JP2024067571A - Gaming system, gaming machine, and gaming device - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming system that can provide the player with an appropriate volume of sound related to the effects of the gaming machine without emitting the sound to the outside (or at an extremely low volume). [Solution] A pachinko machine 6001 outputs an audio signal related to the sound related to the effects to the outside as infrared rays from an audio output LED, and a gaming device 7001 that receives this infrared light with an infrared receiving unit controls to output the sound based on the received light to headphones or earphones. [Selected Figure] Fig. 191

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming system, a gaming machine, and a gaming device.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a predetermined variable display start condition is met, such as when a game ball passes through a passing area provided in a game area in which the released game ball can roll, control is executed to variably display a pattern as identification information on the display area of the image display device, and control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed pattern, and when the derively displayed pattern forms a predetermined combination (a specific display mode), a transition to a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player is provided.

As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine that is configured to perform various effects is known, and in this gaming machine, the volume of the sound output during the effects (effect volume) can be adjusted, for example, in seven stages (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2021-178254 A

In recent years, gaming establishments have been increasingly moving toward self-regulation to reduce the volume of sounds output from gaming machines as much as possible so that players can play in a comfortable environment. If the volume of the sound effects on gaming machines like those mentioned above could be set low, players would be able to play in a relatively quiet environment.

However, if the volume of the gaming machine is turned down, the sense of realism and impact will be lost, and it will be impossible to fully enjoy each performance. Furthermore, if an adjacent gaming machine is outputting a loud sound, players will have no choice but to turn up the volume of their own gaming machine, and as a result, it will be difficult for the entire gaming facility to create a comfortable environment where players can play at a moderate volume.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming system that can provide sounds related to the effects of gaming machines to players at an appropriate volume without emitting them to the outside (or at an extremely low volume).

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A control means for performing various controls related to the game (for example, a sound/LED control circuit 6305 of a sub-control circuit 6300 of the pachinko machine 6001 that outputs sound effects and error/warning sounds);
a sound output means (e.g., a speaker 6032 of the pachinko machine 6001) capable of outputting sound corresponding to sound information (e.g., an analog signal from the AMP 6312 including sound related to the performance controlled by the sub-control circuit 6300) according to the control by the control means;
A light-emitting means (e.g., a sound output LED 6045 of the pachinko machine 6001) capable of emitting light corresponding to sound information (e.g., an analog signal from the infrared transmission control unit 6314 including sound related to the performance controlled by the sub-control circuit 6300) in accordance with the control by the control means toward the outside;
a light receiving means (e.g., an infrared light receiving unit 7011 of the gaming device 7001) for receiving light emitted by the light emitting means;
a sound information generating means (e.g., an infrared receiving control unit 7002 of the gaming device 7001) that generates sound information (e.g., a digital signal including sound related to the performance controlled by the sub-control circuit 6300) from the light received by the light receiving means;
a sound output control means (e.g., a headphone amplifier 7003 or a wireless output control unit 7007 of the gaming device 7001) for controlling a connected audio device (e.g., headphones or earphones) to output a sound corresponding to the sound information generated by the sound information generating means;
A gaming system (e.g., gaming system PS200) comprising:

According to this configuration of the present invention, the device is provided with an audio output means (e.g., a speaker) that outputs audio corresponding to audio information related to the game, and the audio information related to the game is emitted to the outside as light, and audio corresponding to the audio information based on that light is output to an audio device (e.g., headphones or earphones), allowing the player to hear the audio related to the game through at least two different routes.

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
When an input means capable of designating an audio output method is used to designate an audio output method so that audio can be output to the audio device, the volume of the audio output by the audio output means is reduced.

According to the configuration of the present invention, the player can specify the output method of the sound related to the game, for example, whether to listen to it through a speaker or through headphones or earphones. When the sound output method is specified as listening to it through headphones or earphones, the sound from other gaming machines can be significantly reduced, and the sound of the effects related to the player's own gaming machine can be reliably heard at an appropriate volume. In addition, by specifying this method, the volume of the sound output means (for example, a speaker) is kept low, and if an increase in players specifies this method, the noise in the gaming facility will be reduced as a result. In addition, as described above, by reducing the noise in the gaming facility, even players who do not use headphones or earphones can easily hear emergency warnings and evacuation guidance announced in the gaming facility. Furthermore, when the volume of the gaming machine is kept low, the power consumption of the gaming machine is reduced, and this type of usage is promoted, which ultimately results in effective power saving in the gaming facility as a whole.

The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The audio information generating means is capable of acquiring additional audio information (e.g., audio of announcements within the gaming facility) from an external means (e.g., a hall computer 6186) different from the control means,
The audio device is configured to be able to output audio in response to either audio information corresponding to the light received by the light receiving means or audio information corresponding to the additional audio information.

With this configuration of the present invention, if a player can reliably hear audio through headphones or earphones, emergency alerts and evacuation guidance in the event of an emergency such as a fire can be output to the headphones or earphones, making it possible to convey this information to the player in clear sound.

The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A control means for performing various controls related to games;
a voice output means capable of outputting a voice corresponding to voice information according to the control of the control means;
a light emitting means capable of emitting light corresponding to audio information in response to control by the control means toward the outside,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko machine 6001) characterized in that sound corresponding to the sound information generated from the light can be output by an external audio device.

According to this configuration of the present invention, the device is provided with an audio output means (e.g., a speaker) that outputs audio corresponding to audio information related to the game, and the audio information related to the game is emitted to the outside as light, so that the audio corresponding to the audio information generated from the light can be output by an external audio device (e.g., headphones or earphones), allowing the player to hear the audio related to the game by at least two different routes.

The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A light receiving means for receiving light emitted by an external light emitting means (e.g., an LED 6045 for audio output of a pachinko machine 6001);
a sound information generating means for generating sound information from the light received by the light receiving means;
a sound output control means for controlling a connected audio device to output a sound corresponding to the sound information generated by the sound information generating means;
A gaming device (e.g., gaming device 7001) comprising:

According to this configuration of the present invention, sound corresponding to audio information generated from external light can be output from a connected audio device (e.g., headphones or earphones), and the player can hear the sound corresponding to the audio information from an external device equipped with a light-emitting means (e.g., a pachinko machine 6001) via an optical signal.

According to the present invention, sounds and other information related to the effects of the gaming machine can be provided to the player at an appropriate volume without being emitted to the outside (or at an extremely low volume).

In addition, according to the present invention, the sound output from the gaming machine is provided to the player through headphones or earphones, so the volume of the gaming machine is kept low, and by promoting this type of usage, noise levels within the gaming facility are reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, an environment is created in which players can reliably hear audio through headphones or earphones, and emergency alerts and evacuation guidance in the event of an emergency such as a fire can be output to the headphones or earphones, making it possible to convey this information to players in clear sound. Also, as described above, by reducing noise in the gaming establishment, even players who do not use headphones or earphones can more easily hear emergency alerts and evacuation guidance announced within the gaming establishment.

In addition, according to the present invention, the sound output from the gaming machine is provided to the player through headphones or earphones, so the volume of the gaming machine is kept low, thereby reducing the power consumption of the gaming machine. By promoting this type of usage, effective energy conservation is ultimately achieved throughout the gaming facility.

1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. 1 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. 1 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of a first pachinko game machine. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit of the first pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine; 1 is an example of a game flow of a pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of a game state. 1 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (estimate) for each setting value in a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 1A is an example of a special symbol stopping mode determination table in a first pachinko gaming machine; and FIG. 1B is an example of a decorative symbol stopping mode determination table in a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is a modified example of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols of the first pachinko gaming machine. 1 is an example of a normal symbol determination table for a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table for the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table for the first pachinko gaming machine. 1 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a main control process in a first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 4 is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of an initial setting process at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a power cut process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving management process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter update process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving counter update process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a ceiling counter update process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter determination process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving transition determination process of a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving transition process of a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving setting process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a preparation process for opening a large prize opening in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a system timer interrupt process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch input detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a starting hole winning detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a sub-variable presentation pattern determination table in the normal gaming state of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a table for determining a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a winning combination occurs) in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when losing) in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a flowchart showing a process for determining a pre-reading presentation pattern in a first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the jackpot-related look-ahead presentation format changes. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the time-saving hit look-ahead presentation form changes. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern for the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the reserved image changes from a common win type look-ahead presentation form to a big win type look-ahead presentation form. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern for the first pachinko gaming machine, showing the process by which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form to a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern for the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form to a time-saving win type look-ahead presentation form. 11 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a timing chart of the signal "prize ball information 1" among the signals outputted to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine depending on the gaming status. 13 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in a second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a special pattern game determination process in the second pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a preparation process for opening a large prize opening in a second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the second pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening preparation process in a third pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the large prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round of play during execution of an extended example of a large prize game control process, and shows the case where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an extended example. This is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the large prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round of play during execution of an extended example of a large prize game control process, showing (A) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, and (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. FIG. 11 is an overall oblique view showing the external structure of a pachislot machine according to a third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachislot machine according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a main control process of the pachislot machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a gaming system including a gaming display device according to a third embodiment. FIG. 11 is an overall perspective view of a game display device according to a third embodiment. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming display device according to a third embodiment. 13 is a perspective view showing a screen unit of the gaming display device according to the third embodiment, viewed from the rear side. FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram illustrating the display contents of a gaming display device according to a third embodiment. FIG. 13 is an overall perspective view of a game display device according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view of a game display device according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view of a game display device according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of a game display device according to a first modified example of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of a game display device according to a second modified example of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a gaming device according to a sixth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming device according to a sixth embodiment. 13 is an exploded perspective view showing the gaming device according to the sixth embodiment from the rear side. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view showing the gaming device according to the sixth embodiment from the rear side. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an optical path pattern of light from an LED traveling through a light guide plate according to a sixth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an illumination mode of a light guide plate according to the sixth embodiment. 13 is an exploded perspective view showing the gaming device according to the sixth embodiment from the rear side. FIG. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of a projector housing of a gaming device according to a seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of a projector housing of the gaming device according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a projector housing according to the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart of a control process executed by a control circuit according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is an oblique view of a data display device and a gaming machine according to an eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of a data display device according to an eighth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a gaming machine as a pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a gaming machine as a pachislot machine according to an eighth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a data display device according to an eighth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a game state determination table related to the eighth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a performance pattern table according to the eighth embodiment. A figure showing an example of details of the signals transmitted from the external terminal board of an gaming machine such as a pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. A figure showing an example of details of signals for each terminal transmitted from an external terminal board of a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine according to the eighth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a state transition diagram of the game state of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a presentation display linked to the presentation of the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart of a performance execution process executed by a control unit according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a lighting state of a top lamp according to a modified example of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a lighting state of a top lamp according to a modified example of the eighth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a performance pattern table related to the 9th embodiment. A figure showing an example of a game state transition table related to the 9th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart of a performance execution process according to the 9th embodiment. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a gaming system including a gaming device according to a tenth embodiment. FIG. A block diagram showing the configuration of a gaming machine as a pachislot machine related to the tenth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a gaming device according to a tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an image sensor unit according to a tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart of a presentation execution process executed by a control unit of the gaming device according to the tenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart of the LED control process executed by the sub-control unit of the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart of a data receiving process executed by an image sensor unit of the gaming device according to the tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart of a light source detection process executed by an image sensor unit of an amusement device according to a tenth embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining a light source exploration process according to a tenth embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining a light source exploration process according to a tenth embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining a light source exploration process according to a tenth embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining a light source exploration process according to a tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart of a noise removal process performed by an image sensor unit of an amusement device according to a tenth embodiment. 23A to 23D are diagrams for explaining noise removal processing according to the tenth embodiment. 23A to 23D are diagrams for explaining noise removal processing according to the tenth embodiment. 23A to 23D are diagrams for explaining noise removal processing according to the tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart of a decoding process executed by an image sensor unit of the gaming device according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining CDMA encoding according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining PSM encoding according to the tenth embodiment. A diagram showing a gaming system according to an eleventh embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a lighting pattern of a lamp. 11 is a diagram for explaining a model identification pattern. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an outline of a menu screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the menu screen. FIG. 13 shows a character customization screen for customizing a character. 13 is a flowchart showing lamp control processing (when power is turned on) performed in the gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a lamp control process performed in the gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing lamp control processing (at the start of customization) performed in the gaming machine. 10 is a flowchart showing a lighting pattern detection process performed in the data display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a model identification table. A diagram showing a gaming system according to a twelfth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a lighting pattern of a lamp. 13 is a flowchart showing lamp control processing (when a password is entered) performed in the gaming machine. 10 is a flowchart showing a lighting pattern detection process performed in the data display device. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a lighting pattern of a lamp. A figure showing a setting suggestion performance lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing a process performed in the data display machine when detecting a pattern for presentation during play. 13 is a flowchart showing an illumination unit control process performed in the data display device. A diagram showing a gaming system according to a fourteenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing lock-related processing performed in the gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel spin start process performed in the gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a reservation lock effect-related process performed in the data display device. A diagram showing a gaming system according to a fifteenth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a gaming system according to a fifteenth embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a pachinko machine related to the 15th embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a sub-control circuit of a pachinko machine related to the 15th embodiment. A figure showing an example of a setting screen displayed in a pachinko machine related to the 15th embodiment. A diagram showing the appearance of the gaming device related to the 15th embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a gaming device according to a fifteenth embodiment. A diagram showing the appearance of a gaming device according to variant 1 of the fifteenth embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a gaming device according to variant 1 of the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen displayed on a gaming device according to variant 1 of the fifteenth embodiment. A figure showing an overview of a gaming system related to variant example 2 of the fifteenth embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a card unit related to variant example 2 of the fifteenth embodiment. A figure showing an overview of a gaming system related to variant example 3 of the fifteenth embodiment. A figure showing an overview of a gaming system related to variant example 3 of the fifteenth embodiment. A figure showing an overview of a gaming system related to variant example 4 of the fifteenth embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a gaming device according to variant 4 of the fifteenth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a setting screen displayed in a pachinko machine related to variant example 4 of the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen displayed on a gaming device according to variant 4 of the fifteenth embodiment. A figure showing an overview of a gaming system related to variant example 5 of the fifteenth embodiment. A figure showing an overview of a gaming system related to variant example 6 of the fifteenth embodiment.

First Embodiment
As examples of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko machine is defined as the front direction, the back side of the pachinko machine is defined as the rear direction, the left side of the pachinko machine when viewed from the front is defined as the left direction, the right side of the pachinko machine when viewed from the front is defined as the right direction, the top of the pachinko machine is defined as the up direction, the bottom side of the pachinko machine is defined as the down direction, the clockwise direction when viewed from the front is defined as the rightward direction, and the conversely, the counterclockwise direction is defined as the leftward direction.

The first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine are both so-called type one pachinko gaming machines known as digital pachinko. Of these, the first pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. In contrast, the second pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

The third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1/2 mixed machine, which is a combination of a type 1 gaming machine called a digital pachinko machine and a type 2 gaming machine called a feather mono. The third pachinko gaming machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but this specification describes an example in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. However, this is not intended to exclude type 1/2 mixed pachinko gaming machines in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

In this specification, when the term "special design" is used, it means both the first special design and the second special design unless otherwise specified.

In addition, the term "variable display" in this specification includes, for example, both "variable display" in which the pattern is displayed by changing, and "stop display" in which the pattern is displayed by stopping, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is called one "variable display". When the variable display pattern is stopped (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the result of the special pattern hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special pattern lottery") and the result of the normal pattern hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "normal pattern lottery") described later are determined. Note that although the pattern appears to be stopped, there are cases where the pattern is displayed in a state where the result of the special pattern hit determination process or the normal pattern hit determination process is not determined (for example, a state where it is temporarily stopped), and such a state is included in the variable display. Note that even if the pattern is temporarily stopped, for example, the result of the special pattern hit determination process or the normal pattern hit determination process is not determined at this point, so the pattern can be displayed again by changing.

In addition, in this specification, when explaining the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine, the case where there are two special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol) will be explained as an example. However, for the first pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. The first pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be described.

As for pachinko gaming machines in which the first and second special symbols are not displayed in parallel, but only one of them is displayed, there are pachinko gaming machines in which, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are on hold, the starting conditions of the second special symbol are established with priority over the starting conditions of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine"), and pachinko gaming machines in which the starting conditions are established in the order of winning, including the first and second starting holes (hereinafter referred to as a "sequential variable machine").

In a priority variable machine, the start conditions for the first special symbol are met when certain requirements are met, such as neither the first nor the second special symbol being in a variable display, the game not being in a jackpot game state, the variable display of the second special symbol not being on hold, and the variable display of the first special symbol being on hold. Also, in a priority variable machine, the start conditions for the second special symbol are met when certain requirements are met, such as neither the first nor the second special symbol being in a variable display, the game not being in a jackpot game state, and the variable display of the second special symbol being on hold.

In a sequential variable machine, the start conditions for the first special symbol are met when at least all of the following are met: neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the game is not in a jackpot game state, the variable display of the first special symbol is on hold, and the earliest reserved symbol is the reserved variable display of the first special symbol. In a sequential variable machine, the start conditions for the second special symbol are met when at least all of the following are met: neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the game is not in a jackpot game state, the variable display of the second special symbol is on hold, and the earliest reserved symbol is the reserved variable display of the second special symbol.

The following explains using a priority variable machine as an example.

[1-1. Appearance]
Fig. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above the front right. Fig. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above the front right. Fig. 3 is an example of a perspective view of the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above the rear right.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a tray unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), a payout unit, and a payout unit. 8 (see FIG. 2 and FIG. 3), a board unit 9 (see FIG. 2 and FIG. 3), and a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2). 160 (see FIG. 2). Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the tray unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the dispensing unit 8 and the base unit 9 will be briefly described. The game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be described in detail below. Note that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations that are not shown in FIG.

(Outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a frame body having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to an island facility of an amusement park. A hinge (no reference number) is provided on the front side of, for example, the left end of the outer frame 2, and the base door 3 is supported on this hinge. In this way, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward relative to the outer frame 2 with the hinge as an axis.

The outer frame 2 must be strong to support many components, such as the payout unit 8, board unit 9, display device 7, game board unit 10, glass door 4, and tray unit 5, via the base door 3. On the other hand, there is a demand for larger display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and game board unit 10 to enhance the presentation effect. For this reason, by constructing the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 7 and game board unit 10 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

(Base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a dispensing unit 8 and a base unit 9 attached to its back side and supports these.

A game board unit 10 is fitted onto the front side of the base door 3. In addition, hinges (not referenced) are provided at the top end, the middle part below the vertical center, and the bottom end, for example on the front side of the left end of the base door 3, and the glass door 4 is journaled on the hinges at the top end and the middle part, and the plate unit 5 is journaled on the hinges at the middle part and the bottom end. In this way, the glass door 4 and the plate unit 5 can be rotated forward, either together or individually, relative to the base door 3, with the hinges as an axis.

The launcher 6 is fixedly attached, for example, to the lower right side of the front surface of the base door 3, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached, for example, to the left and right of the upper side. The speakers 32 output, for example, sound effects of characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, audio notifications, error notifications, and other sound effects.

Furthermore, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the side of the base door 3 opposite the hinge (i.e., the right end). This locking device has the function of locking the base door 3 to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 to the base door 3.

(Glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member in which an opening 41 is formed. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed to the base door 3, the protective glass 43 faces a game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later) formed in the game board unit 10. In this way, the game area 105 can be visually confirmed from the front with the glass door 4 closed to the base door 3, and game balls flowing down the game area 105 can be prevented from flying out forward.

The protective glass 43 may be made of multiple pieces of glass (e.g., two pieces) attached with a gap between them, or multiple pieces of glass may be unitized with a gap between them. Furthermore, if the protective glass 43 is unitized, a light guide plate, for example, may be provided between the pieces of glass. The protective glass 43 is not limited to being made of glass, and may be made of, for example, transparent resin.

In addition, an operation unit 66 is provided at the bottom of the glass door 4, which can be operated by, for example, a player to receive gaming information services (such as "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). This operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated by an arcade manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

A speaker cover 45 is provided on the top of the glass door 4, located in front of the speaker 32. A large number of LED groups 46 used for light-emitting effects and the like are arranged around the periphery of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 shown in Figs. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light-emitting means for use in light announcements and light-emitting effects in various variations, but is not limited to LEDs as long as it can perform such light-emitting effects and the like, and may be, for example, liquid crystal or a lamp.

(Dish unit)
The dish unit 5 is a unit consisting of an upper dish 51 and a lower dish 52. The dish unit 5 is located at the front lower part of the base door 3, below the glass door 4. As described above, the dish unit 5 is configured to be rotated relative to the base door 3 to open and close, so that, for example, when balls become jammed, an amusement arcade staff member can clear the jam. Note that the dish unit 5 does not necessarily have to have an upper dish 51 and a lower dish 52, and may be configured as an integrated dish.

The upper tray 51 is provided so that game balls can be stored therein, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are launched from the launching device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described below). The upper tray 51 is provided with a payout outlet 53 and a performance button 54. Game balls to be lent out or paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout outlet 53 to the upper tray 51. The performance button 54 is what is called a "CHANCE button" or "push button". The performance button 54 may have a predetermined performance function in addition to an operation function operated by the player. An example of the predetermined performance function is a function to vibrate or protrude upward based on the result of a process to determine whether a special symbol has been hit. It may also serve the function of the operation unit 66.

The lower tray 52 is primarily intended to store game balls that have spilled over from the upper tray 51. The lower tray 52 is provided with a payout outlet 55 that communicates with the upper tray 51, and game balls that have spilled over from the upper tray 51 are paid out from the payout outlet 55 to the lower tray 52.

An opening (no reference number) is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 52, which can be opened and closed by the player. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 52 can be transferred to a ball box placed below the lower tray 52. If a so-called individual machine counting system is installed on each machine, not only is the ball box unnecessary, but the game balls counted by the individual machine counting system can be stored and the stored game balls can be used again for play.

(Launch device)
The launching device 6 is for launching the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launching device 6 is disposed in the lower right front portion of the base door 3 and below the right of the tray unit 5. The launching device 6 includes a panel body 61, a drive unit (not shown), and a launching handle 62.

The panel body 61 is arranged so that when the plate unit 5 is closed relative to the base door 3, the plate unit 5 and the launching device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 appear integrated in appearance.

The launch handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is disposed on the front side of the panel body 61. The drive device is disposed on the back side of the panel body 61, and is configured, for example, by a launch solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the launch handle 62, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device. Note that when operating the launch handle 62, the greater the amount of clockwise rotation (amount of operation), the stronger the launch strength of the game ball.

The game balls launched from the launching device 6 located at the lower right of the dish unit 5 roll in an arc along the guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described below) via the launching rail (not shown) and are launched into the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described below). The location of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right of the dish unit 5, but may be the lower left of the dish unit 5. In this case, the launching rail is not necessary, and the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively utilized, making it possible to increase versatility.

(Display Device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various effect images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100. The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or may be a device that projects images using a projection device such as a projector. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, an effect identification pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed to display the result of a hit determination process of a special pattern, an effect image according to the result of a hit determination process of a special pattern, an effect image during a big win game state, a demo effect image, an effect image showing the pending status of the variable display of a special pattern, etc. are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but the display device 7 may be attached to the base door 3 as long as the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided to display the various performance images described above, but multiple display devices (e.g., two) may be provided and the performance images may be displayed using these multiple display devices.

(Payout unit)
The payout unit 8 (see Figures 2 and 3) is disposed on the rear side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, etc. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see Figures 2 and 3). Game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When a payout condition is met, the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied to the ball passage 81 from the storage tank 80, for example, to the upper tray 51. In addition, a power switch 95 is provided on the rear side of the payout unit 8, as shown in Figure 3.

(Board unit)
The board unit 9 (see Figs. 2 and 3) is disposed on the rear side of the base door 3. The board unit 9 is provided with various control boards and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the board unit 9 is provided with a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described below) is mounted, a sub-control board 92 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described below) is mounted, a payout/launch control board 93 on which a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described below) that controls the payout/launch of game balls is mounted, and a power supply board on which a power supply circuit 450 (see FIG. 6 described below) that supplies power is mounted.

For the sake of convenience, in FIG. 3, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, the payout/launch control board 93, and the power supply board 94 are indicated by reference symbols, but all of these boards are housed in a board case.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (a board on which one control LSI or multiple LSIs are provided). However, this is not limited to this, and the sub-control board 92 may be configured with multiple boards, for example, by making all or part of the display control circuit 304, audio control circuit 305, LED control circuit 306, and role control circuit 307 (all of which are shown in FIG. 6, described below) separate boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 included in the first pachinko game machine. A game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 10, in which the launched game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 is formed in which a launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 110, a center role 115 located approximately in the center of the game area 105, a first starting hole 120, a general winning hole 122, a passing gate unit 125, a special electric role unit 130, a second starting hole 140, a normal electric role unit 145, an LED unit 160, an outlet 178, and a back unit (not shown) located behind the game board unit 10. As mentioned above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. A guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 100, and gaming pegs (no reference number) and the like are planted therein. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 110 toward the gaming area 105, collides with the gaming pegs, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) with decorative bodies is disposed behind the gaming panel 100 to enhance the presentation effect. The gaming panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front. In this case, the entire gaming panel 100 may be made of transparent materials, or, for example, only the parts of the gaming panel 100 where the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front may be made of transparent materials. In addition, the gaming panel 100 may be made of materials that do not have transparent parts (for example, wood), and transparent materials may be provided in some parts to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the gaming panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the rear unit can be seen from the front, but the entire gaming panel 100 may be made transparent, or only a portion of it may be made transparent.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which have no reference numerals). The play area 105 is defined by the guide rail 110. The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6 described later) to the upper part of the play area 105.

(Center role)
The center device 115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference number) of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko gaming machine, the area of the gaming area 105 to the left of the center role 115 is referred to as the left area 106, and the area to the right of the center role 115 is referred to as the right area 107. The definitions of the left area and the right area are the same for the second and third pachinko gaming machines described below.

A game ball launched by the launching device 6 toward the game area 105 flows down the left area 106 or the right area 107. A game ball flowing down the left area 106 or the right area 107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 100. If the amount of operation of the launching handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 106. On the other hand, if the amount of operation of the launching handle 62 (see Figure 1) is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 107.

In this specification, the manner in which the launch handle 62 is operated (hitting style) is referred to as a "left hit" when the game ball is launched so that it flows down the left side area 106, and as a "right hit" when the game ball is launched so that it flows down the right side area 107. In this way, the player can choose to hit the game ball toward either the left side area 106 or the right side area 107.

The center device 115 also has a warp entrance 117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which game balls flowing down the left area 106 can enter. Game balls that enter the warp entrance 117 are configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed in the center device 115. The stage 118 is formed in front of the lower edge of the display area of the display device 7 so that the game balls can roll in the left-right direction. The stage 118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 119 through which game balls can enter is formed at the rear of the stage 118, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and game balls that enter the chance entrance 119 are configured to be released directly above the first start entrance 120. Therefore, game balls that enter the chance entrance 119 have a higher probability of entering (passing through) the first start entrance 120 than game balls that do not enter the warp entrance 117, or game balls that enter the warp entrance 117 but do not enter the chance entrance 119.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 7, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or is impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 120, it is detected by a first starting hole switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later). It is also possible that a game ball hit from the right can win in the first starting hole 120. Also, instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting hole 120, a first starting hole that allows a game ball hit from the right to win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or is impossible to win) may be provided.

When the first start hole switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 120, various data related to the first special symbol (for example, various random numbers such as a random number value for determining a big win of the first special symbol, a random number value for the symbol of the first special symbol, a random number value for determining the reach of the first special symbol, and a random number value for selecting the performance of the first special symbol) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition of the first special symbol (also referred to as the "variation start condition of the first special symbol" in this specification) is established, the stored various data is used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball enters the first start hole 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 120 is referred to as the starting entry of the first special pattern, and various data related to the first special pattern (for example, various random number values such as the random number value for determining a jackpot for the first special pattern, the pattern random number value for the first special pattern, the random number value for determining reach for the first special pattern, and the random number value for selecting effects for the first special pattern) are referred to as the starting information of the first special pattern. In addition, storing the starting information of the first special pattern until the starting conditions are met is referred to as holding. The same applies to the second special pattern.

(General prize entry)
The general winning openings 122 are arranged in a plurality of general winning openings 122 at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and are arranged so that a game ball hit from the left can win a prize (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win a prize). When a game ball wins in any of the general winning openings 122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the general prize opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 122 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is positioned so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the right to win, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the general winning opening 122 described above, a general winning opening through which a game ball hit from the right can win may be provided.

(Passing gate unit)
The pass gate unit 125 is located in the right area 107 and is a unit that integrates a pass gate 126 that is configured to allow almost all game balls hit to the right to pass through, and a pass gate switch 127 (see Figure 6 described below) that detects the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 126.

When the passing gate switch 127 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate 126, various data related to the normal symbols (e.g., random number values for determining whether the normal symbols are winning) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (e.g., up to four). The stored various data are used in the process of determining whether the normal symbols are winning. Note that even if the passing gate switch 127 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate 126, no prize balls are paid out. The passing gate unit 125 may be located in the left area 106 instead of or in addition to the right area 107.

In this specification, the passage of the gaming ball through the passing gate 126 is referred to as a start passing, and various data related to the normal symbol extracted by the passing of the gaming ball through the passing gate 126 (for example, a random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a winning symbol, etc.) is referred to as the start information of the normal symbol. In addition, storing the start information of the normal symbol until the start condition is met is referred to as holding.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric device unit 130 is a unit body that integrates a big winning opening 131, a count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) that detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the big winning opening 131, and a special electric device 133. The special electric device unit 130 is disposed below the passing gate unit 125 in the right side area 107.

The large prize opening 131 is arranged so that game balls hit from the right can win (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or difficulty winning). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the large prize opening 131 described above, a large prize opening that can win game balls hit from the left may be arranged, or a large prize opening that can win game balls may be arranged above the center gimmick 115.

The large prize opening 131 is an opening that is opened to allow a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) to enter (pass through) when the game is controlled to a large win game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. When the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described below) detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric device 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 134. The special electric device 133, i.e., the special electric shutter 134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for game balls to enter (pass) through the large prize opening 131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for game balls to enter (pass) through the large prize opening 131. In addition, in the big win game state, the transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the big win game state is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the large prize opening 131 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period over multiple rounds.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 140 is disposed in the left area 106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting hole 120). However, the second starting hole 140 is configured such that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the left to win, for example, due to game pins, etc., and a game ball hit from the right is guided to the vicinity of the second starting hole 140 so that it can win. However, it is not essential to configure the second starting hole 140 in this way, and it may be provided in the right area 107, for example. The second starting hole 140 may also be configured such that a game ball hit from the left can win.

When the second start hole switch 141 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start hole 140, various data related to the second special symbol (for example, various random numbers such as a random number value for determining a big win of the second special symbol, a random number value for the symbol of the second special symbol, a random number value for determining the reach of the second special symbol, and a random number value for selecting the performance of the second special symbol) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition of the second special symbol (also referred to as the "variation start condition of the second special symbol" in this specification) is established, the stored various data is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball enters the second start hole 140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is disposed in the left area 106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting hole 120), and is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through) the winning hole, a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into the winning hole, and the normal electric accessory 146. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second starting hole 140, and the switch is the second starting hole switch 141.

The normal electric device 146 includes a normal power movable member 147, which is a so-called electric chute and is made of, for example, a blade member, and a normal power solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6 described below) that operates the normal power movable member 147. The normal electric device 146, i.e., the normal power movable member 147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second start hole 140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second start hole 140. The normal power movable member 147 includes blade types, door types, protruding plate types, etc.

(Outlet)
The outlet 178 is for discharging game balls that have been shot toward the game area 105 but have not won any of the various winning ports (e.g., the first starting port 120, the second starting port 140, the big winning port 131, the general winning port 122, etc.) to the outside of the machine. This outlet 178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between multiple general winning ports 122, so that game balls flowing down the game area 105 can be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) is for decorating the game board unit 10, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100. This back unit includes a group of performance-use props 58 (see FIG. 6 described later) such as movable props controlled by the sub-control circuit 300. The group of performance-use props 58 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 7. At least one of the props or prop-use prop component members constituting the props among the group of performance-use props 58 functions as a performance-use prop that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is disposed in the lower right portion of the game board unit 10, outside the play area 105 (see FIG. 4, for example). The LED unit 160 is a unit body that integrates various display sections.

Figure 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display section 161, a normal symbol hold display section 162, a first special symbol display section 163, a second special symbol display section 164, a first special symbol hold display section 165, a second special symbol hold display section 166, a probability change notification display section 167, and a time-saving notification display section 168.

(Normal pattern display section)
The normal symbol display unit 161 displays the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the conditions for starting the variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "normal symbol starting conditions") are met, the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b start to alternately turn on and off to start the variable display of the normal symbol. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the normal symbol started, the variable display of the normal symbol stops, and the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process is derived.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the combination of the lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a lights up and the normal symbol display LED 161b turns off. On the other hand, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a miss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a turns off and the normal symbol display LED 161b lights up. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b that indicate the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is decided to operate the normal electric role 146, and the normal electric movable member 147 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, making it easier for the game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting hole 140.

(Regular pattern reserved display section)
The reserved display unit 162 for normal symbols displays the number of reserved variable displays of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved number of normal symbols") when the start information of the normal symbols, i.e., the variable display, is reserved, and is equipped with reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols. The above "variable display of normal symbols is reserved" refers to the state from when the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 126 is detected and various data related to the normal symbols (for example, random number values for determining whether the normal symbols are hit, etc.) are extracted until the start condition of the normal symbols is established. The start condition of the normal symbols is established when at least the following is satisfied: the normal symbols are not being variable displayed, and the variable display of the normal symbols is reserved.

The normal symbol reserved display unit 162 displays the number of reserved normal symbols by a combination of the on/off state of the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of reserved normal symbols is one, the normal symbol reserved display LED 162a is lit and the normal symbol reserved display LED 162b is turned off. When the number of reserved normal symbols is two, both the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b are lit. When the number of reserved normal symbols is three, the normal symbol reserved display LED 162a flashes and the normal symbol reserved display LED 162b is lit. When the number of reserved normal symbols is four, both the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b flash. However, the display mode of the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b, which indicate the number of reserved normal symbols, is not limited to this.

(Special design display section)
The special symbol display unit displays the result of the special symbol winning determination process, and includes a first special symbol display unit 163 and a second special symbol display unit 164. The first special symbol display unit 163 includes a first special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 163a to 163h. Similarly, the second special symbol display unit 164 includes a second special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 164a to 164h.

When the conditions for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "initiation conditions for the first special symbol") are met, the variable display of the first special symbol begins, in which all or some of the eight LEDs 163a-163h that make up the first special symbol display unit 163 alternately or mutually turn on and off. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the first special symbol began, the variable display of the first special symbol stops, and the result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol is derived.

If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the combination of on/off of the eight LEDs 163a-163h that make up the first special symbol display section 163 will be a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display section 163 is displayed as stopped in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

When the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "start condition of the second special pattern") are met, the variable display of the second special pattern is started in which all or some of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h that make up the second special pattern display unit 164 alternately or mutually turn on and off. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the second special pattern was started, the variable display of the second special pattern stops, and the result of the winning determination process for the second special pattern is derived.

If the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the combination of on/off of the eight LEDs 164a-164h that make up the second special symbol display section 164 will be a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display section 164 is displayed as stopped in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

(Special design reserved display section)
The special pattern reserve display unit displays the number of reserved special pattern variable displays (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved number of special patterns") when start information for a special pattern, i.e., a variable display, is reserved, and is provided with a first special pattern reserve display unit 165 and a second special pattern reserve display unit 166.

The first special symbol reserved display unit 165 displays the number of reserved first special symbols when the variable display of the first special symbol is reserved, and is equipped with first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a, 165b. "The variable display of the first special symbol is reserved" refers to the state from when the entry (passage) of the game ball into the first start hole 120 is detected and the start information of the first special symbol is extracted, until the start condition of the first special symbol is established.

The first special symbol reserved display unit 165 displays the number of reserved symbols of the variable display of the first special symbol by a combination of the lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b. For example, when the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is one, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a is lit and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b is extinguished. When the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is two, both the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b are lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is three, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a flashes and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b is lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is four, both the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b flash. However, the display mode of the first special pattern reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b, which indicate the reserved number of first special patterns, is not limited to this.

The second special symbol reserved display unit 166 displays the number of reserved second special symbols when the variable display of the second special symbol is reserved, and is equipped with second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a, 166b. "Variable display of the second special symbol is reserved" refers to the state from when the entry (passage) of the game ball into the second start hole 140 is detected and the start information of the second special symbol is extracted, until the start condition of the second special symbol is established.

The second special symbol reserved display unit 166 displays the number of reserved symbols of the variable display of the second special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b. For example, when the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is one, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a is lit and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b is extinguished. When the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is two, both the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is three, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a flashes and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b is lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is four, both the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b flash. However, the display mode of the second special pattern reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b, which indicate the reserved number of second special patterns, is not limited to this.

(Display unit for probability change notification)
The probability change notification display unit 167 can be turned on while the probability change control described below is being executed, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

The probability change notification display unit 167 may be lit while probability change control is being executed, but it may also be configured not to light up so that it is not possible to tell from the outside that probability change control is being executed, thereby concealing the fact that probability change control is being executed.

However, when the power is cut off while the special rate control is being executed, the data indicating that the special rate control is being executed is not lost due to the function of the backup capacitor 207 described below. Therefore, if the power is cut off while the special rate control is being executed and then turned on, the special rate notification display unit 167 lights up in a manner that allows the user to know from the outside that the special rate control is being executed.

Even if whether or not the special rate control is being executed is kept secret before the power is cut off, when the power is turned on, the special rate control display unit 167 is turned on, so that it is possible to know that the special rate control is being executed.

(Time-saving notification display unit)
The time-saving notification display unit 168 can be turned on while the time-saving control described below is being executed, and is configured with, for example, an LED or a lamp.

In this embodiment, the time-saving notification display unit 168 has, for example, a first time-saving notification display unit 168a and a second time-saving notification display unit 168b, but the number of time-saving notification display units 168 is not limited to this.

As will be described in detail later, the time-saving play state includes time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, and time-saving play state C. And, for example, it is configured so that it is possible to know which time-saving play state is being used by the combination of lighting or extinguishing of the first time-saving notification display unit 168a and the second time-saving notification display unit 168b.

The time-saving notification display unit 168 may light up the first time-saving notification display unit 168a and/or the second time-saving notification display unit 168b depending on the time-saving control being executed, but may be turned on or off in a manner that makes it impossible to know from the outside whether or not time-saving control is being executed or the type of time-saving control being executed (for example, all lights off, all lights on, or a manner unrelated to the time-saving control being executed), thereby concealing the fact that time-saving control is being executed or the type of time-saving control being executed. In particular, while it may be possible to know from the outside whether or not time-saving control is being executed, it may be difficult to know from the outside which time-saving control is being executed, so by concealing the type of time-saving control being executed, it is possible to increase interest.

However, when the power supply is cut off while time-saving control is being executed, due to the function of the backup capacitor 207 described below, not only the data indicating that time-saving control is being executed, but also the data indicating the type of time-saving control being executed is not lost. Therefore, if the power supply is cut off while time-saving control is being executed and then the power supply is turned on again, the time-saving notification display unit 168 turns on or off in a manner that allows the user to know from the outside that time-saving control is being executed and the type of time-saving control being executed.

Even if the fact that time-saving control is being executed and the type of time-saving control being executed are concealed so that they cannot be seen from the outside before the power is cut off, when the power is turned on, the time-saving notification display unit 168 is configured to turn on and/or turn off in a manner that allows the fact that time-saving control is being executed and the type of time-saving control being executed to be seen from the outside.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Fig. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko game machine is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on and processes related to game operations, and is equipped with a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 204, and a backup capacitor 207, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 201 is connected to a main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, etc. The main CPU 201 has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer (WDT) that monitors operation and a function for preventing fraud.

The main ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. This main RAM 203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201. Note that, although in this embodiment, RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 201, this is not limiting and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal when necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 200 also includes an I/O port 205 that is connected to various devices and other devices so as to be able to communicate with each other, and a command output port 206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, the above-mentioned normal symbol display unit 161, normal symbol reserved display unit 162, first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164, first special symbol reserved display unit 165, second special symbol reserved display unit 166, probability change notification display unit 167, time reduction notification display unit 168, normal power solenoid 148, and special power solenoid 135 are connected to the main control circuit 200. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 170 and error notification monitor 172 are also connected to the main control circuit 200. The main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data and setting values (described later) under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc., in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, which will be described later. Note that the setting change code may be configured to display a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that a setting change is in progress).

The main control circuit 200 is also connected to the first start port switch 121, the second start port switch 141, the pass gate switch 127, the count switch 132, and the general winning port switch 123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to the main control circuit 200 via the I/O port 205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 is connected to a calling device (not shown) having functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 184 used to transmit data to a hall computer 186 that manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall, a setting key socket 174 into which a setting key 174a is inserted that is operated to change or check the setting value in the case of a pachinko machine with a setting function described later, and a RAM clear switch 176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 203 in response to the operation of the gaming center manager. In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing the setting value described later, but is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the setting value may also be provided.

The setting key slot 174 and the RAM clear switch 176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the arcade manager. "Inside a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key slot 174 and the RAM clear switch 176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key slot 174 and the RAM clear switch 176, so that the arcade manager can touch the setting key slot 174 and/or the RAM clear switch 176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the arcade manager to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key slot 174 and the RAM clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 400 or the power supply circuit 450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the arcade manager from easily touching the setting key slot 174 or the RAM clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 includes a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a role control circuit 307, and a command input port 308. The sub-control circuit 300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in Fig. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to effect buttons 54 (see Fig. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the first pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub-CPU 301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for controlling the display of the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 32. The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as an AMP) for amplifying the audio signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. In response to a sound generation command from the sub-CPU 301, the sound source IC selects one piece of sound data from multiple pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a specified sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46, which includes decorative LEDs. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The reel control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of performance reels 58). The reel control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a reel data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored.

The reel control circuit 307 selects one of the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is then supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one of the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is then supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

[1-2-3. Payout/launch control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls, and is connected to a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 6 capable of launching game balls, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 400 receives a prize ball control command sent from the main control circuit 200, it sends a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls.

The card unit 180 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 182. The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (neither is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. The operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation) and controls the launch of the game ball.

[1-2-4. Power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.

The power supply circuit 450 is connected to a power switch 95 and other components. The power switch 95 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, an example of a game flow will be described with reference to Fig. 7 and Fig. 8. Fig. 7 is an example of a game flow. Fig. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of a game state. Note that the game flow shown in Fig. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be grasped from the outside.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is launched by a user operation such as a player, and when the game ball enters one of the various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 120, etc.), a payout control process for the game ball is performed. Pachinko games include a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process for a special symbol is performed based on the winning of a game ball into the starting hole 120, 140, and whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state is determined. The normal symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process for a normal symbol is performed based on the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 126, and whether or not to open the winning hole (in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140) by operating the normal electric role 146 is determined. In this specification, "special symbol games" are sometimes referred to as "games," but "games" is a term used in a broad sense, and for example, normal symbol games and games with effects that use operation units such as the effect button 54 (see, for example, Figure 1) are also included in "games."

In addition, in this specification, one special pattern game is defined as the period from when the variable display of the special pattern begins until this variable display ends and the result of the special pattern hit determination process is definitively displayed (derived) (more specifically, until the special pattern determination time has passed). However, if the game is controlled to a big hit game state after the result of the special pattern hit determination process is derived, one special pattern game is defined as the period until the end of the big hit game state. Note that in the first pachinko game machine, small hits are not included in the result of the special pattern hit determination process, but in the pachinko game machine in which small hits are included in the result of the special pattern hit determination process, one special pattern game is defined as the period until the end of the small hit game state after the result of the special pattern hit determination process is derived and the game is controlled to a small hit game state.

When a stop display mode indicating a jackpot in a special symbol game is output to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the special electric device 133 is operated to keep the jackpot winning hole 131 open for a predetermined time (for example, up to 30,000 msec), and the possibility of winning in the jackpot winning hole 131 is relatively increased.

In addition, when a stop display mode indicating a normal symbol win is output to the normal symbol display unit 161 in a normal symbol game, the normal electric device 146 is activated to open the winning hole (for example, the second starting hole 140 in this embodiment), and the possibility of winning through the second starting hole 140, for example, is relatively increased.

The games that can be played in a pachinko game are not limited to special symbol games and normal symbol games, and new games other than these may also be playable.

The following provides an overview of the game flow for special symbol games and regular symbol games.

[1-3-1. Special symbol game]
As shown in Figure 7, the special pattern game mainly includes a special pattern start winning process which is carried out when there is a winning (passing through) of the first start port 120 or the second start port 140, and a special pattern control process which is carried out based on the establishment of the start conditions for the special pattern.

When a game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 140, a special symbol start winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (e.g., various random number values such as a random number value for determining a jackpot, a random number value for a pattern, a random number value for determining a reach, and a random number value for selecting a performance) are extracted (obtained) from various counters for the special symbol (e.g., a counter for determining a jackpot, a counter for determining a pattern, etc.). Each extracted random number value is reserved as start information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even when the special symbol control process is being executed.

In addition, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the start conditions for the special symbol are met. When the start conditions for the special symbol are met, a special symbol hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not there is a "jackpot" by referring to the random number value for jackpot determination extracted from the special symbol's jackpot determination counter. After that, a stop symbol determination process is performed to determine the stop symbol. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped is determined by referring to the random number value for pattern determination extracted from the special symbol's pattern determination counter and the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In this embodiment, if the probability variable flag is on, the probability variable control is executed. In the hit determination process for the special symbol described above, if the probability variable flag is off, it is determined to be a "jackpot" with a relatively low probability, and if the probability variable flag is on, it is determined to be a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" is referred to as the "jackpot probability."

The high probability flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not high probability control is executed. When the high probability flag is on, the game proceeds in a game state in which high probability control is executed (for example, in this embodiment, a high probability time-saving game state). On the other hand, when the high probability flag is off, the game proceeds in a game state in which high probability control is not executed (for example, a normal game state or a low probability time-saving game state).

Next, a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol is performed. In this process, a random number is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (variable display pattern) is determined by referencing the random number, the result of the special symbol winning judgment process described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed as described above. Then, a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

Once the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined, a presentation pattern determination process is then performed to determine the presentation pattern. Then, based on the results of the presentation pattern determination process, presentation control process is performed for display presentation such as decorative symbols and character presentations displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and sound presentation such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 32. The presentation control process is performed by the sub-CPU 301.

Then, when the special pattern variable display control process and presentation control process are completed and a jackpot has been hit, a jackpot game control process is carried out. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state ends, the special pattern game ends, and a game state transition control process to a non-jackpot game state is carried out. In this case, the game state transitions depending on the type of jackpot. For example, if the jackpot type is one in which both the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are set to on, a transition to a high-probability time-saving game state occurs after the jackpot game state ends.

On the other hand, if there is no big win, i.e., if it is a miss, the special symbol game ends. Note that in the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small win, but in pachinko gaming machines in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small win, a small win game control process is performed when a small win is won. Also, although not shown in FIG. 7, if there is a time-saving hit, which will be described later, the game will transition to a time-saving game state.

Then, each time the conditions for starting the special symbol are met, the various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

If a game ball enters the start hole 120, 140 during the special symbol control process, the special symbol start entry process is executed. In addition, the start information of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the start hole 120, 140 (for example, various data such as random numbers for determining a jackpot, a symbol random number for the special symbol, a random number for reaching a target, and a random number for selecting a performance) is held until the start condition of the special symbol is met.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a maximum of eight pieces of start information for special patterns can be reserved, consisting of four pieces of start information for the first special pattern and four pieces of start information for the second special pattern, but the number of start information for special patterns that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, more start information for the first special pattern may be reserved than start information for the second special pattern, or more start information for the second special pattern may be reserved than start information for the first special pattern.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 7, a look-ahead determination (see, for example, S396 in FIG. 52 described below) may be made between the start of the special symbol and the establishment of the start condition of the special symbol, to determine whether or not a "jackpot" has been won and the change pattern prior to the hit determination process of the special symbol based on the start information extracted when the game ball enters (passes) the start hole 120, 140, and a look-ahead performance function may be provided to perform a predetermined performance based on the result of this look-ahead determination. Note that the look-ahead determination may be made before or after the start information extracted by the game ball entering the start hole 120, 140 is reserved.

[1-3-2. Normal symbol game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal pattern game mainly includes a normal pattern start passing process which is carried out when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126, and a normal pattern control process which is carried out based on the establishment of the start condition of the normal pattern.

When a game ball passes through the passing gate 126, a normal symbol start passing process is executed. In this normal symbol start passing process, start information for the normal symbol (e.g., a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit) is extracted (obtained) from the winning determination counter for the normal symbol, and the extracted start information is reserved.

In addition, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not the start condition for the normal symbol has been met. When starting the variable display of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit judgment random number value extracted from the hit judgment counter for the normal symbol, executes the normal symbol hit judgment process to determine whether or not the "normal symbol hit" has occurred, and then executes the variation pattern determination process. In this process, the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the winning determination process for the normal symbol and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbol, and executes a variable display control process that controls the variable display of the normal symbol, and a performance control process that performs a predetermined performance. Note that there are cases in which the performance control process is not executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the performance control process of the normal symbol are completed, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not a normal winning symbol indicating a "normal winning symbol" has been derived to the normal symbol display unit 161 (see FIG. 5 and FIG. 6). When it is judged that a stop display mode indicating a normal winning symbol has been derived, the main CPU 201 executes a normal symbol winning game control process. In this normal symbol winning game control process, the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4) is operated, and the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)) is opened so that the winning ball can enter (pass through) the winning hole or the opening state is easily opened. On the other hand, when it is judged that a stop display mode indicating a normal winning symbol has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol winning game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in a game state where the time-saving control is not executed (for example, a normal game state), the probability that a stop display mode indicating a normal win will be derived may be set to 0. The time-saving control corresponds to at least one of the following controls: special symbol shortening control, which shortens the variable display time of the special symbol, and electric support control, which operates the normal electric role device 146 to increase the frequency with which the winning port (for example, the second starting port 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment) is opened, compared to when the time-saving control is not executed. This time-saving control may be a control that performs both the special symbol shortening control and the electric support control, or a control that performs only one of the special symbol shortening control and the electric support control.

The electric support control is a control that improves the time-saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of a "normal pattern hit", the variable display time of the normal pattern, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (number of openings, opening time, wait time). The time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of a game ball entering a winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)), and refers to the winning probability of a "normal pattern hit", the variable display time of the normal pattern, and/or the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.). In addition, improving the time-saving performance means, for example, making it easier for a game ball to enter a winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)). In other words, when electric support control is executed, the winning probability of a "normal symbol hit" increases, the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened, and/or winning is made easier with the normal electric device 146 (increasing the number of times it opens, extending the opening time, shortening the wait time, etc.) compared to when electric support control is not executed.

Then, each time the normal symbol start conditions are met, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

When the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In addition, the start information of the normal symbol (for example, a random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, etc.) extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 is held until the start condition of the normal symbol is met.

The variable display of normal symbols will start in the order they were reserved, and when the start conditions for the normal symbols are met, the variable display will be performed for the earliest reserved start information of the reserved normal symbols.

The method for extracting various random numbers (for example, the random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is a jackpot, the design random number value for the first special symbol, the random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is in reach, the random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is a jackpot, the design random number value for the second special symbol, the random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is in reach, and the random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is in reach, etc.) may be a soft random number method that generates random numbers within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 201, or a hard random number method that extracts random numbers from a counter in a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the game state can be roughly divided into a non-jackpot game state and a jackpot game state. In the non-jackpot game state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when a jackpot is derived as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the game state transitions from the non-jackpot game state to the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. However, the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed even in the jackpot game state. Note that the explanation of the small jackpot game state will be omitted.

Non-jackpot game states can be broadly divided into low-probability states in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively low, and high-probability game states in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively high.

The high probability game state includes a high probability time-saving game state (high probability, high base) in which time-saving control is executed. Note that, although not included in the high probability game state in the first pachinko game machine, a high probability non-time-saving game state (high probability, low base state) in which time-saving control is not executed may also be included in the high probability game state, as shown in FIG. 8.

The low probability state includes a normal game state (low probability, low base) in which time-saving control is not executed, and a time-saving game state (low probability, high base) in which time-saving control is executed.

Furthermore, the time-saving play state includes time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, and time-saving play state C.

The A time-saving game state is a time-saving game state to which a player can transition after a specific jackpot game state ends, and the A time-saving game state ends when a specified number of special symbol games are played or when a transition to the jackpot game state occurs. When the A time-saving game state ends due to a specified number of special symbol games being played, the game will generally transition to the normal game state.

The B time-saving game state is a time-saving game state to which a player can enter when, for example, a jackpot game state ends and the variable display of special symbols begins in a non-high probability game state (i.e., a game state in which the probability flag is off), or when the number of times the special symbols are variable displayed (e.g., a ceiling counter) reaches a ceiling value (e.g., 1,000 times), starting from when the RAM is cleared (described below). The B time-saving game state ends when a specified number of special symbol games are played or when a transition is made to the jackpot game state. When the B time-saving game state ends as a result of a specified number of special symbol games being played, the game will generally transition to the normal game state.

The time-saving C game state is a time-saving game state that can be entered when the result of the special symbol hit determination process performed in the low probability state is a "time-saving hit" and the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived, and the time-saving C game state ends when a specified number of special symbol games determined by winning the "time-saving hit" are played or when a transition is made to a jackpot game state. When the time-saving C game state ends by playing the specified number of special symbol games, as a general rule, a transition is made to a normal game state. Note that, for example, if multiple time-saving game states overlap, even if the specified number of special symbol games are played, the time-saving C game state continues rather than transitioning to a normal game state.

In this specification, whether or not multiple time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the time-saving game states are said to "overlap" when the transition conditions to the time-saving game state are satisfied in the time-saving game state, or when the transition conditions to multiple time-saving game states are satisfied simultaneously. When multiple time-saving game states overlap, the main CPU 201 internally operates all of the overlapping time-saving game states, that is, operates the overlapping time-saving game states internally in parallel, which is called "executing in an overlapping manner." However, even if the main CPU 201 internally executes multiple time-saving game states in an overlapping manner, the time-saving control that is actually executed is only the time-saving control that corresponds to one of the time-saving game states. In other words, even when multiple time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the player understands that the game is controlled to one of the multiple time-saving game states.

Next, we will explain how the game state changes.

Even if the game is controlled in the normal game state, the time-saving game state (time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B, time-saving game state C), or the high-probability game state (for example, the high-probability time-saving game state), if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a jackpot, the game will transition to the jackpot game state.

When the jackpot game state ends, depending on the game specifications, it is possible to transition to any of the following game states: normal game state, time-saving game state, and high-probability game state (e.g. high-probability time-saving game state). However, the time-saving game state to which you can transition when the jackpot game state ends is limited to the A time-saving game state.

When controlled to a high probability game state, there is no transition from the high probability game state to a time-limited game state or a normal game state, except for some pachinko game machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines. Similarly, there is no transition from the time-limited game state or the normal game state to the high probability game state unless the jackpot game state is passed through.

When controlled to the normal game state, it is possible to transition to the time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C, but it is not possible to transition to the time-saving game state A without passing through the jackpot game state. However, when a specified number of special symbol games are played in the time-saving game state A, the game transitions to the normal game state, so it is possible to transition from the time-saving game state A to the normal game state. Note that, regardless of whether the game is controlled to the time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C, the game transitions to the normal game state when a specified number of special symbol games are played, so it is also possible to transition from the time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C to the normal game state.

Next, we will explain how to transition between time-saving play states.

When controlled in the time-saving game state A, the number of time-saving plays that can be performed in the time-saving game state A is set to a number less than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition for the time-saving game state B, so there is no transition from the time-saving game state A to the time-saving game state B. Also, since the time-saving game state A is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the time-saving game state B to the time-saving game state A. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the time-saving game state A is a "time-saving hit," the transition condition for the time-saving game state C is met, so the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state C may overlap. However, as described above, since the time-saving game state A is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the time-saving game state C to the time-saving game state A.

When controlled to the B time-saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the condition for transitioning to the C time-saving game state is met, and the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state may overlap. Also, if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state may overlap.

When controlled to the C time-saving play state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the condition for transitioning to the C time-saving play state is met, and the C time-saving play state and the C time-saving play state may overlap.

More details about overlapping time-saving game modes will be provided later.

[1-4. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 9 to FIG.

The first pachinko game machine is provided with a normal game state in which neither probability variable control nor time-saving control is executed, a high-probability time-saving game state in which both probability variable control and time-saving control are executed, and a low-probability time-saving game state in which probability variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed, and the main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in any of these game states. However, the game states progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 are not limited to these.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left hitting is considered to be the regular game mode, and in the high-probability time-saving game state and the low-probability time-saving game state, right hitting is considered to be the regular game mode. The sub-CPU 301 executes control to display the hitting method considered to be the regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7. Note that the "regular game mode" corresponds to the game mode that is the least disadvantageous to the player (the most advantageous to the player) among multiple game modes (for example, firing modes).

[1-4-1. Jackpot Probability for Each Setting Value]
9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (estimate) for each setting value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in Fig. 9, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the setting key 174a or the backup clear switch 176 (see Fig. 6) can be used to set one of a number of settings, for example, settings 1 to 6. In the case of such a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting value, and the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol winning judgment process based on the set setting value.

Specifically, the probability of winning in a game state where the probability variable flag is off and the probability variable control is not executed (for example, in the normal game state and the low probability time-saving game state in this embodiment), regardless of whether the first special symbol hit determination process or the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, is, for example, about 1 in 319 in setting 1, about 1 in 314 in setting 2, about 1 in 309 in setting 3, about 1 in 304 in setting 4, about 1 in 299 in setting 5, and about 1 in 294 in setting 6. In addition, the probability of winning in a game state where the probability variable flag is on and the probability variable control is executed (for example, in the high probability time-saving game state in this embodiment), is about 1 in 77 in setting 1, about 1 in 76 in setting 2, about 1 in 75 in setting 3, about 1 in 74 in setting 4, about 1 in 73 in setting 5, and about 1 in 72 in setting 6.

The probability of a time-saving hit is the same for all settings, unlike the probability of a jackpot. For example, the probability of a time-saving hit when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed is 1 in 160, and the probability of a time-saving hit when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is executed is 1 in 240. The probability of a time-saving hit may be different when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is executed, or it may be the same.

However, even if the probability of a time-saving hit is the same for all setting values, the time-saving continuation rate (e.g., the number of time-saving times set) may be different depending on the setting value. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving times may be set to 50 for setting 1, and 100 for setting 6.

In the first pachinko game machine, small wins are not included in the lottery, but small wins may be included in the lottery. When small wins are included in the lottery, the small win probability may be set to a common probability for all setting values. When small wins are included in the lottery, a small win may be won only when a hit determination process for one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (e.g., the second special pattern) has been performed. In this case, the hit determination process for the other special pattern (e.g., the first special pattern) may not determine whether or not a small win has been won, or may determine whether or not a small win has been won with the small win probability set to 0.

The probability of winning the time-saving bonus and the probability of winning a small bonus when the bonus is included in the lottery are the same for all setting values as described above, but are not limited to this and may be different depending on the setting value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is different for each setting value, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the jackpot probability may be the same for multiple setting values, such as a common jackpot probability for setting 1 and setting 2, a common jackpot probability for setting 3 and setting 4, and a common jackpot probability for setting 5 and setting 6.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot differs depending on the setting value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on the setting value, the target that differs depending on the setting value is not necessarily limited to the probability of winning a jackpot. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state when a gaming ball enters a specific winning hole, the probability of winning a prize in the specific winning hole may be made to differ depending on the setting value. Note that it is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol winning judgment table]
10 is an example of a special symbol winning judgment table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 10 is an example of the case of setting 1 shown in FIG.

The special symbol winning judgment table is a table referenced in the winning judgment process for the special symbol, that is, a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "time-saving win", "jackpot", or "miss" is to be obtained based on the random number value for jackpot judgment extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140. In this embodiment, the objects to be selected are "time-saving win", "jackpot", and "miss", and other objects to be selected (e.g., small win) are not included, but other objects to be selected may be determined when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 and/or the second starting hole 140.

As described above, the random number value for determining a jackpot is a random number value used in the process of determining whether or not a special symbol has won. In this embodiment, the random number value for determining a jackpot is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination in the hit determination process for the first special symbol. The hit determination table for the first special symbol specifies, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data.

In this specification, when the value of the probability change flag is "0", the probability change flag is off, and when the value of the probability change flag is "1", the probability change flag is on.

In addition, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines whether the result is a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination, just as in the hit determination process for the first special symbol. In the hit determination table for the second special symbol, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data are specified.

In this embodiment, for example, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Also, if the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

For example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." If the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

Similarly, for example, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 273 to 477, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 478 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

For example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 273 to 1123, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 1124 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

In this embodiment, for example, of the random numbers for determining a jackpot that are generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 408 for the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data) excluding the jackpot determination value data and the miss determination value data. Also, the end of the predetermined range (for example, 614 to 65535 if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the miss determination value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and the miss determination value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing this, for example, when the probability variable flag goes from off to on (or on to off), it is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the range of other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data) by simply narrowing (or widening) the width of the miss determination value data by the amount that the width of the jackpot determination value data is widened (or narrowed).

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed is made different from the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, thereby adding variety to the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, by making the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed higher than the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become monotonous.

However, the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed may be made higher than the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed. In this case, for example, by executing the time-saving play state in a overlapping manner when a "time-saving hit" is won during a time-saving play state, if a "time-saving hit" is won just before the end of the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state is effectively extended, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

As shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, a "time-shortened win" can be won whether the special chance flag is on or off. However, when the special chance flag is off (normal game state, time-shortened game state), the main CPU 201 controls the game to the time-shortened game state if the result of the win determination process is a "time-shortened win", but when the special chance flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control the game to the time-shortened game state even if the result of the win determination process is a "time-shortened win".

[1-4-3. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 11 shows an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "select symbol command" and a "symbol designation command" that determine the stopped symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140 and the aforementioned determination value data. The "select symbol command" is a command for designating the winning symbol determined according to the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 10 and 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selected symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z10" as the selected symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the second special symbol, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z11" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) is referenced to determine the hit/lose determination value data based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) is referenced to determine the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but this is not limited to this. For example, the hit/lose of the special symbol, the selected symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
12A is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol to be output to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 5) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, in response to the selected symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12(A), the stopping mode of the special symbol output to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of a 1-byte control signal composed of areas 0 to 7, for example. Each of the areas 0 to 7 of the first special symbol corresponds one-to-one to one of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5) that compose the first special symbol display unit 163. For example, area 0 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163a, area 1 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163b, area 2 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163c, area 3 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163d, area 4 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163e, area 5 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163f, area 6 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163g, and area 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163h.

Similarly, each of the areas 0 to 7 of the second special symbol corresponds one-to-one to one of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h (see FIG. 5) that make up the second special symbol display unit 164. For example, area 0 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164a, area 1 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164b, area 2 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164c, area 3 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164d, area 4 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164e, area 5 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164f, area 6 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164g, and area 7 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164h.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the display mode (time-saving hit display mode) of the LEDs output to the special symbol display units 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0," the main CPU 201 determines to stop displaying the first special symbol display unit 163 by turning on LED 163a corresponding to area 0 of the first special symbol and LED 163h corresponding to area 7 of the first special symbol, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol, the LED 163b corresponding to the area 1 of the first special symbol, and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol, the LED 163c corresponding to the area 2 of the first special symbol, and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. Also, when the selected symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 164a corresponding to the second special symbol area 0, the LED 164b corresponding to the second special symbol area 1, and the LED 164h corresponding to the second special symbol area 7 of the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 164a corresponding to the second special symbol area 0, the LED 164c corresponding to the second special symbol area 2, and the LED 164h corresponding to the second special symbol area 7 of the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and turning off the other LEDs.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot," the display mode (jackpot display mode) of the LEDs output to the special symbol display units 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "z3," the main CPU 201 determines that the first special symbol display unit 163 should be displayed in a stopped state such that, of the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, LED 163d corresponding to area 3 of the first special symbol, LED 163e corresponding to area 4 of the first special symbol, and LED 163g corresponding to area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3, the LED 163f corresponding to the first special symbol area 5, and the LED 163g corresponding to the first special symbol area 6, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3, the LED 163e corresponding to the first special symbol area 4, the LED 163f corresponding to the first special symbol area 5, and the LED 163g corresponding to the first special symbol area 6, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z9", the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3, the LED 164e corresponding to the second special symbol area 4, and the LED 164g corresponding to the second special symbol area 6, among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the LED 164f corresponding to the second special symbol area 5, among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and turning off the other LEDs.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "miss," the display mode of the LEDs (miss display mode) output to the special symbol display units 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "z6," the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state with only LED 163h corresponding to area 7 of the first special symbol out of the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 lit and the other LEDs turned off. If the selected symbol command is "z11," the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state with only LED 164h corresponding to area 7 of the second special symbol out of the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 lit and the other LEDs turned off.

When the main CPU 201 determines the stopping mode of the special pattern based on the result of the special pattern winning judgment process, it outputs a control signal corresponding to the determined mode to each LED constituting the first special pattern display unit 163 or the second special pattern display unit 164, and controls the stopping mode of the special pattern output to the first special pattern display unit 163 or the second special pattern display unit 164.

In FIG. 12(A), for convenience, the display mode of the LEDs led to the first special symbol display unit 163 and the display mode of the LEDs led to the second special symbol display unit 164 are shown in the same table. However, it is preferable that the control signals are transmitted separately for the first special symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164.

Figure 12 (B) is an example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The decorative symbol stop mode determination table is referenced when determining the stop mode (symbol combination) of the decorative symbols derived when the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the display device 7 stops in response to a symbol designation command. Note that the "Notes" column shown in Figure 12 (B) is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, since only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed, the sub-CPU 1301 controls the display device 7 to perform a display effect for the variably displayed special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, it is preferable for the sub-CPU 301 to perform the display effect in a manner that allows the player to know whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the decorative symbols displayed on the display device 7 are, for example, nine symbols 1 to 9 on the left, ten symbols 1 to 9 and a time-saving symbol on the middle, and nine symbols 1 to 9 on the right. The time-saving symbol is a symbol that is displayed as a stop when the game state transitions to a time-saving game state, for example, when the result of a special symbol lottery is a time-saving hit. By displaying the middle symbol as a time-saving symbol, the player can know that he or she has won the time-saving hit. In this embodiment, odd symbols are defined as symbols that are more advantageous to the player than even symbols, but this is not limited to this.

In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special pattern lottery does not include a small win, but if the result of the special pattern lottery includes a small win, for example, the patterns that make up the middle pattern may include a small win pattern (a pattern that stops and is displayed when the result of the special pattern lottery is a small win). In this case, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a small win, the sub-CPU 301 stops and displays the middle pattern as a small win pattern, so that the player can know that he or she has won a small win.

As shown in FIG. 12(B), when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time-saving hit"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, by stopping the left and right symbols as even-numbered symbols and stopping the center symbol as a time-saving symbol.

When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time-saving hit"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the left and right symbols as odd symbols and stops the center symbol as a time-saving symbol as the stopping mode of the decorative symbols, for example. Note that when the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"), as can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described below, the number of time-saving times set is greater than when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the selected symbol command is "z0", "z1", or "z7"), and the degree of advantage for the player is high.

When the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, by stopping the left symbol, right symbol, and center symbol in a matching odd-numbered pattern (double number).

When the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the left symbol, right symbol, and center symbol as the stopping mode of the decorative symbols, for example, when the even number symbols are aligned (double number). Note that, as can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described later, when the symbol designation command "zA4" is used, after the end of the jackpot game state, there are cases where the probability variable flag is set on (when the selected symbol command is "z4") and cases where the probability variable flag is not set on (when the selected symbol command is "z5"). Therefore, in this embodiment, whether the selected symbol command is "z4" or "z5", the sub-CPU 301 controls the decorative symbols to stop when the even number symbols are aligned (double number), and in the jackpot game state, it is preferable to perform a promotion performance indicating that it is a probability variable hit (a hit where the probability variable flag is set on).

Also, as can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described below, when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9", the expected value of the probability ...

When the symbol designation command is "zA5" or "zA10" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "miss"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols in a scattered pattern. A scattered pattern corresponds to, for example, a stopping mode in which at least one of the left, right, and center symbols is different from the other symbols.

Figure 12 (B) shows an example of the stopping mode of the decorative pattern according to the pattern designation command (for example, when the pattern designation command is "zA1", the left pattern is "2", the middle pattern is "time saving", and the right pattern is "4"), but the stopping modes shown in the decorative pattern stopping mode column in Figure 12 (B) are merely examples and are not limited to these.

[1-4-5. Winning Type Determination Table]
13 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko game machine. The winning type determination table is referred to when determining the mode of the big win game state (more specifically, for example, the number of rounds) or/and the mode of the subsequent game state according to the selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. The mode of the subsequent game state indicates the mode of the game state after the big win game state ends. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time-saving hit, the game state is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the big win game state, so the mode of the subsequent game state indicates the mode of the C time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the mode of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0," the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 10. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7," the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 50. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8," the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 100. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 derives the display mode of the above-mentioned time-saving hit to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, and then sets the time-saving flag on and the determined number of time-saving times without controlling to the jackpot game state, and can control to the C time-saving game state. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the game is not controlled to the jackpot game state, so the mode of the jackpot game state is not determined. Note that in this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of time-saving times set may be different depending on the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving turns that is set varies depending on the selected symbol command that is determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," it is possible to provide variety to the progress of the game thereafter, and to prevent a decline in interest.

As described above, when the probability variable flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control to the time-saving game state even if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit." For example, even if the probability variable flag is on (high probability game state), the main CPU 201 may draw a "time-saving hit" as shown in FIG. 10, and when the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 201 may derive a time-saving hit display mode indicating that a "time-saving hit" has been won on the special pattern display units 163, 164, but may continue the high probability game state without controlling to the C time-saving game state.

The main CPU 201 may also draw a "time-saving hit" when the probability-changing flag is on, and forcibly derive a losing display mode to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 even if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit."

Furthermore, when the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving hit determination value data is not assigned to the random number value for jackpot determination, i.e., a hit determination process may be performed that does not include "time-saving hit" in the lottery result (the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern). In this case, when the probability variable flag is off, the time-saving hit determination value data is assigned to the random number value for jackpot determination, and when the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving hit determination value data is not assigned. Therefore, the range of random numbers that was assigned to the time-saving hit determination value data when the probability variable flag is off is assigned to miss determination value data, jackpot determination value data, or both miss determination value data and jackpot determination value data, instead of the time-saving hit determination value data.

In this embodiment, when the probability variable flag is on, the game is configured not to transition to the C time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variable flag is on, the game may be configured to transition to a high-probability time-saving game state when the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit."

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot," the winning game state and the subsequent game state are determined as follows:

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z9", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 10 rounds. In addition, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines to set both the high probability flag and the time-saving flag on, and determines to set both the number of high probability rounds and the number of time-saving rounds to 10,000. In these cases, the main CPU 201 controls the game state to a jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control the game state to a high probability time-saving game state.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 4 rounds. In addition, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines to set both the high probability flag and the time-saving flag on, and determines to set both the number of high probability rounds and the number of time-saving rounds to 10,000. In this case, the main CPU 201 controls the game state to a jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display unit 163, and after the end of this jackpot game state, it becomes possible to control the game state to a high probability time-saving game state.

Furthermore, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 4 rounds. Furthermore, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines that only the time-saving flag out of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag is set to on. It also determines that the number of time-saving times to be set is set to, for example, 200 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 controls the jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display unit 163, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control it to the time-saving game state. The time-saving game state controlled here is the A time-saving game state.

Furthermore, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 10 rounds. Furthermore, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines that only the time-saving flag out of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag is set to on. It also determines that the number of time-saving times to be set is set to, for example, 300 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 controls the jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the second special symbol display unit 164, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control it to the time-saving game state. The time-saving game state controlled here is also the A time-saving game state.

It is preferable that the time-saving performance in the high-probability time-saving game state is the same as the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state, but it may be different from the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z11"), the main CPU 201 does not set either the state of the big win game state or the state of the game state thereafter. In other words, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 201 does not change the game state, but continues to control the game state up to that point.

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z11"), neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is set as described above, so there is no need to illustrate this in the hit type determination table of FIG. 13. However, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, it is illustrated in FIG. 13 to clearly show that neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss".

Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table of Fig. 10, determines the hit/lose determination value data based on the jackpot determination random number value extracted when the game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 140 (performs a hit/lose determination), and determines the hit/lose ("time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss"). After that, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol determination table of Fig. 11, determines the selected symbol command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 140 and the hit/lose determination value data, and determines the type of display mode (type of time-saving hit or type of jackpot) to be derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164. Note that the above winning/losing judgment and selection of the symbol command are performed when the variable display of the special symbol begins, but this does not exclude the possibility of performing this between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the final display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of the big win game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5") or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). In contrast, the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state that is controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). In other words, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state. In this way, the positioning of the "big win" can be increased by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state.

In addition, instead of making the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state may be made higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state. FIG. 14 is a modified example of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 13. In this FIG. 14, the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). In contrast, the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7"), or 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). In this way, by making the C time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the A time-saving game state, the positioning of the "time-saving win" can be increased. For example, even if a long period of time passes without a "jackpot" being won, if a "time-saving hit" is won, the player will be controlled to the relatively advantageous C time-saving game state, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

In this specification, as with the special bonus flag, when the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the time-saving flag is off, and when the value of the time-saving flag is "1", the time-saving flag is on.

The time-saving flag, like the probability change flag, is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute time-saving control.

The number of time-saving times is the number of times that the special symbols can be displayed variably while the time-saving control is being continued. That is, for example, if the number of time-saving times is determined to be "50," and 50 times of variable display of special symbols are performed without winning a jackpot in this time-saving game state, this time-saving game state ends and transitions to a non-time-saving game state (for example, a normal game state).

The "10,000" number of times the special mode and the time-saving mode are shown in FIG. 13 and other figures is intended to allow the special mode control to be continuously executed after the end of the special mode game state, until it is determined that a special mode has occurred (i.e., the next special mode).

[1-4-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 15 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the first pachinko game machine. The "Notes" column in FIG. 15 is shown for convenience in order to make it easier to understand. The time-saving hit-type reaches A, B, and C shown in the "Notes" column in FIG. 15 are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is likely to be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Similarly, the jackpot-type reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is likely to be both a time-saving hit and a jackpot. Note that FIG. 15 is a variation pattern table of a special symbol when the probability variable flag is off, and the illustration of the variation pattern table of a special symbol when the probability variable flag is on is omitted.

The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 140. The special symbol variation pattern table in FIG. 15 is a table that is referenced when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S96 in FIG. 28 described below.

As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose), the value of the time-saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach determination, and/or the random number value for performance selection, but is not limited to this and may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 sets a look-ahead flag if the random number value for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 120 is a specific random number value. The sub-CPU 301, which receives the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 201, performs a look-ahead effect if the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the probability bonus flag is on.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 decides whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, but this is not limited to this, and the sub-CPU 301 may decide.

The main CPU 201 may also set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead performance) when the time-saving flag or the probability-change flag is on. The main CPU 201 may also set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead performance) when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

When the time-saving flag is on, the expected number of changes per unit time for the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined is smaller than when the time-saving flag is off. In other words, the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is on is likely to be shorter than the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is sent from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 308 of the sub-CPU 301 via the command output port 206. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information sent from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol that is determined may be different for each setting value, for example by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, when the result of the hit determination process is a miss, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined depending on whether the time-saving flag is on or not, regardless of the type of time-saving, but this is not limited to this. For example, the expected value of the number of times the special symbol will be variably displayed per unit time may be made different depending on the type of time-saving. For example, the expected value of the number of times the special symbol will be variably displayed per unit time may be made different between time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, and time-saving play state C.

[1-4-7. Time-saving game state]
As described above, in this embodiment, the time-saving gaming states are the time-saving gaming state A, the time-saving gaming state B, and the time-saving gaming state C. These time-saving gaming states will be described below.

The A time-saving play state is a time-saving play state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot play state when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z5" or "z10". That is, in this embodiment, the condition for transitioning to the A time-saving play state is winning a jackpot (a jackpot with a selected symbol command of "z5" or "z10"). However, even if the condition for transitioning to the A time-saving play state is met, transition to the A time-saving play state is not necessarily made; if a condition that prevents transition to the A time-saving play state is met (for example, if the backup is cleared), transition to the A time-saving play state is not made.

The condition for ending the A time-saving game state is when either of the following conditions is met: the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and a jackpot game state based on the "jackpot" is initiated, or a variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) for the number of time-saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as the "A time-saving specified number of times") is executed (see the "Number of time-saving times" column in Figure 13).

The B time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that is controlled when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value by updating (adding 1) the ceiling counter, starting, for example, when the jackpot game state ends and the variable display of the special symbol in the non-high probability game state (for example, the normal game state and the low probability time-saving game state in this embodiment) begins. That is, the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. The transition to the B time-saving game state may be when the variable display of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (hereinafter referred to as the "ceiling final fluctuation") begins, when the ceiling final fluctuation ends, or when the variable display of the special symbol next to the ceiling final fluctuation begins. That is, the timing of transition to the B time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the ceiling final fluctuation and the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. In addition, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is "miss", the display mode of miss is derived on the special symbol display section 163, 164, but the game will transition to the B time-saving game state. In this case, the sub-CPU 301 may control the display device 7 to display a display effect (for example, a decorative symbol is stopped with a special symbol, a special effect by a character is performed, or both of these are performed) that indicates to the player that the transition condition to the B time-saving game state has been established (for example, in this embodiment, the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value). Note that even if the transition condition to the B time-saving game state is established, the game will not necessarily transition to the B time-saving game state, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the B time-saving game state is established (for example, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a jackpot, etc.), the game will not transition to the B time-saving game state.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability variable flag is on, and when the probability variable flag is off, it is always counted regardless of whether the time-saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is controlled to the B time-saving game state unless the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a "big hit". In a pachinko game machine in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes a small hit, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small hit", the B time-saving game state may be started when the display mode of the small hit is derived to the special symbol display unit 163, 164, or the B time-saving game state may be started after the small hit game state ends. In other words, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small hit", only the display mode of the small hit is displayed on the special symbol display unit 163, 164, and no display effect is displayed to indicate to the player that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value as described above. In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the ceiling value may be different depending on the setting value. Also, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "jackpot," the machine is controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the B time-saving game state.

The ceiling counter is reset when a specific condition is met, such as when the power is turned on, when the machine is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, when the working area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clearing), when a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 174a or a dedicated switch) is operated, or when the high probability of hitting a normal symbol ends in a gaming machine in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol can be changed. When updating of the ceiling counter is permitted, the ceiling counter is updated each time a variable display of a special symbol is executed. For example, when the probability flag is on, updating of the ceiling counter is not permitted.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the next variable display of the special symbol. The ceiling value may be set by the main CPU 201 each time the ceiling counter is cleared, or may be predetermined as a value specific to the pachinko game machine rather than being set each time.

When the ceiling counter is cleared due to control to the jackpot gaming state, if the probability variable flag is not on after the jackpot gaming state ends, the main CPU 201 updates (+1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern. Also, if the probability variable flag is on after the jackpot gaming state ends, the ceiling counter is not updated even if the variable display of the special pattern is performed, but for example, in the case of an ST machine or a specification that performs a probability variable drop lottery, the ceiling counter is updated at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the probability variable flag is turned off. Note that in the case of a specification that performs a probability variable drop lottery, the probability variable flag is changed from on to off at the start of the variable display of the special pattern, so when updating the ceiling counter at the end of the variable display of the special pattern, if the probability variable flag is off at the end of the variable display of the special pattern, the ceiling counter may be updated.

In the case of a pachinko game machine in which the main CPU 201 performs a lottery for changing into a high probability state, it is preferable that the sub-CPU 301, upon receiving a command sent from the main CPU 201, does not perform any effects suggesting that the lottery for changing into a high probability state has been won or any effects suggesting a transition from a high probability state to a low probability state. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the start point of the count by the ceiling counter, i.e., the timing of the transition to the B time-saving game state, based on the display effects displayed on the display device 7, making it possible to provide an interesting game. If it is difficult to grasp the timing of the transition to the B time-saving game state, for example, a countdown effect suggesting the timing of the transition to the B time-saving game state or a false countdown effect can be displayed on the display device 7 under the control of the sub-CPU 301, thereby making it possible to further increase interest.

In addition, when a clearing process (backup clearing process) is performed on the working area (volatile area) in RAM 203, the main CPU 201 updates (increments by 1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the clearing process of the working area in RAM 203.

Furthermore, if a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 174a or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 updates (+1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the other switch is operated.

The end condition of the B time-saving game state is when either of the following conditions is met: the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a "jackpot" and a jackpot game state based on the "jackpot" is started, or the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as the "prescribed number of B time-saving times"). One of the end conditions of the B time-saving game state, "the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times for B time-saving", may be when the variable display of the special symbol for the prescribed number of B time-saving times (hereinafter referred to as the "final variation of B time-saving") is started, or when the final variation of B time-saving is completed. In other words, the end timing of the B time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the final variation of B time-saving and the end of the variable display of the special symbols related to this final variation of B time-saving.

The C time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that is controlled when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a "time-saving hit". In other words, the condition for transitioning to the C time-saving game state is that a time-saving hit (the selected symbol command is a time-saving hit of "z0" to "z2", "z7" or "z8") is won, and the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived (determined display) on the special symbol display unit 163, 164. Note that even if the transition condition to the C time-saving game state is met, the game does not necessarily transition to the C time-saving game state. If a condition that prevents the transition to the C time-saving game state is met (for example, when the specifications are such that the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state are not executed at the same time (details will be described later), and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the B time-saving game state is a "time-saving hit", etc.), the game will not transition to the C time-saving game state. In addition, if the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving game state are met but a condition preventing transition to the C time-saving game state is met, the main CPU 201 executes control to derive the display mode of the time-saving win to the special pattern display units 163, 164, even though it does not transition to the C time-saving game state.

The end condition of the C time-saving game state is when either of the following conditions is met: the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a "jackpot" and a jackpot game state based on the "jackpot" is started; or the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) for the number of time-saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as the "prescribed number of C time-saving times") is executed (see the "number of time-saving times" column in FIG. 13). The prescribed number of C time-saving times, which is one of the end conditions of the C time-saving game state, may be when the variable display of the special symbol for the number of time-saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as the "final C time-saving change") starts, or when the final C time-saving change ends. In other words, the end timing of the C time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the final C time-saving change and the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to this final C time-saving change.

The time-saving performance may be different between the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state. Also, the time-saving performance of two of the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state may be the same, and the time-saving performance of these two time-saving play states may be different from the time-saving performance of the other one of the time-saving play states. Furthermore, the time-saving performance of the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state may be the same.

In addition, the end conditions for the time-saving play state A, the time-saving play state B, and the time-saving play state C may include, in addition to the above, for example, that the number of times the second special symbol is displayed has reached a specified number of times, that the normal electric device 146 has opened a specified number of times, or that a specific opening mode has been selected as the opening mode of the normal electric device 146. In a pachinko game machine in which the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol includes a small hit, the above end conditions may include that the number of small hits has reached a specified number of times. Furthermore, the above end conditions may include that a time-saving fall lottery is held and that the time-saving fall lottery is won.

[1-4-8. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 16 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referenced in the normal symbol hit determination process, i.e., when determining whether a "normal symbol hit" or "miss" is determined by lottery based on the game state and the normal symbol hit determination random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see Figure 4) (i.e., when executing the normal symbol game determination process of S295 in Figure 43 described below).

As described above, the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is a random number value used in the process of determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 selects the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines whether the normal symbol is a hit or a miss based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. The normal symbol hit determination table specifies, for each type of time reduction, the relationship between the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value determined to be a "normal symbol hit" and the corresponding normal symbol hit determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value determined to be a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data.

In this embodiment, in a non-time-saving game state (for example, a normal game state), if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 79, the main CPU 201 determines that the win/loss determination value is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data." Also, in a non-time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 80 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the win is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 98, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data."In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 79, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data."In addition, in the B time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 80 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 79, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data."In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 80 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In this way, in this embodiment, the probability of winning on a normal symbol in the time-saving game state A (selection rate (estimated) shown in Figure 16) is the highest among the non-time-saving game state, the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C.

In addition, the winning probability of a normal symbol in the B time-saving game state (selection rate (estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability of a normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state. Similarly, the winning probability of a normal symbol in the C time-saving game state (selection rate (estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability of a normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, even if the game state shifts between the non-time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of a normal symbol will not change.

The winning probability for a normal symbol may be the same in the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In this case, the winning probability for a normal symbol does not change, and the ratio of the types of normal symbols described below only needs to be varied for each state, simplifying the control process.

[1-4-9. Normal symbol determination table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "normal symbol winning symbol selection command" that determines the normal symbol stopping symbol based on the type of time reduction, the aforementioned winning/losing determination value data, and the normal symbol random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). The "normal symbol winning symbol selection command" is a command for specifying the winning normal symbol determined according to the normal symbol winning type when the result of the normal symbol winning determination process is a normal symbol winning symbol. The normal symbol random number value is extracted, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17, when normal symbol winning determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol winning determination process, for example, the selected symbol command when a normal symbol wins is selected as follows:

For example, in a non-time-saving game state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz0" as the normal symbol hit selection pattern command, regardless of whether the normal symbol random number value is 0 to 99.

In addition, in the A time-saving play state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz1" as the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 29, selects "fz2" as the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 30 and 69, and selects "fz3" as the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 70 and 99.

In addition, in the B time-saving play state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz4" as the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 29, selects "fz5" as the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 30 and 69, and selects "fz6" as the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 70 and 99.

In addition, in the C time-saving play state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz7" as the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 29, selects "fz8" as the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 30 and 69, and selects "fz9" as the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 70 and 99.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern (see FIG. 16) to determine the winning/losing judgment value data based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern, and then refers to the normal pattern judgment table (see FIG. 17) to determine the pattern command selected when the normal pattern is a winning pattern based on the pattern random number value of the normal pattern, but is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing of the normal pattern and the pattern command selected when the normal pattern is a winning pattern may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

[1-4-10. Normal pattern type determination table]
18 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko game machine. The normal symbol winning type determination table is referenced when determining the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric role 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to the normal symbol winning time selection symbol command determined in response to the normal symbol random number value (i.e., when executing the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric role 146 executed in the variable display start process of the normal symbol in S293 in FIG. 43 described later).

In this embodiment, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, if the symbol command selected when a normal symbol hits is "fz0", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4), to be a first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, and no second opening. In other words, the opening pattern is determined to be one in which the normal electric device 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the selection pattern command for a normal symbol hit is "fz1", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 2000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "fz2" when a normal symbol is hit, the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 2500 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command when a normal symbol is hit is "fz3", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 3000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 3000 msec.

In addition, when the selected pattern command when a normal pattern is hit is "fz4" or "fz7", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, no wait time, and no second opening.

In addition, when the selected pattern command when a normal pattern is hit is "fz5" or "fz8", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2000 msec.

In addition, when the selected pattern command when a normal pattern is hit is "fz6" or "fz9", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2500 msec.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the non-time-saving play state is "normal symbol hit," the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4) will be the most unfavorable mode among the opening patterns of the normal electric device 146 in the non-time-saving play state, the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 is the degree of ease with which the game ball will enter the second starting hole 140 when the normal electric device 146 is opened.

When the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the A time-saving play state is "normal symbol hit," the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4) will be the most advantageous pattern among the opening patterns of the normal electric device 146 in the non-time-saving play state, the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the B time-saving play state is a "normal symbol hit" has the same degree of advantage as the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the C time-saving play state is a "normal symbol hit", but is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Normal pattern variation table]
FIG. 19 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko game machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table is referred to when determining the normal symbol variation pattern (i.e., when executing the normal symbol variation pattern determination process executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 in FIG. 43 described later). The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and determines the normal symbol variation pattern based on the game state and the normal symbol effect selection random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). The normal symbol effect selection random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the non-time-saving game state, regardless of whether the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 0 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 300,000 msec. The variable display time of the normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state is the longest among the non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B, and time-saving game state C.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any value between 0 and 89, the variable display time for the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any value between 90 and 99, the variable display time for the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one between 40 and 79, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one between 80 and 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 40 to 79, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In this way, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal pattern per variable display is the shortest among the variable display times of the normal pattern in the non-time-saving game state, the A-time-saving game state, the B-time-saving game state, and the C-time-saving game state. Therefore, the A-time-saving game state has the shortest time until the normal electric device 146 is opened among the non-time-saving game state, the A-time-saving game state, the B-time-saving game state, and the C-time-saving game state.

In addition, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the B time-saving play state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the C time-saving play state, but is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to time-saving gaming state]
[1-5-1. Number of time-saving times set when time-saving hits]
In the above description, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving times to be set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of time-saving times to be set when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" may be determined according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

Even in a high probability game state where the probability flag is set to ON, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include "time-saving hit". In this case, the main CPU derives the display mode of the time-saving hit on the special symbol display section, but does not execute control to transition to the time-saving game state, and continues to control the high probability game state. However, there are known gaming machines, such as pachinko gaming machines called ST machines, that change the probability flag from ON to OFF when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a prescribed number of times. In such ST machines, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process performed in the final game in the high probability game state is "time-saving hit", if the process of deriving the display mode of the time-saving hit is later than the process of turning off the probability flag, the main CPU may control to the C time-saving game state after deriving the display mode of the time-saving hit.

[1-5-2. Overlapping of time-saving game states]
When multiple time-saving game states are provided, the time-saving game states may overlap. For example, in the A time-saving game state, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time-saving hit", the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state will overlap. Also, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state will overlap. When the time-saving game states overlap in this way, the time-saving game states may be executed in an overlapping manner, or the time-saving game states may not be overlapped (i.e., the "time-saving hit" may be ignored). In order to prevent the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state from overlapping, the A time-saving prescribed number of times, which is the end condition of the A time-saving game state, is specified to be smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving game state.

Below is an explanation of how the time-saving game states overlap when they are executed in a overlapping manner, and how they do not overlap.

[1-5-2-1. Mode of overlapping execution of time-saving gaming state]
Possible modes of overlapping the time-shortened game states when the time-shortened game states overlap include a mode in which the time-shortened game state C is overlapped and executed when a time-shortened prize is won in any one of the time-shortened game states A, B, and C, and a mode in which the time-shortened game state B is overlapped and executed when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-shortened game state C.

[1-5-2-1-1. Mode of executing C time-saving gaming state on one time-saving gaming state]
When a "time-saving win" is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode of the time-saving win on the special symbol display units 163 and 164. In this case, the main CPU 201 adopts, as the number of times of time-saving, the state which has the greater number of variable displays of the special symbols that can be executed until the end condition of the time-saving game state is established, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the one time-saving game state.

For example, if a "time-saving hit" is won in the A time-saving game state, and the number of remaining time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is greater than the number of time-saving times that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 controls the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is consumed, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if a "time-saving hit" is won when the remaining number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is 200, and the number of time-saving times that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit" is 50, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived on the special pattern display units 163 and 164, but the number of time-saving times from here is 200, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. Therefore, even if a "time-saving hit" is won in one of the time-saving game states A, B, or C, the appearance of the number of time-saving hits and time-saving performance will be the same as if the time-saving game state A had not been won and the game continued.

On the other hand, for example, if a "time-saving hit" is won in the A time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving times that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit" is greater than the number of time-saving times remaining in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 controls the time-saving game state until the number of time-saving times set based on the "time-saving hit" is consumed, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if a "time-saving hit" is won when the number of time-saving times remaining in the A time-saving game state is 20, and the number of time-saving times that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit" is 50, the number of time-saving times from this point on will be 50, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special pattern is executed for 20 times, which is the number of time-saving times remaining in the A time-saving game state, the variable display of the special pattern is then further executed for 30 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-2. Mode in which the time-saving gaming state B is superimposed on the time-saving gaming state C]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value during the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 executes control according to the display mode (i.e., the result of the special pattern hit determination process) output to the special pattern display sections 163, 164 during the final ceiling fluctuation.

Note that in the first pachinko gaming machine, the results of the special symbol hit determination process do not include small hits, but the following explanation also includes cases where the results of the special symbol hit determination process include small hits.

First, we will explain the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process during the final ceiling fluctuation is a "small hit" or "miss."

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving C state, if the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving C state is greater than the specified number of time-saving B times, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the time-saving C state and controls the time-saving C state until the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving C state is consumed, unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving C state is 300, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value and the specified number of time-saving B times is 200, the number of time-saving times from this point on will be 300, unless a "jackpot" is derived, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the time-saving C state. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving C state, the appearance of the number of time-saving times and the time-saving performance is the same as when the time-saving C state continues without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value.

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving C game state, if the B time-saving prescribed number of times is greater than the remaining number of time-saving in the time-saving C game state, the main CPU 201 controls the time-saving game state until the B time-saving prescribed number of times is consumed, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state is 20 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time-saving times that can be executed in the B time-saving game state is 300 times, the number of time-saving times from this point on will be 300 times while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special pattern is executed for 20 times, which is the remaining number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state, the variable display of the special pattern is then further executed for 280 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state.

When the variable display of the special symbol ends during the final ceiling variation, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode in the special symbol display sections 163, 164 according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", a small hit display mode is derived, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss", a miss display mode is derived. When the small hit display mode is derived, control is given to the small hit game state, but the main CPU 201 keeps the time-saving flag on even during the small hit game state.

Next, we will explain the case where the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol at the final ceiling fluctuation is a "time-shortened hit," that is, the case where the transition condition to the B time-shortened play state and the transition condition to the C time-shortened play state are met at the final ceiling fluctuation. In this case, the main CPU 201 can execute different controls depending on whether it starts control of the B time-shortened play state before the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164 or whether it starts control of the B time-shortened play state after the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164.

First, if control of the B time-shortened game state is started before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164, the game is already controlled to the B time-shortened game state at the time the display mode of the time-shortened hit is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164. Therefore, while maintaining the time-shortened performance of the B time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 controls the game to the time-shortened game state until the greater of the B time-shortened prescribed number of times or the C time-shortened game state number of times is consumed, unless a "jackpot" is output.

Next, when control of the B time-shortened game state is started after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164, the time-shortened game state is not yet controlled to the B time-shortened game state at the time when the display mode of the time-shortened hit is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164. Therefore, while maintaining the time-shortened performance of the C time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 controls the time-shortened game state until the greater of the B time-shortened prescribed number of times and the C time-shortened number of times is consumed, unless the end condition of the time-shortened game state in which the time-shortened performance is maintained or executed is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to end the time-shortened game state when the end condition of the time-shortened game state in which the time-shortened performance is maintained or executed is satisfied.

In addition, when the conditions for transition to the time-saving B game state and the conditions for transition to the time-saving C game state are satisfied at the final change of the ceiling, the sub-CPU 301 may perform a special display effect different from the B time-saving transition display effect performed when only the conditions for transition to the time-saving B game state are satisfied, and the C time-saving transition display effect performed when only the conditions for transition to the time-saving C game state are satisfied. Alternatively, for example, if the time-saving performance of the time-saving B game state is maintained, the B time-saving transition display effect is performed, and if the time-saving performance of the time-saving C game state is maintained, the C time-saving transition display effect is performed, and so on.

In addition, if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state and the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a "jackpot," the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and controls the game state to the jackpot game state without also controlling the game state to the B time-saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-3. Time-saving performance when multiple time-saving game states are executed at the same time]
The above describes a mode in which a time-shortened game state C is superimposed on one time-shortened game state, and a mode in which a time-shortened game state B is superimposed on a time-shortened game state C.

When multiple time-saving game states can be executed in a superimposed manner, the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving game state is maintained. In a pachinko game machine with such specifications, the time-saving performance of the multiple time-saving game states that can be executed in a superimposed manner may be different, but it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the multiple time-saving game states that can be executed in a superimposed manner the same.

For example, if the specifications allow a time-saving play state C to be overlaid on a time-saving play state, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the time-saving play state C the same as that of the time-saving play state C. Also, if the specifications allow a time-saving play state B to be overlaid on a time-saving play state C, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the time-saving play state C the same as that of the time-saving play state B.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine that is capable of executing multiple time-saving game states in a superimposed manner, a time-saving game state that can be executed later on a previously executed time-saving game state may be provided with, for example, one time-saving performance that is the same as the previously executed time-saving game state, and another time-saving performance that is different from the one time-saving performance. When a time-saving game state is executed in a superimposed manner on a previously executed time-saving game state, the one time-saving performance may be activated, and when a time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner, such as when a time-saving game state is activated in a normal game state, the other time-saving performance may be activated.

For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine that can execute the time-saving gaming state B in a C time-saving gaming state by overlapping it with the time-saving gaming state C, the time-saving performance of the B time-saving gaming state is set to, for example, two time-saving performances, one time-saving performance that is the same as the time-saving gaming state C, and another time-saving performance that is different from the one time-saving performance. Then, for example, if the ceiling counter reaches a ceiling value in the time-saving gaming state C, the one time-saving performance may be activated, and, for example, if the ceiling counter reaches a ceiling value in a normal gaming state that is not one of the time-saving gaming states, the other time-saving performance may be activated.

[1-5-3. Mode in which time-saving gaming states are not executed in succession]
As a mode in which the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner, there are a mode in which a hit determination process is performed so that the "time-saving hit" is not included in the lottery object in the time-saving game state, and a mode in which a hit determination process is performed so that the "time-saving hit" is included in the lottery object in the time-saving game state, and even if the time-saving game state is overlapped, the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner (hereinafter referred to as the "latter mode"). As the latter mode, there are two modes in which even if a time-saving hit is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner by ignoring this, and even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving game state C, the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner by ignoring this. The above two modes considered as the latter mode will be described below.

[1-5-3-1. Mode in which the C time-saving gaming state is not executed in addition to one time-saving gaming state]
When a "time-saving win" is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the main CPU 201 derives the display mode of the time-saving win on the special symbol display units 163 and 164, as described above. However, unless the final variable display of the special symbol in one time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as "final time-saving change") is the last, the main CPU 201 does not control the game to the time-saving game state C based on the "time-saving win", but controls the game to the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving plays in the time-saving game state in the time-saving game state is consumed. In this case, being controlled to the time-saving game state (excluding the final time-saving change) is a condition that prevents a transition to the time-saving game state C.

On the other hand, if a "time-saving hit" is won in the final time-saving fluctuation in one time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 can execute different control depending on whether the one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving hit is introduced to the special pattern display units 163, 164 or whether the one time-saving game state ends when the display mode of the time-saving hit is introduced to the special pattern display units 163, 164.

First, if one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived on the special pattern display units 163 and 164, the main CPU 201 will derive the display mode of the time-saving hit and then start controlling the C time-saving game state.

Next, if one time-shortened game state ends when the display mode of the time-shortened win is derived on the special symbol display units 163, 164, i.e., if the derivation of the display mode of the time-shortened win and the end of one time-shortened game state are performed within the same interrupt process, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the C time-shortened game state depending on the program processing. Specifically, if the process of deriving (determined display) the display mode of the time-shortened win is performed before the end process of one time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 ends one time-shortened game state without controlling it to the C time-shortened game state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode of the time-shortened win before the end process of one time-shortened game state is a condition that prevents transition to the C time-shortened game state.

On the other hand, if the process of deriving (determining) the display mode of the time-saving hit is performed after the end process of the first time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the first time-saving game state and controls it to the C time-saving game state. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time-saving performance of the first time-saving game state, but sets it to the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state. In other words, at the time when the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived, if the end process of the first time-saving game state has not been processed, the main CPU 201 ends the first time-saving game state without controlling it to the C time-saving game state, and if the end process of the first time-saving game state has already been processed, the main CPU 201 controls it to the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-3-2. Mode in which the B time-saving gaming state is not executed in parallel with the C time-saving gaming state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value during the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 executes control according to the display mode (i.e., the result of the special pattern hit determination process) output to the special pattern display sections 163, 164 during the final ceiling fluctuation.

First, we will explain the cases where the result of the special symbol hit determination process during the final ceiling fluctuation is a "time-saving hit," "small hit," or "miss."

In the C time-saving play state, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a "time-saving hit," "small hit," or "miss," the main CPU 201 controls the game to the C time-saving play state until the remaining number of times the time-saving play in the C time-saving play state is consumed.

However, when the remaining number of time-shortened times in the C time-shortened game state is 0 at the final ceiling fluctuation, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the B time-shortened game state, depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time-shortened game state is performed before the start processing of the B time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-shortened game state and controls it to the B time-shortened game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time-shortened game state is performed after the start processing of the B time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-shortened game state without controlling it to the B time-shortened game state. In other words, when the main CPU 201 is about to start the B time-shortened game state, if the end processing of the C time-shortened game state has not been processed, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-shortened game state without controlling it to the B time-shortened game state, and if the end processing of the C time-shortened game state has already been processed, the main CPU 201 controls it to the B time-shortened game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time-shortened game state after the start processing of the B time-shortened game state is a condition that prevents the transition to the B time-shortened game state.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process during the final ceiling fluctuation is a "jackpot," the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and starts control of the jackpot game state.

[1-6. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
First, the main processing (main control main processing) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Figures 20 to 23. Figures 20 to 23 are flow charts showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power interruption signal is at a high level (S11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the setting area corresponding to the interrupt prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at a high level (if S11 is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process of S11.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at a high level (if S11 is judged as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 (S12). In this processing, a process of saving the on/off state of the backup clear switch 176 and the on/off state of the setting key 174a is performed. In other words, the on/off state of the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 is stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. Also, in this processing, the play permission flag is set to off. After executing the processing of S12, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs a wait process. In this process, the sub-control circuit 300 waits for startup. In this case, the startup wait time (wait period) is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S14.

In addition, while waiting for the sub-control circuit 300 to start up, the main CPU 201 may perform, for example, checking an interrupt request signal, outputting a WDT when an interrupt request signal occurs, and outputting various sensor initialization signals at predetermined timing.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power interruption before startup (the previous time) was normal or not. In this process, it is determined whether the power interruption was normal or abnormal based on the value stored in the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was not normal (if S14 returns NO), the main CPU 201 proceeds to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was normal (YES in S14), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then performs a comparison process of the checksum value of the work area (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether the comparison result is abnormal.

If it is determined in S17 that the collation result is not abnormal, i.e., is normal (if S17 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22. Note that the process from S22 onwards will be described later.

On the other hand, if the comparison result is determined to be abnormal, i.e., not normal, in S17 (if S17 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 is off. In other words, if both the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the result is NO. If both the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 are off, or if either the setting key 174a or the backup clear switch 176 is off, the result is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 is not OFF, i.e., both are ON (if S18 returns NO), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S21. The process of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 is off (if S18 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 sets the security signal of the external terminal to ON. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs an error display process on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process sets data for displaying an error to the output port of the I/O port 205 that outputs a signal to the performance display monitor 170. This causes a specified LED in the performance display monitor 170 to light up, displaying an error. After executing the process of S20, the main CPU 201 enters an endless loop.

In this way, if the previous power outage was not normal, or if the checksum value of the working area stored in the main RAM 203 does not match the normal value, the first pachinko game machine will not be able to play the game until it is determined that both the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 are on.

Next, the process of S21 will be described. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed upon abnormal startup, and is intended to store again the value indicating a setting change. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22.

In S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing S22, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs a startup state determination process. In this process, the current startup state (power outage recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear) is determined based on the value of the startup control flag stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM setting process at startup. In this process, a clearing process (e.g., construction of a work area and address setting) is performed on the working area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like. Note that this process is performed both when power is restored after a power outage and when initialization is performed, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs startup initial setting processing. In this processing, the initial setting processing is performed according to the current startup state (power outage recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear). Details of the startup initial setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. After executing the processing of S25, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt inhibition processing. After executing the processing of S26, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs a power cut process. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S28. Details of the power cut process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

In S28, the main CPU 201 performs an update process for the initial random numbers. In this process, the initial random numbers of various random number counters (e.g., random number counters for determining whether a special symbol has won) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether play is permitted. This determination is made based on the value of the play permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that play is not permitted (if S29 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S30.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S29 that play is permitted (if S29 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onward.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor tabulation calculation process. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. This process is also performed using an area separate from (outside) the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the registers that were saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the processing of S34, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec).

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (if S35 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (if S35 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S37.

In this embodiment, within the main control process, an interrupt prohibition section (processing section S26 to S35) of, for example, 6 msec is provided before various processes related to game control (for example, processes S37 to S44) described below are executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control (described below) are executed, for example, every 6 msec (every system cycle). In this embodiment, an example has been described in which the interrupt prohibition section is three times the interrupt cycle, but this is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 performs a process of updating the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system period (e.g., 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in a system period management timer area in the working area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this processing, payout control command transmission/reception processing is mainly performed. After executing S38, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. Details of this special symbol control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. After executing the processing of S39, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. Details of this normal symbol control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. After executing the processing of S40, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs a game action display unit control process. In this process, a process for setting the display data to be output to each display section of the LED unit 160 (e.g., the first special symbol display section 163, the second special symbol display section 164, etc.) is performed. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs a game information data generation process. In this process, control of the external terminal board pulse signal, setting of output data, generation of the test firing signal, etc. are performed. Note that the generation of the test firing signal is performed using an area separate from (outside) the working area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs a port output process. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs a status monitoring process. In this process, a launch position determination process, a game abnormality detection determination process, a payout abnormality detection determination process, and the like are performed. In the launch position determination process, if there is a change in the launch position (e.g., right hit or left hit), a launch position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the process from S26 onwards.

[1-6-2. Initial setting process at startup]
Next, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the startup initial setting process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process to load the start control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating power recovery.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating power recovery (if S52 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S54.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating power recovery (if S52 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs a second normal game pre-processing. Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag indicates a setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the startup status flag is not a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation, i.e., is a value indicating RAM clear (if S54 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the startup status flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation (if S54 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a setting operation command. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S336 in FIG. 46 described below). After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs a first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. When the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

[1-6-3. Electrical disconnection processing]
Next, the power cut process performed in S27 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 25. Fig. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the power cut process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the XINT detection flag is on (S61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (if S61 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the power cut processing and returns processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is on (if S61 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs a process of calculating a checksum value. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the power interruption detection flag value in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203. In this case, they are stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag. After executing S64, the main CPU 201 executes a RAM access inhibition value setting process (S65). After executing S65, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset wait process until power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 26. Fig. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 26, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S71. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S72.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S71, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, etc., in a predetermined register.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 also performs a process to check the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol. Then, if the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are both "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process. Note that the demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later). Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display performance.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S71 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (if S72 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S75.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (if S72 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 201 determines whether the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is not pending (if S73 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 201 determines whether the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is not pending (if S74 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is pending (if S74 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S75.

Returning to S73, if it is determined that the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is pending (if S73 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. After executing the processing of S75, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S71 to S75) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, the first pachinko gaming machine is described as a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved, but this is not limited to this. For example, the first pachinko gaming machine may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, or a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning in the first start port 120 or the second start port 140.

[1-6-5. Special design management process]
Next, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S75 of the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26) will be described with reference to Fig. 27. Fig. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When the control state number is "0" (when S72 is judged as YES), the special symbol management process processes the second special symbol if S73 is judged as YES, and processes the first special symbol if S74 is judged as YES. Also, when the control state number is not "0" (when S72 is judged as NO), the special symbol management process processes the special symbol currently being executed.

The numbers ("0" to "5") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 27 are the control state numbers for the special symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern is 0 (S81).

If it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (if S81 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S81 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S83. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S83 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S82.

In S83, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. This S83 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. This S84 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S85.

In S85, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S85 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S86.

In S86, the main CPU 201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S86 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S87.

In S87, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S87 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S88.

In S88, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. This process in S88 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

After completing steps S83 to S88, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S83 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described with reference to Fig. 28. Fig. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S91).

If it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S91 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S91 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) and uses the random number value for special symbol hit determination to determine whether the special symbol is a hit. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, and sets the big hit flag to ON if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit. In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small hit, the small hit flag is set to ON if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit. After executing the process of S93, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S94. The time-saving hit flag is turned off when transitioning to the C time-saving game state, and the big hit flag is turned off when the big hit game state begins. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process for a pachinko game machine includes a small hit, the small hit flag is turned off when the small hit game state begins.

In the special symbol hit determination process (see S93), first, a process is performed to determine whether or not there is a jackpot, and if this process determines that there is no jackpot, a process is performed to determine whether or not there is a time-saving hit, and if this process determines that there is no time-saving hit, it is determined that there is a miss.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stopping symbol of the special symbol that corresponds to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93) (e.g., time-saving hit, jackpot, or miss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) is referenced, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol is used to determine the above-mentioned "select symbol command" or "symbol designation command." After executing the process of S94, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, big win). In this process, the win type determination table (see FIG. 13) is referenced and the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S94). In this embodiment, there are multiple types of wins, but there may be only one type of big win, or one type of time-saving hit. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to multiple types of wins, multiple types of misses may be provided. In this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small win, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include a small win, and multiple types of such small wins may be provided. After executing the process of S95, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referenced, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, for example, according to the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (S93), the value of the time-saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach judgment and/or the random number value for performance selection, etc. Note that the variation pattern table referenced when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may differ depending on the game state, etc. After executing the process of S96, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the change pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referenced, and the change time corresponding to the change pattern determined in the change pattern determination process for the special symbol (S96) is determined as the change time for the special symbol. After executing the process of S97, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S84 in FIG. 27) is performed. After executing the process of S98, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S99.

In S99, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state (e.g., the number of times remaining in the special mode and the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 is performed. After executing the process of S99, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In this processing, the main CPU 201 mainly performs update processing of various flags related to the management of the game status (e.g., probability bonus flag, time-saving flag, etc.). After executing the processing of S100, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game state management process (S100) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S101)) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S84 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described with reference to Fig. 29. Fig. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S111).

If it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S111 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S111 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (see S85 in FIG. 27) is performed after the special symbol variable display ending process is completed. After executing the process of S112, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described below). After executing the process of S113, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. The determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is determined (the number of times the special symbol game has been played), and the count value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided for managing the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state, such as the number of remaining times of the special symbol game or the number of remaining times of the time-saving game, or the determined symbol counter may be used to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state. After executing the process of S114, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-6-8. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S85 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described with reference to Fig. 30. Fig. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S121 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game play determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S121 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S122.

At S122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S122 that a jackpot has been reached, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S122 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing for the jackpot game control processing. In this processing, signals (e.g., jackpot signals, etc.) output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6 for both) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbols that are the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S123, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S124. Note that the signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 or the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control in S123, the main CPU 201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the special chance flag, special chance counter, time-saving flag, and time-saving counter.

In S124, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 131 can be opened (S125), a process of setting a large prize signal to the external terminal board 184 (S126), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S127), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S128), and a process of reserving the transmission of a large prize start display command (S129). Note that by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S127) to switch the control state number, the large prize opening opening preparation process (see S86 in FIG. 27) is performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. After that, the main CPU 201 completes the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

Returning to S122, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been reached, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot, (if S122 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S130.

In S130, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S121 to S130) within the interrupt prohibited period.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S130 in the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30) will be described with reference to Fig. 31. Fig. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time-saving management process (S131). Details of this time-saving management process will be described later with reference to Figures 32 to 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S131, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" in this way, it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 performs a process for setting game state designation parameters for the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving transmission of a special symbol game end command (S134). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later). Then, after processing S134, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30).

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28) is a miss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the probability hit flag or the time-saving flag. Therefore, even if a miss display mode is derived, the game state does not change.

[1-6-10. Time-saving management process]
Next, the time-saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S131 during the special symbol game ending process (see Fig. 31) in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a counter update process (S141). Details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After executing the process of S141, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 performs a counter determination process. Details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. After executing the process of S142, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 31).

[1-6-11. Counter update process]
Next, the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 33. Fig. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S141 during the time-shortening management process (see Fig. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time-saving counter update process (S151). Details of this time-saving counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. After executing the process of S151, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process. Details of this ceiling counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. After executing the process of S152, the main CPU 201 ends the counter update process and returns the process to the time-saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-12. Time-saving counter update process]
Next, a time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S151 during the counter update process (see Fig. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The time-saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the process when multiple time-saving game states overlap and multiple time-saving game states are executed at the same time.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0 (S161). In this process, if both the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made, and if either of these conditions is not met, a NO determination is made.

The time-saving flag is set to ON when transitioning to time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, or time-saving play state C. When transitioning to a high probability play state, the probability change flag is set to ON.

The time-saving counter indicates the number of time-saving operations executed in the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, or the C time-saving play state.

When the conditions for transitioning to time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B and/or time-saving play state C are met, the time-saving counter for the time-saving play state for which the transition conditions are met is set.

In this embodiment, a subtraction method is adopted in which the time-saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time-saving game state ends when the time-saving counter reaches 0. However, this is not limited to this, and an addition method may be adopted in which the time-saving counter is added when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time-saving game state ends when the time-saving counter reaches the set number of time-saving times. Also, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time-saving counter when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the time-saving counter may be updated when the variable display of the special symbol begins, and the time-saving game state may end when the time-saving counter reaches 0 (in the case of the subtraction method) or when the time-saving counter reaches the set number of time-saving times (in the case of the addition method).

If it is determined in S161 that both the time-saving flag is not on and the time-saving counter is not greater than 0 (if S161 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (Figure 33).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S161 that the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0 (YES in S161), the main CPU 201 performs a process to subtract 1 from the time-saving counter (S162). After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving mode is 3 and the C time-saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time-saving mode is 3 and the C time-saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If a YES determination is made in S163, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S164.

The C time-saving counter is a counter that is set when the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving game state are met during the time-saving game state. Although this C time-saving counter is not shown in the flowchart, it is reset by the main CPU 201 when the B time-saving counter described below is set.

The time-saving mode is a flag that is set when multiple time-saving game states are executed in overlapping fashion. In this embodiment, the time-saving mode is configured, for example, with 2 bits, and is set to "time-saving mode = 3" when time-saving game state C is executed in overlapping fashion with a previously executed time-saving game state. Also, when time-saving game state B is executed in overlapping fashion with a previously executed time-saving game state, it is set to "time-saving mode = 2."

On the other hand, if it is determined in S163 that both the time-saving mode = 3 and the C time-saving counter is not greater than 0 are not satisfied (if S163 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S165.

In S164, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C time-saving counter. This process may also be an addition process instead of a subtraction process. After executing the process of S164, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving mode is 2 and the B time-saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time-saving mode is 2 and the B time-saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If a YES determination is made in S165, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S166.

The B time-saving counter is a counter that is set when the conditions for transitioning to the B time-saving game state are met during the time-saving game state (in this embodiment, during the C time-saving game state). Although this B time-saving counter is not shown in the flowchart, it is reset by the main CPU 201 when the C time-saving counter is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S165 that both the time-saving mode = 2 and the B time-saving counter being greater than 0 are not met (if S165 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S166, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time-saving counter. This process may also be an addition process rather than a subtraction process. After executing the process of S166, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

Although not shown, if the C time-saving counter = 0 as a result of processing S164, or if the B time-saving counter = 0 as a result of processing S166, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving mode to off (= 0).

When multiple time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, it is not limited to overlapping two time-saving game states, but three or more time-saving game states may be executed in an overlapping manner. In this case, as described above, the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state do not overlap, so a case in which three or more time-saving game states overlap corresponds to a case in which the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state overlaps with two or more C time-saving game states, and a case in which three or more C time-saving game states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update process]
Next, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 35. Fig. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S152 during the counter update process (see Fig. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S171). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the probability variable flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In other words, when the probability variable flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The value of the ceiling counter is saved in the main RAM 203.

The ceiling value is a predetermined value specific to the pachinko game machine as a condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 may perform processing to set the ceiling value when the big win game state ends, when a backup clear process is performed, when a dedicated operation means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, etc.

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (if S171 is judged as NO), i.e., if the ceiling count prohibition flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

If the ceiling count prohibition flag is off in S171 (if S171 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

[1-6-14. Counter Determination Process]
Next, the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 36. Fig. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S142 during the time-shortening management process (see Fig. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time-saving transition determination process (S181). Details of this time-saving transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. After executing the process of S181, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving transition process. Details of this time-saving transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving counter is less than 1.

If it is determined in S183 that the time-saving counter is not less than 1 (NO in S183), i.e., the time-saving counter is 1 or greater, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S185.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S183 that the time-saving counter is less than 1 (YES in S183), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 201 turns off the time-saving flag. After executing the process of S184, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S185.

If the time-saving counter is judged to be less than 1 in S183 (if S183 is judged YES), both the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter should be less than 1 (i.e., 0). However, in consideration of the possibility that some malfunction may occur in the execution of processing by the main CPU 201, for example, if the B time-saving counter or the time-saving counter is 1 or more despite the judgement of YES in S183, an abnormality process such as outputting an abnormality warning may be executed. Also, instead of or in addition to this abnormality process, when the judgement of YES in S183 is made, not only the time-saving flag may be turned off (see S184), but also the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter may be reset to ensure consistency between the time-saving counter, the B time-saving counter, and the C time-saving counter.

In S185, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process for the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving transition command transmission reservation process (S186). The time-saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described below). Then, after processing S186, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time-saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-15. Time-saving transition determination process]
Next, the time-saving transition judgment process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 37. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a judgment process for transitioning to the B time-saving game state is performed. Fig. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving transition judgment process executed by the main CPU 201 in S181 during the counter judgment process (see Fig. 36) in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the special chance flag is off (S191).

If it is determined in S191 that the high probability flag is not OFF (if S191 is a NO determination), i.e., if the high probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36). In other words, if the high probability flag is ON, it is possible to prevent transition to the B time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S191 that the special bonus flag is OFF (if S191 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value.

If it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is not at the ceiling value (if S192 is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value (if S192 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S193, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag to ON. The ceiling flag is a flag that indicates that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S196.

In S196, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S196, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-16. Time-saving transition process]
Next, the time-saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 38. Fig. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 in S182 during the counter determination process (see Fig. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the special chance flag is off (S202).

If it is determined in S202 that the high probability flag is not off (if S202 is determined as NO), that is, if the high probability flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36). By doing this, if the high probability flag is on, neither the B time-saving play state nor the C time-saving play state can be started.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S202 that the probability of winning is OFF (YES in S202), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON.

If it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is not on (if S203 returns a NO judgment), i.e., if the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is on (YES in S203), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 201 executes a B time-saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the B time-saving game state. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines the number of time-saving times to be set in the B time-saving counter, whether the time-saving mode is set to 2, and the time-saving performance, etc. After executing the process of S205, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S208.

The number of time-saving times set in the B time-saving counter is a predetermined number. Among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of a "normal symbol hit" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). Among the time-saving performances, the opening pattern (number of times opening, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric device 146 is as shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol hit type determination table (see FIG. 18). Among the time-saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S206, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving hit flag is on.

If it is determined in S206 that the time-saving hit flag is not on (if S206 is judged as NO), i.e., if the time-saving hit flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition process and returns the process to the counter judgment process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S206 that the time-saving hit flag is on (YES in S206), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 201 executes a C time-saving control mode determination process as a process related to the transition to the C time-saving game state. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines the number of time-saving times to be set in the C time-saving counter, whether to set the time-saving mode to 3, and the time-saving performance, etc. After executing the process of S207, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S208.

The number of time-saving times set in the C time-saving counter is determined according to the selected symbol command by referring to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 13, for example). Among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of a "normal symbol hit" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). Among the time-saving performances, the opening pattern (number of times opened, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric role device 146 is as shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol hit type determination table (see FIG. 18). Among the time-saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S208, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving setting process. Details of this time-saving setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. After executing the process of S208, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-17. Time-saving setting process]
Next, the time-saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 39. Fig. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 in S208 during the time-saving transition process (see Fig. 38) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time-saving flag is on (S211).

If it is determined in S211 that the time-saving flag is on (if S211 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S212.

When S211 judges YES, this corresponds to the case where the sure-change flag is off and, for example, the time-saving play state B is executed in addition to the time-saving play state C being executed first (when the ceiling counter = ceiling value), or the time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, or time-saving play state C is executed in addition to the time-saving play state C being executed first (when a "time-saving win" is won).

Although not shown, when the time-saving game state B is executed after the time-saving game state C has been executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time-saving mode = 2" and sets the time-saving counter B determined in S205. When the time-saving game state C is executed after the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, or the time-saving game state C has been executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time-saving mode = 3" and sets the time-saving counter C determined in S207.

If it is determined in S211 that the time-saving flag is not on (S211 is determined as NO), i.e., the time-saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S214.

In S212, the main CPU 201 compares the current time-saving counter (the number of remaining time-saving times in the previously executed time-saving game state) with the new number of time-saving times (the number of time-saving times determined in S205 or S207), and determines whether the current time-saving counter is smaller than the new number of time-saving times.

If it is determined in S212 that the current time-saving counter is not smaller than the new number of time-saving times (if S212 is a NO determination), i.e., if the current time-saving counter is greater than the new number of time-saving times, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving setting process and returns the process to the time-saving transition process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S212 that the current time-saving counter is greater than the new number of time-saving times (if S212 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving counter reset process. In this process, when the time-saving game state B is executed while the time-saving game state C is executed first, or when the time-saving game state C is executed while the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, or the time-saving game state C is executed first, the larger of the current time-saving counter value (i.e., the remaining number of time-saving times) and the new number of time-saving times is reset as the new time-saving counter. However, even if the time-saving counter reset process (S213) is performed, the main CPU 201 does not reset the time-saving counter B and the time-saving counter C. After executing the process of S213, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving setting process and returns the process to the time-saving transition process (FIG. 38).

When the time-saving game state B is executed while the time-saving game state C is executed first, or when the time-saving game state C is executed while the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, or the time-saving game state C is executed first, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that was executed first. In other words, the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that was executed first is not changed to the time-saving performance of the new time-saving game state, nor is it changed to the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that corresponds to the larger of the current time-saving counter and the new number of time-saving times.

As described above, the time-saving performance is the performance that changes the ease with which the game ball can enter the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)), and refers to the winning probability of a "normal symbol hit", the variable display time of the normal symbol, and/or the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.).

In this embodiment, the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter are provided to allow management of two overlapping time-saving game states internally. In the above-mentioned time-saving counter resetting process (S213), the larger of the current time-saving counter value and the new number of time-saving times is reset as the new time-saving counter. However, even if two time-saving game states are overlapping internally, the time-saving performance that appears on the surface (that the player can grasp) is only the time-saving performance of one of the two time-saving game states that are overlapping internally. Therefore, when multiple time-saving game states are overlapping without managing the fact that two time-saving game states are overlapping internally (i.e., without providing the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter), the larger of the current time-saving counter value and the new number of time-saving times may be reset as the new time-saving counter.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving mode setting process. This process is performed when S211 is judged as NO, that is, when a transition is made from a non-time-saving game state to a time-saving B game state (when the ceiling counter = the ceiling value) or when a transition is made from a non-time-saving game state to a time-saving C game state (when a "time-saving hit" is won). In this process, the number of time-saving times and the time-saving performance determined in the time-saving B control mode determination process (S205) or the time-saving C control mode determination process (S207) are set. After executing the process of S214, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving flag to ON. After executing the process of S215, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving setting process and returns the process to the time-saving transition process (FIG. 38).

In this way, in the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figures 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 performs the process of transitioning to the B time-saving game state when the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation has ended. In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine in which the result of the hit determination process for the hit determination process includes a small hit, there may be cases in which the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the ceiling final variation is a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the ceiling final variation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 may perform the process of transitioning to the B time-saving game state based on the end of the small hit game state.

In the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figures 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 performs the transition process to the B time-saving game state when the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation ends, but this is not limited to this, and the transition process to the B time-saving game state may be performed based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation. In particular, in the first pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variable displayed in parallel, it is preferable to perform the transition process to the B time-saving game state based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation. This is because, if the transition to the B time-saving game state is made when the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation ends, if the variable display of one of the special symbols as the ceiling final variation begins during the variable display of the other special symbol, the benefit of the variable display of the other special symbol as the B time-saving game state cannot be obtained, and there is a risk of reducing interest. In the first pachinko game machine, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed with a long fluctuation of, for example, 600,000 msec. However, in a pachinko game machine in which the variable display of the special symbol can be performed with such a long fluctuation, by performing a transition process to the B time-saving game state based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final fluctuation, it is possible to avoid a delay in the start of the B time-saving game state even if the variable display of the special symbol, which is the ceiling final fluctuation, is performed with a long fluctuation.

In addition, in the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figures 32 to 39, the B time-saving control mode determination process (S205) as the process related to the transition to the B time-saving play state is performed with priority over the C time-saving control mode determination process (S207) as the process related to the transition to the C time-saving play state (see S203 to S207 in Figure 38), but this is not limited to this. For example, the C time-saving control mode determination process (S207) as the process related to the transition to the C time-saving play state may be performed with priority over the B time-saving control mode determination process (S205) as the process related to the transition to the B time-saving play state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned ceiling counter update process described with reference to FIG. 35, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not OFF (S171 in FIG. 35 judges NO), the ceiling counter is not updated, but this is not limited to the above. For example, in ST machines and pachinko gaming machines that perform a probability change drop lottery, the ceiling counter may be updated when a variable display of a special pattern is performed even if the probability change flag is ON. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the game may not transition to the B time-shortened game state, but may transition to the B time-shortened game state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability change counter becomes the ceiling value. In this case, the main CPU 201 will not transition to the B time-shortened game state just because the "ceiling counter = ceiling value", but will perform processing to transition to the B time-shortened game state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability change counter becomes the ceiling value.

The ceiling value, which is the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state, is preferably within a predetermined range of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the special symbol flag is off (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times). In this embodiment, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), for example, the jackpot probability when the special symbol flag is off is 1 in 319 (when the setting value is 1), so the ceiling value is preferably within the range of 319 x 2.5 to 319 x 3.0 (times).

The upper limit of the B time-saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the B time-saving game state, is preferably set to a specified multiple (e.g., 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the special probability flag is off. Similarly, the upper limit of the C time-saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the C time-saving game state, is preferably set to a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the special probability flag is off by a specified number (e.g., up to 3.8 times the denominator of the jackpot probability). In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability when the special probability flag is off is 1 in 319 (when the setting value is 1), it is preferable to set the upper limit of both the B time-saving specified number and the C time-saving specified number to approximately 1212 (319 x 3.8). Note that it is not essential that the upper limit of the B time-saving specified number and the upper limit of the C time-saving specified number be the same value.

In the case of a pachinko machine like the first one, which can be set to any one of a number of settings with different jackpot probabilities, such as settings 1 to 6, the time-saving hit probability is the same for all settings, as described above. In such a case, if the ceiling value, which is the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state, is set to a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability flag is off) by a specified number (for example, 3.0) regardless of the setting value, the ceiling value will differ depending on the setting value, and there is a risk that the set setting value will be discovered by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is preferable to set the ceiling value to the same value regardless of the setting value, regardless of the set setting value, rather than determining it by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability flag is off) by a specified number.

[1-6-18. Modifications related to time-saving management processing]
In the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figs. 32 to 39 (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving management process of this embodiment"), the ceiling counter update process (see Fig. 35) is executed in the special symbol game end process (see Fig. 31). In addition, the process related to the transition to the B time-saving game state is performed with priority over the process related to the transition to the C time-saving game state. Furthermore, a transition flag (ceiling flag) to the B time-saving game state and a transition flag (time-saving hit flag) to the C time-saving game state are separately provided, and when the ceiling flag is on, the game is transitioned to the B time-saving game state, and when the time-saving hit flag is on, the game is transitioned to the C time-saving game state. However, the execution timing of the time-saving management process including the ceiling counter update process, the priority order between the transition to the B time-saving game state and the transition to the C time-saving game state, and whether the transition flag to the B time-saving game state and the transition flag to the C time-saving game state are separate or common are not limited to the above, and the time-saving management process can be performed with various variations.

For example, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to when the fluctuation stops, and the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the time-saving play state B, with a transition flag to the time-saving play state B and a transition flag to the time-saving play state C being set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, and the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the B time-saving play state, with a transition flag to the B time-saving play state and a transition flag to the C time-saving play state being set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, and the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the time-saving play state C, with a transition flag to the time-saving play state B and a transition flag to the time-saving play state C being set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the time-saving B play state, and the transition flag to the time-saving B play state and the transition flag to the time-saving C play state may be set as a common flag.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the time-saving play state C, and the transition flag to the time-saving play state B and the transition flag to the time-saving play state C may be set as a common flag.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to when the fluctuation stops, and the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the C time-saving play state, with a transition flag to the B time-saving play state and a transition flag to the C time-saving play state being set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to when the fluctuation stops, and the game may transition to time-saving game state B after confirming that the "time-saving hit" is not a winning combination when the ceiling is reached.

Furthermore, if multiple time-saving game states are not executed at the same time, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time-saving counter when the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0, and does not subtract 1 from the time-saving counter in other cases.

[1-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 40, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S86 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 27) will be described. Fig. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

If it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S251 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S251 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S252.

In S252, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in a jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of times the jackpot opening has been opened is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of times the round play has been performed in the jackpot play state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S253 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is the upper limit (if S253 is a YES judgement), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S254. On the other hand, if it is determined in S253 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (if S253 is a NO judgement), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S257.

In S254, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this way, by switching the control state number by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S254), the jackpot end process (see S88 in FIG. 27) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S254, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S255.

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command (S256). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described below). Then, after processing S256, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing the processing of S257, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S258.

In S258, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening 131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 131, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize opening 131, the number of winning balls when the large prize opening 131 wins, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening 131 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening is opened multiple times in one round. In this case, however, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S259.

In S259, the main CPU 201 performs a special prize opening/closing control process. In this process, the main CPU 201 generates data for controlling the opening/closing of the special prize opening 131. After executing S259, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S260.

In S260, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S260) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening opening control process (see S87 in FIG. 27) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S261.

In S261, the main CPU 201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described below). After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-1. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 41, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S87 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 27) will be described. Fig. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

If it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S271 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (if S271 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S272.

In S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 131 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6), which counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 131, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the large prize opening winning counter counted by the count switch 132 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S272 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 131 is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S272 returns NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S273.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S272 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 131 is the maximum number of winning balls (if S272 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S274.

In S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the special prize opening 131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the special prize opening related various setting process (see S258 in FIG. 40) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 131 has not elapsed (if S273 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 131 has elapsed (if S273 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S274.

In S274, the main CPU 201 performs a process for setting the closure of the large prize opening 131. After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S275) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening preparation process (see S86 in FIG. 27) will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing S276, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described below) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S277, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-2. Big win end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S88 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described with reference to Fig. 42. Fig. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S281 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (if S281 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (e.g., a probability change flag, a time-saving flag, etc.) are set, and the values of various counters (e.g., a probability change counter, a time-saving counter, a number of confirmed symbols counter, a round counter, a large prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing S282, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S283.

In S283, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the processing of S283, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end processing and returns to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 set an interrupt prohibited area and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited area.

[1-7-3. Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S40 during the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 43. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 43, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

Figure 43 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 43 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. Note that, for convenience, each process shown in Figure 43 is not shown as a subroutine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for normal symbols is 0 (S291).

If it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is not 0 (if S291 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (if S291 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S293. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S293 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S292.

In S293, the main CPU 201 performs variable display start processing for the normal symbol. This S293 processing is performed when the control state number for the normal symbol is "0". In this variable display start processing for the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 performs a win determination process for the normal symbol, a process to determine the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, and if the result of the win determination process for the normal symbol is a win for the normal symbol, a process to set the opening pattern (number of times to open, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric role device 146. Note that if the control state number for the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs processing to end the variable display of the normal symbol. This processing of S294 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this processing, the main CPU 201 performs various processing when ending the variable display of the normal symbol. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol gameplay determination process. This S295 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol gameplay determination process, a determination process is performed of the derived result of the normal symbol (for example, whether the normal symbol is a hit or a miss). Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric role release process. This S296 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric role 146 is released in a predetermined manner. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol win end processing. This S297 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol win end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

In this embodiment, as shown in the winning judgment table for normal symbols (see FIG. 16), the random numbers for winning judgment for normal symbols are generated in a range (width) of, for example, 0 to 99, and the winning judgment value data for normal symbols is, for example, 0 to 79 (in the case of a non-time-saving game state). The winning probability of a normal symbol is determined by the number of winning judgment value data for normal symbols relative to the total random numbers for winning judgment for normal symbols, so that, for example, the winning probability of a normal symbol is 80/100 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, this winning probability of a normal symbol is different when time-saving control is executed and when time-saving control is not executed, but may be the same or approximately the same. In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 600,000 msec, in a non-time-saving game state in which time-saving control is not executed, whereas it is executed for a relatively short time, for example, 1,000 msec, in a game state in which time-saving control is executed. In this way, when time-saving control is executed, the frequency with which the normal electric device opening process is executed, i.e., the frequency with which game balls enter the second starting hole 140, is increased.

[1-7-4. External Maskable Interrupt Processing]
Next, an external maskable interrupt process executed under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 44. This process is an interrupt process executed in response to an external interrupt request generated, for example, when power is interrupted. Fig. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of the external maskable interrupt process in the first pachinko game machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a process of saving the protection register (S301). After executing the process of S301, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 reads the state of a specific input port of the I/O port 205. The specific input port is, for example, an input port in which the state of a power interruption detection line, a backup clear switch line, a sensor abnormality detection line, a radio wave sensor line, an open detection line, a magnetic sensor line, a vibration sensor line, a solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. is set. After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S303.

In S303, the main CPU 201 determines whether a power outage has been detected.

If it is determined in S303 that a power interruption has not been detected (if S303 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined in S303 that a power interruption has been detected (if S303 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag that indicates a power outage, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S304, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the protection register that was saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 ends the external maskable interrupt processing.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt period of, for example, 2 msec will be described with reference to Fig. 45. Fig. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a protection register backup process (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off (S312). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (i.e., a power interruption has been detected) (if S312 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S326. On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (i.e., a power interruption has not been detected) (if S312 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S314), and the process proceeds to S315.

In S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not play is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not play is permitted based on, for example, the value of the startup control flag. The startup control flag is a flag for determining whether the startup state when the power is turned on is one of power failure recovery, setting change, setting check, RAM clear, etc. For example, if power failure recovery is selected, it is determined that play is permitted, and if setting change, setting check, RAM clear, etc. is selected, it is determined that play is not permitted.

The startup control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information of the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 are off, it is determined that power has been restored; if both the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 are on, it is determined that settings have been changed; if the backup clear switch 176 is off and the setting key 174a is on, it is determined that settings have been confirmed; and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174a is off, it is determined that the RAM has been cleared.

If it is determined in S315 that the game is not permitted (if S315 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 performs a setting control process (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within a system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, at a 2 msec cycle, and are performed when the game is not permitted, i.e., when the game is not permitted. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326. Details of the setting control process of S316 will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

If play is not permitted (if S315 is judged as NO), it is preferable for the main CPU 201 to prohibit the launch of game balls from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6), disable various switches except for specific switches (e.g., setting key 174a, backup clear switch 176, etc.), and prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S315 that play is permitted (if S315 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes a process to increment the value of the interrupt counter by 1. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt prohibited intervals during the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is stored in an interrupt counter area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 performs an update process for the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S319. The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing the interrupt cycle (e.g., 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the working area of the main RAM 203.

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a jackpot for a special symbol) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are an important factor in determining the number of balls dispensed. After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs a switch input detection process. Details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. After executing the process of S320, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 executes a winning information command setting process. In this process, a winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. After executing S321, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S322.

In S322, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process. In this process, the command that is scheduled for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S323, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor control process. In this process, game judgment process, prize ball addition judgment process, display content update process of the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6), etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area separate from (outside) the working area in which data necessary for game progress is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up and where the data is not cleared even if, for example, the RAM is cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the registers that were saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 performs the process of restoring the protection registers that were saved in S311, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[1-7-6. Setting control process]
Next, the setting control process performed in S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described with reference to Fig. 46. Fig. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the value of the startup control flag indicates a setting change (S331).

If it is determined in S331 that the value of the launch control flag is a value indicating a setting change (if S331 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 201 performs a setting change process (S332). Details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. After executing the setting change process (S332), the main CPU 201 proceeds to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S331 that the value of the launch control flag does not indicate a setting change (if S331 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S333.

At S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S333 that the value of the launch control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (if S333 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting confirmation processing (S334). Details of this setting confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. After executing the setting confirmation processing (S334), the main CPU 201 advances the processing to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S333 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating confirmation of the setting, i.e., that the RAM is to be cleared (if S333 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S337.

In S335, the main CPU 201 performs a setting operation display process. In this process, the currently set setting value is displayed. After executing S335, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S336.

In S336, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process. In this process, a command (initialization command, power interruption recovery command, or setting operation command) that is reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), setting confirmation process (S334), or startup initial setting process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing S336, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs a WDT (watchdog timer) output process. In this process (WDT output process), a WDT clear register address read process, a WDT clear process, and a WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. Then, after processing of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process, and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45).

[1-7-7. Setting change process]
Next, the setting change process performed in S332 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described with reference to Fig. 47. Note that Fig. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S341). This process is performed by reading the information set in the input port of the I/O port 205.

If it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 has not been pressed (if S341 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (if S341 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S342.

In S342, the main CPU 201 performs an update process within the range of the set value. After executing the process of S342, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S343.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176 in the setting change process, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch may be provided so that the setting value can be changed by operating this setting switch.

In S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether the setting key 174a has been turned off (S343).

If it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174a has not been turned off (if S343 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, if it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174a has been turned off (if S343 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs a first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. As described above, when this first normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change processing, and returns the processing to the setting control processing (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-8. Setting confirmation process]
Next, the setting confirmation process performed in S334 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described with reference to Fig. 48. Note that Fig. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the setting key 174a has been turned off (S351). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the setting change process described above (see FIG. 47).

If it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174a is not turned off (if S351 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174a has been turned off (if S351 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 performs a second normal game pre-processing (S352). Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. As described above, when this second normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After the second normal game pre-processing (S352) is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-9. First normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 49, the first normal game pre-processing performed at S344 during the setting change processing (see Fig. 47) will be described. Fig. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. Note that this first normal game pre-processing is also performed as the initial setting processing when the power failure recovery, setting change, and setting confirmation are not performed in the startup initial setting processing (see Fig. 24), that is, when the RAM is cleared.

The main CPU 201 first performs an initialization RAM setting process (S361). In this process, a clearing process (e.g., construction of a working area and address setting, etc.) of the area in the main RAM 203 where backup data is stored when power is interrupted (hereinafter referred to as the "backup area") is performed. Note that the area where data is stored in the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 45) is not cleared. In addition, in this process, initial data is generated, and the generated initial data is stored in the constructed working area in the main RAM 203. That is, the data backed up when power is interrupted is erased, and it becomes possible to return the game state to the initialized state. Note that, although not shown, in this process, the game state is returned to the initialized state, making it possible to start playing, and the play permission flag is set to ON, resulting in a play permission state. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving transmission of an initialization command. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in a presentation control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). When the process of S362 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-processing. When this first normal game pre-processing is ended, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted.

[1-7-10. Second normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 50, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S352 during the setting confirmation process (see Fig. 48) will be described. Fig. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process when the power is restored in the startup initial setting process (see Fig. 24).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process when power is restored (S371). In this process, for example, data stored in the backup area in the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the work area in the main RAM 203 that has been constructed. The above data is, for example, various information required to proceed with the game, such as game status information, the on/off state of the hit flags for special and normal symbols, and reserved number information. In other words, by restoring the data backed up at the time of power loss to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same game status as before the power loss. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning to the same game status as before the power loss, and the game permission flag is set to on, resulting in a game permission state. After executing the RAM setting process when power is restored (S371), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S372.

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether the probability of winning is increased or decreased. This process is performed by reading data stored in the working area of the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S372 that the special bonus flag is not on (if S372 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S374.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S372 that the probability of winning is increased (if S372 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the high probability notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the high probability notification flag when power is restored after the power outage. If the high probability notification flag is ON, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a high probability notification LED (not shown) to be lit. This makes it possible to know from the outside whether the high probability flag is ON or not when power is restored after the power outage. After executing the process of S373, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S374.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a power interruption recovery command. The power interruption recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in a performance control command transmission process (S336) during the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the process of S374, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection process]
Fig. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch input detection process by the main CPU 201. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-mentioned system timer interrupt process. As shown in Fig. 51, the main CPU 201 executes the start hole winning detection process (S381). After executing the process of S381, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S382. The start hole winning detection process will be described later with reference to Fig. 52.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes a general prize opening passage detection process (S382). In the general prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts etc. when a prize is won through the general prize opening 122 is set. After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes a large prize opening passage detection process (S383). In the large prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts etc. when a prize is won through the large prize opening 131 is set. After executing the process of S383, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a ball passage detection process (S384). In the ball passage detection process, various random numbers (such as random numbers for determining whether a normal symbol wins) for normal symbols are extracted based on the detection of the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 126 by the pass gate switch 127. The main RAM 203 has normal symbol start memory areas (1) to (4) that hold various random numbers (such as random numbers for determining whether a normal symbol wins) extracted based on the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 126 until the start condition for the normal symbol is satisfied. In addition, in the ball passage detection process, it is also determined whether there is free space in the normal symbol start memory area (1) to (4), that is, whether the number of reserved normal symbols extracted based on the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 126 is, for example, less than four. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Start gate winning detection process]
52 is a flow chart showing an example of the start hole winning detection process by the main CPU 201. The start hole winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-mentioned switch input detection process.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start switch 121 (S391).

If it is determined that the first start switch 121 has not detected a game ball (if S391 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S398.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball has been detected by the first start switch 121 (if S391 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 extracts various random number values (for example, a random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is a jackpot, a symbol random number value for the first special symbol, a random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is in a reach state, and a random number value for selecting a performance for the first special symbol, etc.), and performs processing to set payout information according to the winning of the first starting port. After executing processing of S392, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols extracted based on the winning of the first start hole 120 is, for example, less than four. The main RAM 203 has the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) in which various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the first start hole 120 are reserved until the start condition is met, and in this process, it is determined whether there is free space in the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4). In addition to the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4), the main RAM 203 also has the first special symbol start memory area (0), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than four, i.e., the upper limit of four (if S393 returns NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S398.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved first special symbols is less than four (if S393 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S394.

In S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process to increment the number of reserved first special symbols by 1. After executing the process of S394, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S395.

In S395, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random number values extracted based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting hole 120 in the main RAM 203 until the condition for starting the variation of the first special symbol is met. As a result, the display of the variation of the first special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the condition for starting the variation is met. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead determination process. This process is a process that uses the random number value extracted in S392 to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol and perform a win determination process, etc., prior to the special symbol winning determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28). It also determines whether or not the look-ahead flag is set.

The look-ahead determination process may be performed at any time between the extraction of the random number value in S392 and the execution of the special symbol winning determination process. However, considering that the sub-control circuit 300 performs the look-ahead performance before the variable display of the special symbol begins, it is preferable to perform the look-ahead determination process, for example, around the time of S395. After executing S396, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S397.

In S397, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a winning command for the first special pattern. The winning command for the first special pattern is a command that includes information for increasing the number of reserved first special patterns by 1, information on the variation pattern of the first special pattern (i.e., the variation pattern command for the special pattern), etc., and the winning command for the first special pattern reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45). After executing the process of S397, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S398.

In S398, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start switch 141.

If it is determined that the second start port switch 141 has not detected a game ball (if S398 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the start port winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball has been detected by the second start switch 141 (if S398 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 extracts various random number values (for example, a random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is a jackpot, a symbol random number value for the second special symbol, a random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is in a reach state, and a random number value for selecting a performance for the second special symbol, etc.), and performs processing to set payout information according to winning the second starting port. After executing processing of S399, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of reserved second special symbols extracted based on winning at the second starting hole 140 is, for example, less than four.

The main RAM 203 has second special symbol start memory area (1) to second special symbol start memory area (4) that reserve various random number values extracted based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 140 until the start condition is met, and in this process, it is determined whether there is free space in the second special symbol start memory area (1) to second special symbol start memory area (4). The main RAM 203 also has a second special symbol start memory area (0) in addition to the second special symbol start memory area (1) to second special symbol start memory area (4), but this will be described later.

If the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than four, i.e., the upper limit of four (if S400 judges NO), the main CPU 201 ends the start hole winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is less than four (if S400 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process to increment the number of reserved second special symbols by 1. After executing the process of S401, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random number values extracted based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 140 in the main RAM 203 until the condition for starting the variation of the second special symbol is met. As a result, the display of the variation of the second special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the condition for starting the variation is met. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S403.

In S403, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a winning command for the second special symbol (S403). The winning command for the second special symbol is a command that includes information for increasing the number of reserved second special symbols by 1 and information on the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 ends the start hole winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

[1-8. Sub-control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S501). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S502.

The above-mentioned initialization process (S501) is executed when the power is turned on or the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S502 to S508 described below are executed repeatedly.

In S502, the sub-CPU 301 performs a read process on the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). This process is performed by reading the command sent from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) that is set in the command input port 308. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S503.

In S503, the sub-CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S504.

In S504, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation mode determination process. In this process, for example, the display presentation mode to be displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 4 and FIG. 6) and the sound presentation mode to be output from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6) are determined based on the winning command sent from the main CPU 201.

In the performance mode determination process (S504), the sub-CPU 301 generates an animation request including information specifying the performance content, and generates various requests (e.g., a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, and a prop request) for operating various performance devices based on the generated animation request. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S505.

In S505, the sub-CPU 301 executes a drawing control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S506.

In S506, the sub-CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 6). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to output audio from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S507.

In S507, the sub-CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). Based on the message (LED request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to light up or blink all or a portion of the LEDs that make up the LED group 46. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S508.

In S508, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends a reel request to the reel control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6). Based on the message (reel request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the reel control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the reels that make up the performance reel group 58. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the sub-control circuit main process.

[1-9. Specific example of the performance mode determination process by the sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub-CPU 301) performs a presentation mode determination process (see S504 in FIG. 53) based on the winning command sent from the main control circuit 200.

As one of the various processes performed in the presentation mode determination process, the sub-CPU 301 performs, for example, a sub-variation presentation pattern determination process that determines the presentation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "sub-variation presentation pattern") of the sub-variation presentation corresponding to the current special symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as the "variation"), and a look-ahead presentation pattern determination process that determines the presentation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "look-ahead presentation pattern") of the look-ahead presentation. In addition, the presentation mode determination process also performs various presentation mode determination processes related to the progress of the game, such as the presentation mode of a countdown presentation that suggests that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value, and the presentation mode of a B time-saving play state transition presentation that suggests that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value.

The sub-variation presentation pattern determination process is performed based on the results of the special symbol hit determination process. The sub-variation presentation pattern is a presentation pattern (e.g., decorative symbol variation pattern, character presentation pattern, etc.) that is performed by the sub-CPU 301 in the display area of the display device 7 in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbol as a presentation that indicates the expected outcome of the variation.

In the sub-variable performance, depending on the sub-variable performance pattern being executed, it is possible to show that the expectation level for the result of the special symbol winning determination process is maintained or increased as time passes from when the variable display of the special symbol starts to when the special symbol stops.

The sub-variable performance patterns include, for example, time-saving hit type reaches A, B, C, jackpot hit type reaches A, B, C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, E, etc., as shown in FIG. 54 described below. As described above, time-saving hit type reaches A, B, C are reach performances that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol (see S93 in FIG. 28) may be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Jackpot hit type reaches A, B, C are reach performances that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol may be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Common reaches A, B, C, D, E are reach performances that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol may be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

For example, if the timing of executing a countdown effect that indicates the timing of transition to the B time-saving game state overlaps with the timing of executing a reach effect, the sub-CPU 301 may give priority to executing one of the effects.

The pre-reading performance pattern determination process is performed based on, for example, the variation pattern of the special symbol determined as a result of the pre-reading judgment process. The pre-reading performance is a performance pattern performed by the sub-CPU 301 in the display area of the display device 7 while in a pending state (i.e., after a winning entry into the first starting hole 120, until the starting information such as various random numbers extracted based on this winning entry is provided to the winning judgment process of the special symbol (the variable display of the special symbol begins)) as a performance indicating the degree of expectation for the result of the pre-reading judgment process.

Depending on the look-ahead performance pattern being executed, when in a pending state, the look-ahead performance can show that the expectation level for the result of the look-ahead determination process is maintained or increased as time passes (more specifically, as the variable display of the previously held start information progresses).

The preview effect is performed, for example, by using a pending image displayed on the display device 7. The pending image is an image that shows the current pending status.

The look-ahead performance pattern includes a look-ahead winning type performance pattern that can suggest the expected value for the result type (whether it is a time-saving winning or a jackpot) of the look-ahead judgment process, i.e., the special pattern winning judgment process, and a look-ahead expectation value performance pattern that can suggest the expected value for the result of the special pattern winning judgment process being a winning (a jackpot or a time-saving winning). In other words, in the look-ahead performance, it is possible to suggest both or either of the expected value for the result type of the special pattern winning judgment process and the expected value for the result of the special pattern winning judgment process being a winning. In addition, in the look-ahead performance pattern determination process (see FIG. 59 described below), a look-ahead winning type performance pattern determination process (see S3006 in FIG. 59 described below) and a look-ahead expectation value performance pattern determination process (see S3008, S3009 in FIG. 59 described below) are performed. Specific examples of the look-ahead hit type presentation pattern, the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern, the look-ahead hit type presentation pattern determination process, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination process will be described later.

[1-9-1. Sub-variable performance pattern determination process]
First, the sub-variation presentation pattern determination process will be described. Figure 54 is an example of a sub-variation presentation pattern determination table (detailed description omitted) in a game state where the time-saving flag is off (normal game state). This sub-variation presentation pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 of the first pachinko game machine. The program ROM 302 also stores a sub-variation presentation pattern determination table in a game state where the time-saving flag is on (high-probability time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), but the description will be omitted here.

The sub-CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation presentation pattern determination table in the normal game state of FIG. 54, and determines the sub-variation presentation pattern (shown as "variation pattern" in FIG. 54) to be displayed on the display device 7 as the variation presentation pattern corresponding to the variation based on the variation pattern command of the special symbol sent from the main control circuit 200. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub-variation presentation patterns include time-saving hit type reaches A, B, and C, big hit type reaches A, B, and C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, and E.

As described above, the time-saving hit system reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate the possibility of a time-saving hit, and are reach effects that allow the player to understand the possibility of a time-saving hit from the appearance. The time-saving hit system reach A is not displayed if the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern is a miss or a big hit, and is a time-saving hit guaranteed reach effect that is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (see FIG. 15). This time-saving hit system reach A is not a sub-variable performance pattern for the pre-reading target, but is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variable performance pattern for the pre-reading mode. The time-saving hit system reach B and the time-saving hit system reach C have the same or approximately the same performance mode in appearance. However, while the time-saving hit system reach B is not a sub-variable performance pattern for the pre-reading target, the time-saving hit system reach C is a sub-variable performance pattern for the pre-reading target (see the "pre-reading flag" column in FIG. 15, FIG. 54, and FIG. 55 described below).

As described above, the jackpot-related reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate the possibility of a jackpot, and can be seen from the outside to indicate the possibility of a jackpot. The jackpot-related reach A is not displayed if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a miss or a "time-saving hit", and is a jackpot-guaranteed reach effect that is displayed only if the result is a "time-saving hit" (see FIG. 15). This jackpot-related reach A is not a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading, but is not limited to this and may be a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading. The appearance of the jackpot-related reach B and the jackpot-related reach C is the same or approximately the same. However, while the jackpot-related reach B is not a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading, the jackpot-related reach C is a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading (see the "pre-reading flag" column in FIG. 15).

As described above, common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate the possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving hit, and are reach effect modes that make it difficult to know whether there is a possibility of a time-saving hit or a jackpot in terms of appearance. Common reach A is a hit (jackpot, time-saving hit) confirmed reach effect that is not displayed if the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern is a miss, and is displayed only if there is a jackpot or a "time-saving hit" (see Figure 15). Common reach B and common reach C have the same or nearly the same appearance effect mode. Furthermore, common reach D is an effect that develops from common reach C to time-saving hit reach C. Furthermore, common reach E is an effect that develops from common reach C to jackpot reach C. Note that common reach A and common reach B are not sub-variable performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading, whereas common reach C, common reach D, and common reach E are sub-variable performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading (see the "Pre-reading flag" column in Figure 15).

In this way, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 54) and determines the sub-variation performance pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 201. Then, the sub-CPU 301 controls the display device 7 to display the determined sub-variation performance pattern.

[1-9-2. Pre-reading performance pattern determination process]
Next, a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination process and a pre-reading expected value presentation pattern determination process, which are performed as the pre-reading presentation pattern determination process, will be described.

In addition, the work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6) is provided with the first sub-reserved area (0), the first sub-reserved area (1), the first sub-reserved area (2), the first sub-reserved area (3), and the first sub-reserved area (4) as areas corresponding to the first special symbol start memory area (0), the first special symbol start memory area (1), the first special symbol start memory area (2), the first special symbol start memory area (3), and the first special symbol start memory area (4) provided in the main RAM 203, respectively. Various reserved information related to the extracted random number value is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) and the first sub-reserved area (1) to the first sub-reserved area (4). In addition, the first special symbol start memory area (0) and the first sub-reserved area (0) store information corresponding to the fluctuation. When the sub-CPU 301 receives a winning command for the first start port winning, it stores the received information in the first sub-reserve area that corresponds to the current first special symbol start memory area.

In addition, the work RAM 303 is provided with a second sub-reserve area (0), a second sub-reserve area (1), a second sub-reserve area (2), a second sub-reserve area (3), and a second sub-reserve area (4) as areas corresponding to the second special pattern start memory area (0), the second special pattern start memory area (1), the second special pattern start memory area (2), the second special pattern start memory area (3), and the second special pattern start memory area (4) provided in the main RAM 203, respectively.

In this embodiment, the pre-reading performance is performed for the first special symbol in the normal game state, but it is not limited to this and may be performed in other game states (e.g., high probability time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state), or may be performed for the second special symbol.

The pre-reading performance is performed, for example, by using pending images displayed in the display area of the display device 7. The display area of the display device 7 has the following areas for displaying pending images: a zeroth area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (0), a first pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (1), a second pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (2), a third pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (3), and a fourth pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (4).

[1-9-2-1. Tables referenced in the pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination process]
First, a table to be referenced in the pre-read winning type presentation pattern determination process will be described.

The reserved image forms in which the pre-reading performance is executed with the determined pre-reading hit type performance pattern include a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form that indicates that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit, a jackpot type pre-reading performance form that indicates that there is a possibility of a jackpot, and a common hit type pre-reading performance form that indicates that there is a possibility of both a time-saving hit and a jackpot.

The predictive hit type presentation pattern is a presentation pattern that can suggest a change in the expected value for the result type of the special symbol hit determination process by changing the form of the reserved image, for example, from a common hit type predictive presentation form to a time-saving hit type predictive presentation form, or from a common hit type predictive presentation form to a jackpot type predictive presentation form.

Figure 55 is an example of a pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number determination table. This Figure 55 shows only the variation patterns that are the pre-reading targets among the variation patterns shown in Figure 54. Also, Figure 56 is an example of a pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table. These tables are stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number determination table in FIG. 55, when the sub-CPU 301 receives a fluctuation pattern in which the pre-reading flag is set, the sub-CPU 301 determines the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number, for example, based on the fluctuation pattern and the reserved number. The reserved number here includes the start information to be pre-read. In other words, when the start information extracted based on the winning of the first start port 120 is reserved, the reserved number after the reservation corresponds to the reserved number shown in FIG. 55.

For example, if the fluctuation pattern is "03H" and the reserved number is "3", the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is determined to be "3". Also, for example, if the fluctuation pattern is "0EH" and the reserved number is "2", the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is determined to be "22".

When the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is determined, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table in FIG. 56 to determine the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern. In more detail, as shown in the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table in FIG. 56, for example, the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined based on the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number and the sub-presentation selection random number value 1.

In FIG. 56, for the sake of convenience, the "pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number" is shown as the "SASPT number" and the "pre-reading winning type presentation pattern" is shown as the "SAS presentation pattern." The random number value 1 for sub-presentation selection is a random number value extracted by the sub-CPU 301 based on a specified trigger, such as when a special symbol variation pattern command is received.

For example, if the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is "3" and the extracted random number value 1 for selecting sub-presentation is "55", the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined to be "07H". Also, if the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is "7" and the extracted random number value 1 for selecting sub-presentation is "77", the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined to be "16H".

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the Notes (Reserved) column in Figure 56 indicate the first to fourth reserved areas, respectively.

In addition, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the Notes (Reserved) in Figure 56, the "A" shown in correspondence with the look-ahead hit type presentation pattern determination table number and the random value 1 for sub-presentation selection indicates that the reserved image is displayed in a time-saving hit type look-ahead presentation format, which indicates that the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be a time-saving hit. When the reserved image is displayed in a time-saving hit type look-ahead presentation format, it can be seen from the outside that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit.

In addition, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the Notes (Reserved) in Figure 56, the "B" shown in correspondence with the look-ahead hit type presentation pattern determination table number and the random number value 1 for sub-presentation selection indicates that the reserved image is displayed in a jackpot-type look-ahead presentation format, which indicates that the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be a jackpot. When the reserved image is displayed in a jackpot-type look-ahead presentation format, it can be seen from the outside that there is a possibility of a jackpot.

In addition, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the Notes (Reserved) in Figure 56, the "C" shown in correspondence with the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number and the random value 1 for sub-presentation selection indicates that the reserved image is displayed in a common-hit pre-reading presentation format, which indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot. When the reserved image is displayed in a common-hit pre-reading presentation format, it is difficult to tell from the outside whether there is a possibility of a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

For example, if the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined to be "07H", a common hit type pre-reading presentation form is displayed in the third reserved area, and a common hit type pre-reading presentation form is also displayed in the second reserved area after shifting from the third reserved area. Then, when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area, the common hit type pre-reading presentation form changes to a time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form, and a time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form of "A" is displayed in the first reserved area.

In addition, if the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", a "C" common hit type pre-reading presentation form is displayed in the third reserved area. Then, when shifting from the third reserved area to the second reserved area, the common hit type pre-reading presentation form changes to a jackpot type pre-reading presentation form, and a "B" jackpot type pre-reading presentation form is displayed in the second reserved area and in the first reserved area after being shifted from the second reserved area.

That is, the pre-reading hit type performance pattern includes the following patterns A) to E) as shown in Fig. 56. In this embodiment, the pattern of changing from the big hit type pre-reading performance form to the time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form and the pattern of changing from the time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form to the big short hit pre-reading performance form are not included in the pre-reading hit type performance pattern, but these patterns may be included in the pre-reading hit type performance pattern.
(i) A pre-reading time-saving hit presentation pattern in which a pre-reading presentation form for a time-saving hit is displayed at the time of being put on hold, and the presentation form does not change thereafter, and a pre-reading presentation form for a time-saving hit is displayed (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "09H").
(b) A pre-reading jackpot presentation pattern in which a jackpot-type pre-reading presentation form is displayed at the time of being put on hold, and the presentation form does not change thereafter, and the jackpot-type pre-reading presentation form is displayed (for example, pre-reading jackpot type presentation pattern "17H").
(c) At the time of being put on hold, a common hit type pre-reading presentation form is displayed, and then it changes to a time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form, pre-reading common hit presentation pattern A (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "24H").
ii) When placed on hold, it is displayed in a common win type pre-reading presentation format, and then changes to a jackpot type pre-reading presentation format, a pre-reading common win presentation pattern B (for example, pre-reading win type presentation pattern "12H").
(e) When placed on hold, the display is in a common hit type pre-reading presentation format, and the presentation format does not change thereafter, and the common hit type pre-reading presentation format is displayed. Pre-reading common hit presentation pattern C (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "06H")

In this way, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number determination table (see, for example, FIG. 55) and determines the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number (SASPT number) based on the fluctuation pattern and the number of reserved items. Then, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) and determines the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern (SAS presentation pattern) based on the determined pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number (SASPT number) and the random number value 1 for sub-presentation selection.

In FIG. 56, the time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A" is displayed at the time of reservation, and the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern that changes to the jackpot type pre-reading presentation form "B" thereafter is not shown, but the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern that changes from the time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A" to the jackpot type pre-reading presentation form "B" in this manner may be determined by the sub-CPU 301. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest that the pre-reading presentation can provide to the player.

In addition, in Fig. 56, the big win type pre-reading performance form of "B" is a big win type pre-reading performance form that indicates that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is likely to be a big win (i.e., there is a possibility of a miss), as described above, but in addition to this, a big win confirmation pre-reading performance form that indicates that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big win confirmation may be displayed. In this case, the pre-reading hit type performance pattern determined by the sub-CPU 301 may include any or all of the following pre-reading type performance patterns E) to H).
(e) A pre-reading jackpot confirmed presentation form is displayed at the time of being put on hold, and the presentation form does not change thereafter, and the pre-reading jackpot confirmed presentation form is displayed.
(d) When the ball is put on hold, another pre-reading presentation form (for example, a time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A", a jackpot type pre-reading presentation form "B", a common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C", etc.) is displayed, and then the pre-reading jackpot confirmation presentation form changes to a jackpot confirmation pre-reading presentation form, a pre-reading jackpot confirmation presentation pattern B.
(c) At the time of being put on hold, another look-ahead presentation form (for example, a time-saving hit type look-ahead presentation form "A", a common hit type look-ahead presentation form "C", etc.) is displayed, and then a big hit type look-ahead presentation form "B" is displayed, and then it changes to a big hit confirmed look-ahead presentation form C, which is a look-ahead jackpot confirmed presentation form.

In addition, in FIG. 56, among the time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A", the jackpot type pre-reading presentation form "B", and the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C", the display frequency of the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C" is the highest at the time of reservation, but this is not limited to this. For example, the display frequency of the time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A" may be the highest at the time of reservation, or the display frequency of the jackpot type pre-reading presentation form "B" may be the highest at the time of reservation. Furthermore, the display frequency of the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C" may be the lowest at the time of reservation.

In addition, in FIG. 56, a random number value of 1 for selecting sub-effects within a predetermined range is assigned to all "pre-reading winning type effect pattern determination table numbers (SASPT numbers)", but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to not assign a random number value for selecting sub-effects to only certain SASPT numbers (i.e., the allocation rate for certain SASPT numbers is set to 0 so that they are not selected).

[1-9-2-2. Tables referenced in the process of determining the expected value effect pattern ahead of time]
Next, a table to be referred to in the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination process will be described.

Figure 57 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a win occurs) that is referenced when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot." Also, Figure 58 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a miss occurs) that is referenced when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss.

The form of the reserved image in which the look-ahead performance is executed in the determined look-ahead expected value performance pattern differs depending on the expected value for a win (time-saving win, jackpot).

When a reserved image is displayed as a time-saving hit-reading performance format, for example, the reserved image, which is usually displayed as a triangle, can be changed in shape to show a change in expected value, such as "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star." In this case, the expected value is lowest when the reserved image is a square, and highest when the image is a star.

In addition, when a reserved image is displayed as a jackpot-type pre-reading performance, for example, the reserved image, which is usually displayed in white, can be changed in color to show a change in expected value, such as "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow." In this case, when the reserved image is blue, the expected value is the lowest, and when the reserved image is rainbow, the expected value is the highest.

In addition, although details will be described later, when the reserved image is displayed as a common win type pre-reading presentation format that indicates the possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving win, the reserved image may be displayed, for example, as both a color indicating the expected value level for a jackpot and a shape indicating the expected value level for a time-saving win, or it may be displayed in a dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation format.

Although the reserved image for which the look-ahead performance is performed can change from a performance form with a relatively low expected value to a performance form with a relatively high expected value, it is preferable not to change from a performance form with a relatively high expected value to a performance form with a relatively low expected value. Furthermore, when changing the performance form of the reserved image, it is not necessarily necessary to change one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star" or "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow", but it may be changed, for example, from "pentagon → circle" or "yellow → rainbow". Furthermore, it is not necessarily necessary to start the reserved image form with a square or blue, which have the lowest expected value, but it may start with a circle or red, for example.

Note that the numbers "1" to "4" shown in the Notes (Reserved) column in Figure 57 indicate the first to fourth reserved areas, respectively, just like in Figure 56.

In addition, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the remarks (for pending play) in Figure 57, the "0" to "5" shown in correspondence with the pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination table number and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-performance indicates the expected value for a win (time-saving win, big win). For example, the above-mentioned "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", the above-mentioned "square" and "blue" correspond to "1", the above-mentioned "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2", the above-mentioned "hexagon" and "green" correspond to "3", the above-mentioned "circle" and "red" correspond to "4", and the above-mentioned "star" and "rainbow" correspond to "5".

Hereinafter, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the Notes (Reserved) in Figure 57, the "0" to "5" shown in correspondence with the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-presentations will be referred to as expected value levels "0" to "5".

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot", the look-ahead expectation value presentation pattern is determined based on, for example, the reserved number and the random number value 2 for selecting the sub-effect, as shown in the look-ahead expectation value presentation pattern determination table (when a hit) in FIG. 57. Similarly, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the look-ahead expectation value presentation pattern is determined based on, for example, the reserved number and the random number value 2 for selecting the sub-effect, as shown in the look-ahead expectation value presentation pattern determination table (when a miss) in FIG. 58. The random number value 2 for selecting the sub-effect is a random number value extracted by the sub-CPU 301 based on a specified trigger, such as when a special symbol change pattern command is received. Note that in FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, only the reserved number values of "1" to "3" are illustrated, and the illustration of the reserved number value of "4" is omitted for convenience.

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the reserved number is "3", and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-effects is "750", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H". If the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H", for example, the expected value level is "2" in the third reserved area, the expected value level changes from "2" to "3" when shifting from the third reserved area to the second reserved area, and the expected value level changes from "3" to "5" when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the reserved number is "3", and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-effects is "680", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "3FH". If the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "3FH", for example, the expected value level is "2" in the third reserved area, the expected value level is "2" in the second reserved area, and when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area, the expected value level changes from "2" to "4".

In this way, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a win occurs) (see FIG. 57) or the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a miss occurs) (see FIG. 58) based on the result of the special pattern hit determination process, and determines the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern based on the number of reserved numbers and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-presentations.

In addition, if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot," the allocation rate of each pre-reading expected value presentation pattern is not limited to the allocation rate shown in FIG. 57 and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss," a bias is created by increasing the selection rate of pre-reading expected value presentation patterns with relatively low expected value levels (for example, "01H" or "0BH"), but this is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate, for example by distributing them evenly.

In addition, in Figures 57 and 58, a predetermined range of random number values 2 for selecting sub-effects are assigned to all "look-ahead expected value performance patterns", but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to not assign random number values 2 for selecting sub-effects to only certain "look-ahead expected value performance patterns" (i.e., the allocation rate of a certain "look-ahead expected value performance pattern" is set to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-3. Pre-reading performance pattern determination process]
Next, the look-ahead performance pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to each table of Figures 54 to 58 will be described with reference to Figure 59. Figure 59 is an example of a flowchart showing the look-ahead performance pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance pattern determination process only in a normal game state in which hitting from the left is considered to be a regular game mode, but is not limited to this.

The sub-CPU 301 first determines whether or not a winning command has been received from the main CPU 201 (S3001).

If no winning command has been received (if S3001 returns NO), the sub-CPU 301 ends the pre-reading performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a winning command has been received (if S3001 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3002.

In S3002, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether there are currently no pending items to be pre-read, i.e., whether a pre-read performance is being performed for the current pending items. If there are multiple pending items, the pre-read performance may be performed for multiple pending images, but in this embodiment, the pre-read performance is performed for only one pending image.

If a look-ahead performance is being performed for the current hold (if S3002 is judged as NO), the sub-CPU 301 ends the look-ahead performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if a look-ahead performance is not being performed for the current hold (if S3002 returns YES), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the variation pattern information received in the winning command is subject to pre-reading (see FIG. 55).

If the variation pattern information received in the winning command is not subject to pre-reading (if S3003 is judged as NO), the sub-CPU 301 ends the pre-reading performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern information received in the winning command is to be pre-read (if S3003 returns YES), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3004.

In S3004, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than the upper limit number of reserved balls (e.g., 4 or 8). This process is to avoid a transition to time-saving game state B before the variable display of the special symbol is executed for the reserved ball for which the pre-reading performance has been executed, despite the pre-reading performance having been executed. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest. After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S3005.

In this embodiment, in S3004, it is determined whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than the maximum number that can be reserved, but this is not limited to this, and if the fluctuation pattern information received in the winning command is a target for pre-reading (if S3003 is determined to be YES), it may be determined whether the difference is greater than the number of reserved balls including the target for pre-reading. In addition, the ceiling value and ceiling counter may receive information as a command from the main CPU 201, or may be managed by the sub-CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201.

In S3005, the sub-CPU 301 performs a pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number determination process. In this process, the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55) is referenced to determine the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number. After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process for determining a pre-reading hit type presentation pattern. In this process, the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined by referring to the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot". In this process, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined based on the fluctuation pattern information received in the winning command sent from the main CPU 201, and if the result is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot", a YES determination is made. However, this is not limited to this, and a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot" may be determined by sending hit/loss information for the special symbol from the main CPU 201 to the sub-CPU 301.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot" (YES determination in S3007), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3008.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is neither a "time-saving hit" nor a "jackpot" (S3007 judges NO), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process for determining a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern (when a win occurs). In this process, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a win occurs) in FIG. 57 to determine a look-ahead presentation pattern (when a win occurs). After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the look-ahead presentation pattern determination process.

In addition, in S3009, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process for determining a look-ahead performance pattern when the result is a loss. In this process, the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination table (when the result is a loss) in FIG. 58 is referenced, and a look-ahead expected value performance pattern (when the result is a loss) is determined. After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the look-ahead performance pattern determination process.

[1-9-4. Effects of pre-reading performance, examples of pre-reading performance extensions]
In the above-mentioned look-ahead performance, not only is it interesting to see whether the reserved image changes into a big win type look-ahead performance form or a time-saving hit type look-ahead performance form, but it is also possible to change the expected value level of a hit (big win, time-saving hit), and it is possible to increase interest by performing a new performance that has never been performed before. Note that the timing for changing the reserved image form is not limited to when the reserved image shifts, and may be, for example, during the variable display of the special pattern of the change.

In addition, the form of the reserved image used as a pre-reading effect (for example, the form of the reserved image displayed within the range of the first sub-reserved area (4) to the first sub-reserved area (1)) may be determined at the time of winning at the first starting port 120, and the form of the reserved image in the variable display of the special pattern of the change may be determined at the start of the variable display of the special pattern.

By the way, when comparing the probability of being determined as a variation pattern in which a look-ahead performance is executed in a look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern (see, for example, "03H" and "0EH" in FIG. 54) with the probability of being determined as a variation pattern in which a look-ahead performance is executed in a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern (see, for example, "06H" and "11H" in FIG. 54), the former probability is higher (see, for example, FIG. 15). In other words, the execution rate of the look-ahead performance is higher in the look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern than in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko gaming machines in which a look-ahead performance is executed only when there is a possibility of a jackpot, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the look-ahead performance while suppressing the decrease in the expected value of a win, and to increase interest.

The execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern may be higher than the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead time-saving performance pattern. In this case, when the look-ahead performance is executed, the expected value for a jackpot is higher than the expected value for a time-saving hit, making it possible to increase interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a game state where the probability change flag is off (in this embodiment, the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state), a "time-saving hit" can be won in the hit determination process of the special symbol (see FIG. 10). However, in this embodiment, a pre-reading performance is performed in the normal game state, but not in the low-probability time-saving game state. Even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving game state is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving times is unlikely to increase in either the case where the time-saving game state C is superimposed on the time-saving game state A, or the case where the time-saving game state C is not superimposed on the time-saving game state A. Therefore, by making it as much as possible for the player to not know that there is a possibility of winning a "time-saving hit" in the time-saving game state A, it is possible to reduce the disappointment given to the player by winning a "time-saving hit," and to suppress a decrease in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the pre-reading effect from being performed in the low-probability time-saving game state, and the pre-reading effect may be performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability low-time-saving game state. Also, in this embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed only for the first special symbol, but it is not limited to this, and the pre-reading effect may also be performed for the second special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, a time-saving hit type reach, a jackpot type reach, or a common reach can be executed as the sub-variation presentation pattern. In this embodiment, as can be seen by referring to FIG. 15 and FIG. 54 to FIG. 56, when the sub-CPU 301 executes a look-ahead presentation with a look-ahead time-saving hit presentation pattern, it executes a time-saving hit type reach as the sub-variation presentation pattern, and does not execute a jackpot type reach. In addition, when the sub-CPU 301 executes a look-ahead presentation with a look-ahead jackpot presentation pattern, it executes a jackpot type reach as the sub-variation presentation pattern, and does not execute a time-saving hit type reach.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the sub-CPU 301 executes a look-ahead performance with a look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern or a look-ahead common hit performance pattern, it can execute a time-saving hit type reach as a sub-variable performance pattern. However, when the sub-CPU 301 executes a look-ahead performance with a look-ahead big hit performance pattern, it does not execute a time-saving hit type reach as a sub-variable performance pattern.

In addition, regardless of whether a pre-reading jackpot presentation pattern (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern (SAS presentation pattern) "37H" shown in FIG. 56), a pre-reading time-saving hit presentation pattern (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "29H" shown in FIG. 56), or a pre-reading common hit presentation pattern (for example, pre-reading presentation pattern (SAS presentation pattern) "27H" shown in FIG. 56) is executed, the sub-CPU 301 may execute a common reach (for example, the sub-variable presentation patterns "0AH" and "0BH" shown in FIG. 55) as a sub-variable presentation pattern.

Also, a presentation pattern may be set in which a time-saving hit type reach is executed, and after the time-saving hit type reach indicates a miss, a big win type reach is executed. In this case, the player can play with a sense of anticipation until the end, wondering whether or not a high-profit big win type reach will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15, in the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "target variation") performed for start information in which a pre-reading effect has been executed, if a common reach E is executed, an effect common to the common reach C is displayed, and then it is possible to transition to an effect common to the jackpot reach C. On the other hand, if no effect common to the common reach C is executed, it will not transition to the jackpot reach C. Similarly, in the target variation, if a common reach E is executed, an effect common to the common reach C is displayed, and then it is possible to transition to an effect common to the time-saving hit reach C. On the other hand, if no effect common to the common reach C is executed, it will not transition to the time-saving hit reach C.

In this embodiment, the look-ahead performance is performed only for one reserved image (see S3002). Therefore, even if a look-ahead performance mode (hereinafter referred to as a "jackpot look-ahead performance") that indicates that the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be a jackpot has already been performed, the sub-CPU 301 will not perform a new look-ahead performance. Note that even in a pachinko gaming machine in which look-ahead performance is performed for multiple reserved images, it is preferable not to perform a new look-ahead performance if a jackpot look-ahead performance has already been performed.

For example, if there are multiple reserves including one reserve (hereinafter referred to as the "first reserve") and another reserve (hereinafter referred to as the "second reserve") in which the variable display of the special pattern starts after the first reserve, and a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type performance pattern "17H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first reserve, even if a look-ahead performance is executed in the second reserve, the look-ahead performance in the second reserve may be meaningless. In particular, if a jackpot is derived for the first reserve and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and the game state is controlled to an A time-saving game state after the end of this jackpot game state, even if a "time-saving hit" is derived for the second reserve, the player may not be able to receive the benefit of this "time-saving hit", and in this case, the interest will be significantly reduced. Therefore, if a jackpot look-ahead performance has already been executed, it is preferable not to execute a look-ahead performance for a reserve that is consumed after the reserve in which the jackpot look-ahead performance is being executed.

In addition, even if the first hold is a jackpot hold (a hold from which a jackpot is derived), if a look-ahead performance has not been performed for the first hold, the look-ahead performance may or may not be performed for the second hold.

In addition, even if a false jackpot pre-reading effect (for example, pre-reading jackpot type effect pattern "53H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to execute the pre-reading effect in the second hold.

However, if a time-saving hit pre-reading effect (for example, the pre-reading hit type effect pattern "05H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first hold, a jackpot pre-reading effect or a time-saving hit pre-reading effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a time-saving hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot that is more profitable than that.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol does not include a small hit, but in a pachinko gaming machine in which the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol includes a small hit, even if a small hit pre-reading effect is executed in the first reserve, a big hit pre-reading effect or a time-saving hit pre-reading effect may be executed in the second reserve. This is because even if a small hit is derived for the first reserve, it is possible to make the player expect a big hit that is more profitable than that.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol includes a small hit, and a look-ahead performance mode indicating that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol may be a small hit (hereinafter referred to as a "small hit look-ahead performance") is executed in the first hold, a big hit look-ahead performance or a time-saving hit look-ahead performance may be executed in the second hold. This is because, even if a small hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to make the player expect a small hit that is more profitable than that.

In addition, if, for example, a winning ball is entered into the first starting hole 120 during the execution of a jackpot-related reach as a sub-variable performance pattern, and start information is reserved, the sub-CPU 301 will not execute a look-ahead performance for this reservation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance only in the normal game state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the jackpot display mode is derived, if the start information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the look-ahead judgment made by the main CPU 201 is reserved (this reservation is referred to as a "specific reservation" in this paragraph), whether the look-ahead performance is executed for this specific reservation or not, the sub-CPU 301 will not execute the look-ahead performance for the specific reservation after the jackpot game state ends unless the normal game state is in effect. However, the sub-CPU 301 may be able to not execute the look-ahead performance for the specific reservation even if the normal game state is in effect after the jackpot game state ends. Furthermore, even in a pachinko game machine that executes a look-ahead performance in a game state other than the normal game state (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state), if there is a specific reserve when the jackpot display mode is derived, the sub-CPU 301 may be able to not execute a look-ahead performance for the specific reserve after the jackpot game state ends.

In addition, when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the jackpot display mode is derived, if the start information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the pre-reading judgment made by the main CPU 201 is held (this hold is referred to as a "specific hold" in this paragraph), even if this specific hold is a hold for a "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 may not be controlled to the C time-saving play state based on the "time-saving hit" after the jackpot game state ends. For example, if the specification is such that multiple time-saving play states are not executed in overlap when the time-saving play states overlap, and the A time-saving play state is executed after the jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time-saving play state based on the "time-saving hit" even if the specific hold is a hold for a "time-saving hit".

[1-10. Examples of pre-reading performance]
A specific example of the look-ahead effect will be described below with reference to Figures 60 to 64. In this embodiment, the sub-CPU 301 is capable of executing the look-ahead effect using a reserved image based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

[1-10-1. Specific examples of when a pre-reading performance is performed with a pre-reading jackpot performance pattern]
As described above, the look-ahead performance pattern includes a look-ahead winning type performance pattern and a look-ahead expectation value performance pattern. First, a specific example of a look-ahead performance in a look-ahead big win performance pattern as the look-ahead winning type performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

Figures 60(a) to 60(f) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show the process by which the big win look-ahead presentation form, which indicates the possibility of a big win, changes. Note that the look-ahead hit type presentation patterns shown in Figures 60(a) to 60(f) correspond to "1CH", "3CH", "58H", or "78H" in Figure 56. Also, the look-ahead expected value presentation patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value presentation patterns shown in Figures 60(a) to 60(f) are omitted from Figure 57.

As shown in Figures 60(a) to 60(f), the first hold area 411 to the fourth hold area 414 are displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7. As described above, the first hold area 411 to the fourth hold area 414 are areas that indicate whether hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area (1) to the first sub-hold area (4), respectively. In addition, the 0th area 410 is an area that corresponds to the first sub-hold area (0) in which information corresponding to the change is stored.

In this embodiment, when hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area, the sub-CPU 301 displays the hold areas 411-414 corresponding to the first sub-hold area in which the hold information is stored with a hold image (hereinafter simply referred to as a "hold image") indicated by a triangle. Also, when no hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area, the sub-CPU 301 does not display a hold image, but displays only the frame of the hold area.

In FIG. 60(a), the first hold area 411 to the third hold area 413 display normal hold images with no pre-reading effect being performed, and the fourth hold area 414 displays only a frame and no hold image. This indicates that hold information is stored in the first sub-hold areas (1) to (3), but no hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area (4).

In FIG. 60(b), a new pending image is displayed in the fourth pending area 414, which is different from the state shown in FIG. 60(a). This indicates that new pending information has been stored in the first sub-pending area (4), which is different from the state shown in FIG. 60(a).

As described above, the sub-CPU 301 displays the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 in different forms (e.g., colors) depending on the expected value for a jackpot. In this embodiment, with the exception of rainbows, differences in color are illustrated by shades of color.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 60(b), the color of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white (expected value level "0"), and the color of the reserved image shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is blue (expected value level "1").

Figure 60 (c) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (b), and shows that the color of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in Figure 60 (b) has changed from blue to yellow (expected value level "2") when it is shifted to the third pending area 413.

Figure 60 (d) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (c), and shows that the color of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in Figure 60 (c) has changed from yellow to green (expected value level "3") when it is shifted to the second pending area 412.

Figure 60 (e) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (d), and shows that the color of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in Figure 60 (d) has changed from green to red (expected value level "4") when it is shifted to the first pending area 411.

Figure 60 (f) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (e), and shows that the color of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in Figure 60 (e) has changed from red to rainbow (expected value level "5") when it is shifted to the zeroth area 410.

In addition, the color (expected value level) of the reserved image indicating the expected value for a jackpot does not necessarily need to change when the reserved image shifts, and may change during the variable display of the special pattern for that change, for example.

In addition, in FIG. 60, the jackpot-based pre-reading presentation form is changed to indicate a change in the expected value from which a jackpot is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, a pre-reading presentation that changes from a jackpot-based pre-reading presentation form to a jackpot confirmation pre-reading presentation form may be executed by the sub-CPU 301. In this case, if it is before the change to the jackpot confirmation pre-reading presentation form, the expected value level may also be changed accordingly.

[1-10-2. Specific examples of when pre-reading effects are performed with pre-reading time-saving performance patterns]
Next, a specific example of a pre-reading performance performed with a pre-reading time-saving winning performance pattern as the above-mentioned pre-reading winning type performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

Figures 61(a) to 61(f) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are diagrams showing the process by which the time-saving hit type look-ahead presentation form, which indicates the possibility of a time-saving hit, changes. Note that the look-ahead time-saving hit type presentation patterns shown in Figures 61(a) to 61(f) correspond to "0EH", "2EH", "4AH", or "6AH" in Figure 56. Also, the look-ahead expected value presentation patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value presentation patterns shown in Figures 61(a) to 61(f) are omitted from Figure 57.

In FIG. 61(a), the first pending area 411 to the third pending area 413 display normal pending images with no preview performance being performed, and the fourth pending area 414 displays no pending images, only a frame.

In FIG. 61(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 61(a). As described above, the sub-CPU 301 displays the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 in different forms (e.g. shapes) depending on the expected value for the time reduction.

In this way, in this embodiment, the expected value for a jackpot is represented by the color of the reserved image, and the expected value for a time-saving hit is represented by the shape of the reserved image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 61(b), the shape of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is a triangle (expected value level "0"), and the shape of the reserved image shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is a rectangle (expected value level "1").

Figure 61 (c) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 61 (b), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in Figure 61 (b) has changed from a square to a pentagon (expected value level "2") when it is shifted to the third pending area 413.

Figure 61 (d) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 61 (c), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in Figure 61 (c) has changed from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when it is shifted to the second pending area 412.

Figure 61 (e) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 61 (d), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in Figure 61 (d) has changed from a hexagon to a circle (expected value level "4") when it is shifted to the first pending area 411.

Figure 61 (f) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 61 (e), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in Figure 61 (e) has changed from a circle to a star (expected value level "5") when it is shifted to the zeroth area 410.

The shape of the reserved image, which indicates the expected value for the time-saving hit, does not necessarily have to change one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star" and may change, for example, from "pentagon to circle."

In addition, the shape of the reserved image (expected value level) indicating the expected value for the time-saving win does not necessarily need to change when the reserved image shifts, and may change, for example, during the variable display of the special pattern for that change.

In addition, in Fig. 61, the time-saving hit system pre-reading performance form is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the time-saving hit is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, the pre-reading performance shown below may be executed by the sub-CPU 301. In this case, if it is before changing to the big win confirmation pre-reading performance form, the expected value level may also be changed accordingly.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form to a jackpot type pre-reading performance form.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form to a guaranteed jackpot pre-reading performance form.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form to a jackpot type pre-reading performance form, and then changes to a jackpot confirmed pre-reading performance form.

[1-10-3. Specific examples of when pre-reading effects are performed with pre-reading common winning effects patterns]
Next, a specific example of a pre-reading effect performed with a pre-reading common winning effect pattern as the above-mentioned pre-reading winning type effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

Figures 62(a) to 62(d) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show the process by which the reserved image changes from a common win type look-ahead presentation form, which indicates that there is a possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving win, to a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form. Changes in the common win type look-ahead presentation form include a change in the expected value level of a win (time-saving win, jackpot), and a change in the type of win to one that clearly indicates whether it is a jackpot or a time-saving win. The look-ahead type win presentation patterns shown in Figures 62(a) to 62(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in Figure 56, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern shown in Figures 62(a) to 62(d) corresponds to "43H" in Figure 57.

In this embodiment, a common hit type pre-reading presentation form that indicates the possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit is displayed by displaying both a color that indicates the expected value level for a jackpot and a shape that indicates the expected value level for a time-saving hit.

In FIG. 62(a), the first pending area 411 and the second pending area 412 display normal pending images with no preview performance being performed, while the third pending area 413 and the fourth pending area 414 display only frames and no pending images.

In FIG. 62(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 62(a). The sub-CPU 301 displays the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 in different forms (e.g., color and shape) depending on the expected value for a win (big win or short-time win). In this embodiment, when the pre-reading performance is not executed or the expected value for a win is the lowest, the reserved image is displayed as a white triangle, and the expected value for a short win increases in the following order: "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star."

In this embodiment, in FIG. 62(b), the shape of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412 is a white triangle (expected value level "0"), and the shape of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2").

Figure 62 (c) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 62 (b), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in Figure 62 (b) has changed from a yellow pentagon to a green hexagon (expected value level "3") when it is shifted to the second pending area 412.

Figure 62 (d) is an image in which the reserved image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 62 (c), and shows that the shape of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved area 412 in Figure 62 (c) has changed from a green hexagon (a common win-type pre-reading presentation form with an expected value level of "3") to a rainbow triangle (a big win-type pre-reading presentation form with an expected value level of "5") when it is shifted to the first reserved area 411.

In other words, the look-ahead effects shown in Figures 62(b) and 62(c) are effects in which it is difficult to determine from the shape of the reserved image whether the shape of the reserved image indicates the expected value for a jackpot or the expected value for a time-saving hit. In contrast, the look-ahead effect shown in Figure 62(d) is an effect in which it is possible to determine that the shape of the reserved image indicates the expected value for a jackpot, and that the expected value is extremely high (for example, expected value level "5").

In this way, in this embodiment, depending on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the look-ahead performance can be executed in one of the following patterns: a look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern that indicates the expected value for a time-saving hit, a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern that indicates the expected value for a jackpot, and a look-ahead common hit performance pattern that indicates the expected value for a hit (jackpot or time-saving hit). When the look-ahead performance is executed in the look-ahead common hit performance pattern, the player can enjoy the excitement of wondering whether the reserved image will change to a jackpot-type look-ahead performance form or a time-saving hit-type look-ahead performance form, which can increase the excitement.

The form of the reserved image showing the expected value for a time-saving hit does not necessarily have to change one by one in the order of "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star" and may change, for example, from "yellow pentagon (common hit type pre-reading presentation form) → red triangle (big hit type pre-reading presentation form)" or from "green hexagon (common hit type pre-reading presentation form) → triangular star (time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form)". Also, the form of the reserved image showing the expected value for a hit does not necessarily have to start from the blue square which has the lowest expected value and may start from, for example, a red circle.

In addition, the form of the reserved image indicating the expected value for a win does not necessarily need to change when the reserved image shifts, and may change, for example, during the variable display of the special pattern for that change.

In addition, in Fig. 62, the common hit system pre-reading performance form is changed to change the expected value derived from any hit (big hit or time-saving hit) or to change the expected hit from an unknown state to a big hit, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, the pre-reading performance shown below may be executed by the sub-CPU 301. In this case, if it is before changing to the big hit confirmed pre-reading performance form, the expected value level may also be changed.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a common hit type pre-reading performance form to a guaranteed jackpot pre-reading performance form.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a common hit type pre-reading performance form to a jackpot type pre-reading performance form, and then changes to a jackpot confirmed pre-reading performance form.

[1-10-4. Modification of common hit type pre-reading performance form]
In addition, the common win type pre-reading presentation form, which indicates the possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving win as the form of the reserved image, is not necessarily limited to a form that is expressed by both a color indicating the expected value for a jackpot and a shape indicating the expected value for a time-saving win. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation form may be provided. When a dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation form is provided, it becomes possible to have a sense of expectation for both a jackpot and a time-saving win, and since the expected values of each are unknown, it becomes possible to play with a sense of expectation for future changes in the presentation form, thereby improving interest.

Figures 63(a) to 63(d) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show the process by which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common win look-ahead presentation to a big win look-ahead presentation. Note that the look-ahead winning type presentation patterns shown in Figures 63(a) to 63(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in Figure 56, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern shown in Figures 63(a) to 63(d) corresponds to "31H" in Figure 57 or Figure 58.

Figures 64(a) to 64(d) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show the process by which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common win look-ahead presentation to a time-saving win look-ahead presentation. The look-ahead winning type presentation patterns shown in Figures 64(a) to 64(d) correspond to "07H", "27H", "43H", or "63H" in Figure 56, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern shown in Figures 64(a) to 64(d) corresponds to "31H" in Figure 57 or Figure 58.

In Figures 63(a) and 64(a), the first pending area 411 and the second pending area 412 display a normal pending image in which no preview performance is being performed, and the third pending area 413 and the fourth pending area 414 display no pending image, only a frame.

In FIG. 63(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved area 413, following the state shown in FIG. 63(a).

Similarly, in FIG. 64(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 64(a).

In both Figures 63(b) and 64(b), the form of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a dedicated common winning type pre-reading performance form, for example, a shining form. By changing the degree of brightness of the light, the expected value level can be changed.

Figure 63 (c) is an image in which the reserve has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 63 (b), and shows that the dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation form displayed in the third reserve area 413 in Figure 63 (b) has been shifted in the same form to the second reserve area 412.

Similarly, Figure 64(c) is an image in which the reserve has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 64(b), and shows that the dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation form displayed in the third reserve area 413 in Figure 64(b) has been shifted in the same form to the second reserve area 412.

Figure 63 (d) is an image in which the reserved position has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 63 (c), and shows that the form of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved area 412 in Figure 63 (c) has changed from a special common hit type pre-reading presentation form to a red triangle (expected value level of a jackpot "4") when it is shifted to the first reserved area 411.

On the other hand, Figure 64 (d) is an image in which the reserved position has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 64 (c), and shows that the form of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved area 412 in Figure 64 (c) has changed from a special common hit type pre-reading presentation form to a white circle (expected value level for time-saving hits of "4") when it is shifted to the first reserved area 411.

In this way, even if the look-ahead presentation form is expressed as a dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form, the player can be entertained by wondering whether the dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form will change to a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form or a time-saving win type look-ahead presentation form, thereby increasing the player's interest.

[1-11. Signals output to outside the device]
Next, a signal output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), an island computer (not shown) provided on each island) will be described. Note that, in this embodiment, a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described, but it is also possible to input a signal from outside the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. The signals output from each CH of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are, for example, various signals such as "prize ball information 1," "door/frame open," "external information 1" to "external information 8," "prize ball information 2," and "security." However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are not limited to these, and there may be other signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals, or the machine may be configured so that none of these signals are output.

Figure 65 is a table showing an example of the output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in Figure 65, a "prize ball information 1" signal is output from CN1, a "door/frame open" signal is output from CH2, signals for "external information 1" to "external information 8" are output from CH3 to CH10 respectively, a "prize ball information 2" signal is output from CH11, and a "security" signal is output from CH12. The output conditions for signals from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in Figure 65.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained using the "prize ball information 1" signal as an example. As shown in FIG. 65, in this embodiment, the "prize ball information 1" signal is output for 120 msec every time 10 prize balls are paid out.

Figure 66 is an example of a timing chart of the "prize ball information 1" signal, one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time a prize ball is paid out. As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the large prize opening 131 (see FIG. 4), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out, when a game ball enters a start opening (first start opening 120 or second start opening 140 (both see FIG. 4)), for example, 3 prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball enters the general prize opening 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, 4 prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs the signal "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for, for example, 120 msec each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 outputs the signal "prize ball information 1" for, for example, 120 msec, at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on, starting from the previous output of the signal "prize ball information 1". Note that outputting the signal "prize ball information 1" at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on is merely an example, and it may be any time between when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on and when it is turned off. Also, outputting the signal "prize ball information 1" each time 10 prize balls are paid out or for 120 msec is merely an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal "prize ball information 1" can be set appropriately.

Next, we will explain an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside. The "security" signal is a signal that is mainly output when an error occurs.

Figure 67 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, for each error name, the table shows the trigger for the error in the main control circuit 200, the trigger for the error to be released in the main control circuit 200 (see Figure 6), the output time of the "security" signal (shown as "security signal" in Figure 67), and any notes.

Note that the first pachinko game machine does not have a large prize opening for small wins, but for the sake of convenience, Figure 67 also describes an abnormal prize winning error at the large prize opening for small wins. Also, in Figure 67, the large prize opening 131 is described as a large prize opening for big wins.

The outline of the errors shown in FIG. 67 is an example, and only some of them may be judged to be errors, or, for example, those not shown in FIG. 67 may be judged to be errors. Examples of errors that are judged to be errors that are not shown in FIG. 67 include a solenoid monitoring sensor error when a solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined time or more, a large prize opening entry/ejection abnormality error when there are undischarged game balls inside the large prize opening (large prize opening for a large win or large prize opening for a small win) or when a prize is won inside the large prize opening when the large prize opening is not open, and a vibration sensor error when the vibration sensor is on for a predetermined time. Also, for example, if a specific area is provided within the jackpot large prize opening, and the special probability control is executed after the jackpot game control ends based on the game ball passing through the specific area while the jackpot game control is being executed, it is preferable to configure it so that an error is determined when there is an abnormal passage to the specific area, or when the game ball passes through the specific area even though there are no game balls yet to be discharged inside the jackpot large prize opening.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, it sends a fraud detection-related command to the sub-CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub-CPU 301, which receives the fraud detection-related command, executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The following briefly explains the control by the main CPU 201 and sub-CPU 301 (see Figure 6 for both), using the example of an abnormal winning error at the big win slot.

As shown in FIG. 67, for example, after the initial power is turned on, if one winning is detected before the first big win opening is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an abnormal winning error has occurred at the big win opening, and outputs a "security" signal for 12 seconds. It also sends a fraud detection-related command to the sub-CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred at the big win opening.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the type of error, so that an external device (e.g., hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or island computer (not shown)) can know that an error has occurred by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot know the content of the error. However, this is not limited to the above, and for example, the output time of the "security" signal may be changed depending on the content of the error, so that an external device that receives the "security" signal can know the content of the error.

When the sub-CPU 301 (see Figure 6) receives a fraud detection-related command indicating, for example, an abnormal winning error at the large winning port for a jackpot, it executes all or part of the notification control shown below, and when, for example, 30 seconds have elapsed since receiving the fraud detection-related command, it terminates the notification control shown below.
Notification control for displaying, for example, the text "Abnormal winning error at large prize port" on the display device 7 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the display control circuit 304.
- Notification control to output a voice such as "There is an abnormal winning error at the large prize port" from the speaker 32 (see, for example, Figure 6) via the voice control circuit 305.
Notification control for outputting, for example, a beep from the speaker 32 via the voice control circuit 305.
Notification control for lighting up all of the LEDs 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) in red via the LED control circuit 306.

If a power outage occurs, for example, before 30 seconds have elapsed since receiving the fraud detection-related command, the sub-CPU 301 will end the above-mentioned notification control.

In addition, for example, if the sub-CPU 301 receives a fraud detection-related command indicating an abnormal winning error at the large jackpot winning port while executing the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of an abnormal winning error at the large jackpot winning port, it will re-execute the above-mentioned notification control.

Next, the signals output from the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming status will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a table showing an example of the output conditions of signals output from the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming status. In FIG. 68, signals that are output are indicated by ◯, and signals that are not output are indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, the signals output vary depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, during normal gameplay (other than during a big win or small win, other than during a special probability or time-saving mode), no signals are output, during low-probability time-saving gameplay (other than during a big win or small win), the signals "External Information 3" and "External Information 7" are output, and during high-probability time-saving gameplay (other than during a big win or small win), the signals "External Information 3", "External Information 5", and "External Information 7" are output. Also, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high-probability non-time-saving gameplay state, the signals "External Information 3" and "External Information 6" are output during a high-probability non-time-saving gameplay (other than during a big win or small win).

In this way, by outputting different signals according to the game status controlled by the main CPU 201, devices outside the machine that can receive the signals (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)) can grasp the game status of the pachinko game machine that is the source of the external information.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the signal output during the small win game control process (in the normal game state) is the same as the signal output during the normal game state (other than during a big win or small win, other than during a special mode or time-saving mode). Similarly, the signal output during the small win game control process (in the low-probability time-saving game state) is the same as the signal output during the low-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or small win), the signal output during the small win game control process (in the high-probability time-saving game state) is the same as the signal output during the high-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or small win), and the signal output during the small win game control process (in the high-probability non-time-saving game state) is the same as the signal output during the high-probability non-time-saving game state (other than during a big win or small win). In other words, an external device capable of receiving the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)) cannot know whether or not the small win game control process is being executed in the pachinko game machine that sent the external information. However, instead of this, the signal output during the small win game control process may be made different from the signal output when the small win game control process is not being executed, so that an external device capable of receiving the signal can know whether or not the small win game control process is being executed in the pachinko game machine that sent the external information.

Also, during the low-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or a small win), during the high-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or a small win), during small win game control processing (low-probability time-saving game state), and during small win game control processing (high-probability time-saving game state) shown in FIG. 68, the signal is output during execution of time-saving control. In this case, it may be considered that the time-saving control is being executed when both the electric support control and the special chart shortening control are being executed, or it may be considered that the time-saving control is being executed when only the electric support control of the electric support control and the special chart shortening control is being executed, or it may be considered that the time-saving control is being executed when only the special chart shortening control of the electric support control and the special chart shortening control is being executed.

In addition, in the above description of the first pachinko gaming machine, it is assumed that the main CPU can control the time-shortened game state A, the time-shortened game state B, and the time-shortened game state C (the time-shortened game state function A, the time-shortened game state function B, and the time-shortened game state function C are installed), but this is not limited to the above. For example, the pachinko gaming machine may be equipped with only one of the time-shortened game state functions A, B, and C, and not equipped with the other functions (for example, the time-shortened game state function B and the time-shortened game state function C). Also, the pachinko gaming machine may be equipped with only two of the functions of the time-saving play state A, the time-saving play state B, and the time-saving play state C (for example, the time-saving play state A function and the time-saving play state B or the time-saving play state C function), and not equipped with the other functions (for example, the time-saving play state B or the time-saving play state C function).

In addition, for example, in pachinko gaming machines called ST machines, where the probability of ...

[2. The second pachinko game machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be described. As mentioned above, the second pachinko game machine is a so-called type one pachinko game machine called digital pachinko. However, the second pachinko game machine is different from the first pachinko game machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in parallel. Therefore, the game board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from the first pachinko game machine.

In the following description of the second pachinko gaming machine, we will omit as much as possible the description of the functions, shapes, and positions that are common to the first pachinko gaming machine, such as the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, and the signals output from the external terminal board 1184 (see FIG. 70 described below) to the outside of the second pachinko gaming machine (for example, the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 described below) and the island computers (not shown) installed on each island).

In addition, when describing the second pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine, using the same reference numbers and step numbers as the first pachinko gaming machine. However, when describing the configuration with reference to new drawings adopted in the description of the second pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to different reference numbers and step numbers than the first pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has functions and the like in common with the first pachinko gaming machine.

Incidentally, pachinko gaming machines that can changeably display the first and second special symbols in parallel include pachinko gaming machines in which, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are on hold, the start conditions of the second special symbol are established with priority over the start conditions of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "priority change machines"), and pachinko gaming machines in which the start conditions are established in the order of winning, including the first and second start ports (hereinafter referred to as "sequential change machines").

[2-1. Game board unit]
69 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. As shown in Fig. 69, the game board unit 1010 has a play area 1105 formed thereon.

Note that the various components (e.g., first starting hole 1120, etc.) arranged in the play area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine share some in common with the various components arranged in the play area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine (see Figure 4), but will be explained in detail again.

As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 1110, a center role 1115 located approximately in the center of the game area 1105, a first start port 1120, a general winning port 1122, a passing gate unit 1125, a special electric role unit 1130, a second start port 1140A, 1140B, a normal electric role unit 1145, a small win unit 1150, an LED unit 1160, an outlet 1178, and a back unit (not shown) located behind the game board unit 1010. Note that the LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description of the LED unit 1160 of the second pachinko game machine will be omitted.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 1100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. A guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, and gaming pegs (no reference number) and the like are planted thereon. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 1110 toward the gaming area 1105, collides with the gaming pegs, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 1105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) with decorative bodies is disposed behind the gaming panel 1100 to enhance the presentation effect. The gaming panel 1100 is made of transparent resin so that the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front. In this case, the entire gaming panel 1100 may be made of transparent materials, or, for example, only the parts where the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front may be made of transparent materials. In addition, the gaming panel 1100 may be made of materials that do not have transparent parts (for example, wood), and transparent materials may be provided in some parts to enhance the presentation effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which have no reference number). The play area 1105 is defined by the guide rail 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 1006 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the upper part of the play area 1105.

(Center role)
The center device 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (without reference number) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 1116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

A game ball launched by the launching device 1006 toward the game area 1105 flows down the left area 1106 or the right area 1107. A game ball flowing down the left area 1106 or the right area 1107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 1100. If the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 1106. On the other hand, if the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 1107.

The center device 1115 also has a warp entrance 1117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which game balls flowing down the left area 1106 can enter. Game balls that enter the warp entrance 1117 are configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed in the center device 1115. The stage 1118 is formed below and in front of the display area of the display device 1007 so that the game balls can roll left and right. The stage 1118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 1119 through which game balls can enter is formed at the rear of the stage 1118, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and game balls that enter the chance entrance 1119 are configured to be released directly above the first start opening 1120. Therefore, game balls that enter the chance entrance 1119 have a higher probability of entering (passing through) the first start opening 1120 than game balls that do not enter the warp entrance 1117, or game balls that enter the warp entrance 1117 but do not enter the chance entrance 1119.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 1120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 1007, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or is impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 1120, it is detected by a first starting hole switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later). It is also possible that a game ball hit from the right can win in the first starting hole 1120. Also, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 1120 described above, a first starting hole that allows a game ball hit from the right to win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or is impossible to win) may be provided.

When the first start hole switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 1120, start information for the first special pattern is extracted, and a predetermined number of the extracted start information (for example, up to four) are held. When the start conditions are met, the held start information is used in the winning determination process for the first special pattern. When a game ball enters the first start hole 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 1120 is not limited to this.

(General Prize Winners)
The general winning openings 1122 are arranged in a plurality of locations on the lower left side of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that game balls hit from the left can win (game balls hit from the right have difficulty or no chance of winning). When a game ball wins in a general winning opening 1122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the general prize opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 1122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 1122 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 1122 is positioned so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the right to win, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the general winning opening 1122 described above, a general winning opening through which a game ball hit from the right can win may be provided.

(Passing gate unit)
The pass gate unit 1125 is located in the right area 1107 and is a unit that integrates a pass gate 1126 that is configured to allow almost all game balls hit to the right to pass through, and a pass gate switch 1127 (see Figure 70 described below) that detects the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 1126.

When the passing gate switch 1127 detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 1126, the start information of the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information of the normal pattern is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). The reserved start information of the normal pattern is used for the winning determination process of the normal pattern. Note that even if the passing gate switch 1127 detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 1126, no prize balls are paid out. The passing gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left area 1106 instead of or in addition to the right area 1107.

The pass gate 1126 may also function as a trigger for activating the consecutive operation device of the special feature. In other words, the condition for transitioning from a non-jackpot gaming state (such as a normal gaming state) to a jackpot gaming state is that both the condition device and the consecutive operation device of the special feature are activated, but when a stop display mode (symbol combination) indicating a jackpot is derived, the condition device may be activated but the consecutive operation device of the special feature may not be activated. Then, assuming that the condition device is activated, the consecutive operation device of the special feature may be activated when a gaming ball passes through the pass gate 1126, i.e., when a gaming ball is detected by the pass gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 70 described below), thereby transitioning to the jackpot gaming state.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 is a unit body that integrates a big winning hole 1131 for a big winning, a big winning hole count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described later) for detecting the entry (passage) of a game ball into the big winning hole 1131 for a big winning, and a special electric accessory 1133. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is disposed below the passing gate unit 1125 in the right side area 1107.

The big winning opening 1131 for big wins is arranged so that game balls hit from the right can win (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or difficulty winning). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the big winning opening 1131 for big wins described above, a big winning opening for big wins that can win game balls hit from the left may be arranged, or a big winning opening for big wins that can win game balls may be arranged above the center device 1115.

The big jackpot winning opening 1131 is an opening that is opened to allow a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) to enter (pass through) when the machine is controlled to a big jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. When the big jackpot winning opening count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described below) detects the entry of a game ball into the big jackpot winning opening 1131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the big jackpot winning opening 1131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric device 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 70 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 1134. The special electric device 1133, i.e., the special electric shutter 1134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass) through the big winning opening 1131 for a big win, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter (pass) through the big winning opening 1131 for a big win. The transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 1131 for a big win is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the big winning game state is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big winning opening 1131 for a big win transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period over multiple rounds.

(Second starting hole)
In this embodiment, the second starting holes 1140A and 1140B are arranged in the game area 1105 as the second starting holes, and both of these second starting holes 1140A and 1140B are designed so that a game ball hit to the right can win (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win). However, this is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be able to win the second starting hole 1140A and/or the second starting hole 1140B.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 1140A, it is detected by the second start hole switch 1141A (see FIG. 70 described below). Also, when a game ball enters the second start hole 1140B, it is detected by the second start hole switch 1141B (see FIG. 70 described below). Regardless of whether the game ball enters the second start hole 1140A or 1140B, this triggers the process of determining whether the second special symbol has been won.

When the second start port switches 1141A, 1141B (see FIG. 70 described below) detect the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start port 1140A, 1140B, the start information of the second special pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). The reserved start information is used for the winning determination process of the second special pattern. When a game ball enters the second start port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second start port 1140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 1140A, 1140B is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, two flow paths 1107a, 1107b are formed on the downstream side of the flow direction of the game ball that is hit from the right but does not enter the big winning opening 1131 for the big win. The game ball that is hit from the right and does not enter the big winning opening 1131 for the big win and flows further downstream is sorted by the branching nail 1108 shown in FIG. 69, for example, to the upper flow path 1107a or the lower flow path 1107b.

The second starting port 1140A is arranged so that game balls sorted into the upper flow path 1107a can win, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win. However, it is not essential to configure most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a to win at the second starting port 1140A. For example, it may be configured so that almost no game balls can be expected to win at the second starting port 1140A, or it may be configured so that a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately one-third to one-fifth) of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win. Note that game balls that flow down the upper flow path 1107a but do not win at the second starting port 1140A are configured to be discharged outside the machine from the outlet 1178.

The second starting hole 1140B is positioned so that the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can enter, but details will be given later in the explanation of the normal electric role unit 1145.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged on the lower flow path 1107b side, and is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game ball enters (passes through), a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 1146. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second start hole 1140B, and the switch is the second start hole switch 1141B. However, it is not essential that the winning hole is the second start hole 1140B, and for example, the first start hole may be the winning hole.

The normal electric device 1146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 1147 that can move back and forth, and a normal power solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 70 described later) that operates the normal power shutter 1147. The normal electric device 1146, i.e., the normal power shutter 1147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the second starting hole 1140B or is easy, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the second starting hole 1140B or is difficult. Note that instead of the above-mentioned normal power shutter 1147 that can move back and forth, a movable member made of, for example, a blade member, known as an electric tulip, may be used. Also, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and may include a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, etc.

(Small hit unit)
The small win unit 1150 is a unitary body that integrates a small win large prize opening 1151, a small win large prize opening count switch 1152 (see Figure 70 described below) that detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the small win large prize opening 1151, a small win shutter 1153 that can move back and forth, and a small win solenoid 1154 that can operate this small win shutter 1153.

The small win shutter 1153 is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (pass through) the large winning opening 1151 for small wins, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the large winning opening 1151 for small wins, by moving it back and forth.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening for small wins 1151 when it is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the large prize opening for small wins count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70 described below). When the large prize opening for small wins count switch 1152 detects a game ball, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening for small wins 1151 is not limited to 10.

The small win unit 1150 is located on the lower flow path 1107b downstream of the normal electric role unit 1145. Therefore, when the second starting port 1140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric role 1146, even if the small win large prize opening 1151 is open, the game ball that flows down the lower flow path 1107b will enter the second starting port 1140B located upstream before reaching the small win large prize opening 1151, making it difficult (or impossible) for the ball to enter the small win large prize opening 1151.

In this embodiment, the large prize opening 1131 for the large prize and the large prize opening 1151 for the small prize are provided separately, but this is not limited to this, and the large prize opening that is opened when the large prize game control process is executed and the large prize opening that is opened when the small prize game control process is executed may be the same large prize opening.

(Outlet)
The outlet 1178 is for discharging game balls that have been shot toward the game area 1105 but have not won any of the various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 1120, the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B, the big winning hole 1131 for big wins, the general winning hole 1122, etc.) to the outside of the machine. This outlet 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 1178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between multiple general winning holes 1122 or between the normal electric role unit 1145 and the small winning unit 1150, so that game balls flowing down the game area 1105 can be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100 as described above. This back unit includes a group of performance-use accessories 1058 such as movable accessories controlled by a sub-control circuit 1300 (see FIG. 70 described later). The group of performance-use accessories 1058 is arranged around the display area of the display device 1007, for example. At least one of the performance-use accessory group 1058 or a performance-use accessory component constituting the accessory functions as a performance-use accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 70. Fig. 70 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine. Note that the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine has some parts in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, but they will be described in detail again.

As shown in FIG. 70, the second pachinko game machine is mainly composed of a main control circuit 1200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 1300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 1400, and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on and processes related to game operations, and is equipped with a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 1204, and a backup capacitor 1207, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 1201 is connected to the main ROM 1202, the main RAM 1203, the initial reset circuit 1204, etc. The main CPU 1201 has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer (WDT) that monitors operation and a function to prevent fraud.

The main ROM 1202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 1201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. This main RAM 1203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201. Note that, although in this embodiment, RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201, this is not limiting and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 1203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 1200 also includes an I/O port 1205 that is connected to various devices and other devices so as to be able to communicate with each other, and a command output port 1206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 1300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 1300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, the main control circuit 1200 is connected to the normal symbol display unit 1161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 1162, the first special symbol display unit 1163, the second special symbol display unit 1164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 1165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 1166, the sure-change notification display unit 1167, the time-saving notification display unit 1168, the normal power solenoid 1148, the special power solenoid 1135, and the small win solenoid 1154. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected to the performance display monitor 1170 and the error notification monitor 1172. The main control circuit 1200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data and setting values (described later) under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 1172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc., for example, in a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function described below. Note that the setting change code may be configured to display a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that a setting change is in progress).

The main control circuit 1200 is also connected to the first start port switch 1121, the second start port switches 1141A and 1141B, the pass gate switch 1127, the big win large prize port count switch 1132, the general prize port switch 1123, and the small win large prize port count switch 1152. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to the main control circuit 1200 via the I/O port 1205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 is connected to a calling device (not shown) having functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 1184 used to transmit data to a hall computer 1186 that manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall, a setting key socket 1174 into which a setting key 1174a is inserted that is operated to change or check the setting value in the case of a pachinko machine with a setting function described later, and a RAM clear switch 1176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 in response to the operation of the gaming center manager. In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1176 also serves as a switch for changing the setting value described later, but is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the setting value may also be provided.

The setting key slot 1174 and the RAM clear switch 1176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the arcade manager. "Inside a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key slot 1174 and the RAM clear switch 1176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key slot 1174 and the RAM clear switch 1176, so that the arcade manager can touch the setting key slot 1174 and/or the RAM clear switch 1176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the arcade manager to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key slot 1174 and the RAM clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 1400 or the power supply circuit 1450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the arcade manager from easily touching the setting key slot 1174 or the RAM clear switch 1176.

[2-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 1300 includes a sub-CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, a sound control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, a role control circuit 1307, and a command input port 1308. The sub-control circuit 1300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 1200. Although not shown in Fig. 70, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected to effect buttons 54 (see Fig. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the second pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 1301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 1301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub-CPU 1301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for controlling the display of the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 1301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 1032. The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as an AMP) for amplifying the audio signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. In response to a sound generation command from the sub-CPU 1301, the sound source IC selects one piece of sound data from multiple pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a specified sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046, which includes decorative LEDs. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The reel control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of reels for performance 1058). The reel control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a reel data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored.

The reel control circuit 1307 selects one operation pattern from among multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 1301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is then supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from among multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 1301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is then supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 1200.

The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls, and is connected to a payout device 1082 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 1006 capable of launching game balls, a card unit 1180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 1400 receives a prize ball control command sent from the main control circuit 1200, it sends a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls.

The card unit 1180 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 1182. The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (neither is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. The operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 1400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation), and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.

The power supply circuit 1450 is connected to a power switch 1095 and other components. The power switch 1095 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 71 to 75. The second pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the second pachinko game machine, a normal game state in which neither the probability variable control nor the time-saving control is executed, a high-probability time-saving game state in which both the probability variable control and the time-saving control are executed, a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the probability variable control is executed but the time-saving control is not executed, and a low-probability time-saving game state in which the probability variable control is not executed but the time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 1201 is capable of progressing the game in any of these game states. However, the game states progressed by the control of the main CPU 1201 are not limited to these, and it is also possible to prevent any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state from progressing. For example, it is possible to allow the game to progress in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state, and not allow the game to progress in the high-probability non-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, hitting to the left is the normal game mode, and in the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state, hitting to the right is the normal game mode. The sub-CPU 1301 executes control to display the normal game mode (e.g., whether to hit to the right or left) in, for example, the display area of the display device 1007.

[2-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 71 shows an example of a special symbol winning determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referenced in the hit determination process for the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78 described later), that is, a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "time-saving hit", "small hit", "big hit" or "miss" is a hit based on a random number value for big hit determination extracted when a game ball enters the first start hole 1120 or the second start hole 1140A, 1140B. In this embodiment, the objects of the lottery in the hit determination process for the first special symbol are a "time-saving hit", a "big hit", and a "miss", and a "small hit" is not included in the objects of the lottery. In contrast, the objects of the lottery in the hit determination process for the second special symbol are a "time-saving hit", a "small hit", a "big hit", and a "miss". However, a "small hit" may be included in the objects of the lottery in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

As described above, the random number value for determining a jackpot is a random number value used in the process of determining whether or not a special symbol has won. In this embodiment, the random number value for determining a jackpot is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result is a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" in the hit determination process for the first special symbol based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination. The hit determination table for the first special symbol specifies, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data.

In addition, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result is a "time-saving hit", "small hit", "big hit", or "miss" based on the extracted random number value for determining a big hit. In the hit determination table for the second special symbol, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "small hit" and the corresponding small hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "big hit" and the corresponding big hit determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data are specified.

In this embodiment, for example, if the probability of a win flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for determining a jackpot is any value between 0 and 408, the main CPU 1201 determines that there is a "time-saving hit" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability of a win flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for determining a jackpot is any value between 409 and 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that there is a "jackpot" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Also, if the extracted random number value for determining a jackpot is any value between 614 and 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that there is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

For example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." If the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

Similarly, for example, if the probability variable flag is off during hit determination processing for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is off during hit determination processing for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "small hit" and determines the determination value data as "small hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is off during hit determination processing for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 22118 to 22322, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability of a big win flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for determining a big win is any of 22323 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

Also, for example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "small hit" and determines the determination value data as "small hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 22118 to 22968, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability of a big win flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for determining a big win is any of 22969 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In this way, in this embodiment, of the random number values for determining a jackpot that are generated in the range of 0 to 65535, for example, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 22117 in the hit determination process for the second special symbol) is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data and small hit determination value data) excluding the jackpot determination value data and miss determination value data. In addition, the end of the predetermined value (for example, 22323 to 65535 if the special bonus flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol) is assigned to miss determination value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and miss determination value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing this, for example, when the probability change flag changes from OFF to ON (or ON to OFF), it is possible to change the probability of a jackpot without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data and small hit judgment value data) by simply narrowing (or widening) the width of the miss judgment value data by the same amount that the width of the jackpot judgment value data is widened (or narrowed).

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed is made different from the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, thereby adding variety to the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 71, by making the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed higher than the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become monotonous.

However, the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed may be made higher than the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed. In this case, for example, by overlapping the time-saving play state when a "time-saving hit" is won during a time-saving play state, if a "time-saving hit" is won just before the end of the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state is effectively extended, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

As shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is a "time-shortened hit" whether the special-hit flag is on or off. However, when the special-hit flag is off (normal game state, time-shortened game state), the main CPU 1201 controls the game to the time-shortened game state if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-shortened hit", but when the special-hit flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control the game to the time-shortened game state even if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-shortened hit".

[2-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 72 shows an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "selected symbol command" and a "symbol designation command" that determine the stopped symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 or the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B and the aforementioned winning/losing determination value data (i.e., when executing the special symbol determination process of S1035 in FIG. 78 described below). The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a symbol that is determined according to the result of the special symbol winning/losing determination process, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating a symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 72, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main CPU 1201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 2 and 9, the main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 10 and 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any value from 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selected symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the win determination process for the second special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z10" as the selected symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command.

When small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 executes small win game control processing. In the small win game control processing, for example, the small win shutter 1153 (see FIG. 69) is operated to execute control so that the small win large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is opened so that the game ball can enter (pass through) the small win large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) or can be easily opened, and the prize ball can be paid out.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 29, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selected symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 30 and 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z12" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z13" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the second special symbol, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected, for example, as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z14" as the selected symbol command and "zA11" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71) is referenced to determine the hit/lose determination value data based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) is referenced to determine the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but this is not limited to this. For example, the hit/lose of the special symbol, the selected symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine will not be described, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol that is output to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164 (see FIG. 70) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, in response to a selected symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display units 1163 and 1164 derive the display mode of a time-saving hit, a big hit, a small hit, or a miss based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 1302 of the sub-control circuit 1300.

[2-3-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
FIG. 73 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 of the second pachinko game machine. The winning type determination table is referred to when determining the winning game state and/or the subsequent game state in response to the selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random number value of the special symbol (i.e., when executing the winning type determination process of S1036 in FIG. 78 described later). The winning game state shown in FIG. 73 indicates the big win game state or the small win game state. In addition, the subsequent game state indicates the game state after the winning game state ends. However, if the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is a time-saving winning, the game state is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the winning game state, so that the subsequent game state indicates the C time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the mode of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0," the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 10. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z8," the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 50. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z9," the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 100. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the above-mentioned time-saving hit to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then sets the time-saving flag on and the determined number of time-saving times without controlling to the big hit game state, and can control to the C time-saving game state. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the game is not controlled to the hit game state, so the mode of the hit game state is not determined. In this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of time-saving times set may be different depending on the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving turns that is set varies depending on the selected symbol command that is determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," it is possible to provide variety to the progress of the game thereafter, and to prevent a decline in interest.

As described above, when the probability variable flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time-saving game state even if the result of the winning judgment process is a "time-saving win". For example, even if the probability variable flag is on (high probability game state), the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for a "time-saving win" as shown in FIG. 72, and when the result of the winning judgment process is a "time-saving win", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the time-saving win indicating that the "time-saving win" has been won to the special pattern display units 1163 and 1164, but does not control to the C time-saving game state. In addition, the main CPU 1201 may perform a lottery for a "time-saving win" even if the probability variable flag is on, and when the result of the winning judgment process is a "time-saving win", the main CPU 1201 may forcibly derive the display mode of a loss to the special pattern display units 1163 and 1164. Furthermore, if the probability of winning flag is on, the random number value for determining a jackpot may not be assigned time-saving hit determination value data, i.e., a win determination process may be performed in which the "time-saving hit" is not included in the lottery result.

In this embodiment, when the probability variable flag is on, the game is configured not to transition to the C time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the probability variable flag is on but the time-saving flag is off, if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the game may transition to a high-probability time-saving game state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", the mode of the hit game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of times the small hit large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is opened as one time as the mode of the small hit game state. When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the small hit described above to the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then sets the determined number of times the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened, and the game state can be controlled to a small hit game state. Note that when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", after the small hit game state ends, the main CPU 1201 does not change either the probability change flag or the time reduction flag, and returns to the game state immediately before being controlled to the small hit game state.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot," the winning game state and the subsequent game state are determined as follows:

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z11", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 10 rounds, and as the mode of the subsequent game state, determines that only the high probability flag out of the high probability flag and the time-saving flag is set to on, and determines that the number of high probability flags is set to 10,000. In this case, the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control the game state to a high probability non-time-saving game state.

When the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5", or "z12", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 10, 4, or 10, respectively, as the mode of the jackpot game state. In addition, in each case, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines to set both the probability change flag and the time-saving flag on, and determines to set both the number of probability change rounds and the number of time-saving rounds to 10,000. In these cases, the main CPU 1201 controls the jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then controls it to a jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control it to a high-probability time-saving game state.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and when it is "z13", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 4 rounds and 10, respectively. In addition, as the mode of the subsequent game state, in either case, it determines that only the time-saving flag out of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag is set to on. In addition, the number of time-saving times to be set is determined to be set to, for example, 200 times when the selected symbol command is "z6", and to be set to, for example, 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 1201 controls the display mode of the above-mentioned jackpot to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then controls it to the jackpot game state, and after the end of this jackpot game state, it can be controlled to the time-saving game state. The time-saving game state controlled here is the A time-saving game state. In addition, the mode of time-saving control in the high-probability time-saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as "time-saving performance") is preferably the same as the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state, but may be different from the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), the main CPU 1201 does not set either the hit game state or the subsequent game state. In other words, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 1201 does not change the game state, but continues to control the previous game state.

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), neither the state of the winning game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is set as described above, so there is no need to illustrate this in the hit type determination table of FIG. 73. However, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, it is illustrated in FIG. 73 to clearly show that, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss", neither the state of the winning game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is determined.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table in FIG. 71, and determines the hit/loss determination value data based on the random number value for jackpot determination extracted when the game ball enters the first start hole 1120 or the second start hole 1140A, 1140B (performs hit/loss determination), and determines the hit/loss ("time-saving hit", "small hit", "jackpot", or "miss"). After that, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table in FIG. 72, and determines the selected symbol command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the first start hole 1120 or the second start hole 1140A, 1140B and the hit/loss determination value data, and determines the type of display mode (for example, the type of time-saving hit, the type of jackpot) to be derived to the special symbol display section 1163, 1164. Note that the above winning/losing judgment and selection of the symbol command are performed when the variable display of the special symbol begins, but this does not exclude the possibility of performing this between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the final display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 73, in this embodiment, the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z6") or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). In contrast, the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state that is controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). In other words, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state. In this way, the positioning of the "jackpot" can be increased by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state. For example, even if you win a "jackpot", it will be possible to suppress the decline in interest that may occur when you are at a disadvantage compared to not winning the "jackpot" (winning a "time-saving jackpot").

In addition, instead of making the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving play state higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving play state, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving play state may be made higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving play state. In this way, by making the C time-saving play state more advantageous to the player than the A time-saving play state, the positioning of a "time-saving hit" can be increased. For example, even if a long period of time continues without a "jackpot", if a "time-saving hit" is won, the game will be controlled to the relatively advantageous C time-saving play state, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

[2-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 74 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a low start of the second pachinko game machine. FIG. 75 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start of the second pachinko game machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 of the second pachinko game machine. The "Notes" column in FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 is shown for convenience of understanding. The main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first start hole 1120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second start hole 1140A, 1140B. The variation pattern tables of the special symbols in FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 are tables that are referred to when executing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol in S1037 in FIG. 78 described later.

In normal game mode, where hitting from the left is the normal game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low starts shown in FIG. 74, for example.

As shown in the special symbol variation pattern table for low starts in FIG. 74, the main CPU 1201 sets a look-ahead flag when the random number value for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 1120 is a specific random number value. The sub-CPU 1301, which receives the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 1201, performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 decides whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, but this is not limited to this, and the sub-CPU 1301 may decide.

On the other hand, in a game state where right-hand play is the normal game mode, i.e., in a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, or a low-probability time-saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table for special symbols for high starts shown in, for example, FIG. 75.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 does not set a look-ahead flag when determining the special symbol variation pattern by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high starts, but this is not limited to this.

As shown in Figures 74 and 75, the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose), the reach determination random number value, and the performance selection random number value. However, this is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start in FIG. 75, the expected number of times the special symbol is variably displayed per unit time is larger than when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start in FIG. 74. In particular, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for an extremely long period of time, for example, approximately 600,000 msec (for example, long fluctuation A to C). On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for only an extremely short period of time, for example, 1,000 msec (for example, super-fast fluctuation).

The main CPU 1201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub-CPU 1301. The sub-CPU 1301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

Although not shown in Figures 74 and 75, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbols that are determined may be different for each setting value, for example by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in a normal game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to a special symbol fluctuation pattern table for a low start (see FIG. 74), and in a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, and a low-probability time-saving game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to a special symbol fluctuation pattern table for a high start (see FIG. 75), but this is not limited to this. For example, as the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for a high start, multiple fluctuation pattern tables with different expected values for the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed per unit time may be provided, and the table to be referenced when determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern may be different depending on the type of time-saving game state, for example.

In addition, the time-saving hit type reaches A and B shown in the "Notes" column of Figures 74 and 75 are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Similarly, the jackpot type reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine will not be described, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 stores a normal symbol winning determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol winning type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19). The main CPU 1201 then determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 1146 (see FIG. 69) in the same way as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operating mode of the normal electric device 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 are the same as those executed by the main CPU 1201 except for the special symbol control process executed in S39 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23). Therefore, the special symbol control process will be described below, and the other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will not be described. Note that the special symbol control process in the second pachinko game machine includes the same processes as those executed in the first pachinko game machine (e.g., the jackpot end process (Figs. 42 and 86)), but the special symbol control process will be described again below, including the same processes as those executed in the first pachinko game machine, with the step numbers changed.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 76. Fig. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S1001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of each special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 1201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the working area of each special symbol in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process to check the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol. If the reserved number of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 1201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol, and if the reserved number of the second special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 1201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process for the second special symbol. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. If the sub-control circuit 1300 receives the demo display command, and the demo display command is a demo display command for the main special symbol, the sub-CPU 1301 performs a demo display performance.

Although the second pachinko game machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub-CPU 1301 sets one of the first and second special symbols as the main special symbol and the other as the sub-special symbol, and mainly controls the presentation of the main special symbol. In this embodiment, in the normal game state in which left-handed play is the regular game mode, the first special symbol is the main special symbol, and in the game state in which right-handed play is the regular game mode (for example, high-probability time-saving game state, high-probability non-time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. The sub-CPU 1301 then performs variably displaying decorative symbols and displaying characters, etc., for the main special symbol, as well as sound presentation, etc., for the main special symbol. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the sub-special symbol is, for example, a jackpot, the main special symbol may be displayed while the sub-special symbol is displayed. In addition, in a low-probability time-saving game state among game states in which right-hitting is the regular game mode, another display image (for example, a countdown display of the remaining number of time-saving turns until the time-saving game state ends) may be displayed instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main special symbol.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the second special symbol to start being variably displayed based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1001.

If it is determined in S1002 that it is not the timing to start the variable display of the second special symbol (if S1002 is a NO judgment), that is, if any processing related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1003. For example, if a jackpot game control processing based on the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is being executed, a NO judgment is made in S1002.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1002 that it is time for the second special symbol to begin to change display (if S1002 returns YES), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1004.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the processing of S1003, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1004, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the first special symbol to start being variable displayed based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1004.

If it is determined in S1005 that it is not the timing to start the variable display of the first special symbol (if S1005 is a NO judgment), that is, if any processing related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1006. For example, if a jackpot game control processing based on the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is being executed, a NO judgment is made in S1005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1005 that it is time for the first special symbol to begin to change display (if S1005 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1007.

In S1006, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the processing of S1006, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1007.

In S1007, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S1007, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1008.

In S1008, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the second special symbol to start being variable displayed based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1007.

If it is determined in S1008 that it is not time for the second special symbol to start being variable displayed (if S1008 returns NO), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1010.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (if S1008 returns a YES judgment), that is, if no processing related to the second special symbol has been performed and variable display can begin, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1009.

In S1009, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the processing of S1009, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1010.

In S1010, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1010, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1011.

In S1011, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the first special symbol to start being variable displayed based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1010.

If it is determined in S1011 that it is not time for the first special symbol to start being variable displayed (if S1011 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1011 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (if S1011 returns a YES judgment), that is, if no processing related to the first special symbol has been performed and variable display can begin, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the processing of S1012, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S1001 to S1012) within the interrupt prohibited period.

In this way, in this embodiment, the special pattern management process described below is executed in the following order of priority: when any process related to the second special pattern is being executed, when any process related to the first special pattern is being executed, when no process related to the second special pattern is being executed and variable display can be started, when no process related to the first special pattern is being executed and variable display can be started.

[2-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1003, S1006, S1009, and S1012 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76) will be described with reference to Fig. 77. Fig. 77 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

For example, if the special pattern management process is called and executed in S1003 or S1009 during the special pattern control process, the second special pattern is the target of processing, and if the special pattern management process is called and executed in S1006 or S1012 during the special pattern control process, the first special pattern is the target of processing.

The numbers ("0" to "5") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 77 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 1201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern is 0 (S1021).

If it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (if S1021 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S1021 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1023. The main CPU 1201 performs the process from S1023 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S1022.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S1023 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S1024 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to Figures 79 and 80. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S1025 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 81 and 82. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S1026 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 84. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S1027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a jackpot end process. This S1028 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

After completing the processes of S1023 to S1028, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). If the special symbol management process is called in S1003 during the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1004; if it is called in S1006, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1007; if it is called in S1009, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1010; and if it is called in S1012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described with reference to Fig. 78. Fig. 78 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1031).

If it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S1031 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S1031 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1032.

In S1032, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the special symbol pause flag is off. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so that it does not proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S1032, even if S1031 is judged as YES (i.e., even if the start condition of the special symbol is met), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, i.e., it is on (S1032 is judged as NO), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

If it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol pause flag is not OFF, i.e., is ON (if S1032 is a NO determination), as described above, the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed, and the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process. After that, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1032 that the special pattern pause flag is off (if S1032 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1033.

In S1033, the main CPU 1201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special pattern. After executing the process of S1033, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1034.

In S1034, the main CPU 1201 performs a hit determination process for the special symbol. In this process, the hit determination process for the special symbol is performed by referring to the hit determination table for the special symbol (see FIG. 71) and using a random number value for determining whether the special symbol is a hit. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is determined to be a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a miss, and the second special symbol is determined to be a time-saving hit, a small hit, a big hit, or a miss. In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets the time-saving hit flag on when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a time-saving hit, sets the small hit flag on when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a small hit, and sets the big hit flag on when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a big hit. After executing the process of S1034, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1035. The time-saving hit flag is turned off when transitioning to the C time-saving play state, the small hit flag is turned off when the small hit play state begins, and the big hit flag is turned off when the big hit play state begins.

In the process of determining whether or not the special symbol is a hit (see S1034), first, a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and if this process determines that it is not a big hit, a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit is performed, and if this process determines that it is not a small hit, a process of determining whether or not it is a time-saving hit is performed, and if this process determines that it is not a time-saving hit, it is determined that it is a miss.

In S1035, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stopping symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034) (for example, a time-saving hit, a small hit, a big hit, or a miss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) is referenced, and the random number value of the special symbol is used to determine the above-mentioned "selection symbol command" or "symbol designation command". In this embodiment, since there is only one type of miss, it is not necessary to determine the stopping symbol when the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, but multiple types of misses may be provided and the stopping symbol may be determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss. After executing the process of S1035, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1036.

In S1036, the main CPU 1201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol win determination process is, for example, a win (time-saving win, small win, or big win). In this process, the win type determination table (see FIG. 73) is referenced and the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1035). Note that in this embodiment, there are multiple types of wins, but there may be only one type of big win or one type of time-saving win. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to multiple types of wins, multiple types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or multiple types of misses may be provided. After executing the process of S1036, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1037.

In S1037, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table (see Figs. 74 and 75), for example, according to the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (S1034), the random number value for reach judgment and/or the random number value for performance selection, etc. In this embodiment, in a normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see Fig. 74), and in a game state in which right-handed hitting is the regular game mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, a low-probability time-saving game state), the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start (see Fig. 75). After executing processing of S1037, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1038.

In S1038, the main CPU 1201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see Figures 74 and 75) is referenced, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S1037) is determined as the variation time for the special symbol. After executing the process of S1038, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1039.

In S1039, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S1024 in FIG. 77) is performed. After executing the process of S1039, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1040.

In S1040, the main CPU 1201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 is performed. After executing the process of S1040, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1041.

In S1041, the main CPU 1201 performs game status management processing. In this processing, the main CPU 1201 performs update processing of various flags related to the management of the game status (e.g., the probability bonus flag, the time-saving flag, etc.). After executing the processing of S1041, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interruption prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game status management process (S1041) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S1042)) within the interruption prohibited section.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 79 and Fig. 80, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1024 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 77) will be described. Fig. 79 and Fig. 80 are a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the second pachinko game machine.

When the special symbol variable display end process is called at S1024 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called at S1024 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target. Also, in the special symbol variable display end process described below, the special symbol that is the processing target is simply referred to as the "special symbol," and the special symbol that is not the processing target is referred to as the "other special symbol."

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1051).

If it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S1051 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S1051 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 loads the special symbol pause flag value. After executing the process of S1052, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the special pattern pause flag is off based on the special pattern pause flag value loaded in S1052.

If it is determined in S1053 that the special pattern pause flag is not off, i.e., is on (if S1053 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special pattern variable display end process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1053 that the special pattern pause flag is off (if S1053 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (see S1025 in FIG. 77) is performed after the special symbol variable display ending process is completed. After executing the process of S1054, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1055.

In S1055, the main CPU 1201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1055, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1056.

In S1056, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. The determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is determined (the number of times the special symbol game has been played), and the count is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 1203. For example, a counter may be provided for managing the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state, such as the number of remaining times of the special symbol game or the number of remaining times of the time-saving game, or the determined symbol counter may be used to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state. After executing the process of S1056, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1057.

In S1057, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit.

In S1057, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be not a small hit (if S1057 returns a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1059.

On the other hand, in S1057, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be a small hit (if S1057 returns a YES determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1058.

In S1058, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting or stopping while the small win game control process is being executed. After executing the process of S1058, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1059.

In S1059, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot.

In S1059, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be not a big hit (if S1059 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1059, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be a jackpot (if S1059 returns a YES determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting while the jackpot game control process is being executed. After executing the process of S1060, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1061.

In S1061, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is not being variably displayed (if S1061 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variably display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (if S1061 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 increments the value of the determined symbol number counter by 1. After executing the process of S1062, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 sets the variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, a test firing signal is output to the outside. This test firing signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped as a miss. After executing the process of S1063, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1064.

In S1064, the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes and sets the hit flag of the other special symbol to a miss. By performing this process, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol being processed (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot, the other special symbol will be forcibly stopped as a miss even if the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the result of the hit determination process for this other special symbol is a jackpot. After executing the process of S1064, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1065.

In S1065, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to clear the working area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing processing in S1065, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1066.

In S1066, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set a predetermined fixed waiting time on the timer for the other special symbol. In this processing, the fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a miss. After executing processing in S1066, the main CPU 1201 moves the processing to S1067.

In S1067, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2." After executing the process of S1067, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1068.

In S1068, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1068, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1069.

In S1069, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1069, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

In this way, in the special symbol variable display end processing of this embodiment, if the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol being processed, the result of the hit determination processing for this special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot, and the other special symbol is being variable displayed, processing is performed to forcibly change the variable display of the other special symbol to a miss.

[2-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to Figures 81 and 82, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1025 during the special symbol management process (see Figure 77) will be described. Figures 81 and 82 are flow charts showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the second pachinko game machine.

When this special symbol game judgment process is called at S1025 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game judgment process is called at S1025 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1071).

If it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S1071 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game play determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S1071 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1072.

At S1072, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S1072 that the reel is not a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S1072 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1073. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1072 that the reel is a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S1072 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1075.

At S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a small win has occurred, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a small win.

If it is determined in S1073 that the special symbol is not a small win, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a miss (if S1073 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1074.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 83. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1073 that a small win has occurred, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a small win (if S1073 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs start setting processing for the big win game control processing or the small win game control processing. In this processing, signals are generated and updated that are output via the external terminal board 1184 to, for example, the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 for both) or the island computer (not shown). Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After performing processing in S1075, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1076.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control process of S1075, the main CPU 1201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the special chance flag, special chance counter, time-saving flag, and time-saving counter.

In S1076, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening (for example, the large prize opening for large prizes 1131 for large prizes or the large prize opening for small prizes 1151 for small prizes) to be opened (S1077), a process of setting a large prize signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S1078), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S1080), and a process of reserving the transmission of a large prize start display command (S1081). In addition, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079) to switch the control state number, the large prize opening opening preparation process (see S1026 in FIG. 77) will be performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. The main CPU 1201 then ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1071 to S1081) within the interrupt prohibited period.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1074 during the special symbol game determination process (see Figs. 81 and 82) will be described with reference to Fig. 83. Fig. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game end process in the second pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 1201 first performs a time-saving management process (S1091). Details of this time-saving management process are similar to those described with reference to Figures 32 to 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine, so a detailed description will be omitted. After executing the process of S1091, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". When the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed in this manner, the next special symbol game can be played. After executing the process of S1092, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1093.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for setting game state designation parameters for the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving transmission of a special symbol game end command (S1094). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S1094, the main CPU 1201 terminates the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 81).

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a miss, the main CPU 1201 does not set or reset either the sure win flag or the time-saving flag. Therefore, even if a miss display mode is derived, the game state does not change.

[2-4-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 84, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1026 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 77) will be described. Fig. 84 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the second pachinko game machine.

When this large prize opening preparation process is called in S1026 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, when this large prize opening preparation process is called in S1026 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1101).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S1101 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S1101 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 loads the large prize opening counter value. When a large prize opening counter is being executed, the large prize opening counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds executed in a large prize game state. When a small prize game control process is being executed, the large prize opening counter is a counter that counts the number of times a small prize game control process is executed. The count value of the large prize opening counter (large prize opening counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 1203. After executing the process of S1102, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of times a large prize opening (e.g., the large prize opening 1131 for a large prize or the large prize opening 1151 for a small prize) has been opened is at the upper limit. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the large prize opening 1131 for a large prize that is opened in a large prize game state, is 4 rounds or 10 rounds, as shown in the prize type determination table (see FIG. 73), for example. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 1151 for a small prize that is opened in a small prize game state is 1 time, for example.

If it is determined in S1103 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened has reached the upper limit (if S1103 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1104.

In S1104, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this way, by switching the control state number by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1104), the jackpot end process (see S1028 in FIG. 77) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S1104, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1105.

In S1105, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command (S1106). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S1106, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

Returning to S1103, if it is determined that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (if S1103 returns NO), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1107.

In S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large prize opening count counter. After executing the process of S1107, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1108.

In S1108, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of selecting the large prize opening to open. In this process, if a large prize game control process is being executed, the large prize opening for large prizes 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected as the large prize opening to open, and if a small prize game control process is being executed, the large prize opening for small prizes 1151 (see FIG. 69) is selected. After executing the process of S1108, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1109.

In S1109, the main CPU 1201 performs various settings related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize openings (large prize openings for large prizes 1131 for large prizes and large prize openings for small prizes 1151 for small prizes) are opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize openings, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize openings, the number of winning balls when the large prize openings are opened, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize openings are opened corresponds to the number of rounds when the large prize opening control process is executed, and corresponds to the number of times the small prize opening 1151 is opened when the small prize opening control process is executed. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize openings are opened multiple times in one round or small prize opening control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize openings are opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S1109, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1110.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1,800 msec when the small prize game control process is being executed. The maximum number of winning balls entering the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 balls when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 5 balls when the small prize game control process is being executed. The number of winning balls entering the large prize opening is set to, for example, 10 balls for both the large prize opening 1131 for a large prize opening for a large prize opening for a small prize opening and the large prize opening 1151 for a small prize opening. However, the values set in the various setting processes related to the large prize opening are not limited to the above.

In S1110, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for controlling the opening and closing of the large prize opening. In this process, the process for generating the opening and closing control data for the large prize openings (large prize opening for large wins 1131 and large prize opening for small wins 1151) is performed. After executing the process of S1110, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1111.

In S1111, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S1111) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening opening control process (see S1027 in FIG. 77) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S1111, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1112.

In S1112, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1112, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1113.

In S1113, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1113, the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-8. Big prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 85, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1027 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 77) will be described. Fig. 85 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the second pachinko game machine.

When this large prize opening control process is called in S1027 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, when this large prize opening control process is called in S1027 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1121).

If it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S1121 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (if S1121 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1122.

In S1122, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (large prize opening for big wins 1131, large prize opening for small wins 1151) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the large prize opening entry counter (for example, the large prize opening count switch for big wins 1132, the large prize opening count switch for small wins 1152 (see FIG. 70 for both)) that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings is the maximum number of winning balls. The large prize opening entry counter value counted by the large prize opening entry counter is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 1203.

If it is determined in S1122 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large wins, large prize opening 1151 for small wins) is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S1122 returns NO), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1123.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1122 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large wins, large prize opening 1151 for small wins) is the maximum number of winning balls (if S1122 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1124.

In S1123, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large prizes, large prize opening 1151 for small prizes) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various settings process related to the large prize openings (see S1109 in FIG. 84) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening (large prize opening for large win 1131, large prize opening for small win 1151) has not elapsed (if S1123 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large prizes, large prize opening 1151 for small prizes) has elapsed (if S1123 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1124.

In S1124, the main CPU 1201 performs a process to close the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for a large win, and large prize opening 1151 for a small win). After executing the process of S1124, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1125.

In S1125, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1125) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening preparation processing (see S1026 in FIG. 77) will be performed again after this large prize opening control processing is completed. After executing processing of S1125, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1126.

In S1126, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1126, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1127.

In S1127, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S1127, the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described with reference to Fig. 86. Fig. 86 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the second pachinko game machine.

If this jackpot end process is called in S1028 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, if this jackpot end process is called in S1028 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1131).

If it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S1131 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). In this case, it returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (if S1131 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1132.

In S1132, the main CPU 1201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (e.g., high probability flag, time-saving flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.) are set or reset, and the values of various counters (e.g., high probability counter, time-saving counter, number of confirmed symbols counter, number of times large prize openings have been opened counter, large prize opening winning counter, ceiling counter, etc.) are set or reset. The special symbol pause flag and ceiling counter are both reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S1132). In addition, when the high probability flag is set to ON, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set to ON. As a result, in a high probability game state where the high probability flag is ON, the ceiling counter is not updated. After executing the process of S1132, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1133.

In S1133, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the processing of S1133, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 set an interrupt prohibited area and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited area.

[2-5. Small Hit Rush]
In the second pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small win rush can be realized. The small win rush will be described below.

As described above, the second pachinko game machine has a normal game state, a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, and a low-probability time-saving game state, and the main CPU 1201 controls the game state to one of these game states. As described above, in the normal game state, hitting from the left is considered to be the regular game mode, so the first special symbol game based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 1120 is mainly executed. In the other game states (high-probability time-saving game state, high-probability non-time-saving game state, and low-probability time-saving game state), hitting from the right is considered to be the regular game mode, so the second special symbol game based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 1140A, 1140B is mainly executed. In addition, if the winning hole included in the normal electric role unit 1145 is set as the first starting hole, the first special symbol game is primarily played in either the normal game state, the high probability time-saving game state, or the low probability time-saving game state, and the second special symbol game is primarily played in the high probability non-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, the frequency with which game balls enter the large winning port 1151 for small wins is increased compared to other game states (e.g., normal game state, high-probability time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), resulting in a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (e.g., number of winning balls, etc.) paid out per number of balls fired per unit time can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small win rush will be described. First, the game ball hit to the right passes through the passing gate 1126. In the high probability non-time-saving game state, the electric support control that operates the normal electric device 1146 to increase the frequency of opening the winning port (for example, the second start port 1140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, the big win large winning port 1131 will not be in an open state unless the big win game control process is executed, so the frequency of the second start port 1140B being in an open state in the high probability non-time-saving game state is lower than in the game state in which the time-saving control is executed. Therefore, if the small win large winning port 1151 is open, the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win the small win large winning port 1151. When the game ball wins the small win large winning port 1151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. In addition, a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can enter the second start port 1140A. When a game ball enters the second start port 1140A, 1140B, not only is a stop display mode that indicates a small win with a relatively high probability of 1 in 3 (approximately) as shown in the hit determination table for special symbols (see FIG. 71), but also a super-fast fluctuation (for example, variable display time 1000 msec) is executed as shown in the fluctuation pattern table for special symbols for high start (see FIG. 75), so that the frequency of game balls entering the large winning port 1151 for small wins is increased compared to other game states (for example, normal game state, high probability time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time can exceed 1.

On the other hand, in a game state where time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state), the second start port 1140B is opened by the execution of the electric support control, and most of the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b enter the second start port 1140B. Therefore, even if the small win large winning port 1151 is open, the expectation of a game ball entering the small win large winning port 1151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second start port 1140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. When a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a enters the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out, but only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a enter the second starting port 1140A. In this way, in a game state in which time-saving control is executed, the expected value of the game value (e.g., number of prize balls) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time does not exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, a left hit is considered to be the normal game mode, but if a right hit is performed, when the game ball hit from the right passes through the passing gate 1126 and a stop display mode indicating a normal pattern win is derived, the normal electric device 1146 is activated, and the game ball enters the second start port 1140B, which may open the large winning port for small wins 1151. However, in the normal game state, the variation pattern of the special pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special pattern for low start (see FIG. 74), so even if the game ball enters the second start port 1140A, 1140B, the variable display of the second special pattern is performed in one of the long variation A to C, which has an extremely long variation time, and the frequency with which the large winning port for small wins 1151 is opened is extremely low. Therefore, there is no practical benefit for the player to hit from the right in the normal game state. In addition, if the winning hole included in the normal electric role unit 1145 is the first starting hole, the probability of winning a normal symbol in the normal game state may be set to 0, for example, so that there is no practical benefit to hitting to the right. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (e.g., the number of winning balls) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time does not exceed 1, and is smaller than the game state in which time-saving control is executed.

In this embodiment, the small win rush occurs in a high probability non-time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the small win rush may occur in a high probability time-saving game state in which special symbol shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time of the special symbol without executing electric support control.

[3. The third pachinko game machine]
Next, the third pachinko game machine will be described. As described above, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine called a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, and there are a first route and a second route as routes until the machine is controlled to a jackpot game state. The first route is when a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. The second route is when the V attacker is opened by deriving a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a "gimmick opening hit", and the game ball that entered the opened V attacker enters the V winning hole in the V attacker.

The third pachinko gaming machine is a priority variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, and the start condition of the second special symbol is established with priority over the start condition of the first special symbol. However, it is not limited to this, and may be a sequential variable machine as described above.

In the following explanation of the third pachinko gaming machine, we will omit as much as possible explanation of the functions, shapes, and positions that are common to the first pachinko gaming machine, such as the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, and the signals output from the external terminal board 2184 (see Figure 88 described below) to outside the third pachinko gaming machine (for example, the hall computer 2186 (see Figure 88 described below) and the island computers (not shown) installed on each island).

In describing the third pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to the drawings used in describing the first pachinko gaming machine, using the same reference numbers and step numbers as the first pachinko gaming machine. However, the configuration will be described with reference to new drawings used in describing the third pachinko gaming machine, using different reference numbers and step numbers than the first pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions, etc. as the first pachinko gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 2010 of the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 87. This game board unit 2010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 provided in the third pachinko game machine. A game area 2105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 2010, in which the released game balls can roll and flow down.

Note that the various components (e.g., the first starting hole 2120, etc.) arranged in the play area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine share some in common with the various components arranged in the play area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine, but will be explained in detail again.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 is formed in which a launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 2110, a center role 2115 located approximately in the center of the game area 2105, a first start opening 2120, a second start opening 2140, a general winning opening 2122, a passing gate unit 2125, a special electric role unit 2130, a normal electric role unit 2145, an LED unit 2160, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 2160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description thereof will be omitted for this third pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 2100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. A guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 2100, and gaming nails (no reference number) and the like are planted therein. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 2110 toward the gaming area 2105, collides with the gaming nails, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 2105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) with decorative bodies is arranged behind the gaming panel 2100 to enhance the presentation effect. The gaming panel 2100 is made of transparent resin so that the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front. In this case, the entire gaming panel 2100 may be made of transparent materials, or, for example, only the parts where the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front may be made of transparent materials. In addition, the gaming panel 2100 may be made of materials that do not have transparent parts (for example, wood), and transparent materials may be provided in some parts to enhance the presentation effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which have no reference number) similar to the first pachinko game machine. The play area 2105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 2110. The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 2006 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the upper part of the play area 2105.

(Center role)
The center device 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (without reference number) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 2116 at the top. Game balls launched toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

A game ball launched by the launching device 2006 towards the game area 2105 flows down the left area 2106 or the right area 2107. A game ball flowing down the left area 2106 or the right area 2107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 2107.

The center device 2115 also has a warp entrance 2117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which game balls flowing down the left area 2106 can enter. Game balls that enter the warp entrance 2117 are configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed in the center device 2115. The stage 2118 is formed in front of the lower edge of the display area of the display device 2007 so that the game balls can roll in the left-right direction. The stage 2118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 2119 through which game balls can enter is formed at the rear of the stage 2118, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and game balls that enter the chance entrance 2119 are configured to be released directly above the first start opening 2120. Therefore, game balls that enter the chance entrance 2119 have a higher probability of entering (passing through) the first start opening 2120 than game balls that do not enter the warp entrance 2117, or game balls that enter the warp entrance 2117 but do not enter the chance entrance 2119.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 2120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 2007, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or is impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 2120, it is detected by a first starting hole switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later). It is also possible that a game ball hit from the right can win in the first starting hole 2120. Also, instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting hole 2120, a first starting hole that allows a game ball hit from the right to win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or is impossible to win) may be provided.

When the first start hole switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 2120, start information for the first special pattern is extracted, and a predetermined number of the extracted start information (for example, a maximum of four) is reserved. When the start conditions are met, the reserved start information is used in the winning determination process for the first special pattern. When a game ball enters the first start hole 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 2140 is arranged so that a game ball hit from the right can win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or cannot win). However, this is not limited to this, and a game ball hit from the left may be able to win in the second starting hole 2140.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 2140, it is detected by the second start hole switch 2141. When the second start hole switch 2141 (see FIG. 88 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start hole 2140, start information for the second special pattern is extracted, and a predetermined number of the extracted start information (for example, up to four) are reserved. The reserved start information is used in the winning determination process for the second special pattern. When a game ball enters the second start hole 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 2140 is not limited to this.

(General Prize Winners)
A plurality of general winning openings 2122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit from the left can win a prize (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win a prize). When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 2122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the general prize opening switch 2123 (see Figure 88 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 2122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 2122 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2122 is positioned so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the right to win, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the general winning opening 2122 described above, a general winning opening through which a game ball hit from the right can win may be provided.

(Passing gate unit)
The passing gate unit 2125 is a unit body that is an integrated unit of a passing gate 2126 that is arranged in the right area 2107 and is configured so that the game ball hit from the right side can pass through, and a passing gate switch 2127 (see FIG. 88 described later) that detects the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 2126. When the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 2126 is detected, the starting information of the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). The reserved various data are used for the winning judgment process of the normal pattern. Note that even if the passing gate switch 2127 detects the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 2126, the prize ball is not paid out. The passing gate unit 2125 may be arranged in the left area 2106 instead of or in addition to the right area 2107.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 is a unit body that integrates a large prize opening 2131, a large prize opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later) that detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the large prize opening 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. The special electric accessory unit 2130 is disposed below the passing gate unit 2125 in the right side area 2107.

The large prize opening 2131 is positioned so that game balls hit from the right can win (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or difficulty winning). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the large prize opening 2131 described above, a large prize opening that allows game balls hit from the left to win may be arranged, or a large prize opening that allows game balls to win may be arranged above the center gimmick 2115.

The large prize opening 2131 is an opening that is opened to allow a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) to enter (pass through) when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. When the large prize opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described below) detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 2131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 2131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric device 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 88 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134. The special electric device 2133, i.e., the special electric shutter 2134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the large prize opening 2131 or easily, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large prize opening 2131 or is difficult to enter. The large prize opening 2131 transitions from a closed state to an open state when the game enters a jackpot game state via the first route described above. When the game enters a jackpot game state via the first route described above, the transition from the closed state to the open state is performed for a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the jackpot game state via the first route is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing multiple rounds of round play in which the jackpot opening 2131 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 2145 is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through), a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 2146, and is disposed in the right area 2107. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second start hole 2140, and the switch is the second start hole switch 2141.

The normal electric device 2146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 2147 that can move back and forth, and a normal power solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 88 described below) that operates the normal power shutter 2147. The normal electric device 2146, i.e., the normal power shutter 2147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting hole 2140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 2140. Note that instead of the normal power shutter 2147 that can move back and forth, a movable member known as an electric chute may be used.

(V prize device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passing gate 2126 in the right area 2107. The V winning device 2150 comprises an opening and closing winning port 2151 opened to allow a game ball to enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 capable of opening and closing the opening and closing winning port 2151, a V attacker solenoid 2154 which operates the V attacker 2152 to open and close the opening and closing winning port 2151, a V attacker count switch 2153 which detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, a V winning port 2155 through which a game ball which has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening and closing winning port 2151 can pass, and a V attacker count switch 2153 which detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, and a V winning port 2155 through which a game ball which has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening and closing winning port 2151 can pass. The V winning device 2150 includes a V winning port switch 2156 for detecting that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 has entered (passed) the V winning port 2155, a losing port 2157 through which game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 but have not entered the V winning port 2155 can enter (pass), a V shutter 2158 for opening and closing the V winning port 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 for operating the V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning port 2155, and a locking member 2160 for holding only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150. The V winning device 2150 may be provided upstream of the passing gate 2126 or in the left area 2106.

The V attacker 2152 is made of an arc-shaped member, and is normally in a closed state in which the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is closed. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and a stop display mode is derived indicating a "hit on the opening of the special device" described below, the V attacker solenoid 2154 (see FIG. 88 described below) is activated to activate the V attacker 2152, for example, once, almost simultaneously with the end of the variable display of the special symbol. When the V attacker 2152 is activated once, the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is in an open state in which it is open for, for example, 1800 msec. Then, while the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is open due to the activation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 per opening is, for example, 10.

The manner in which the V attacker 2152 is opened when a stop display mode indicating a "hit on the opening of the special feature" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, it may be opened twice for 900 msec, or may be closed when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., one) enter the interior of the V winning device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning device 2150. When the V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning device 2150, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and increments the value of the V attacker winning counter, which is a function of the main CPU 2201. When the V attacker winning counter reaches a specified value, the V attacker 2152 is activated by the V attacker solenoid 2154, and the opening/closing winning port 2151 is closed, even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) that the opening/closing winning port 2151 can be opened has not elapsed.

The V attacker 2152 continues to be controlled to open when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 2155. In other words, the V winning hole 2155 is the winning hole that triggers control to a jackpot game state via the second route described above.

The V winning hole switch 2156 detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 2155. When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 2155 within a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 opens, it continues to control the opening of the V attacker 2152. In other words, it is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route. When it is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 transitions from a closed state to an open state is played for a predetermined number of rounds.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the first route, a round game is executed in which the large prize winning port 2131 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state, whereas when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the V attacker 2152 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state in the first round, but a round game in which, for example, the large prize winning port 2131 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state may be executed midway through the round game.

In addition, for example, by providing a V entry port inside the special electric device 2133 (i.e., the area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is in the open state), it is possible to have one V entry port and one attacker that is opened in the jackpot game state. In this case, when a stop display mode indicating a "game device open hit" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and when a game ball enters the V entry port 2155 provided inside the special electric device 2133, control is performed to the jackpot game state (jackpot game state via the second route).

The losing port 2157 is configured to allow game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but have not passed through the V winning port 2155 to enter (pass through). Game balls that pass through the losing port 2157 are discharged outside the machine. Note that if all game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the losing port 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends.

The V shutter 2158 constantly operates in a constant manner between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for game balls to pass through the V winning opening 2155 and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for game balls to pass through the V winning opening 2155, by the operation of the V shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 88 described below). In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 constantly operates in a cycle (period) of 7000 msec, repeating the operation of "closed for 6000 msec -> open for 1000 msec -> closed for 6000 msec".

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning port 2155, and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one of the game balls that enter the V winning device 2150. Game balls that enter the V winning device 2150 but are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged outside the machine from the losing port 2157. Even if multiple game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all game balls that are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged outside the machine from the losing port 2157.

In addition, after a certain time (e.g., 3000 msec) has elapsed since the V attacker 2152 was activated, the locking member 2160 releases the game ball by the activation of a locking solenoid (not shown). The game ball that has been released from the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning port 2155, and if the V winning port 2155 is open at this time, it enters (passes through) the V winning port 2155, and if the V winning port 2155 is closed at this time, it passes through the losing port 2157. Note that the locking member 2160 may not be provided and game balls that enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning port 2155 or the losing port 2157.

(Outlet)
The outlet 2178 is for discharging game balls that have been shot toward the game area 2105 but have not won or entered any of the various winning ports (for example, the first start port 2120, the second start port 2140, the large winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150, the general winning port 2122, etc.) to the outside of the machine. This outlet 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 2178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between multiple general winning ports 2122 or between the special electric role unit 2130 and the second start port 2140, so that game balls flowing down the game area 2105 can be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) is used to decorate the game board unit 2010, as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 2100. This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007, and is provided with a group of performance-use accessories 2058, such as movable accessories, controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300. At least one of the performance-use accessory group 2058 or a performance-use accessory component constituting the accessory functions as a performance-use accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 88. Fig. 88 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine. Note that the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine has some parts in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, but will be described again in detail.

As shown in FIG. 88, the third pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 2200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 2300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read-write memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 2201 is connected to the main ROM 2202, the main RAM 2203, the initial reset circuit 2204, etc. The main CPU 2201 has built-in functions such as a WDT that monitors operation and a function for preventing fraud.

The main ROM 2202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the third pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 2201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 has a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 2203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201. Note that, although in this embodiment, RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201, this is not limited to this, and any readable and writable storage medium can be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 2203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 2200 also includes an I/O port 2205 that is connected to various devices and other devices so as to be able to communicate with each other, and a command output port 2206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 2300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 2300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, the main control circuit 2200 is connected to the normal symbol display unit 2161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 2162, the first special symbol display unit 2163, the second special symbol display unit 2164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 2165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 2166, the time-saving notification display unit 2168, the normal power solenoid 2148, the special power solenoid 2135, the V attacker solenoid 2154, and the V shutter solenoid 2159. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected to the performance display monitor 2170 and the error notification monitor 2172. The main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the proportion of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 2172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, for example, if the pachinko game machine has a setting function, the error notification monitor 2172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc. Note that the setting change code may be a special symbol that is not normally displayed (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that a setting change is in progress).

The main control circuit 2200 is also connected to the first start port switch 2121, the second start port switch 2141, the pass gate switch 2127, the large prize port count switch 2132, the V attacker count switch 2153, the V prize port switch 2156, and the general prize port switch 2123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to the main control circuit 2200 via the I/O port 2205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 2200 is connected to a calling device (not shown) having functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 2184 used to send data to a hall computer 2186 that manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall, a setting key socket 2174 into which a setting key 2174a is inserted that is operated to change or check the setting value if the pachinko machine has a setting function, and a RAM clear switch 2176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 according to the operation of the gaming center manager. Note that if the pachinko machine has a setting function, the RAM clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided.

The setting key insertion port 2174 and the RAM clear switch 2176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the manager of the game arcade. "Inside a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key insertion port 2174 and the RAM clear switch 2176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key insertion port 2174 and the RAM clear switch 2176, and a case in which the manager of the game arcade can touch the setting key insertion port 2174 and/or the RAM clear switch 2176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game arcade to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key slot 2174 and the RAM clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 2400 or the power supply circuit 2450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the person in charge of the arcade from easily touching the setting key slot 2174 or the RAM clear switch 2176.

[3-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 2300 includes a sub-CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, a sound control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, a role control circuit 2307, and a command input port 2308. The sub-control circuit 2300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 2200. Although not shown in FIG. 88, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected to the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player, as in the first pachinko game machine.

The program ROM 2302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the third pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 2301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 2301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub-CPU 2301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for controlling the display of the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 2301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 2032. The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as an AMP) for amplifying the audio signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. In response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub-CPU 2301, the sound source IC selects one piece of sound data from multiple pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a specified sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046, which includes decorative LEDs. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The reel control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of reels for performance 2058). The reel control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a reel data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored.

The reel control circuit 2307 selects one of the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 2301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one of the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 2301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 2308 is connected to the command output port 2206 and receives commands sent from the main control circuit 2200.

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls from the pachinko game machine, and is connected to a payout device 2082 for paying out game balls, a launch device 2006 for launching game balls, a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 2400 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls.

A ball lending operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (neither is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 2400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation), and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.

The power supply circuit 2450 is connected to a power switch 2095 and other components. The power switch 2095 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 89 to 92. The third pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

The third pachinko gaming machine does not execute the probability bonus control. The third pachinko gaming machine also has a normal gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed, and a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed, and the main CPU 2201 can proceed with the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state.

In this embodiment, in the normal game mode, left hitting is the regular game mode, and in the time-saving game mode, right hitting is the regular game mode. The sub-CPU 2301 executes control to display the hitting method that is the regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 2007.

[3-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 89 shows an example of a special symbol winning determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 89, when a game ball enters (passes) the first starting hole 2120, the main CPU 2201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol to be a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" based on the hit determination process for the first special symbol using a random number value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol. Also, when a game ball enters (passes) the second starting hole 2140, the main CPU 2201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol to be a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "gimmick release hit" based on the hit determination process for the second special symbol using a random number value for jackpot determination of the second special symbol.

It is not essential that a "hit on the release of the special feature" is not determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but even if a "hit on the release of the special feature" is determined, it is preferable that the probability of the "hit on the release of the special feature" is extremely low compared to when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed (for example, a probability equal to or lower than a "jackpot"). Also, it is not essential that a "miss" is not determined when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, but if a "miss" is determined, the probability may be higher than the probability of the "hit on the release of the special feature" or lower than the probability of the "hit on the release of the special feature".

In the hit determination table for the special symbols stored in the main ROM 2202, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "time-saving hit", a "jackpot", or a "miss" and the corresponding determination value data ("time-saving hit determination value data", "jackpot determination value data", "miss determination value data") is specified as data used in the hit determination process for the first special symbol executed based on the winning of the first starting hole 2120. In addition, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "time-saving hit", a "jackpot", or a "gimmick release hit" and the corresponding determination value data ("time-saving hit determination value data", "jackpot determination value data", "gimmick release hit determination value data") is specified as data used in the hit determination process for the second special symbol executed based on the winning of the second starting hole 2140.

In addition, this third pachinko game machine does not have a function to change the jackpot probability determined for a "jackpot," but this is not essential, and the jackpot probability may be increased, for example, by setting a probability-change flag to ON depending on the type of jackpot, etc.

In addition, in this third pachinko gaming machine, the total random number value for the random number value used to determine a jackpot is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, the random number value for determining a jackpot is generated within the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

When the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting, or the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the jackpot probability may be set to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting, or the probability of hitting the jackpot may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be higher in the high setting than in the low setting. However, even if the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the probability of hitting the time-saving feature to be the same for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the jackpot probability or the probability of winning the special feature opening according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 may be changed for each set value to change the winning rate for the V winning device 2150, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning port 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning port 2155, or the number of times the time-saving continuation may be changed for each set value. In other words, by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of winning the special feature opening, the opening frequency of the V winning port 2155 (i.e., the operation frequency of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times the time-saving continuation may be changed, the expected value controlled in the jackpot game state may be configured to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 90 shows an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "select symbol command" and a "symbol designation command" that determine the stopping symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the gaming ball enters the starting hole 2120, 2140 and the aforementioned determination value data. The "select symbol command" is a command for designating the winning symbol determined according to the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 90, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 99.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 61 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, when the winning determination process for the second special symbol results in the obtaining of the winning determination value data for the opening of the reel, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

Although the third pachinko gaming machine will not be described, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol that is output to the first special symbol display unit 2163 or the second special symbol display unit 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, in response to a selected symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display units 2163 and 2164 derive the display mode of the time-saving hit, the display mode of the jackpot, the display mode of the gimmick opening hit, or the display mode of the miss based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 2302 of the sub-control circuit 2300.

[3-3-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
FIG. 91 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 of the third pachinko game machine. The winning type determination table is referred to when determining the mode of the big win game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the mode of the subsequent game state (more specifically, the time-saving flag and the end condition of the time-saving) according to the selection pattern command determined in response to the pattern random number value of the special pattern. The mode of the subsequent game state indicates the mode of the game state after the big win game state ends. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special pattern is a time-saving hit, the game state is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the big win game state. "L" shown in the column of the time-saving end condition in FIG. 91 indicates the sum of the variable display number of the first special pattern and the variable display number of the second special pattern. Similarly, "M" indicates the variable display number of the second special pattern, and "N" indicates the number of times of the opening of the special device. Note that the remarks in the remarks column of FIG. 91 are written for convenience and to make it easier to understand.

In this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the mode of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time-saving flag on, and determines the time-saving end conditions to be L=30, M=6, and N=3. Also, if the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time-saving flag on, and determines the time-saving end conditions to be L=30, M=3, and N=3. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state is not determined.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "jackpot", the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state and the mode of the subsequent game state (A time-saving game state) are determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time-saving flag on, and determines the end conditions of the time-saving to be L = 50, M = 5, N = 2. In addition, if the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, determines to set the time-saving flag on, and determines the end conditions of the time-saving to be L = 50, M = 5, N = 1. In addition, if the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines not to set the time-saving flag on. Furthermore, if the selected symbol command is "z6," the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time-saving flag to ON, and determines the conditions for ending the time-saving mode to be L=50, M=5, and N=2.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "release of the special feature" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time-saving flag to ON, and determines the time-saving end conditions to be L = 50, M = 5, and N = 2. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "release of the special feature", if the game state is not controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 not only does not execute the jackpot game state, but also does not set the time-saving flag to ON, and after executing control based on the special feature hit, returns to the game state immediately before the special feature hit.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 does not set either the state of the big win game state or the state of the game state thereafter. In other words, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 2201 does not transition the game state, but continues to control the game state up to that point.

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z4"), as described above, neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is set, so there is no need to illustrate this in the hit type determination table of FIG. 91. However, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, it is illustrated in FIG. 91 to clearly show that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss", neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is determined.

The "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of the time-saving termination conditions in FIG. 91 are all the same conditions regardless of the game state, but are not limited to this and may be different conditions depending on the game state. For example, all of the termination conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different for the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, respectively, or may be different only for one of the time-saving game states among the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. Also, only one of the termination conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different for the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, respectively, or may be different only for one of the time-saving game states among the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In other words, at least one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different in at least one of the time-saving play states A, B, and C.

[3-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
Fig. 92 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols of the third pachinko game machine. The "Notes" column in Fig. 92 is shown for convenience. The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the winning is based on the winning of a game ball into the first start hole 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the winning is based on the winning of a game ball into the second start hole 2140.

As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 2140.

As shown in FIG. 92, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the first starting hole 2120.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the first starting hole 2120.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "miss," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the time-saving flag, the reach determination random number value and the effect selection random number value extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes) the first starting hole 2120. Note that, since hitting to the right is considered the regular gaming mode in the time-saving gaming state, it is considered that the gaming ball will rarely enter the first starting hole 2120.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the second starting hole 2140.

In addition, if the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the second starting hole 2140.

If the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "hit with the release of the special feature" and the value of the time-saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol based on the reach determination random number value and the performance selection random number value extracted when the gaming ball enters the second start hole 2140.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "hit on the release of the reel" and the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to be a long fluctuation presentation with an extremely long fluctuation time, for example, 600,000 msec. If the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the game ball will not basically enter (pass) the second start hole 2140, but even if an unforeseen event occurs and the game ball does enter the second start hole 2140, this is done to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player, but this is not necessarily required.

The random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 2201 sets a look-ahead flag if the random number value for effect selection extracted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 2120 is a specific random number value. The sub-CPU 2301, which receives the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 2201, performs a look-ahead effect if the look-ahead flag is set.

For convenience, although it is not shown in the special symbol variation pattern table in FIG. 92, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the probability bonus flag is on.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 decides whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, but this is not limited to this, and the sub-CPU 2301 may decide.

The main CPU 2201 may also set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead performance) when the time-saving flag or the probability-change flag is on. The main CPU 2201 may also set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead performance) when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

When the time-saving flag is on, the expected number of changes per unit time for the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined is smaller than when the time-saving flag is off. In other words, the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is on is likely to be shorter than the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub-CPU 2301. The sub-CPU 2301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

In addition, the time-saving hit type reaches A and B shown in the "Notes" column of Figure 92 are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Similarly, the jackpot type reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

Although the third pachinko gaming machine will not be described, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 stores a normal symbol winning determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol winning type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19). The main CPU 2201 then determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 2146 (see FIG. 87) in the same manner as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operation mode of the normal electric device 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 are the same as those executed by the main CPU 2201 except for the special symbol control process executed in S39 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23). Therefore, the following will describe the special symbol control process, and will omit a description of the other processes executed by the main CPU 2201. Note that, although some of the processes executed in the special symbol control process in the third pachinko game machine are the same as those executed in the first pachinko game machine (for example, the jackpot end process (Figs. 42 and 103)), the following will describe the same processes as those executed in the first pachinko game machine with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 93. Fig. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S2001, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 2201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the processing of S2001, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the working area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203, etc., in a predetermined register.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of checking the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol. Then, when both the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 2201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process. Note that the demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 2300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 2301 performs a demo display performance. Note that the second pachinko game machine is not a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, and therefore does not have the concept of a main special symbol as described in the first pachinko game machine.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a state waiting for variable display.

If it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (if S2002 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (if S2002 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is not pending (if S2003 returns NO), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is not pending (if S2004 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is pending (if S2004 returns YES), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

Returning to S2003, if it is determined that the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is pending (if S2003 returns YES), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. After executing the processing of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt prohibited period.

Thus, in this embodiment, the third pachinko gaming machine is described as a priority variable machine in which the special pattern management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special pattern when the start information of the second special pattern is reserved, but this is not limited to this. For example, the third pachinko gaming machine may be a priority variable machine in which the special pattern management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special pattern when the start information of the first special pattern is reserved, or a sequential variable machine in which the special pattern management process is executed in the order of winning in the first start port 2120 or the second start port 2140.

[3-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93) will be described with reference to Fig. 94. Fig. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When the control state number is 0 (when S2002 is judged as YES), the special pattern management process processes the second special pattern if S2003 is judged as YES, and processes the first special pattern if S2004 is judged as YES. Also, when the control state number is not 0 (when S2002 is judged as NO), the special pattern management process processes the special pattern currently being executed.

The numbers ("0" to "7") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 94 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 2201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S2011).

If it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (if S2011 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S2011 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2012, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2013. The main CPU 2201 performs the processes from S2013 onward based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. This S2013 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. This S2014 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2015.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This process of S2015 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs a V winning device opening preparation process. This S2016 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs a V winning device opening control process. This S2017 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2018.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process in S2018 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 101. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S2019 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot end process. This S2020 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

After completing steps S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to Fig. 95. Fig. 95 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the third pachinko game machine.

Note that if the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, if the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S2021 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S2021 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol hit determination process. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 89) is referenced, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a random number value for determining whether the special symbol is a hit. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is the target of processing, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a jackpot, or a miss. Also, if the second special symbol is the target of processing, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a jackpot, or a role-opening hit. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stopping symbol of the special symbol that corresponds to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, a time-saving hit, a big hit, a role-opening hit, or a miss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 90) is referenced, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol is used to determine the above-mentioned "select symbol command" or "symbol designation command." After executing the process of S2024, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (time-saving hit, jackpot, or special feature release hit). In this process, the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024) by referring to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91). Note that the type of win determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a special feature release hit is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed by the game ball passing through the V winning hole 2155 opened based on the special feature release hit. In addition, in this embodiment, the types of time-saving hit, jackpot, and special feature release hit are all multiple types, but the type of time-saving hit, jackpot, and/or special feature release hit may be one type. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing multiple types of time-saving hits, jackpots, and/or feature release hits, multiple types of misses may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referenced, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, for example, according to the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (S2023), the value of the time-saving flag, the random number value for reach judgment and/or the random number value for performance selection. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the change pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referenced, and the change time corresponding to the change pattern determined in the change pattern determination process for the special symbol (S2026) is determined as the change time for the special symbol. After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, a special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is performed. After executing the process of S2028, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state (e.g., the number of times remaining in the special mode and the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 is performed. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs game status management processing. This processing mainly involves updating various flags related to game status management (e.g., probability bonus flags, time-saving flags, etc.). After executing S2030, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game status management process (S2030) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S2031)) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to Fig. 96. Fig. 96 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the third pachinko game machine.

If the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, if the special symbol variable display end process is a process called in S2014 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S2041 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S2041 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2044.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. As described above in the explanation of the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, the determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is determined (the number of times a special symbol game has been played), but it may also manage the number of games of a special symbol game played under a specific state, such as the number of times a special symbol game is remaining or the number of times a time-saving game is remaining. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to Fig. 97. Fig. 97 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

Note that if this special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the target of processing, the first special symbol is the target of processing. Similarly, if the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the target of processing, the second special symbol is the target of processing.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S2051 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game play determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S2051 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S2052 that the reel is not a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S2052 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2060. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2052 that the reel is a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S2052 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2053. Note that if the special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a win for the release of a special reel, or if the special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a miss, then a NO judgment is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing for the jackpot game control processing. In this processing, signals (e.g., jackpot signals, etc.) that are output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 are generated and updated. Note that the signal that is generated and updated in this processing is a hit signal for the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S2053, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2054.

In addition, in the start setting process for jackpot game control in S2053, the main CPU 2201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the time-saving flag and the time-saving counter.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 2131 can be opened (S2055), a process of setting a large prize signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2057), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S2058), and a process of reserving the transmission of a large prize start display command (S2059). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2057), the large prize opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

At S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a special feature has been opened, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a special feature has been opened.

If it is determined in S2060 that the special symbol that has stopped is not a winning combination, i.e., that the special symbol that has stopped is a winning combination (if S2060 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2061. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2060 that the special symbol that has stopped is a winning combination, i.e., that the special symbol that has stopped is a winning combination (if S2060 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2061.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing for game control when a special feature is opened. In this processing, signals (e.g., a special feature opening signal, etc.) that are output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 are generated and updated. Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S2061, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to set the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 can be opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 can be opened, set in this process, is, for example, 1 time. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processes such as setting a signal for opening a special device to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), setting a game state designation parameter (S2065), and reserving the transmission of a display command for starting a special device to be opened (S2066). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 98. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibited period.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described with reference to Fig. 98. Fig. 98 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first performs time-saving management processing (S2071). The third pachinko gaming machine, which is called a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, is not controlled to a high probability gaming state, so the time-saving management processing executed in the third pachinko gaming machine differs from the processing described with reference to Figures 32 to 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine. Specifically, in the first pachinko gaming machine, it was described that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on when the probability variable flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, but the third pachinko gaming machine is not controlled to a high probability gaming state. Therefore, it differs in that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, instead of being set to on when the probability variable flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. Also, in the first pachinko gaming machine, in the time-saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), it is determined whether the probability variable flag is off (see S191), and then the process of S192 is performed on the condition that the probability variable flag is off. However, in the third pachinko gaming machine, as described above, it is not controlled to a high probability gaming state, so it differs in that it performs the process of S192 without performing the process of S191. The other processes in the time-saving management process are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 32 to FIG. 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S2071, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". By carrying out the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" in this way, the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to carry out the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After carrying out the process of S2072, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2073.

In S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for setting game state designation parameters for the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving transmission of a special symbol game end command (S2074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S2074, the main CPU 2201 terminates the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97).

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 99, a V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2016 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 94) will be described. Fig. 99 is a flow chart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S2081 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S2081 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of openings as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the operation pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to a maximum of 1800 msec opening only once, but the opening pattern is not limited to this, and for example, a maximum of 900 msec opening may be performed a maximum of two times per opening, or the first opening may be performed for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second opening may be performed for a maximum of 1200 msec. Furthermore, multiple opening patterns may be provided for each opening of the role within a total time not exceeding a specified time (for example, 1800 msec), and one of these multiple opening patterns may be set based on, for example, the random number value of the special pattern. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this processing, processing is performed to generate opening/closing control data for the V winning port 2155. After executing the processing of S2083, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S2084), the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) is performed after the V winning device opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S2084, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process for the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device open preparation process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 100, a V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 94) will be described. Fig. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S2091 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (if S2091 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls that entered the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 was opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of winning game balls that entered the V winning device 2150, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 2203.

If it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls that have won in the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S2092 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2093.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls that have won in the V winning device 2150 is the maximum number of winning balls (if S2092 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the maximum opening time of the open/close winning port 2151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 99) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (if S2093 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (if S2093 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2094.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of closing the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the open/close winning port 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a V entry has been detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the V entry port 2155 within a specified time (i.e., whether or not detection has occurred by the V entry port switch 2156). Note that the above-mentioned specified time may be any time related to the entry of a game ball into the V entry device 2150, and may be, for example, within a specified time from when the V attacker 2152 begins to operate, or within a specified time from when the game ball is released from the engagement by the engagement member 2160, etc.

If it is determined in S2095 that a V win has been detected (if S2095 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for V hit game control. In this process, a signal (e.g., a V hit signal, etc.) output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal for the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game judgment process. When the V hit game control is executed, for example, 15 rounds of round play are executed as shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91), so that the player can win a large number of prize balls as in the case where the jackpot game control process is executed. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V hit game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and called, but the V hit game control can also be called the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2097.

In addition, in the V hit game control start setting process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the time-saving flag and time-saving counter.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the operation of the V attacker 2152), which was first performed based on the opening of the reel, is processed as the first round of round play. In other words, the V winning game control, which is executed when it is determined that a V winning has been detected (S2095 is determined as YES), will start from the second round of round play. After performing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (i.e., the number of times the V attacker 2152 is operated) (S2099), a process of setting a V hit signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100), a process of setting the control state number of the special pattern to "5" (S2101), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S2102), and a process of reserving the transmission of a V hit start display command (S2103). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special pattern to "5" (S2101), a process of preparing to open the large winning port (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special pattern game judgment process is completed. The main CPU 2201 then ends the special pattern game determination process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined that no V win was detected in S2095 (if S2095 returns NO), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the processing of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-9. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 101, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 94) will be described. Fig. 101 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S2111 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (if S2111 is judged as YES), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in the jackpot game state. The round counter count value (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 2203. After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of times the jackpot opening has been opened is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of times the round play has been performed in the jackpot play state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S2113 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened has reached the upper limit (if S2113 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S2114), the jackpot end process (see S2020 in FIG. 94) will be performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command (S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2113, if it is determined that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (if S2113 returns NO), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing processing of S2117, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2118.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of selecting the large prize opening to be opened. In this process, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is a big prize, and the stop display mode indicating a big prize is derived (YES judgment is made at S2052 in FIG. 97), and the game control is started by the big prize opening, the large prize opening 2131 is selected as the large prize opening to be opened. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a role release hit, and the stop display mode indicating the role release is derived (YES judgment is made at S2060 in FIG. 97), and further, the V winning is detected (YES judgment is made at S2095 in FIG. 100), and the game control is started by the V winning, the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the open/close winning opening 2151) is selected as the large prize opening to be opened. After executing processing of S2118, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150, the number of winning balls when the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is won, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing processing of S2119, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2120.

The above "large prize opening 2131 or V prize device 2150" corresponds to the large prize opening selected in S2118 as the large prize opening to be opened between the large prize opening 2131 and the V prize device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for controlling the opening and closing of the large prize opening. In this process, the process for generating the opening and closing control data for the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S2121), the large prize opening opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-10. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 102, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 94) will be described. Fig. 102 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (if S2131 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (if S2131 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the large prize opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of winning game balls in the large prize opening 2131, or the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of game balls that have entered the V prize device 2150, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the large prize opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 2203.

If it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is not the maximum number of prizes (if S2132 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2133.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is the maximum number of prizes (if S2132 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2134.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the large prize opening related various setting process (see S2119 in FIG. 101) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 has not elapsed (if S2133 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 has elapsed (if S2133 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to close the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150. After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2135), the large prize opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S2135, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing S2136, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-11. Big win end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to Fig. 103. Fig. 103 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (if S2141 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, it returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (if S2141 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (e.g., a probability change flag, a time-saving flag, etc.) are set, and the values of various counters (e.g., a probability change counter, a time-saving counter, a number of confirmed symbols counter, a round counter, a large prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing S2142, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the processing of S2143, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end processing and also ends the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 93). In this case, as described above, the processing returns to the processing from which the jackpot end processing was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 set an interrupt prohibited section and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[4. Extension Example]
The following describes an example of an extension common to the first, second, and third pachinko game machines. Since the symbols attached to the components are different depending on the first, second, and third pachinko game machines, the symbols are omitted in the following description except when the description is limited to a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third pachinko game machine).

[4-1. Example of extended probability control]
In the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, whether or not to set the special probability flag on is determined depending on the type of jackpot, and when the special probability flag is set on, the number of special probability rounds is determined, but this is not limited to this and may be, for example, in the following manner.

For example, the machine may be a so-called V-type high probability machine that determines whether or not a specific area provided in a large prize opening has been passed during execution of the jackpot game control process, and sets a high probability flag to ON when it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area at the end of the jackpot game control process. Note that the specific area can be changed between an open state where game balls can or easily pass through and a closed state where game balls cannot or have difficulty entering, for example, by the operation of a movable member during a specific round of play during execution of the jackpot game control process.

In such a V-type high probability machine, for example, the ease with which the game ball passes through the above-mentioned specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, i.e., the probability that the high probability flag will be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process, may be different between when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot, as will be described later with reference to Figures 104 to 107.

Figure 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the jackpot opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round of play during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, and shows a case where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. Note that the first opening mode and the second opening mode are modes in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through to the specific area, and the third opening mode is a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through to the specific area. Note that in the example shown in Figure 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Note that, although FIG. 104 shows the large prize opening being opened for a short time and then opened for a long time, the opening manner of the large prize opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104(A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is open while the large prize opening is open, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the large prize opening has begun. Therefore, while the jackpot game control process is being executed, it is easy for at least one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area. In other words, the special probability flag is likely to be set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends. However, if no game balls have passed through the specific area despite the specific area being open, the special probability flag is not set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends.

Also, as shown in FIG. 104(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in an open state from the start of the short opening of the large prize opening to the end of the long opening of the large prize opening. Therefore, while the jackpot game control process is being executed, it is extremely easy for at least one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area. In other words, the special probability flag is very easily set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if the specific area is in an open state but no game balls have passed through the specific area, the special probability flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104(C), in the third opening mode, the specific area is closed except for the time when the large prize opening is short-open and for a predetermined time after the large prize opening has started to be long-opened (both of these times are short). Therefore, compared to either the first or second opening mode, it is more difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control. In other words, it is difficult for the probability variable flag to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability variable flag will be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In FIG. 104, an example is described in which two opening modes, a first opening mode and a second opening mode, are provided as examples of opening modes of a specific area in which at least one of a plurality of game balls that have entered a large prize opening can easily pass through the specific area during execution of a jackpot game control process. However, the number of opening modes of a specific area in which at least one of a plurality of game balls that have entered a large prize opening can easily pass through the specific area during execution of a jackpot game control process is not limited to two modes, and may be only one mode or three or more modes.

In addition, FIG. 104 describes an example of a third opening mode as an example of a specific area opening mode in which it is difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process. However, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which it is difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process is not limited to one mode, and two or more modes may be provided.

Figure 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in this Figure 105, when the winning/losing determination value data is "jackpot determination value data" (when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a winning), the winning time selection symbol commands for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are selected as follows. That is, when the result of the first special symbol winning determination process is a winning, the winning time selection symbol command is, for example, "z0" with a selection rate of 40%, "z1" with a selection rate of 10%, and "z2" with a selection rate of 50%. Also, when the result of the second special symbol winning determination process is a winning, the winning time selection symbol command is, for example, "z3" with a selection rate of 15%, "z4" with a selection rate of 50%, and "z5" with a selection rate of 35%.

Figure 106 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in this Figure 106, the type of jackpot (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of the specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the third opening mode (3R normal jackpot A). Also, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the third opening mode (10R normal jackpot A). Also, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the first opening mode (10R certainty jackpot A). Also, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the third opening mode (10R normal jackpot B). If the symbol command for selecting a winning combination is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode of the winning combination (10R special winning combination B). If the symbol command for selecting a winning combination is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the second opening mode of the winning combination (10R special winning combination C).

That is, according to the above-mentioned Figs. 104 to 106, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit, the type of the hit is determined to be 3R normal hit A with a selection rate of 40%, 10R normal hit A with a selection rate of 10%, and 10R sure-win A with a selection rate of 50%. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit, the type of the hit is determined to be 10R normal hit B with a selection rate of 15%, 10R sure-win B with a selection rate of 50%, and 10R sure-win C with a selection rate of 35. In this way, it is possible to make the probability that the sure-win flag is set to ON at the end of the hit game control process different between when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit.

In addition, in a specific round of play during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to being opened by time control as shown in Figures 104 (A) to (C), but may be opened in response to a game ball entering a jackpot opening, for example, as shown in Figure 107 described below.

Figure 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the large prize opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round of play during execution of the expanded example of the jackpot game control process (an example in which the specific area is controlled to be in an open state based on a win in the large prize opening), showing (A) a case in which the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, and (B) a case in which the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode.

As shown in FIG. 107(A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the large prize opening is opened, when the first game ball enters the large prize opening and the entry of the first game ball is detected by the large prize opening count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball enters the large prize opening and the entry of the second game ball is detected by the large prize opening count switch, the specific area is opened based on this detection until the large prize opening is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one of the multiple game balls that entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area. In other words, the probability flag is easily set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 107(B), in the second opening mode of another example, after the large prize winning hole is opened, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time only when the first game ball enters the large prize winning hole and the entry of the first game ball is detected by the large prize winning hole count switch. Even if the second game ball enters the large prize winning hole and the entry of the second game ball is detected by the large prize winning hole count switch, the specific area does not become open and remains closed until the winning hole is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the large prize game control, it is more difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize winning hole to pass through the specific area compared to the first opening mode. In other words, it is difficult for the probability variable flag to be set to ON at the end of the large prize game control process. However, even in this case, if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area while the jackpot game control is being executed, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability of winning flag is set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends.

In the above, an example was described in which if the game ball passes through a specific area while the jackpot game control process is being executed, the probability variable flag is set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the game ball passes through a specific area while the jackpot game control process is being executed, the time-saving flag may be set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends. This type of specification is particularly effective in the case of a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, such as a third type pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the above, an example was described in which the same opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, but this is not limited to this, and for example, an opening pattern dedicated to the first special symbol and an opening pattern dedicated to the second special symbol may be set.

In addition, in the above, an example was described in which the third mode may be determined to be one in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that when the result of the hit determination process for either one of the special symbols (e.g. the second special symbol) is a hit, only a mode in which it is easy for at least one game ball to pass through the specific area (the first mode or the second mode) is determined.

Also, in the above, in the third mode in which it is difficult for game balls to pass through to the specific area, the specific area is in an open state twice (both for a short period of time) while the large prize opening is short-open and for a predetermined period of time after the large prize opening starts to be long-opened; however, if it is difficult for game balls to pass through to the specific area, the specific area may be in an open state once or multiple times.

The closure of a specific area may be controlled to occur after a predetermined opening time has elapsed, or after the round in which the specific area is open has ended, or in response to a set number of large prize openings or winnings in the specific area. There may also be one or more combinations of closure conditions.

It may also be a so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variable control is executed (for example, a high probability time-saving game state, a high probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) are alternately executed repeatedly until a predetermined upper limit number (hereinafter referred to as the "limiter number") is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as the "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the probability variable control is not executed (for example, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, etc.). At this time, the loop number is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the limiter number may be a fixed number, or may be determined according to, for example, the random number value of the special pattern, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. In addition, if it is a setting machine, the limiter number may be different depending on the setting value.

In the above, we have described a so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variable control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached, but this is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot game state and the game state in which the time-saving control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached. This is particularly effective in the case of a type 1/type 2 mixed machine such as the third type pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned V-type high probability machine, if the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the game state in which the high probability control is executed continues. Therefore, in such a V-type high probability machine, if the limiter number is, for example, N times, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, it is considered that the predetermined limiter number has been reached, and the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the high probability control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, although it is not considered that the predetermined limiter number has been reached, since the game ball has not passed through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even in such a case, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the high probability control is not executed. The same applies to gaming machines in which, if a gaming ball passes through a specific area while a jackpot game control process is being executed, the time-saving flag is set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game control process, the machine is controlled to a game state (e.g., high probability time-saving game state, high probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) in which the probability variable control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played, and when the predetermined number of special symbol games are played, the machine may be a so-called ST machine in which the probability variable control is not executed (e.g., normal game state, time-saving game state, etc.). In such a game machine, the number of special symbol games in which the probability variable control is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "ST number") may be a fixed number, or may be different each time. In addition, if it is a setting machine, the expected value of the ST number may be different depending on the setting value. Furthermore, the machine may be a so-called falling type game machine in which a falling lottery is performed and the probability variable control ends based on the result of the falling lottery, or it may be a so-called V probability variable type game machine in which the probability variable control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state when the game ball passes through a specific area during the jackpot game state.

[4-2. Example of time-saving control extension]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a jackpot, the time-saving control can be executed after the jackpot game control process is completed, but the time-saving control may also be executed even if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is not a jackpot.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a miss, a time-saving hit/miss determination process may be performed separately from the special symbol hit determination process to determine whether or not to execute time-saving control, using a specific random number value (e.g., a random number value for special symbol hit determination, a pattern random number value of a special symbol, etc.) from among the random number values extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole. When a time-saving hit/miss determination is performed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a miss, for example, when the pattern random number value of a special symbol extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole is a specific pattern random number value, it can be determined to be a "time-saving hit" in which time-saving control is executed. Note that the time-saving hit/miss determination process may also be performed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit.

In addition, if the time-saving winning/losing determination process is performed separately from the special pattern winning/losing determination process, the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be performed prior to the special pattern winning/losing determination process in the same frame.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving winning/losing judgment process, a random number for time-saving winning/losing judgment that is used exclusively for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be generated within a predetermined range, and the random number value for time-saving winning/losing may be extracted based on, for example, the entry of a game ball into the starting hole, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing.

The random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process does not necessarily have to be extracted based on the game ball winning the start port, but may be extracted based on the game ball winning in other areas (for example, the general winning port, the small winning port, the large winning port, etc.). Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be provided, and the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be extracted based on the game ball passing through this dedicated area.

For example, if the time-saving winning/losing determination process and the special pattern winning/losing determination process are executed at different times, the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed during the variable display of the special pattern, which, when confirmed, derives a stop display mode indicating a jackpot, and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process may be a "time-saving winning". In such a case, the main CPU may forcibly derive, for example, a display mode indicating a "time-saving losing" even though the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is a "time-saving winning".

The sub-CPU also preferably controls the display of a performance image (such as a decorative pattern change performance or a character display performance) on the display device that allows or makes it easy to understand from the outside whether the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is a "time-saving win" or a "time-saving miss." In this case, the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special pattern win/loss judgment process, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying on the display device an effect image that makes it possible or easy to grasp from the outside whether the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning" or a "time-saving losing" result, it is also possible to execute control to display on the display device an effect image (for example, a decorative pattern change effect or a character display effect) that makes it impossible or difficult to grasp from the outside whether the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning" or a "time-saving losing" result. In this case, it is possible to maintain interest until the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is disclosed.

In addition, in a typical pachinko game machine, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the sub-CPU controls the display device (e.g., liquid crystal display device) to display, for example, a performance image showing a right-hit instruction as the recommended method of launching game balls in a jackpot game state. In this regard, in this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a jackpot, if the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the sub-CPU controls the display device to display, for example, a performance image showing a right-hit instruction as the recommended method of launching game balls when time-saving control is executed. However, if the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the performance image showing the recommended method of launching game balls when time-saving control is executed may be displayed on the display device at all times, or may be displayed only when a specific condition is met. For example, if the number of time-saving hits set based on the "time-saving hit" is a predetermined number or more (e.g., 2 or more), it may be displayed, but if it is less than the predetermined number (e.g., less than 2), it may not be displayed. Note that the above specific conditions are not limited to the number of time-saving times, but can be any conditions as appropriate.

In addition, if the time-saving hit/lose determination process is executed before the special pattern hit determination process is executed, the sub-CPU may execute control to display on the display device a performance image that is externally comprehensible or easily comprehensible as to whether or not the special pattern hit determination process will be executed under the "time-saving hit" condition (i.e., under the condition in which the time-saving flag is set to on).

The following is a summary of the processes related to time-saving, such as the type of random number used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the timing of extracting the random number used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the conditions for judging a time-saving winning/losing in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the execution timing of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the game state in which the time-saving winning/losing judgment process can be executed, the state of the time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times set when a time-saving winning/losing is achieved, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the timing of rewriting the number of time-saving times, the probability of winning the time-saving game, and the display of the results of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process.

(Type of random numbers used in time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be any of a plurality of types of random number values, such as a random number value for special symbol winning judgment, a random number value for special symbol determination, a random number value for normal winning judgment, a random number value for normal symbol determination, a random number value for special symbol fall judgment, and a dedicated random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment. In addition, in the case of a setting machine, when the setting is changed, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed using the changed setting value.

In addition, the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing determination process is not limited to one type (for example, only a random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination), but may be determined using multiple types of random number values (for example, a random number value for determining whether a special pattern has been won and a random number value for determining the pattern).

(Timing of extracting random numbers used in time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The timing of extraction of the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be any timing, such as when the game ball enters the start gate which triggers the special symbol winning judgment process, when the game ball passes through the pass gate which triggers the execution of the normal symbol winning judgment process, when the game ball passes through a dedicated area which triggers the execution of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, etc. The extraction of the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed based on the winning of a specific winning gate or the like which has a prize ball payout, or may be performed based on the passing through a specific gate or a specific out-gate which has no prize ball payout.

In addition, if the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is extracted based on the entry (passage) of the game ball into the start port, the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing judgment may be extracted regardless of whether the game ball enters the first start port or the second start port, or the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing judgment may be extracted only when the game ball enters one of the specific start ports.

(Conditions for determining whether a time-saving win has been won in the time-saving winning/losing determination process)
When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment process, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment is a specific random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment (for example, specific time-saving winning/losing judgment value data). When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the random number value for special pattern winning/losing judgment, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the data is a specific losing judgment value data, a specific small winning judgment value data, or/and a specific big winning judgment value data. When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the pattern random number value of the special pattern, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the data is a specific losing pattern, a specific small winning pattern, or a specific big winning pattern. When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the random number value for special pattern falling judgment, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the data is a specific random number value for special pattern falling judgment. When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the changed setting value, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the random number value for normal winning judgment or the random number value for normal pattern determination. Furthermore, the conditions for determining the time-saving winning/losing in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process are not limited to the above conditions and can be arbitrarily determined to be various conditions.

In the third pachinko game machine, even if the result of the time-saving hit/loss judgment process is a "time-saving hit," if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a hit to open the special symbol and the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 is opened passes through the V winning port 2155, it is preferable to determine whether or not to execute time-saving control and the number of time-saving times according to the type of hit to open the special symbol. And, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a hit to open the special symbol and the V attacker 2152 is opened but the passage of the game ball to the V winning port 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is not executed, if the result of the time-saving hit/loss judgment process is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 2201 may determine whether or not to execute time-saving control and the number of time-saving times based on the "time-saving hit." However, if the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process is "time-saving miss," and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit to open the device, and the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 opens does not pass through the V winning port 2155, the time-saving control will not be executed.

(Time-saving winning/losing judgment processing execution timing)
When the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed at the start of the variable display of the special pattern using a random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination obtained based on the winning (passing) of the game ball at the starting hole, the main CPU may retain the obtained random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination, in the same manner as the start information of the special pattern.

The main CPU may execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment process immediately after extracting the random number value to be used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process (e.g., before it is reserved), or may reserve the extracted random number value and execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment process until the variable display of the special pattern begins, or may execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment process at the start of the variable display of the special pattern.

(Game state in which time-saving winning/losing judgment processing can be executed)
The time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state, or may be executed only in a game state in which the time-saving control is not executed (for example, the normal game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.). In addition, for example, a condition for executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be determined in advance, such as executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process in any game state, or executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process only in a specific game state, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed when the determined condition is satisfied.

(Mode of time-saving control)
The mode of time-saving control executed according to the type of jackpot and the mode of time-saving control executed according to the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be the same or different. For example, a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag may be prepared, and when the time-saving control is executed according to the type of jackpot, the first time-saving flag may be set to on, and when the time-saving control is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the second time-saving flag may be set to on. In this case, when the first time-saving flag is set to on and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, it is preferable to execute time-saving control with different functions. For example, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, both the special chart shortening control and the electric support control are performed, and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, only one of the special chart shortening control and the electric support control is performed. Also, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, the first time-saving game state is controlled in which only the special chart shortening control is performed among the special chart shortening control and the electric support control, and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, the second time-saving game state is controlled in which only the electric support control is performed among the special chart shortening control and the electric support control. However, which of the multiple time-saving flags is set to on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, for example, or may be determined according to the game state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is executed.

(Number of time-saving times set when time-saving hits)
It is preferable that the number of time-saving times to be set when the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is "time-saving winning/losing", is determined according to the game state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when multiple random numbers for time-saving winning/losing judgment are specified as time-saving winning/losing judgment value data, the number of time-saving times to be set may be determined according to the extracted random numbers for time-saving winning/losing judgment instead of or in addition to the game state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed. For example, when the random number for time-saving winning/losing judgment extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole is the first time-saving winning/losing judgment value data, the number of time-saving times is determined to be "100", and when it is the second time-saving winning/losing judgment value data, the number of time-saving times is determined to be "50".

In addition, the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed even in a game state where time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is a "time-saving winning," the main CPU may set the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning" in place of the remaining number of time-saving times (i.e., reset the remaining number of time-saving times). In this case, the degree of benefit to the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of time-saving times is more or less than the remaining number of time-saving times, broadening the scope of gameplay, making the time-saving game state where the time-saving flag is on more interesting and increasing interest.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed even in a game state in which time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU may add the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving win" to the remaining number of time-saving times. In this case, the number of time-saving times will never be less than the current remaining number of time-saving times, allowing the player to play with peace of mind in a game state in which time-saving control is executed.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed even in a game state in which time-saving control is executed (e.g., a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU may predetermine one of two processes: a process of replacing the remaining number of time-saving wins with the number of time-saving wins determined based on the "time-saving win" and setting it as a new number, or a process of adding the number of time-saving wins determined based on the "time-saving win" to the remaining number of time-saving wins, and set the number of time-saving wins in a manner that satisfies the predetermine condition.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine in which a time-saving control having a different function is executed when the first time-saving flag is set to on and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, if the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning", the main CPU may change the process of setting the number of time-saving times depending on whether the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving winning" are time-saving controls of the same function or different functions. For example, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving winning" are time-saving controls of the same function, the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning" may be added to the remaining number of time-saving times, and if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving winning" are time-saving controls of different functions, the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning" may be newly set (i.e., the remaining number of time-saving times may be reset) instead of the remaining number of time-saving times being executed. In addition, if the time-saving control currently being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving hit" are time-saving controls with different functions, the time-saving control based on the "time-saving hit" may be executed after all remaining times of the currently executed time-saving are consumed.

When the number of time-saving times is set based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process being "time-saving winning", the number of time-saving times may be set to "0". In other words, if the number of time-saving times to be set is determined to be "0", the time-saving flag is set to on even though the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is "time-saving winning". Also, if the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process performed during the execution of time-saving control is "time-saving winning" and the number of time-saving times is set to "0", the time-saving control being executed will end.

(Time-saving control start timing)
The timing for starting the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process being a "time-saving hit," can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the time-saving control can be started based on the passage of the special symbol determination time during which the special symbol is determined. Also, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time-saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Also, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time-saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

When the start timing of the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process being a "time-saving hit", is the end of the special pattern game, and the time-saving hit/miss determination process is performed prior to the special pattern hit determination process in the same frame, even if the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process is a "time-saving hit", if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a jackpot, it is preferable to invalidate the "time-saving hit" (the time-saving flag is not set on based on the "time-saving hit") and set the time-saving flag on based on the hit time selection pattern command (the time-saving flag may not be set on depending on the type of jackpot).

In addition, the start timing of the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process being a "time-saving winning/losing win," is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed prior to the special symbol winning/losing determination process in the same frame, the time-saving control may be started immediately (before the special symbol winning/losing determination process is executed) based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process. In this case, the game state (i.e., whether or not the time-saving control is executed) may differ between the time when the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing determination process is extracted and the time when the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed, which can increase interest.

Furthermore, the timing for starting the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process being a "time-saving winning" may be after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is a "time-saving winning" and before the time-saving control starts, the sub-CPU can execute a teasing performance as to whether or not the time-saving control will start, which can increase interest.

In the third pachinko game machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol being a jackpot (a jackpot for which time-saving control is executed), the time-saving control based on the jackpot may be started based on the end of the jackpot game control. Also, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a role-opening hit (a role-opening hit for which time-saving control is executed) and the jackpot game control is executed because the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 2155 is detected when the V attacker 2152 is opened, the time-saving control may be started based on the end of the jackpot game control. In addition, if the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process is a "time-saving hit" and the result of the special pattern hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a hit to open the special device, and therefore the V attacker 2152 opens, but the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU may start time-saving control based on the "time-saving hit" based on the opening/closing winning hole 2151 being closed.

(End timing of time-saving game mode)
The timing at which the time-saving game state ends is, for example, "when, in a game state in which time-saving control is being executed, a variable display of a special pattern is executed for a set number of time-saving times,""when, in a game state in which time-saving control is being executed, the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the result of a special pattern hit determination process," or "when the number of time-saving times is set to 0 even though the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is a time-saving hit," etc.

In addition, if a small win game control process is executed based on the results of the special symbol hit determination process during a game state in which time-saving control is executed, time-saving control will continue to be executed even after the small win game control process ends.

In the third pachinko game machine, if the opening and closing winning hole 2151 is opened when the special symbol hit determination process derives a stopped symbol pattern indicating a jackpot opening hit during the execution of the time-saving control, but the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 2155 is not detected when the V attacker 2152 opens, and the jackpot game control process is not started, the main CPU 2201 continues to execute the time-saving control even after the opening and closing winning hole 2151 is closed.

(Rewrite the number of time-saving times)
A time-saving win/loss determination process is executed in a game state in which time-saving control is executed (e.g., a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU may rewrite the number of time-saving times, or may not rewrite the number of time-saving times (i.e., execute the time-saving control until the number of time-saving times in the currently executing time-saving control has been exhausted).

When rewriting the number of time-saving times, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving hit" when the number of time-saving times in the currently running time-saving control has been consumed, or may set it when the special pattern hit determination process is executed, or may set it when the variable display of the special pattern starts or stops, or may set it during the time-saving hit/loss determination process, and may set it at various times. When setting it during the time-saving hit/loss determination process, the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving hit" will overwrite the number of time-saving times in the currently running time-saving control. Also, it may be set in advance to either "rewrite the number of time-saving times" or "add to the previous number of time-saving times," and the number of time-saving times may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(Time-saving hit probability)
When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed based on the winning of a game ball into the first start port or the second start port, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process performed based on the winning of a game ball into the first start port (hereinafter referred to as the "first time-saving winning/losing judgment process") and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process performed based on the winning of a game ball into the second start port (hereinafter referred to as the "second time-saving winning/losing judgment process") may have different winning probabilities for time-saving. For example, the winning probability for time-saving when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be higher than the winning probability for time-saving when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed, the winning probability for time-saving when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be higher than the winning probability for time-saving when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed, or the winning probability for time-saving when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be the same or approximately the same as the winning probability for time-saving when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed.

(Displaying the results of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process)
A time-saving winning/losing judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process (whether the time-saving winning/losing is a winning or losing) and/or a winning number of time-saving times display unit that displays the number of time-saving times determined based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process (whether the time-saving winning/losing is a winning) may be provided. The time-saving winning/losing judgment result display unit and/or the winning number of time-saving times display unit may be provided in an LED display group that includes a special pattern display unit or the like, and may be controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub-CPU may display the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process and/or the number of time-saving times determined based on the winning of the time-saving on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

(interval)
When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss and the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU may make the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss and the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving miss." Note that, since the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol, in this case, it is preferable that the sub-CPU displays an effect image indicating a "time-saving hit" on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device until the above-mentioned interval time has elapsed.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a hit to open the special feature and the jackpot game control process is not executed based on this hit to open the special feature, the main CPU 2201 may set the interval time after the end of the operation related to the hit to open the special feature when the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving miss", or may set it to the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Examples of extensions related to management of game media]
The first, second and third pachinko game machines described in this specification can be applied to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a gaming medium and a bonus (e.g., prize balls, prize data, etc.) is awarded based on the result of the game. In other words, not only can the game be played by shooting or inserting a gaming medium (e.g., a gaming ball, a medal, etc.) by a physical action of a player, and the gaming medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but the main control circuit itself can electromagnetically manage the gaming medium held by the player and enable a game to be played by circulating the enclosed gaming balls or a medal-less game. In addition, the electromagnetic management of the gaming medium held by the player can be a gaming medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the gaming medium.

In the case of gaming machines that circulate enclosed gaming balls, the gaming balls serving as gaming media are configured to be playable without being discharged to the outside, so that when a prize is won, prize ball data is awarded as a gaming medium instead of prize balls being paid out. In this specification, "paid-out gaming value" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, if 15 prize balls are won in a prize slot, in the case of an enclosed gaming machine, prize ball data with a value corresponding to 15 prize balls is awarded. Furthermore, the gaming value is not necessarily limited to prize balls or prize ball data, and may be anything equivalent to prize balls or prize ball data.

In addition, when the game media are managed by a game media management device connected to the main control circuit, the game media management device is a device having ROM and RAM (or RWM) and installed in the game machine, and is connected to an external game media handling device (not shown) via a specified interface with a two-way communication function, and can perform the operation of lending game media (i.e., the operation of providing the game media required when the player inserts the game media), or the operation of paying out game media when a winning combination related to the payout of game media is won (the winning combination is established) (i.e., the operation of making the player obtain the game media required while paying out the game media), or the operation of electromagnetically recording the game media used for play. In addition, the game media management device can not only manage the actual number of game media, but also, for example, a game media number display device (not shown) that displays the number of game media held on the front of the pachinko game machine based on the management results of the game media number, and can manage the number of game media displayed on this game media number display device. In other words, the gaming media management device should be able to electromagnetically record and display the total number of gaming media that a player can use for gaming.

In this case, the gaming media management device has the capability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming media to an external gaming media handling device, and also has the capability to prevent the number of recorded gaming media from being reduced except by direct operation by the player, and if an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and the external gaming media handling device, it is desirable that the device has the capability to prevent the player from transmitting a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming media except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a loan operation means, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming medium handling device may be provided with an insertion slot for valuables such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, and various other operation means such as a loan operation means and a return operation means, and an external connection terminal board on the gaming medium handling device side (all not shown).

In this case, the game flow is as follows: the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, subtracts a predetermined amount of value by operating any of the above-mentioned lending operation means, and increases the game media corresponding to the subtracted value from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and repeats the above operation if more game media are required. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of the game, and when the game ends, the player operates any of the return operation means to transmit the number of game media from the game media management device to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the game media number is transmitted, the game media management device clears the number of game media stored in itself. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange it for a prize, or moves to another game machine to play based on the game media recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media were sent to the game media handling device, but the game machine or game media handling device may send only the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media owned by the player may be divided and processed. Also, instead of just discharging the recording medium, cash or cash equivalents may be dispensed, or the media may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. The game media handling device may also be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the amusement center, and the media may be stored in the member recording medium so that it can be played again at a later date.

In addition, in the gaming machine or gaming media handling device, a locking operation may be performed to lock the gaming media or valuable data communication to the gaming media handling device or gaming media management device by operating a specified operating means (not shown). In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, and the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the gaming media handling device.

In addition, the above describes the application of the gaming media management device to a pachinko gaming machine, but gaming media management devices can also be installed in pachislot machines, slot machines that use gaming balls, and sealed gaming machines to manage the gaming media of players.

In this way, by providing the gaming medium management device described above, it is possible to reduce the number of parts inside the gaming machine compared to when the gaming medium is physically provided for play, and not only can the cost and manufacturing costs of the gaming machine be reduced, but it is also possible to prevent the player from directly touching the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment and reducing noise, and the reduction in parts also reduces the power consumption of the gaming machine. It is also possible to prevent fraudulent activities via the gaming medium and the gaming medium insertion and payout slots. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, when the present invention is applied to a gaming system having an enclosed gaming machine configured so that gaming media can be played without being ejected to the outside, and a gaming media management device connected to the gaming machine so that data regarding increases and decreases in gaming media associated with consumption, lending, and dispensing of gaming media can be sent and received by optical signals via a communication cable, the gaming system may be configured as follows.

Second Embodiment
The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed game machine, the launching device is located above the game area and launches game balls as game media from above into the game area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed pestle pushes the waiting game ball toward the launching platform. This causes the game ball to move to the launching platform. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the waiting position to the launching platform to detect the game ball moving to the launching platform. When the game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by one. In this way, since the game balls as game media are launched from above into the game area, the enclosed game machine can avoid so-called return balls (foul balls). Then, the game balls discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by the ball polishing device. The game balls polished by the ball polishing device are transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, but a certain number (for example, 50 balls) of game balls are configured to circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. Alternatively, instead of providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism that discharges game balls to the outside of the game machine and a take-in mechanism that takes in the game balls polished outside the game machine may be provided. In this case, the take-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to take-in, or may be configured to take in the balls from a winning hole provided in the game area.

In an enclosed gaming machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, so there is no upper or lower tray for temporarily holding the game balls. In an enclosed gaming machine, the game balls are not actually in the player's hands, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as the player plays. In an enclosed gaming machine, the player starts playing after obtaining balls by loaning them from a gaming medium management device. Here, obtaining balls means that the player obtains gaming media for data management purposes. Then, the balls are consumed by the launching device when the game balls are launched, and the number of balls in hand decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through each winning hole or the like provided in the playing area, the number of balls in hand is paid out according to the conditions set for each winning hole, and the number of balls in hand increases. Furthermore, the number of balls in hand increases by loaning them from the gaming medium management device. In addition, for example, when the game ends and all or a part of the balls are integrated into the game value managed by the game media management device by clearing all of the game value (i.e., the balls in hand) stored in the enclosed game machine, or by performing an operation to transmit some of the balls in hand to the game media management device, the game value stored in the enclosed game machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls in hand is reduced. Furthermore, although there is no concept of foul balls in a game machine in which game balls are shot from above the game area, foul balls may occur when game balls are shot from below as in conventional game machines. Therefore, in the case of a game machine in which game balls are shot from below, the number of balls in hand increases or decreases depending on whether or not a foul ball occurs. Note that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" refers to consumption, lending, and payout of balls in hand. Also, "increase or decrease in game media" refers to the increase or decrease in the number of balls in hand due to consumption, lending, and payout. In addition, "data regarding the increase and decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" refers to data regarding the decrease in balls held due to game balls being fired, and the increase in balls held due to lending and payout.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of gaming balls through each winning hole, etc. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a gaming ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls paid out as a result is added to the number of balls held. Also, when a gaming ball is released, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to a gaming media management device by the player's operation. Also, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the gaming machine, and accepts requests to convert the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device to balls held (ball lending) and to count the number of balls held (return). Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the gaming media management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the payout control circuit to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the gaming media management device. Here, "game value" refers to currency/paper money, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into balls by the game media management device. In this second embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept paper money, prepaid media, etc. Furthermore, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange, etc., in the amusement center where the gaming system is installed.

The enclosed gaming machine also has a backup power supply. This allows the data immediately prior to the power being turned off to be retained even if the power is turned off at night, etc. This backup power supply may also be used to, for example, continue to detect the opening of the door frame using a door opening sensor. This also makes it possible to prevent fraudulent activities at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

Enclosed gaming machines are only required to be configured so that players cannot touch the gaming balls. For example, machines that do not circulate gaming balls in an island facility but circulate them only in the gaming machine itself, and machines that circulate gaming balls in an island facility but do not allow players to touch them are also included in enclosed gaming machines.

The gaming media management device has a gaming machine connection board. The gaming media management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signals) to and from the gaming machine via the gaming machine connection board. The transmitted and received data is information such as the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the gaming machine model code. Then, with either the gaming machine or the gaming media management device as the source and the other as the destination, when the source transmits a transmission signal, the destination that receives the transmission signal transmits a confirmation signal, which is the same signal as the transmission signal, to the source, and the source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether they are the same or not.

In this way, the source of transmission can compare the confirmation signal sent from the destination with the transmission signal to determine whether they are identical, thereby confirming that the signal sent from the source of transmission has been sent to the source without being tampered with. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent activities such as tampering with the transmitted and received signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device.

In addition, in the gaming system, the source may have a modulation unit that modulates a signal and transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit as the transmission signal, and the destination may have a demodulation unit that demodulates the signal modulated by the modulation unit.

As a result, even if the signals transmitted between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device are read, it is difficult to decipher these signals, and fraudulent activities such as tampering with the signals transmitted between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device can be prevented.

In addition, in the gaming system, when the destination receives the transmission signal from the source, the destination may transmit an acknowledgment signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, to the source separately from the confirmation signal.

By comparing the transmission signal with the confirmation signal, it is possible to not only confirm that a legitimate signal has been sent and received, but also to confirm that a legitimate signal has been sent and received based on the approval signal, thereby further strengthening the prevention of fraudulent activities. Also, instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the gaming media management device for communication, a frame control circuit may be provided between the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, and the main control circuit and the gaming media management device may be connected for communication via the frame control circuit. Also, a firing control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the firing control circuit and the gaming media management device. In this case, error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU performs processing so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not stop at a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol.

In more detail, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops in a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, the main CPU performs control to forcibly stop the other special symbol in a symbol combination that indicates a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops in a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, as described above, the game transitions from the general game state to the jackpot game state, but in this jackpot game state, neither the start condition for the first special symbol nor the start condition for the second special symbol is met, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol, the main CPU suspends the measurement of the variable time of the other special symbol based on the transition from the general game state to the small win game state (stopping at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol), and resumes the measurement of the variable time of the other special symbol based on the transition from the small win game state to the general game state (end of the small win game). When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol, the general game state transitions to the small win game state as described above, but in this small win game state, neither the start condition of the first special symbol nor the start condition of the second special symbol is met, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are being displayed in a variable manner, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol, the main CPU will perform a variable display of the other special symbol that is being displayed in a similar manner to when it is being displayed in a variable manner, consisting of a group of LEDs, but as described above, timing of the variable time will be interrupted.

[4-4. Other extension examples]
In this specification, the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine have been given as examples, but the technology described in this specification can be applied to other gaming machines, such as pachislot machines.

Regardless of whether the technology described in this specification is applied to a pachinko game machine or a pachislot, the effects involving a temporary stop of the symbols may include a temporary stop of the reels. Note that a "stop" of the symbols can be a permanent stop or a temporary stop, and the "stop" can be interpreted in either way. Furthermore, the operation by the player to play the game can be any of the following: operation of a lever, handle, button, etc., touch, etc.

In pachinko machines, the administrator of the machine may set the effects by operating the effect button, and the machine may be operated so that the player starts playing after the settings are made using the effect button. In this case, it is assumed that the operations by the administrator will ultimately be the operations by which the player plays the game. Similarly, in pachislot machines, it is assumed that the administrator plays a 2-bet game, and when the BB flag corresponding to the 2-bet game is established, the player plays a 3-bet game. In this case, although the player can play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game, the administrator of the machine may play the 2-bet game, and therefore the game played by the administrator (e.g., a 2-bet game, etc.) or the selection of the hall menu may be the operations by which the player plays the game.

In a pachinko game machine, the main CPU controls the player to inform them of whether they are hitting from the right or left, thereby managing the player's playing style, and if the player's playing style is not as intended, the sub-CPU may control the player to inform them of the unintended play, such as an error or warning.

In pachislot, the main CPU may control the player's playing method, such as the order in which the buttons are pressed (assist), but if the player's playing method is not as intended, the sub-CPU may control the player to issue an error, warning, or other notification that the play is unintended.

In pachinko machines, the main control board and payout control board are mounted on separate boards, but they may be on a single board. In pachislot machines, the payout control board may not exist, but the payout may be controlled by the main control board, or the board may be separated into the main control board and the payout control board.

Pachislot machines usually have a rectangular cabinet that houses various devices necessary for playing games, and a door that can be opened and closed relative to the cabinet, but the cabinet in a pachislot machine can be considered as the frame. In contrast, in a pachinko machine, the outer frame can be considered as the cabinet, the outer frame and base door can be considered as the cabinet, or the entire gaming machine consisting of the outer frame, base door, glass door and plate unit can be considered as the cabinet. Note that between the cabinet and the door, or between the frame and the door, there may be a unit with various control boards, a middle frame, an intermediate part, etc., and various control boards, display means, decorative parts, gimmicks, etc. may be present in the door, frame, cabinet, etc.

Third Embodiment
First, the structure of a slot machine 4001 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described. Fig. 108 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4001 according to this embodiment.

The housing 4060 forming the entirety of the slot machine 1 has a box-shaped cabinet 4061 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door 4062a arranged at the upper front part of the cabinet 4061, and a lower door 4062b arranged at the lower front part of the cabinet 4061. The cabinet 4061 houses devices used in games (e.g., reels, etc.). The upper door 4062a and the lower door 4062b are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 4061. The upper door 4062a is provided so as to be able to close the upper part of the opening in the cabinet 4061, and the lower door 4062b is provided so as to be able to close the lower part of the opening in the cabinet 4061.
Since the cabinet 4061 is a member for fixing the upper door 4062a and the lower door 4062b, it may be referred to as a fixed frame, and the upper door 4062a and the lower door 4062b may be referred to as a front door.

The upper door 4062a has a display unit 4100 in the center. The display unit 4100 is an effect device that produces effects according to the progress of the game, and displays various images according to the progress of the game under the control of the sub-control board 4072 described below. Note that the display unit 4100 may be a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, but in this embodiment, a so-called projection mapping device is used.

A display window 4004 formed as a rectangular opening is provided in the approximate center of the upper part of the lower door 4062b. The display window 4004 constitutes a symbol display means that displays some of the symbols displayed on the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R described below. The display window 4004 displays a cross-up line diagonally upward to the right, a top line in the upper row, a center line in the middle row, a bottom line in the lower row, and a cross-down line diagonally downward to the right.

Although not shown here, the display window 4004 displays three of the multiple symbols displayed on the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R. Therefore, the display window 4004 displays a 3x3 pattern. The five lines displayed in the display window 4004, from the cross-up line to the cross-down line, are lines that linearly connect the 3x3 symbols displayed in the display window 4004.

In this embodiment, the center line of these five lines is the active line, and winning is determined based on the combination of symbols displayed along the center line. On the other hand, the other four lines are pseudo lines that are not used to determine winning.

The active line (center line) is activated by operating the MAX BET button 4011, which will be described later, or by inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 4022. Here, operating the MAX BET button 4011 and inserting medals are synonymous. Therefore, for example, when referring to the "number of medals inserted," this includes both the number of medals bet by operating the MAX BET button 4011 described above and the number of medals actually inserted into the medal insertion slot 4022.

In the cabinet 4061, multiple reels 4003L, 4003C, 4003R are arranged in a horizontal row so as to be freely rotatable. Each of the reels 4003L, 4003C, 4003R has a reel band on its outer periphery on which a row of symbols is drawn as identification information made up of multiple types of symbols required for play. In other words, multiple symbols are displayed on the reels 4003L, 4003C, 4003R.

The patterns drawn on each reel band can be seen from outside the pachislot machine 4001 through the display window 4004. In addition, each reel 4003L, 4003C, 4003R rotates at a constant speed (e.g., 80 rotations per minute) and displays a variable row of patterns.

A roughly horizontal base 4010 is formed below the display window 4004. Within the horizontal plane of the base 4010, a medal insertion slot 4022 is provided on the right side, and a MAX BET button 4011 and a 1 BET button (not shown) are provided on the left side. Inside the MAX BET button 4011, there is a BET button LED 4103 (not shown) that lights up when medals can be inserted.

By pressing the MAX BET button 4011, the number of medals (3 medals) used for a unit game (one game) is inserted and the active lines are activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted each time the 1 BET button is pressed. When the 1 BET button is pressed three times, three medals used for a unit game are inserted and the active lines are activated.

Operation of the MAX BET button 4011, operation of the 1 BET button, and operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 4022 (operation of inserting a medal to play) are referred to as "insertion operations".

An information display 4014 is provided in approximately the center of the horizontal plane of the base 4010. The information display 4014 is provided with an LED (not shown) that lights up in response to the number of medals inserted in the current game (hereinafter, "inserted number"). The information display 4014 also has a digital display (not shown) that digitally displays to the player information such as the number of medals paid out to the player as a bonus (hereinafter, "paid number") and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 4001 (hereinafter, "credit number").

The information display 4014 is also provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) that notifies the player of the information on the stop operation required to display the combination of symbols corresponding to the role determined as the internal winning role along the pay line. The instruction monitor is, for example, composed of a 7-segment LED, and notifies the player of the information on the stop operation required by lighting or blinking in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified. As will be described later, in this embodiment, a "push order role" is provided, which is a role in which the combination of symbols displayed varies depending on the order of the stop operation (push order). The manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified is, for example, to display "1" when notifying the push order "1st (the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 4003L)", to display "2" when notifying the push order "2nd (the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 4003C)", and to display "3" when notifying the push order "3rd (the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 4003R)".

The information display 4014 is controlled by the main control board 4071 via the door relay terminal board 4460. Here, in the pachislot machine 4001, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 4071, other means controlled by the sub-control board 4072 may be used to notify information on the stop operation, for example, the above-mentioned display unit 4100 may be used to notify information on the stop operation.

In this case, the manner of notification on the instruction monitor and the manner of notification on other means may be different. In other words, the instruction monitor only needs to notify in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified, and does not necessarily need to notify the information on the stop operation directly (for example, even if the instruction monitor displays "1", some players may not be able to identify the content of the notification, and it cannot be said to be a direct notification). In contrast, notifications on other means may directly notify the information on the stop operation. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", the instruction monitor may display "1" that uniquely corresponds to the push order to be notified, while other means (display unit 4100) may directly notify that the first stop operation will be performed on the left reel 4003L.

In this way, in the pachislot machine 4001 of this embodiment, necessary information on the stopping operation according to the internal winning combination can be notified not only by control of the sub-control board 4072 but also by control of the main control board 4071. Of course, the notification of information on the stopping operation may be controlled according to the gaming state. More specifically, it is possible to notify information on the stopping operation in the general gaming state (non-ART) but to notify information on the stopping operation in the ART gaming state.

Also, on the left side of the front part of the base part 4010, there is provided a settlement button 4013 that can be pushed to switch between crediting and paying out medals that the player has won in the game. By switching this settlement button 4013, medals are paid out from a medal payout opening 4015 at the bottom of the front part, and the paid out medals are stored in a medal receiving part 4016.

To the right of the settlement button 4013, a start lever 4006 is attached which can be tilted freely within a predetermined angle range as a start operation means for rotating the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R by the player's tilt operation and starting the changing display of the patterns in the display window 4004.

Stop buttons 4007L, 4007C, and 4007R are provided in the approximate center of the front surface of the base 4010 as stop operation means for stopping the rotation of the three reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R when pressed by the player. In this embodiment, one game (unit game) basically starts when the start lever 4006 is operated, and ends when all the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R have stopped.

A first sub-display device 4201 and a second sub-display device 4202 are provided on the front of the upper part of the lower door 4062b. The first sub-display device 4201 and the second sub-display device 4202 are liquid crystal displays or organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) displays, and display various information. The first sub-display device 4201 and the second sub-display device 4202 are provided on the sides of the surface of the front part of the lower door 4062b that stands approximately vertically from the horizontal plane of the base part 4010, with the first sub-display device 4201 provided on the left side (the side of the MAX BET button 4011 and the start lever 4006) and the second sub-display device 4202 provided on the right side (the side of the medal insertion slot 4022).

At least one of the first sub-display device 4201 and the second sub-display device 4202, in this embodiment the first sub-display device 4201, has a touch sensor 4201a on its display surface, and the display can be switched according to the player's operation received via the touch sensor 4201a. The touch sensor 4201a operates according to a predetermined operating principle such as a capacitance method, and when it receives a player's operation, it outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The first sub-display device 4201 is controlled by the sub-control board 4072 based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 4201a.

On the left and right sides of the lower front of the lower door 4062b are speakers 4009L, 4009R that produce sound effects and voices, and between these speakers 4009L, 4009R is a medal payout outlet 4015 from which medals are paid out. At the bottom of the lower door 4062b is a medal receiver 4016 that stores the paid-out medals.

A waist panel 4025 with a design corresponding to the motif of the machine is attached to the front of the lower part of the lower door 4062b, on the surface sandwiched between the stop buttons 4007L, 4007C, 4007R and the medal receiver 4016. This waist panel 4025 is illuminated by a waist panel illuminator (not shown) installed behind it.

[Control system of pachislot machines]
Next, the control system of the slot machine 4001 will be described with reference to Fig. 109. Fig. 109 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the slot machine 4001 according to the third embodiment.

The slot machine 4001 has a main control board 4071 provided inside the housing 4060, and a sub-control board 4072 provided on the upper door 4062a. The slot machine 4001 also has a reel relay terminal board 4410, a ratio display device 4420, a setting key switch 4430, a cabinet side relay board 4440, and a power supply unit 4450, all of which are connected to the main control board 4071. The slot machine 4001 also has an external centralized terminal board 4073, a hopper device 4040, a medal auxiliary storage switch 4441, and a reset switch 4442, all of which are connected to the main control board 4071 via the cabinet side relay board 4440.

The main control circuit is constituted by a microcomputer 4030 mounted on the main control board 4071. The microcomputer 4030 is constituted by a main CPU 4031, a main ROM 4032, and a main RAM 4033.

The main ROM 4032 stores the control program executed by the main CPU 4031, data tables, data for sending various control commands to the sub-control circuit implemented on the sub-control board 4072, and the like. The main ROM 4032 also stores multiple minimum play times for unit games.

The main RAM 4033 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by execution of the control program.

The main CPU 4031 is connected to a clock pulse generating circuit 4034, a frequency divider 4035, a random number generator 4036, and a sampling circuit 4037. The clock pulse generating circuit 4034 and the frequency divider 4035 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 4031 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulses. The random number generator 4036 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 4037 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The sub-control board 4072 basically includes a CPU (hereinafter, sub-CPU) 4081, a ROM cartridge board 4082, a RAM (hereinafter, sub-RAM) 4083, a rendering processor 4084, a drawing RAM 4085, and a driver 4086.

The sub-CPU 4081 controls the output of video, sound, and light in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 4082 in response to commands sent from the main control board 4071. The ROM cartridge board 4082 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

The program memory area stores various control programs executed by the sub-CPU 4081. The control programs stored in the program memory area include, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control board 4071, a performance registration task for extracting random numbers for performance and determining and registering performance content (performance data), a drawing control task for controlling the display of images by the display unit 4100 based on the determined performance content, a lamp control task for controlling the light output by the various LEDs 4101, and an audio control task for controlling the sound output by the speakers 4009L, 4009R.

The data storage area includes various storage areas, such as a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing performance data constituting various performance contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to the creation of images, a storage area for storing sound data related to background music and sound effects, and a storage area for storing lamp data related to light on/off patterns.

The sub-RAM 4083 has a storage area for registering the determined performance contents and performance data, and a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations transmitted from the main control board 4071.

The external centralized terminal board 4073 receives signals from the main control board 4071, such as the number of medals inserted/paid out, the number of games played, and whether or not a bonus has been activated, and outputs these signals to an external display that displays the number of games played and the number of bonuses activated, and to the host computer of the amusement center. The external display is installed, for example, above the pachinko slot machine 4001, and updates the display in conjunction with the progress of the number of games played and the activation of the bonus, and notifies the user of the bonus activation with a lamp or the like.

The medal insertion signal is a signal that allows the insertion of a medal to be recognized, and is output when the start lever 4006 is operated. The medal payout signal is a signal that allows the payout or replay of a medal to be recognized, and is output when a medal is paid out (including credit accumulation) or when a replay is activated.

The hopper device 4040 detects medals and checks whether the number of medals dispensed from the hopper device 4040 to the outside has reached the dispensed number.

The reel relay terminal board 4410 is disposed inside the reel body of each of the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R. The reel relay terminal board 4410 is electrically connected to the stepping motor (not shown) of each of the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R, and relays the signal output from the main control board 4071 to the stepping motor.

The ratio display device 4420 has a ratio display board 4421 connected to the main control board 4071, and a ratio display 4422 and a changeover switch 4423 connected to the ratio display board 4421. The ratio display board 4421 controls the display of the ratio display 4422 based on a signal output from the main control board 4071. The ratio display 4422 displays various ratios such as specific section ratios and role ratios. The changeover switch 4423 switches the display of the ratio display 4422.

The setting key switch 4430 is used when setting one of a number of setting values provided for setting the amount of profit to be given to the player, or when checking the setting value set in the pachislot machine 4001. When the main control board 4071 accepts an operation using the setting key switch 4430, it sets a setting value from the number of setting values according to the content of the operation.

The cabinet side relay board 4440 is a relay board for electrically connecting the main control board 4071 with the external centralized terminal board 4073, the hopper device 4040, the auxiliary medal storage switch 4441, and the reset switch 4442. The auxiliary medal storage switch 4441 detects whether the auxiliary medal storage (not shown) is full of medals. The reset switch 4442 is used to reset (initialize) various data of the pachislot machine 4001.

The power supply device 4450 has a power supply board 4451 connected to the main control board 4071, and a power switch 4452 connected to the power supply board 4451. The power switch 4452 is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachislot machine 4001.

The pachislot machine 4001 also has a door relay terminal board 4460, and a selector 4461, a door opening/closing monitoring switch 4462, a BET switch 4011S, a settlement switch 4013S, a start switch 4006S, a stop switch board 4463, a game operation display board 4470, and a sub-relay board 4075, which are connected to the main control board 4071 via the door relay terminal board 4460.

The selector 4461 is a device that selects whether the material, shape, etc. of a medal is appropriate, and guides appropriate medals inserted into the medal insertion port 4022 to the hopper device 4040. Although not shown, a medal sensor (insertion operation detection means) that detects the passage of an appropriate medal is provided on the path along which the medal passes within the selector 4461.

The door opening/closing monitoring switch 4462 outputs a security signal to the outside of the slot machine 4001 to notify the opening/closing of the upper door 4062a and the lower door 4062b. The stop switch board 4463 (stop operation detection means) is equipped with a circuit for stopping the spinning reels and a circuit for indicating which reels can be stopped by means of an LED or the like. The stop switch board 4463 is also provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 4007L, 4007C, 4007R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 4470 is connected to the information display 4014, and is a board for displaying the number of inserted medals, etc., on the information display 4014 when medals are inserted, when the three reels 4003L, 4003C, 4003R can rotate, when a replay is performed, etc. In addition, the game operation display board 4470 is connected to an LED group 4471, which, for example, lights up a mark indicating the start of a game or a mark indicating a replay based on a signal input from the game operation display board 4470.

The sub-control board 4072 is connected to the main control board 4071 via the door relay terminal board 4460 and the sub-relay board 4075. The slot machine 4001 also has speakers 4009L, 4009R, various LEDs 4101, a touch sensor 4201a, and a display unit 4100, which are connected to the sub-control board 4072 via the sub-relay board 4075.

The pachislot machine 4001 also has a ROM cartridge board 4082 and a liquid crystal relay board 4480 connected to the sub-control board 4072. The ROM cartridge board 4082 and the liquid crystal relay board 4480 are stored in the sub-control board case together with the sub-control board 4072.

The ROM cartridge board 4082 is a board for managing the image (video), audio, light, and communication data for the performance. The LCD relay board 4480 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 4072 and the display unit 4100.

[Main operation processing of pachislots controlled by the main CPU]
Next, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachislot machine 4001 performed under the control of the main CPU 4031 will be explained with reference to the flowchart shown in Figure 110 (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

First, when the power is turned on to the pachislot machine 4001, the main CPU 4031 performs the power-on initialization process (S3501). In this process, it is determined whether the backup was performed normally, whether the settings were changed appropriately, etc., and initialization is performed according to the result of the determination.

The main CPU 4031 then performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S3502). In this initialization process, data in a designated storage area in the main RAM 4033 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area from which data needs to be erased for each unit game, such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area.

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs a medal acceptance/start check process (S3503). This process checks inputs from the medal sensor 4042S and the start switch 4006S, etc.

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs an internal lottery process (S3504). In this process, the main CPU 4031 refers to an internal lottery table (not shown) according to the current game state, and randomly selects a role to be determined as an internal winning role from among a plurality of roles. Next, the main CPU 4031 determines whether or not the roles "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" have been determined as internal winning roles in the internal lottery process of S3504 (S3505). If the roles "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" have been determined as internal winning roles (YES), the main CPU 4031 then turns on the RT5 game state flag and sets the game state to the inter-flag game state (S3506).

Following the processing of S3506, or if it is determined in S3505 that the roles "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" have not been determined as the internal winning roles (NO), the main CPU 4031 then performs state-specific game control processing (which controls various processes according to the current ball output status) (S3507).

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs main-side navigation control processing (S3508). In this processing, the main CPU 4031 sets navigation data according to the current game state and the internal winning combination based on a predetermined correspondence. The set navigation data is stored in the start command and notified to the sub-control board 4072. Furthermore, notifications according to the set navigation data are made at any timing.

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs reel stop initial setting processing (S3509). In this processing, reel stop control information to be used for stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S3505 and the current game state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 4033 and is used in the reel stop control processing of S3512.

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs a start command transmission process (S3510). In this process, the main CPU 4031 generates start command data and transmits it to the sub-control board 4072. Note that the start command data includes various information necessary for the performance, such as an internal winning combination.

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs wait processing and then reel spin start processing (S3511). In this processing, the main CPU 4031 requests all reels to start spinning. Then, when all reels are requested to start spinning, an interrupt process executed at a fixed cycle (1.1172 msec) accelerates each reel until its spinning speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained.

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs reel stop control processing (S3512). In this processing, the reel stop control information determined in S3509 is used to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the timing at which the left stop button 4007L, the middle stop button 4007C, and the right stop button 4007R are pressed.

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S3513). In this winning determination medal payout process, a benefit according to the combination of symbols displayed along the winning line as a result of the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R stopping is awarded, such as a medal payout or replay operation, based on the combination of symbols displayed along the winning line. Next, the main CPU 4031 performs a winning activation command transmission process (S3514). In this process, the main CPU 4031 generates winning activation command data and transmits it to the sub-control board 4072. Note that the winning activation command data includes various information such as the combination of symbols displayed along the winning line.

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs a BB check process (S3515). In this process, the main CPU 4031 controls the activation and termination of the bonus state. Then, the main CPU 4031 performs an RT check process (S3516). In this process, the main CPU 4031 controls the transition of the RT gaming state based on the combination of symbols displayed.

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs CZ/ART end processing (S3517). In this processing, the main CPU 4031 performs a CZ pullback lottery. After performing CZ/ART end processing, the main CPU 4031 returns the processing to S3502, assuming that one game (unit game) has ended.

Next, a basic overview of a gaming system including a gaming display device 5001 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 111. As shown in the figure, the gaming system according to this embodiment is constructed in an amusement center or arcade, such as a pachinko parlor, and is configured with a gaming display device 5001, a gaming machine 5002, a gaming medium lending device 5003, and a server device 5004, each of which is connected as shown in the figure.

In this embodiment, a card is used as an example of a "storage medium," but this is not limited to this and includes anything that can be applied to the invention according to this embodiment, such as coins and tokens equipped with an IC chip, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, paper money is used as an example of "currency," but this is not limited to this and includes all currency that can be applied to the invention according to this embodiment, such as paper money, coins, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the word "card" is simply used, it includes both a membership card lent to a player who has become a member of an amusement establishment, and a counting card (visitor card) temporarily lent by the amusement establishment.

In this embodiment, when the term "held balls" is used, it includes both the saved balls stored in association with the member card and the counted held balls stored in association with the counting card, and when the term "held ball information" is used, it includes both the held ball information indicating the saved balls (hereinafter referred to as "saved ball information") and the held ball information indicating the counted held balls (hereinafter referred to as "counted held ball information"). In addition, information indicating the amount of currency inserted by the player is referred to as "currency information" (or "balance information"), and when specifically indicated, "held ball information" may include "currency information". In addition, the member card is capable of separately storing saved ball information, counted held ball information, and currency information. Furthermore, for convenience of explanation, the term "held balls" is usually used to indicate information about the game balls held by the player, but this is not limited to this, and the "held balls" includes information about the medals held by the player, information about the game value held by the player by electromagnetic means, and all other similar information.

[Gaming display device]
The game display device 5001 will be briefly described with reference to Fig. 111. The detailed configuration of the game display device 5001 will be described later.

The game display device 5001 of this embodiment displays various game information as a projected image using a transparent projector device, and is installed, for example, above each game machine 5002. Game information such as the number of game media acquired (the number of acquired pieces or the number of acquired balls), the number of various games, and game history are displayed as graphs or numbers (see FIG. 115). The game display device 5001 is provided with a plurality of buttons 5014A to 5014F (described later) for the player to operate (see FIG. 115). The game display device 5001 is connected to the game machine 5002, the game media lending device 5003, and the server device 5004, and displays various game information on a screen (projection target) 5110A (described later) based on input signals, received signals, or player operations. The game display device 5001 may be installed on a so-called game island basis.

The gaming display device 5001 includes electrical and optical components such as a projector body 5012 (described later) and a control unit (not shown) for controlling the projector body 5012. The control unit controls the projector body 5012 and communications between the gaming machine 5002, the gaming medium lending device 5003, and the server device 5004. When the control unit detects the operation of buttons 5014A-5014F by a sensor, it controls the display on the screen 5110A in response to the operation. Note that while physical buttons 5014A-5014F are provided in this embodiment, the screen 5110A may be configured as a touch panel, for example, and the control unit may detect operations on the touch panel.

Although not shown, the gaming display device 5001 includes an interface unit for communicating with the gaming machine 5002, the gaming medium lending device 5003, and the server device 5004. This interface unit and an external connection terminal board in the gaming machine 5002, which will be described later, are connected by a contact input method, and one-way communication from the gaming machine 5002 to the gaming display device 5001 is possible. The interface unit and the gaming medium lending device 5003 are connected by a contact input/output method, for example, using a harness, and two-way communication is possible. The interface unit and the server device 5004 are connected by a wired LAN method, for example, using a coaxial cable, and are also connected by a contact output method, for two-way communication. Note that the connection method is not limited to these methods, and for example, a wireless LAN method or an optical communication method using an optical cable may be used for each connection. Furthermore, a combination of these methods may be used.

[Gaming machines]
The gaming machine 5002 will be briefly described with reference to Fig. 111. For example, a pachinko gaming machine 5002a or a pachislot gaming machine 5002b is applied as the gaming machine 5002. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the pachinko gaming machine 5002a and the pachislot gaming machine 5002b will be collectively referred to as the gaming machine 5002.

The pachinko game machine 5002a mainly plays a game in which game balls (game media) are ejected onto the surface of the board, and when a game ball that hits a nail and flows down irregularly enters a specific winning hole, a prize ball is paid out or a score is added. The pachinko game machine 5002a is equipped with a main control unit for controlling the main game device, a sub-control unit for controlling the performance operation related to display and sound output, and a payout control unit for controlling the payout operation of the game balls as prize balls. The payout control unit is connected to the game display device 5001 via an external connection terminal board, and outputs a game information signal, an error signal, etc. to the game display device 5001 after each game or when there is a change in the internal state. In addition, this payout control unit is connected to the game ball lending device 5003a via an external connection terminal board, and outputs a lending request signal or a return request signal based on the player's operation.

The pachislot gaming machine 5002b mainly plays a game in which a player inserts a coin (game medium) and operates a start lever to spin multiple reels with multiple symbols drawn on them, and then stops the reels sequentially by pressing the stop buttons corresponding to each reel, and pays out coins when symbols corresponding to a predetermined role are aligned on an active line. Like the pachinko gaming machine 5002a, the pachislot gaming machine 5002b also includes a main control unit for controlling the main gaming device, a sub-control unit for controlling the performance operations related to display and audio output, and a payout control unit for controlling the coin payout operation. The payout control unit is connected to the gaming display device 5001 via an external connection terminal board, and outputs a game information signal, an error signal, etc. to the gaming display device 5001 after each game or when there is a change in the internal state. This payout control unit is also connected to the medal lending device 5003b via an external connection terminal board, and outputs a lending request signal or a return request signal based on the player's operation.

[Gaming media lending device]
The game media lending device 5003 will be briefly described with reference to Fig. 111. The game media lending device 5003 includes a game ball lending device 5003a installed adjacent to a pachinko game machine 5002a and a medal lending device 5003b installed adjacent to a pachislot game machine 5002b. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the game ball lending device 5003a and the medal lending device 5003b are collectively referred to as the game media lending device 5003.

The game media lending device 5003 is connected to the server device 5004 via, for example, a switching hub or controller (not shown). When a player inserts a card into the game media lending device 5003, the game media lending device 5003 transmits identification information (hereinafter simply referred to as "identification information") such as a card ID or a member ID attached to an IC chip of the card to the server device 5004. The server device 5004 transmits the ball information of the player stored in association with the received identification information to the game media lending device 5003. When a payout instruction is received from the player, the server device 5004 updates the ball information, and the game media lending device 5003 drives a payout device (not shown) to execute payout control of the game media. When a player inserts a bill, the server device 5004 transmits the remaining amount information according to the amount of the bill (the amount inserted). Then, when a payout command is received from the player, the server device 5004 updates the remaining balance information, and the gaming media lending device 5003 similarly controls the payout of gaming media.

When gaming media are inserted into a counting device (not shown) by the player's operation or directly from the gaming machine 5002, the gaming media lending device 5003 counts the number of gaming media inserted and transmits the counting result to the server device 5004 as the player's counted ball information, and the server device 5004 stores the received counted ball information in association with the identification information attached to the card. Also, if no card is inserted, the server device 5004 stores the received counted ball information in association with the identification information previously attached to the counting card stored in the gaming media lending device 5003.

In this embodiment, the server device 5004 manages the ball information and remaining balance information of the player, but this information may also be managed by the game media lending device 5003. Furthermore, in addition to adding identification information to the card, a memory area may also be provided, and this information may be stored in the memory area and managed. Furthermore, the information may be updated by either the server device 5004 or the game media lending device 5003. Furthermore, the ball information may be managed by the game media lending device 5003 or the server device 5004, and the remaining balance information may be stored directly in the memory area of the card.

In addition, in this embodiment, when no card is inserted, the counting ball information and remaining balance information are stored in association with identification information that is pre-added to the counting card stored in the game media lending device 5003, but when a request is made to return the card, the game media lending device 5003 or the server device 5004 may add new identification information to the counting card stored in the game media lending device 5003, and store this newly added identification information in association with the counting ball information or remaining balance information.

In addition, if the gaming machine 5002 is provided with a gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board (hereinafter referred to as the "lending terminal board"), the gaming medium lending device 5003 is also connected to this lending terminal board, and based on receiving a lending request signal, a return request signal, etc. output from the lending terminal board, sends a payout request signal to the gaming machine 5002 or returns a card, etc.

The gaming medium lending device 5003 is also connected to the gaming display device 5001 via a converter or the like, and receives gaming information signals and error signals output from an external connection terminal board provided on the gaming machine 5002, and transmits information about the balls held by the player to the gaming display device 5001.

[Server device]
The server device 5004 will be briefly described with reference to Fig. 111. The server device 5004 is used as a so-called hall computer, and is connected to the game display device 5001 as well as to the game medium lending device 5003. The server device 5004 transmits to the game display device 5001 game result management information (e.g., payout history information including the past few days and fraud detection information) and information about the game parlor (e.g., new machine information, vacant machine information, etc.) that it manages.

The server device 5004 is also connected to an external management device (not shown) managed by a center operator, which is a third party other than the gaming facility, and transmits card identification information, member information, and information on the balls held by the player periodically (e.g., once a day). The external management device backs up the transmitted information. If the server device 5004 loses connection to the external management device for a specified number of days (e.g., 15 days), it stops updating the information on the balls held by the player.

In the gaming system described above, when a player enters an amusement store (amusement hall), he or she first sits down at the desired gaming machine 5002 while looking at various information displayed on the gaming display device 5001. Next, if the player is a member of the amusement store, the player inserts a membership card into the gaming medium lending device 5003, and after identity verification (for example, input of a registered PIN number, etc.), if the ball information is stored in the server device 5004, the player uses the balls, and if the ball information is not stored or the ball information is the number of balls that cannot be lent in the gaming machine 5002, the player inserts a bill, makes a lending request to receive the gaming medium, and inserts the gaming medium into the gaming machine 5002 to start playing. Alternatively, if the player is not a member of the amusement store, the player inserts a bill, makes a lending request to receive the gaming medium, and inserts the gaming medium into the gaming machine 5002 to start playing. At this time, the balls held and remaining balance information stored in the server device 5004 are updated (deducted) by the amount lent out.

If the player continues playing without being able to receive a payout of gaming media from the gaming machine 5002, the held ball information and remaining balance information stored in the server device 5004 are updated (subtracted) by the amount of the loaned amount each time a loan request is made. On the other hand, if the player is able to receive a payout of gaming media from the gaming machine 5002, when the paid-out gaming media is inserted into the gaming media lending device 5003, the number of inserted gaming media is counted, and the held ball information stored in the server device 5004 is updated (added) based on the counting result.

After that, when the player wishes to finish playing on the gaming machine 5002, the player requests the return of the card. If the membership card is inserted into the gaming medium lending device 5003, the membership card is returned as is after identity verification (for example, entry of a registered PIN number, etc.). If the membership card is not inserted into the gaming medium lending device 5003, and if the server device 5004 stores counting ball information or has remaining balance information, the counting card stored in the gaming medium lending device 5003 is returned (issued). If the server device 5004 does not store counting ball information and there is no remaining amount deposited, the counting card is not returned (issued).

If the counting card is returned (issued) and you wish to play on another gaming machine 5002, you can insert the counting card into the gaming medium lending device 5003 provided for the other gaming machine 5002 to start (replay) the game using the same procedures as for a membership card (except for identity verification). In the above case, replay based on saved ball information is called "saved ball replay," and replay based on counted held ball information is called "held ball replay."

[Configuration of the gaming display device]
Next, the configuration of the game display device 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 113, the gaming display device 5001 has, as basic components, a housing 5010, a screen unit 5011A, a projector body (projection means) 5012, a reflector 5013, and an operation unit 5014. In addition to the projector body 5012, the reflector 5013, and the operation unit 5014, the housing 5010 houses a control unit (not shown) for controlling the overall operation of the gaming display device 5001. The screen unit 5011A is attached so as to cover the opening surface 5010A provided on the front side of the housing 5010. FIGS. 112 to 114 show a standard type screen unit 5011A, and unless otherwise specified, the description will be basically given using this screen unit 5011A, but any screen unit may be used.

As shown in FIG. 113, the housing 5010 is formed in a rectangular box shape having a bottom surface 5010a, left and right side surfaces 5010b, 5010c, a back surface 5010d, a top surface 5010e, and a front opening surface 5010A. A projector body 5012 is installed at the rear of the bottom surface 5010a, and an operation unit 5014 is installed at the front of the bottom surface 5010a. A reflector 5013 is installed at the top of the back surface 5010d.

The screen unit 5011A is formed to have a front part 5011a that covers the opening surface 5010A of the housing 5010, and left and right side parts 5011b, 5011c that are detachably fixed to the side surfaces 5010b, 5010c of the housing 5010. The screen unit 5011A has a screen (projection target part) 5110A provided in the opening 5011aa of the front part 5011a, and LED boards 5111 provided on the left and right sides of the rear surface of the front part 5011a, as shown in FIG. 114.

The front surface 5011a is provided with an opening 5011aa for placing the screen 5110A, as well as light-emitting surfaces 5111a that emit light on the left and right sides of the screen 5110A, and an opening 5112 for exposing the buttons 5014A to 5014F of the operation unit 5014 to the front.

The screen 5110A is a translucent type that displays a projected image projected from behind, and is formed primarily from a light-transmitting glass plate, acrylic plate, or resin film, for example, and is milky white, translucent, or gray when not projecting. The screen 5110A of the screen unit 5011A is formed to have an even thickness over its entire surface. Such a screen 5110A has a uniformly flat rear-side entrance surface 5100 (Figure 114) onto which the light projected from the projector body 5012 enters, and a front-side display surface 5101 (Figure 113) onto which the projected image is projected by transmitting the light that enters the entrance surface 5100.

As shown in Figures 113 and 114, the light-emitting surface 5111a is made of a translucent plate-like member, and an LED board 5111 is provided on the back side of the light-emitting surface 5111a. The LED board 5111 is equipped with a plurality of LEDs (not shown), and is connected to a control unit on the housing 5010 side via a connector 5111A and a cable 5111B. Note that while Figure 114 shows a connector 5111A and a cable 5111B corresponding to one LED board 5111, the other LED board 5111 is also provided with a connector and a cable, and is also connected to the control unit via a connector and a cable.

This control unit causes multiple LEDs on the LED board 5111 to light up or blink, and the light from these LEDs is emitted forward through the light-emitting surface 5111a.

The light-emitting surface 5111a is made of a plate-like material having translucency, but is not limited to this and may be made of a material at least partially having translucency and partially not having translucency.

In addition, in the translucent portion, a decorative sheet may be placed between the LED board and the plate-like member, or the plate-like member itself may be decorated with a translucent colored decoration. In such a case, the LED board functions as a light-emitting means having a light source, while the plate-like member functions as a decorative member decorated by the light-emitting means, and the decorative member may have optical properties such as translucency, diffusion, polarization, refraction, and reflection.

The projector body 5012 projects light to display information related to the game on a screen as a projected image, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal type using a liquid crystal panel, or a DLP (registered trademark: Digital Light Processing) type using a DMD (Digital Micromirror Device) element.

The projector body (projection means) 5012 is connected to a control unit (not shown), and its operation is controlled by this control unit. The projector body 5012 includes an LCD panel or DMD element, an LED or lamp as a light source, a dichroic mirror, a projection lens, and the like. The projection lens can be adjusted in the direction of the optical axis.

The projector body 5012 is arranged so that the light emitted from the projection lens is directed directly to the reflector 5013. When the screen unit 5011A is attached, the focus can be adjusted by finely adjusting the projection lens of the projector body 5012 in the optical axis direction. This allows a sharp, accurately focused projection image to be projected onto the screen 5110A of the screen unit 5011A.

The reflector 5013 is made of a material that reflects light, and is installed on the back surface 5010d at an angle to the opening surface 5010A of the housing 5010 so as to reflect the light incident from the projector body 5012 toward the opening surface 5010A (the entrance surface 5100 of the screen 5110A).

The operation unit 5014 has multiple buttons 5014A-5014F arranged side by side that can be operated by a player or the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 115, the operation unit 5014 is provided with, from the left, a switch button 5014A, a history button 5014B, a call button 5014C, a setting button 5014D, a confirmation button 5014E, and a cross button 5014F. The operation unit 5014 is connected to a control unit (not shown), and when the operation of each of the buttons 5014A-5014F is detected by a switch (not shown), a detection signal is supplied from the switch to the control unit, and the control unit performs display control in accordance with the detection signal.

The switch button 5014A is a button for switching between graph display and numerical display, which will be described later. The history button 5014B is a button for displaying today's gaming history. The call button 5014C is a button for calling an arcade attendant. The setting button 5014D is a button for changing display settings, etc. The confirmation button 5014E is a button for confirming various settings. The cross button 5014F is a button for changing numerical values and scrolling.

As shown in FIG. 115, the projected image V1 on the screen 5110A displays a chart image showing the number of medals won since the start of the game in a line graph. The projected image V2 displays a text image showing the number of bonuses executed today and the cumulative number of games.

Projected image V3 displays a text image showing the number of past bonuses and the cumulative number of games played as history. Note that the surface onto which light enters is the incident surface 5100, but the surface onto which light is projected (display surface) may also include the rear region of the LED board 5111, the regions above and below the incident surface 5100 (such as the front portion 5011a), and even the left and right regions (side portions 5011b, 5011c).

Even if the surface onto which light is projected in this manner is included inside the screen unit, it is sufficient that the projection image can be projected in the area in front of the projector body 5012 or in front of the reflector 5013.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a game display device according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 116 to 117. Note that components that are the same as or similar to those in the previously described embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 116 and 117, the game display device 5501 according to the fourth embodiment has a screen unit 5511D with a concave screen 5610D over the entire front surface, and the entire front surface of the screen 5610D is a gently sloping concave display surface 5601. This game display device 5501 does not have a light-emitting surface or buttons.

Also, as shown in FIG. 117, an LED board 5560 and a reflector 5561 are provided on the outside of the rear surface 5510d of the housing 5510, which is the rear surface side of the reflector 5513. The LED board 5560 is mounted with a plurality of LEDs 5560A positioned in a ring shape with respect to the rear surface 5510d, and the LEDs 5560A are arranged so that light can be irradiated toward the reflector 5561. The light of such LEDs 5560A is reflected by the reflector 5561, thereby illuminating the periphery of the gaming display device 5501 and the periphery of the screen 5610A from behind.

With this type of gaming display device 5501, a projection image can be projected onto the entire display surface 5601 of the screen 5610D, and the decorative effect can be enhanced by the light from behind by the LED 5560A.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the screen 5610D is formed in a concave shape, so that a three-dimensional image with depth can be displayed. This can further enhance the visual effect and decorative effect.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, a game display device according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 118 to 120. Note that components that are the same as or similar to those in the above-described embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The fifth embodiment is configured to improve the visual effect and decorativeness by illuminating the upper edge of the concave screen 5610D shown in FIG. 116, for example.

As shown in FIG. 118, the gaming display device 5501 according to the fifth embodiment has a screen 5610D that is composed of an entrance surface 5600 (light guide) having a predetermined thickness and transmitting light, and a display surface 5601 (display) having a predetermined thickness and displaying a projected image. In addition, at least one board (LED board) 5570 is installed on the bottom surface 5510a of the housing 5510 near the lower edge of the screen 5610D, and a diffuse reflection section 5572 consisting of uneven parts that diffusely reflect light is provided on the upper edge of the entrance surface (light guide) 5600 of the screen 5610D.

The diffuse reflection section 5572 is provided over the entire upper edge of the screen 5610D. The base 5570 may be provided over the entire lower edge of the screen 5610D, or may be divided as appropriate. The position and emission angle of one or more light-emitting elements 5571 are appropriately adjusted so that light from the light-emitting elements reaches the diffuse reflection section 5572 uniformly over the entire surface.

This creates a horizontally elongated reflected light that borders the upper edge of the screen 5610D, improving the visual and decorative effects. Note that in the diagram shown in FIG. 118, an LED board 5560 and a reflector 5561 are provided on the back surface of the reflector 5513, but these can be omitted as appropriate.

In addition, to prevent light from the light-emitting element 5571 from leaking through the gap between the base 5570 and the bottom surface 5510a, a light-shielding member 5573 is installed in the gap to prevent light from leaking into the housing 5510.

Furthermore, a light-shielding member may be provided around the light-emitting element 5571 as appropriate to prevent light from the light-emitting element 5571 from being directed toward the display surface 5601 of the screen 5610D.

According to the fifth embodiment, the light from the light emitting element 5571 of the base 5570 provided near the lower edge of the screen 5610D is emitted so as to border the upper edge of the screen 5610D, thereby improving the visual effect and decorativeness of the gaming display device 5501. Moreover, by preventing the occurrence of leakage light from the light emitting element 5571 into the housing 5510, the irradiation efficiency is increased and the projected image on the screen 5610D is not affected. In addition, the base 5570 may be provided near the upper edge, left edge, and/or right edge of the screen 5610D, and the diffuse reflection section 5572 may be provided at the lower edge, right edge, and/or left edge of the incident surface (light guide section) 5600 in opposition to each of them. This allows each edge (upper edge, lower edge, right edge, and/or left edge) of the screen 5610D to be appropriately illuminated.

(Variation 1)
119, in order to prevent light from the light emitting element 5571 from leaking into the housing 5510 through a gap between the base 5570 and the bottom surface 5510a, the bottom surface 5510a having a light blocking function is modified so as to close the gap. This provides the same effects as the fifth embodiment and reduces the number of parts.

(Variation 2)
120, in the second modification, a board 5570 having a light-shielding function is disposed vertically, and the board 5570 itself prevents light from the light-emitting element from leaking into the housing 5510. This makes it possible to achieve the same effects as those of the fifth embodiment, and also to reduce the number of parts.

In addition, in the present modified examples 1 and 2, the LED board 5560 and the reflector 5561 can be omitted as appropriate.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, a gaming device according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 121 to 127. Note that components that are the same as or similar to those in the above embodiment will be given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Figure 121 is a perspective view of a gaming device G1 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in Figure 121, the gaming device G1 has a housing G10 and a screen unit G11 configured with a screen G110 whose entire front surface is concave. The housing G10 has a base G101 and a projector housing G102.

Figure 122 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming device G1. As shown in Figure 122, the base G101 has a flat rear portion G101a and a bottom portion G101b, which respectively form the rear wall and bottom wall of the housing G10. The projector main body 5012 is mounted on the bottom portion G101b. In addition, a reflector 5013 is arranged along the inner wall of the rear portion G101a.

The projector housing G102 is attached to the bottom surface portion G101b so as to cover the projector body G12, thereby housing the projector body G12 in the internal space. The internal space is open at the top, allowing the image light emitted from the projector body G12 to reach the reflector G13 arranged on the back surface portion G101a. The screen unit G11 is attached so as to cover the reflector G13, and is configured so that the image light reflected by the reflector G13 is irradiated onto the screen G110.

In this way, the gaming device G1 of the sixth embodiment is a gaming display device that functions as a transmissive projector device, similar to the above-mentioned embodiments, but is not limited to this. For example, the gaming device may be a gaming display device with a built-in liquid crystal display or organic EL (Electro Luminescence). Furthermore, the gaming device is not limited to a gaming display device, and may be, for example, a gaming medium lending device or a unit for decorating a gaming machine that is installed on the gaming machine.

In the following description of the sixth embodiment, for convenience, the direction perpendicular to the main surface of the rear portion G101a may be referred to as the front-rear direction. In the front-rear direction, the screen unit G11 side of the rear portion G101a may be referred to as the front side (front direction) of the gaming device G1, and the side opposite the front side may be referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). Furthermore, the right side and left side when viewed from the front side may be referred to as the right side (right direction) and left side (left direction) of the gaming device G1, respectively, and the direction including the right side and left side may be referred to as the left-right direction. Furthermore, the direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction and left-right direction may be referred to as the up-down direction or height direction.

Figure 123 is a perspective view showing the gaming device G1 from the rear side. As shown in Figures 121 to 123, a light guide plate G61 is arranged behind the rear portion G101a of the base G101 so as to be parallel to the rear portion G101a. That is, the light guide plate G61 is arranged parallel in the vertical and horizontal directions. The light guide plate G61 is translucent, and is capable of guiding incident light. In the sixth embodiment, the light guide plate G61 is formed as a flat plate having a substantially rectangular shape, but is not limited to this and may be any shape, such as a circle. As shown in Figure 123, the light guide plate G61 is fixed to the base G101 by a rear substrate cover G62.

The gaming device G1 is generally placed above the gaming machine 5002, and the screen G110 is placed so that it faces the face of the player, with the screen G110 facing in a direction that slopes downward from the front. At this time, it is preferable that the light guide plate G61 is configured in a position and/or size such that the light guide plate G61 can be seen from the player above the screen G110.

Figure 124 is an exploded perspective view showing the gaming device G1 from the rear side. As shown in Figure 124, the light guide plate G61 has a circular opening G61a formed to penetrate in the thickness direction. That is, the light guide plate G61 has a circular end face (opening side end face G61b) on the opening G61a side. In other words, the opening side end face G61b forms the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61. In the sixth embodiment, the opening G61a is formed in a circular shape, but is not limited to this, and may be a square shape, etc. In addition, a part of the periphery of the opening G61a may coincide with the periphery of the light guide plate G61. That is, the opening G61a may be formed by providing a notch in the light guide plate G61.

The LED substrate G60 is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the light guide plate G61 and the base body G101. That is, the LED substrate G60 is provided with the LED substrate G60, which is separate from the light guide plate G61. The LED substrate G60 is equipped with the LED substrate G60 at a position facing the opening side end face G61b on the light guide plate G61 side. More specifically, the LED substrate G60 is arranged at equal intervals along the opening side end face G61b on the LED substrate G60 so as to surround the opening G61a. In addition, when the opening G61a is formed by a notch, the LED substrate G60A is arranged in an arc shape along the notch. Each LED substrate G60A has an exit port in the direction facing the opening side end face G61b. Therefore, the LED substrate G60 radiates light from the LED substrate G60A toward the opening side end face G61b of the light guide plate G61. In addition, the optical axis of the light emitted from the multiple LEDs G60A is parallel to the light guide plate G61, so that the light incident on the light guide plate G61 travels through the light guide plate G61 and can reach the outer end face G61c that constitutes the periphery of the light guide plate G61. The thickness of the light guide plate G61 is set to be longer than the length of the LEDs G60A in the front-to-rear direction. This prevents the rear substrate cover G62 that fixes the light guide plate G61 from contacting the LEDs G60A located in the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61.

In this way, the light from the multiple LEDs G60A arranged in the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61 is incident from the opening side end face G61b of the light guide plate G61, and then guided inside the light guide plate G61, illuminating the entire area of the outer end face G61c of the light guide plate G61. As a result, the light emitted from the multiple LEDs G60A spreads radially inside the light guide plate G61 and reaches the outer end face G61c, making it possible to illuminate the entire periphery of the light guide plate G61 in a ring shape, making the illuminated light guide plate G61 visible from any direction of the gaming device G1, and improving the identifiability of the gaming machine to which the gaming device G1 is attached.

The LED board G60 is capable of individually controlling the lighting of the multiple LEDG60A. The LED board G60 has a memory (not shown) in which multiple lighting patterns are stored, and controls the multiple LEDG60A with a lighting pattern corresponding to an external signal or the like. For example, the LED board G60 selects a lighting pattern corresponding to a signal indicating the game state transmitted from the gaming machine or an operation performed on an input device (not shown) of the gaming device G1, and controls the multiple LEDG60A based on the lighting pattern. For example, by controlling the multiple LEDG60A with a lighting pattern that sequentially lights up in the order of arrangement, a drive effect in which light flows around the periphery of the light guide plate G61 is possible. In addition, by selecting full-color LEDs for the multiple LEDG60A, various notifications can be made, such as lighting up red when a call input is made by the player by operating a touch sensor, which will be described later, or flashing yellow when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine.

The light guide plate G61 is provided with a reflection treatment at multiple locations that reflects a portion of the light from the LED G60A inside the light guide plate G61 in the thickness direction toward the base G101 side. The reflection treatment is applied to the light guide plate G61 to form a shape with design, so that illumination of that shape appears on the main surface of the light guide plate G61. The reflection treatment of the light guide plate G61 will be specifically described below by illustrating the optical path pattern of the light traveling inside the light guide plate G61.

Figures 125A and 125B are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the optical path pattern of light from LED G60A traveling through the light guide plate G61. As shown in Figure 125A, if no reflection processing is applied to the optical path of the light from LED G60A, the light emitted from LED G60A enters the light guide plate G61 from the opening side end face G61b, travels in the surface direction (up and down direction) within the light guide plate G61, and reaches the outer end face G61c. This causes the entire periphery of the light guide plate G61 to be illuminated in a ring shape.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 125B, the light guide plate G61 has a reflecting portion G61d that reflects light traveling in the surface direction (up and down direction) of the light guide plate G61. In the sixth embodiment, the reflecting portion G61d is a recess formed on the main surface of the light guide plate G61 opposite the LED substrate G60. The reflecting portion G61d has a reflecting surface whose normal is inclined 45 degrees in the thickness direction (forward direction) with respect to the optical path of the light from the LED G60A, and reflects the light that reaches the reflecting portion G61d toward the LED substrate G60 in the thickness direction (forward direction) of the light guide plate G61. The reflecting portion G61d may be provided inside the light guide plate by processing such as laser processing.

Figure 126 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the illumination mode of the light guide plate G61. As shown in Figure 126, light is emitted radially from the LED G60A (see Figure 124) arranged in the opening G61a, reaches the outer end face G61c, and illuminates the periphery of the light guide plate G61. In addition, a portion of the light from the LED G60A (see Figure 124) is reflected forward by the reflecting portion G61d, forming a bright spot on the main surface of the light guide plate G61. The reflecting portions G61d are arranged in groups to form a design, and the bright spots formed by reflection of the reflecting portions G61d pointillize the design.

Figure 127 is an exploded perspective view showing the gaming device G1 from the rear side. As shown in Figure 127, the multiple LEDs G60A are provided on an LED board G60 that is separate from the light guide plate G61. The LED board G60 and the light guide plate G61 are each provided with an alignment portion G60e and an alignment portion G61e for aligning the multiple LEDs G60A so that they are positioned opposite the opening side end face G61b of the light guide plate G61.

Specifically, the alignment portion G60e is four through holes that penetrate in the front-rear direction provided at the four corners of the light guide plate G61. The alignment portion G61e is four through holes that penetrate in a manner corresponding to the four alignment portions G60e. Similarly, alignment portions G62e are formed on the rear substrate cover G62 that sandwiches the light guide plate G61 with the LED substrate G60.

The rear surface G101a of the base G101 is provided with an alignment member G101e for aligning the LED substrate G60 and the alignment portions G60e, G61e of the light guide plate G61. The alignment member G101e has a cylindrical shape with a cross section that engages with the alignment portions G60e, G61e, G62e, is longer than the combined thickness of the LED substrate G60, the light guide plate G61, and the rear substrate cover G62, and is provided protruding rearward from the base G101.

In this way, the LED board G60, the light guide plate G61, and the rear board cover G62 are detachably arranged on the base G101. The alignment portions G60e, G61e, and G62e of the LED board G60, the light guide plate G61, and the rear board cover G62 are sequentially inserted into the alignment member G101e of the base G101 to align them.

When the light guide plate G61 is aligned, first, the alignment portion G61e of the light guide plate G61 is aligned with and inserted into the protruding end of the alignment member G101e of the base G101. The light guide plate G61 is then moved forward while its movement in the up-down and left-right directions is restricted by the alignment member G101e, and is positioned so as to be placed on the LED substrate G60. In this way, the light guide plate G61 is restricted to movement only in the forward-backward direction by the alignment member G101e. This makes it possible to prevent the light guide plate G61 from coming into contact with the LED G60A that is provided to be placed on the LED substrate G60 during alignment.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, a gaming device according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figs. 128 to 131. Components that are the same as or similar to those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and will not be described. In the seventh embodiment, a different aspect of the projector housing G102 (see Figs. 122 and 123) described in the sixth embodiment will be described, and other configurations will be omitted as they are the same as those in the sixth embodiment.

Figure 128 is a perspective view of the projector housing F102 of the gaming device F1 according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in Figure 128, the projector housing F102 is attached to the base G101 below the screen unit G11 so as to cover the projector body G12 (see Figure 122), thereby housing the projector body G12 in the internal space. As in the sixth embodiment, the internal space is open at the top, allowing the image light emitted from the projector body G12 to reach the reflector G13 arranged on the back part G101a. Furthermore, the projector housing F102 of the seventh embodiment has a function of an input device that accepts input from the player and a function of notifying the player. The projector housing F102 will be described in detail below.

The projector housing F102 has an exterior panel F1021 that forms the front outer shape of the projector housing F102. The exterior panel F1021 has a touch area F1021a, a speaker unit F1021c, and a light receiving unit F1021d.

The touch area F1021a is a rectangular input area set according to the shape of the touch sensor F1022 (see FIG. 129) described later. The touch area F1021a is provided with a light-transmitting portion F1021b having light-transmitting properties, and light irradiated from the back side can be transmitted through the touch area F1021a. In the seventh embodiment, the light-transmitting portion F1021b is composed of, but is not limited to, a rectangular design showing the touch area F1021a, a picture showing a "hand" arranged within the rectangular design, and text showing "CALL". In the seventh embodiment, the exterior panel F1021 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and then printed with non-transmitting ink so as to leave the light-transmitting portion F1021b, but is not limited to this. For example, a light-transmitting material may be provided so as to be flush with the exterior panel F1021, or a through hole may simply penetrate the exterior panel F1021. In addition, the light-transmitting portion F1021b may have a through-hole formed through the exterior panel F1021, and an optical sheet (optical film) for diffusely reflecting light may be provided on the back side.

The speaker unit F1021c is a through hole for outputting sound from the speaker F10253 (see Figures 129 and 130) described below to the outside. The light receiving unit F1021d is an input device for receiving signals from the outside, such as infrared rays.

Figure 129 is an exploded perspective view of the projector housing F102. As shown in Figure 129, the projector housing F102 has the above-mentioned exterior panel F1021, a touch sensor F1022, a light guide plate F1023, an LED array F1024 provided on the upper edge of the light guide plate F1023, a substrate F1025, a frame body F1026, and a housing base F1027.

The housing base F1027, together with the exterior panel F1021, forms the outer shape of the projector housing F102, and houses the touch sensor F1022, light guide plate F1023, LED array F1024, and substrate F1025 between the housing base F1027 and the exterior panel F1021. The housing base F1027 is also provided with the above-mentioned speaker and a light receiving element for the light receiving unit F1021d to receive optical signals from the outside. The projector main body G12 (see FIG. 122) is housed on the opposite side of the housing base F1027 from the exterior panel F1021. The housing base F1027 is also provided with a speaker F10253 on the upper left of the front side for outputting sound from the speaker unit F1021c.

The substrate F1025 has the function of receiving input from the touch sensor F1022 and the light receiving unit F1021d, and the function of controlling the lighting of the LED array F1024.

The LED array F1024 is an LED unit in which multiple full-color LEDs are arranged in parallel, and emits light in a planar manner from the upper edge of the light guide plate F1023 toward the light guide plate F1023. The light guide plate F1023 is provided on the back side of the touch sensor F1022, and reflects the light from the LED array F1024 by a reflective sheet provided on the rear side of the light guide plate F1023 while traveling, and emits the light from a diffusion sheet provided on the front side of the light guide plate F1023. That is, the light guide plate F1023 has the function of guiding the light from the LED array F1024 toward the light-transmitting portion F1021b of the exterior panel F1021 provided on the front side through the touch sensor F1022. This illuminates the light-transmitting portion F1021b, which has light-transmitting properties.

The touch sensor F1022 is translucent and is arranged on the back side of the exterior panel F1021 in correspondence with the touch area F1021a. This allows the touch sensor F1022 to detect touch input to the touch area F1021a by the player.

The touch sensor F1022, the light guide plate F1023 on which the LED array F1024 is arranged, and the substrate F1025 are attached to the frame F1026, and are then attached to the center of the housing base F1027 on the exterior panel F1021 side.

[Configuration of the Seventh Embodiment]
FIG. 130 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the projector container F102. As shown in FIG. 130, the board F1025 has a control circuit F10250, a ROM F10251, a RAM F10252, and a communication interface F10254. The control circuit F10250 has a CPU and circuits for controlling the LED array F1024 and the speaker F10253. The ROM F10251 stores a lighting pattern for controlling the lighting of the LED array. The RAM F10252 temporarily stores input information from the outside. The communication interface F10254 is for communicating with the gaming machine 5002 (see FIG. 111) and, for example, the LED board G60 (see FIG. 124). Note that communication from the gaming machine 5002 may be performed via the LED board G60 or a control board (not shown) that controls the LED board G60. Also, instead of receiving signals directly from the gaming machines, the signals may be received indirectly from other devices, such as a server or controller within the gaming center.

In this way, the substrate F1025 is configured to be able to change the illumination of the light-transmitting portion F1021b based on information from the touch sensor F1022 and the gaming machine 5002. In addition, since it is connected to the LED substrate G60 for illuminating the light guide plate G61 arranged on the rear surface of the gaming device G1, it is possible to perform effects and notifications in which the illumination of the light-transmitting portion F1021b and the illumination of the light guide plate G61 are synchronized, for example.

Figure 131 is a flowchart of the control process executed by the control circuit F10250. The operation of the control circuit F10250 will be explained with reference to Figure 131.

As shown in FIG. 131, first, the control circuit F10250 determines whether or not there is an input (step S4001). Input includes an input to the touch sensor F1022 by the player and an input of a signal indicating the game status from the gaming machine 5002. If there is no input (step S4001: NO), step S4001 is executed again. Note that there may be a control process when there is no input. For example, the light-transmitting portion F1021b (LED array F1024) may continue to be illuminated in a predetermined manner as long as there is no input to the touch sensor F1022.

If there is an input (step S4001: YES), the control circuit F10250 determines the type of input (step S4002). Thereafter, the control circuit F10250 determines the control target (step S4003). That is, the control circuit F10250 selects the actuator to be controlled according to the input type. The actuators include the LED array F1024, the speaker F10253, and the multiple LEDs G60A of the LED board G60. That is, the ROM F10251 stores a data table in which the actuator to be controlled is associated with the input type, and the control circuit F10250 refers to the data table to obtain the actuator corresponding to the input type.

Then, the control circuit F10250 selects a predetermined control pattern for controlling the actuator (step S4004). That is, the ROM F10251 stores a data table in which the control patterns of the actuators correspond to the input types, and the control circuit F10250 refers to the data table to obtain the control pattern for each actuator.

Then, the control circuit F10250 controls the actuator with the selected control pattern (step S4005) and ends the process. Specifically, when there is an input from the player to the touch sensor F1022, the control circuit F10250 controls the illumination state of the light-transmitting portion F1021b (LED array F1024) to change to a predetermined pattern. When controlling multiple LEDG60A in response to the input to the touch sensor F1022, the control circuit F10250 transmits a control signal to the LED board G60 or a control board that controls the LED board G60, and controls the multiple LEDG60A.

When the player touches the touch panel, the control circuit F10250 may instruct the LED board G60 and/or the projector control means to emit light from the LED G60A in a predetermined manner and/or to display a predetermined image on the screen G110. When the control circuit F10250 instructs the LED board G60 to emit light, not only the light-transmitting portion F1021b of the touch area F1021a in front of the player and the screen G110, but also the light guide plate G61, which is larger than the main body and visible from the side of the gaming machine, is lit in a predetermined manner (for example, red light), making it easier for the manager of the gaming facility to identify the gaming machine being called (the gaming machine to which the gaming device G1 to which the player has made the call input is attached). In addition, when the arcade manager arrives at the called gaming machine, he or she usually operates the touch sensor F1022 (touch area F1021a) to turn off the light, but the LED board F1025 may be configured to change the lighting state of the LEDG60A depending on the time from the touch operation. For example, the control circuit F10250 may control the LEDG60A to light up red when the player operates the machine, change it to flashing red 30 seconds after the player operates the machine, and change it to flashing red faster than before after one minute has passed since the player operates the machine. This allows the arcade manager to determine at a glance the time from the player's operation even when he or she is away from the gaming machine, and allows the manager to prioritize the operations even when there are multiple called gaming machines, making it possible to provide appropriate service to the player.

In this way, when there is a touch input to the touch area F1021a, the control circuit F10250 controls to change the lighting state of the LEDG60A, which is a plurality of light sources for the light guide plate G61. In addition, the control circuit F10250 controls to change the lighting state of the plurality of LEDG60A according to the elapsed time from the timing of the touch input to the touch area F1021a. Here, the change in the lighting state includes a change from an unlit state to a lighting state, and a change from a lighting state to a specific lighting state. In addition, the change in the lighting state of the LEDG60A may be an intermittent change at a predetermined timing as described above, or may be a continuous change (gradual change in color, gradual change in blinking interval) according to the elapsed time. In addition, the control of the plurality of LEDG60A based on the touch input to the touch area F1021a is not limited to being performed by sending an instruction signal from the control circuit F10250 to the LED board G60 and/or the projector control means, as described above. For example, the gaming device F1 may be configured so that multiple LEDGs 60A are connected to the control circuit F10250, so that the control circuit F10250 directly controls multiple LEDGs 60A.

Eighth Embodiment
Next, a gaming device according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figs. 132 to 145. Components identical to or similar to those in the above-mentioned embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals and will not be described. The gaming device according to the eighth embodiment is a gaming display device that functions as a transmissive projector device, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, but is not limited thereto. For example, the gaming device may be a gaming display device with a built-in liquid crystal display or organic EL (Electro Luminescence). In this embodiment, the gaming device is a data display device, but is not limited thereto. For example, the gaming device may be a gaming medium lending device, or a unit for decorating a gaming machine that is provided on the gaming machine.

[Configuration of the eighth embodiment]
Fig. 132 is a perspective view of a data display H1 and a gaming machine H2 according to the eighth embodiment Fig. 133 is a perspective view of the data display H1 according to the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 132, the data display H1 is installed individually above the gaming machine H2 in the gaming arcade. In the present invention, the gaming machine H2 is configured to have different presentation modes depending on the gaming state, and the data display H1 is configured to execute presentation modes corresponding to the presentation modes of the gaming machine H2. In other words, the data display H1 is configured to be able to detect the gaming state of the gaming machine H2 based on the presentation modes of the gaming machine H2.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132, the gaming machine H2 has a main body H32 and a base door H33 pivotally attached to the main body H32 so as to be freely opened and closed. A top lamp H60 is arranged to form the upper end region of the base door H33. The top lamp H60 is an illumination device that has a full-color LED and projects light from the full-color LED onto a translucent member that forms part of the housing of the base door H33 to emit light. As the top lamp H60 is thus arranged to form the upper end region of the base door H33, the light emission mode of the top lamp H60 is visible from the front side, side side, and top side of the gaming machine H2. The top lamp H60 is controlled in the gaming machine H2 to function as a light-emitting means for performance that changes the lighting mode depending on the game state. In addition, the data display H1 has a container H102 having the same function as the projector container G102 of the above-mentioned embodiment, and supports the screen unit H11. Note that FIG. 132 shows an example in which a data display H1 is provided on a pachinko gaming machine as the gaming machine H2, but this is not limited to this and may also be a pachislot gaming machine.

As shown in Figures 132 and 133, the housing H102 has a similar configuration to the projector housing G102 of the above embodiment, and also incorporates a camera unit H12. The camera unit H12 has a CMOS image sensor and a control device that controls the sensor. The camera unit H12 is disposed at the bottom of the housing H102 so that it can capture an image of at least a portion of the top lamp H60. That is, the data display H1 is disposed at the top of the gaming machine H2 so that the top lamp H60 is included in the imaging range of the camera unit H12. For example, the data display H1 is configured as a separate housing from the gaming machine H2, and is held at the top of the gaming machine H2 by a predetermined holding means.

As a result, the camera unit H12 functions as an image acquisition means that captures an image of the top lamp H60 and acquires an image including the lighting state of the top lamp H60. Therefore, the data display H1 can have the function of acquiring continuous images by the camera unit H12, thereby determining the lighting state of the gaming machine H2, and judging the gaming state of the gaming machine H2. In other words, the camera unit H12 functions as a lighting state detection means that detects the lighting state of the top lamp H60. Note that while the camera unit H12 has been given as an example of lighting state detection means, this is not limiting, and any other means that can detect the lighting state of light, such as a sensor, may be used.

In this way, the data display H1 is configured to be able to grasp the gaming status of the gaming machine H2 by detecting the lighting state of the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2. This allows the data display H1 to determine the gaming status of the gaming machine H2 based on the lighting state of the top lamp H60 detected by the camera unit H12. Therefore, the data display H1 can have the function of executing a presentation in a manner corresponding to the lighting state of the top lamp H60 detected by the camera unit H12.

The gaming device of the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, as long as it has a state detection function for detecting the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the gaming machine has a presentation device for changing the presentation mode according to the gaming state so that the gaming device can detect the gaming state. For example, the gaming machine may be provided with a directional speaker that points in the direction in which the gaming device is installed (the top of the own machine) and output presentation sounds of different patterns according to the gaming state. As a result, the gaming device can detect the gaming state of the gaming machine by the detected sound by having a microphone (sound collection device). In addition, it may determine whether the sound is the own machine's sound based on the volume of the sound detected by the microphone. In addition, by using a directional speaker, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the gaming device in determining whether the sound is from the corresponding gaming machine. In addition, in order to improve accuracy, the gaming device may be provided with a directional microphone that points in the direction of the speaker of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible for the gaming device to determine the gaming state of the gaming machine regardless of the presence or absence of a data communication path by wire or wireless.

[Electrical configuration: gaming machine]
FIG. 134 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a gaming machine H2 as a pachinko machine. The gaming machine H2 includes a main control unit H301a for controlling a main device group H303a, a sub-control unit H302a for controlling a sub-device group H304a, and a payout control unit H305 for controlling a payout device group H306. The main control unit H301a is connected to the sub-control unit H302a by one-way communication, and the main control unit H301a and the payout control unit H305 are connected to each other so as to be able to communicate in two directions. In addition, the payout control unit H305 is connected to an external terminal board H308a by one-way communication. The main control unit H301a and the sub-control unit H302a each include a CPU, a ROM in which programs and the like are stored, and a RWM (Read Write Memory) in which information on games and performances is stored.

The main device group H303a is composed of, for example, a start port switch, a count switch, a winning port switch, a normal electric role solenoid, a winning port solenoid, etc., and the main control unit H301a controls the progress of the game in the gaming machine 5002 by controlling these devices. In addition, the main control unit H301a sends commands according to changes in the game state, etc. to the sub-control unit H302a and the payout control unit H305.

The sub-device group H304a has a top lamp H60 and an illumination control circuit H61 that controls the top lamp H60 and other lamps. The sub-device group H304a also has, for example, a liquid crystal module, a performance button sensor, a role control circuit, an illumination control circuit, and a speaker control circuit. The sub-controller H302a controls the performance in the gaming machine 5002 by controlling these devices based on commands sent from the main controller H301a.

The payout device group H306 is composed of, for example, a payout control circuit, a payout ball detection switch, a launch control circuit, a touch switch, etc., and the payout control unit H305 controls these devices based on commands sent from the main control unit H301a, or automatically controls these devices to control the launch and payout of game balls in the gaming machine H2.

Although not shown, the gaming machine H2 has a lending terminal board connected to the payout control unit H305. The gaming machine H2 is connected to the gaming medium lending device 5003 (see FIG. 111) via the lending terminal board, and outputs a lending request signal or a return request signal based on the player's operation.

The payout control unit H305 is also connected to the data display H1 via the external terminal board H308a, and outputs game information signals, error signals, etc. after each game or when there is a change in the internal state.

Referring to FIG. 135, a block diagram showing the configuration of a gaming machine H2 as a pachislot machine is illustrated. The gaming machine H2 includes a main control unit H301b that controls a main device group H303b, and a sub-control unit H302b that controls a sub-device group H304b, and the main control unit H301b is connected to the sub-control unit H302b via one-way communication. An external terminal board H308b is also connected to the main control unit H301b via one-way communication. The main control unit H301b and the sub-control unit H302b each include a CPU, a ROM in which programs and the like are stored, and an RWM in which information related to games and performances is stored.

The main device group H303b is composed of, for example, a reel control circuit, a medal sensor, a start lever sensor, a stop button sensor, a hopper control circuit, etc., and the main control unit H301b controls the progress of the game in the gaming machine H2 by controlling these devices. In addition, the main control unit H301a sends commands to the sub-control unit H302b in response to changes in the game state, etc.

The sub-device group H304b has a top lamp H60 and an illumination control circuit H61 that controls the top lamp H60 and other lamps. The sub-device group H304b is also composed of, for example, a liquid crystal module, a performance button sensor, a role control circuit, an illumination control circuit, a speaker control circuit, etc., and the sub-control unit H302b controls the performance in the gaming machine H2 by controlling these devices based on commands sent from the main control unit H301b.

The main control unit H301b is connected to the data display H1 via the external terminal board H308b, and outputs game information signals, error signals, etc. after each game or when there is a change in the internal state.

In addition, even in the gaming machine H2 as a pachislot machine, the main control unit H301b may be connected to the gaming medium lending device 5003 via a lending terminal board and configured to output a lending request signal or a return request signal based on the player's operation.

[Electrical configuration: data display]
136 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the data display H1. The data display H1 includes a camera unit H12, a projector body 5012, a video display unit H405 such as a screen unit G11, an illumination unit H406 such as an LED G60A, an audio output unit H407 such as a speaker F10253, a sensor group H404, a control unit H401, a ROM H402, and a RAM H403. The control unit H401 includes a CPU and a control circuit board on which the CPU is provided, and drives and controls the devices connected to it.

The ROM H402 stores a control program for implementing the functions of the data display H1. The control unit H401 reads out and executes the control program stored in the ROM H402 to control each component, and realizes functions such as determining the gaming state of the gaming machine H2 and executing a presentation in a manner corresponding to the gaming state (lighting state) of the gaming machine H2. The control unit H401 also controls communication with the server device H4 and the gaming machine H2.

The sensor group H404 includes the touch sensor F1022 (see FIG. 129) of the embodiment described above, and is a plurality of sensors for detecting an external operation on the touch area F1021a (see FIG. 129) of the exterior panel F1021. When an operation is detected by these sensors, the control unit H401 controls the display content on the video display unit H405, the light emission state on the illumination unit H406, and the audio output state on the audio output unit H407 in accordance with the operation. When the display screen of the video display unit H405 is made to function as a touch panel, the sensor group H404 includes a sensor for detecting a touch operation on this touch panel.

The communication interface H410 is an interface for communicating with the server device H4 and the gaming machine H2, and is also a conversion module that converts input information into the most suitable format when outputting it. Although not shown, the communication interface H410 is connected to the gaming medium lending device 5003 (see FIG. 111) by a harness using a contact input/output method, enabling two-way communication. The communication interface H410 and the server device H4 are connected by a coaxial cable using a wired LAN method, and are also connected by a harness using a contact output method, enabling two-way communication. The communication interface H410 and the external terminal board H308 in the gaming machine H2 are connected by a contact input method, providing one-way communication from the gaming machine H2 to the data display H1. The connection method is not limited to these methods, and a wireless LAN method or an optical communication method using an optical cable may be used for each connection. Furthermore, a combination of these methods may be used.

The RAM H403 functions as a storage means for storing various data. For example, the control unit H401 stores the control results of each connected component in the RAM H403. The RAM H403 also stores a data table for determining the gaming state of the gaming machine H2 and a data table for executing a performance according to the gaming state. In this embodiment, the data display H1 is capable of downloading these data tables and video data and audio data used for the performance from the server device H4. That is, the control unit H401 has a function of downloading a data table for determining the gaming state of the gaming machine H2 and a data table for executing a performance according to the gaming state from the server device H4 via the communication interface H410. That is, the server device H4 has a function of distributing a data table for determining the gaming state of the gaming machine H2 and a data table for executing a performance according to the gaming state to the data display H1. However, without being limited thereto, for example, the data display H1 may be configured such that the communication interface H410 has a USB connection terminal and is capable of transferring a data table from an external storage device or the like to the RAM H403. Also, the data display H1 may be configured such that the sensor group H404 has an infrared sensor and the data table can be set using a remote control or the like.

As described above, the camera unit H12 is provided to capture an image of the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2. When an image including the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2 is acquired by the camera unit H12, the control unit H401 determines the gaming state based on the image and executes a presentation according to the gaming state. The control unit H401 controls the video display unit H405, the illumination unit H406, and the audio output unit H407 to execute the presentation.

[Electrical configuration: Data display: Data table]
The data tables stored in the RAM H403 of the data display H1 will be described with reference to Fig. 137 and Fig. 138. Fig. 137 is a game state determination table for determining the game state. Fig. 138 is an effect pattern table for executing effects according to the game state.

As shown in FIG. 137, the game status determination table has a lighting mode column and a game status column. The lighting mode of the top lamp H60 is stored in the lighting mode column. The game status column stores the game status corresponding to the lighting pattern. The control unit H401 of the data display H1 determines the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 based on the image captured by the camera unit H12, and acquires the game status corresponding to the determined lighting mode by referring to the game status determination table.

Here, the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 controlled by the sub-controller H302b of the gaming machine H2 will be described. In this embodiment, the sub-controller H302b controls the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 to vary within a range that is difficult for humans to perceive, thereby causing the top lamp H60 to be lit in a mode that corresponds to the gaming state. In this embodiment, the range of the blinking cycle that is difficult for humans to perceive is 50 Hz or more, but is not limited to this.

For example, if the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 is 50 Hz, the top lamp H60 repeats a set of turning on and off every 1/50 seconds. That is, the top lamp H60 turns on for 1/100 seconds, turns off for 1/100 seconds, and repeats this cycle. For a top lamp H60 with such a lighting mode, if the frame rate of the camera unit H12 is 100 fps (frames per second), an image in which the top lamp H60 turns on and off alternately frame by frame is acquired. In this case, the control unit H401 determines that the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 is 50 Hz (repeated 1/100 second lighting and 1/100 second off). In this way, the control unit H401 determines the pattern of the lighting and extinguishing of the top lamp H60 by the image recognition program, and identifies the lighting mode (blinking cycle) of the top lamp H60. That is, in this embodiment, the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 is stored in the lighting mode column of the game state determination table.

In addition, the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 may be changed while keeping the duration of each blink unchanged, so that the blinking cycle can be determined based on the ratio of the number of images in the lit state to the number of images captured in a specified period.

The lighting mode according to the game status is not limited to being changed by changing the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 in a range that is difficult for people to recognize. For example, the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 may have any blinking cycle (e.g., blinking at less than 50 Hz), the game status may be indicated by changing the light emission color, or a combination of these may indicate the game status.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game state is determined using a game state determination table, and then a presentation pattern according to the game state is selected, but this is not limited to this. The presentation pattern may be set in correspondence with the lighting state of the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2. In other words, it is sufficient that the data display H1 is configured to be able to execute a presentation according to the game state.

The gaming machine H2 also has a data table similar to the gaming state determination table in a storage unit (not shown). The gaming machine H2 refers to the lighting pattern in the lighting mode column that corresponds to its own gaming state, and controls the top lamp H60 with that lighting pattern.

As shown in FIG. 138, the presentation pattern table has a game status column, a video display column, a sound output column, an illumination column, and a termination condition column. The game status column stores the game status to which the gaming machine H2 can transition. That is, not only the game status determined based on the lighting state of the top lamp H60, but also the game status transmitted directly from the gaming machine H2 via the external terminal board H308 is stored. The video display column stores the video pattern displayed by the video display unit H405 corresponding to the game status. For example, the video pattern indicates the video data or a combination of video data stored in the RAM H403 by the data display H1. The sound output column stores the audio pattern output by the audio output unit H407 corresponding to the game status. For example, the audio pattern indicates the audio data or a combination of audio data stored in the RAM H403 by the data display H1. The illumination column stores the illumination pattern that the illumination unit H406 emits light in response to the game status. For example, the illumination pattern indicates the lighting pattern of each illumination provided on the gaming machine H2.

The end condition column stores the end condition of the presentation corresponding to the game state. For example, this end condition is referenced in an error state in which the lighting state of the top lamp H60 cannot be detected after the presentation on the data display H1 has started, for example, because it is blocked by the player's hand or baggage, and if the end condition is met, the presentation is forcibly terminated. Note that if the presentation by the data display H1 corresponds to a game state that can be determined based on information transmitted from the external terminal board H308, there may be no end condition.

A specific example of the termination condition stored in the termination condition column will be described. For example, a case where the gaming state is the BB gaming state described below will be described. Generally, the external terminal board H308 is maintained in the ON state while the gaming machine state is the BB gaming state. Then, when the end state of the BB gaming state is satisfied on the gaming machine H2 side (for example, when the gaming machine H2 has executed a payout of more than 300 coins), the dedicated terminal becomes the OFF state. In other words, the data display H1 is able to recognize the start to end of the BB gaming state from the external terminal board H308. Therefore, the data display H1 only needs to stop the presentation corresponding to the BB gaming state when the signal becomes the OFF state, and there is no need to set a forced termination condition due to an error.

Also, for example, when the game state is a special ART game state described later, the add-on specialization zone described later may start immediately after the game started in the ART game state. Since the add-on specialization zone is confirmed to continue for 1G or more, the forced termination condition of the special ART game state when the start of the special ART game state can be detected is the termination condition for the performance time of one game, which is the minimum number of continuing games. Since the pachislot machine in this embodiment is set to 4.1 seconds between games, if an error state occurs in which the lighting state of the top lamp H60 cannot be detected, the count is started, and if the previous IN (insertion) signal cannot be detected within 4.1 seconds after it is received from the external terminal board H308, the termination condition of the performance is set. Note that it may be set to 4.1 seconds from the OUT (payout) signal, or it may be set to 4.1 seconds from the timing when the start of the special ART game state can be detected, and it may be changed appropriately depending on the corresponding gaming machine. In actual operation, on the gaming machine side, an IN (insertion) signal is sent from the external terminal board H308 based on the start operation performed after placing a bet, and the added specialized zone starts. On the display side, counting begins after receiving the IN signal, and if no state occurs during that time in which the lighting mode cannot be detected, the presentation on the display side is changed when the lighting mode becomes something other than that of the specialized zone after a predetermined number of games (for example, the specialized zone continues for 5G). On the other hand, if an undetectable error occurs 1 second after the first G count, the presentation continues at the time of occurrence, and if the error has not been resolved even after a cumulative 4.1 seconds have passed since the start of the count, the presentation on the display side is changed. If the error is resolved before 4.1 seconds have passed, the presentation related to the specialized zone continues as is.

As such, it is preferable to set the termination condition to a period that will ensure execution even if an error state occurs in which the lighting state of the top lamp H60 cannot be detected. In other words, if the minimum guaranteed number of games for the gaming state is determined, the termination condition is the time obtained by multiplying that number of games by the specified time, and if the gaming state ends with the payout of a specified amount, it is preferable to divide that specified amount by the maximum number of coins payout in one game, subtract the remainder, and use the quotient as the determined number of games, and multiply this by the specified time as the end time.

[Electrical configuration: Data display: External terminal board]
Fig. 139 is a diagram showing an example of the details of signals sent from the external terminal board H308a of the gaming machine H2 in the connection between the gaming machine H2 as a pachinko machine and the data display H1. Note that Fig. 139 shows only the connection between the gaming machine H2 and the data display H1, and does not show the connection to the other gaming medium lending devices 5003.

As shown in FIG. 139, the following signals are input from the external terminal board H308a in the gaming machine H2 to the communication interface H410 in the data display machine H1: a "prize ball signal" indicating the number of gaming balls paid out to the player, an "external information 1" signal indicating that a jackpot has been hit or is currently hitting the jackpot in the gaming machine H2, an "external information 2" signal indicating that a special game has started in the gaming machine H2 or is currently in a special game, an "external information 3" signal indicating that a special pattern game has started in the gaming machine H2, an "external information 4" signal indicating that a gaming ball fired in the gaming machine H2 has entered the starting hole, a "security signal" indicating that some kind of error (abnormality) has occurred in the gaming machine H2, and a "door/frame open signal" indicating that the base door H33 or glass door (not shown) in the gaming machine H2 is open. In addition, the contents output by the "External Information 1" signal to the "External Information 7" signal can be changed as appropriate depending on the specifications of the gaming machine H2, which is the sending side, and the specifications of the data display H1, which is the receiving side.

In addition, an "out ball information" signal indicating that a gaming ball released in gaming machine H2 did not enter any of the winning slots but entered an out slot (not shown) is input from a separate signal line based on the detection results of an out ball sensor in a separate device not shown, but when the out ball sensor is controlled by the gaming machine H2, it may be output from the external terminal board H308a in gaming machine H2.

In addition, the above-mentioned "out information" based on the "out ball information" signal, "safe information" based on the "prize ball signal", "jackpot information" based on the "external information 1" signal, "probable change information" based on the "external information 2" signal, "start signal" based on the "external information 3" signal, "start gate information" based on the "external information 4" signal, "door opening information" based on the "door/frame opening signal", and "abnormality 1 information" based on the "security signal" are input from the communication interface H410 in the data display H1 to the server device H4. Note that, for the "security signal", if the type of error (abnormality) can be determined from its output time, it may be converted to "abnormality 1 information", "abnormality 2 information", or "abnormality 3 information" according to the type of error (abnormality) and output to the server device H4. Also, as described later, it may be possible to add predetermined information under the control of the control unit H401 and output to the server device H4. In addition, the communication interface H410 may receive each signal input from the external terminal board H308a itself and output each input signal as it is to the server device H4 (through signal).

In addition, examples of types of errors (abnormalities) indicated by the "security signal" in gaming machine H2 include a start port switch error indicating that the start port switch has been turned on due to fraudulent means or other factors even though no gaming ball has entered the game, a count switch error indicating that the count switch has been counted despite the prize port solenoid not being driven (the prize port not being open) due to fraudulent means or other factors, and a sensor detection error (e.g., a magnetic sensor error) indicating that various sensors (e.g., magnetic sensors) installed in gaming machine H2 to prevent fraud have entered a detection state.

Referring to FIG. 140, the details of the signals sent from the external terminal board H308b of the gaming machine H2 as a pachinko slot machine in the connection with the data display H1 are illustrated. Note that FIG. 140 only illustrates the connection between the gaming machine H2 and the data display H1, and does not illustrate the connections to the other gaming media lending devices 5003, etc.

From the external terminal board H308b in the gaming machine H2 to the communication interface H410 in the data display H1, the following signals are input: a "medal insertion signal" indicating the number of medals inserted by the player; a "medal payout signal" indicating the number of medals paid out to the player; an "external signal 2" indicating that a BB has occurred in the gaming machine H2 or that a BB is in progress; an "external signal 1" indicating that a RB has occurred in the gaming machine H2 or that a RB is in progress; an "external signal 3" indicating that an ART has been entered in the gaming machine H2 or that a ART is in progress; and a "security signal" indicating that some error (abnormality) has occurred in the gaming machine H2. Note that in the gaming machine H2, the fact that the front door (not shown) is open is input to the data display H1 by the "security signal", but as in the gaming machine H2 as a pachinko machine described above, for example, a signal indicating that the front door is open may be output by outputting "external signal 4" separately from the "security signal". In addition, the output contents of "External Signal 1" to "External Signal 4" can be changed as appropriate depending on the specifications of the gaming machine H2, which is the sending side, and the specifications of the data display H1, which is the receiving side.

In addition, the communication interface H410 in the data display H1 inputs the above-mentioned "IN information" based on the "medal insertion signal", "OUT information" based on the "medal payout signal", "BB information" based on the "external signal 2", "RB information" based on the "external signal 1", "ART information" based on the "external signal 3", and "error information" based on the "security signal". In addition, if the type of error (abnormality) can be determined from the output time of the "security signal", it may be converted into "error information", "abnormality 1 information", "abnormality 2 information", or "abnormality 3 information" according to the type of error (abnormality) and output to the server device 2. In addition, as described later, it may be possible to add predetermined information under the control of the control unit H401 and output to the server device H4. In addition, the communication interface H410 may receive each signal input from the external terminal board H308b itself and output each input signal as it is to the server device H4 (through signal).

In addition, examples of the types of errors (abnormalities) indicated by the "security signal" in gaming machine H2 include a door open error, which indicates that the front door is open; an RWM error, which indicates that reading and writing of the RWM was not performed normally; a selector error, which indicates that the selector is no longer performing normal detection due to fraudulent means or other factors (e.g., a medal jam); a hopper error, which indicates that the hopper is no longer performing normal payout due to fraudulent means or other factors (e.g., medal empty); and a medal auxiliary store error, which indicates that the medal auxiliary store, which stores surplus medals that cannot be accommodated in the hopper, is full of medals.

In this way, the external terminal board H308 (external terminal boards H308a, H308b) generally employs a parallel transfer method in which one type of signal is sent per terminal, so the number of signals that can be transmitted is limited by the upper limit on the number of terminals on the external terminal board H308. Therefore, it is not possible to transmit all of the game states that the gaming machine H2 can transition to to the data display H1. In other words, the gaming machine H2 is configured to be able to transmit only limited game states among the game states that the gaming machine H2 can transition to (in the above example, jackpot and probability change information for a pachinko machine, and BB, RB, and ART information for a pachislot machine).

Hereinafter, the game state obtained and determined by transmitting via such external terminal board H308 may be referred to as the "first game state". Furthermore, among the game states to which the gaming machine H2 can transition, the game state indicated by the gaming machine H2 by the lighting state of the top lamp H60 and determined by the data display H1 detecting the lighting state of the top lamp H60 by the camera unit H12 may be referred to as the "second game state". Note that in this embodiment, the "second game state" does not include the "first game state", but the "second game state" may include a part or all of the "first game state".

[Game Status]
The gaming states to which the gaming machine H2 may transition will be described with reference to Fig. 141. Fig. 141 is a diagram showing an example of a state transition diagram of the gaming state of the gaming machine H2. Note that the following mainly describes the case where the gaming machine H2 is a slot machine.

In this embodiment, the transition of the gaming state is mainly controlled by the main control unit H301 (main control unit H301a, main control unit H301b) of the gaming machine H2. The main control unit H301 determines the transition destination based on a lottery for an internal winning role, etc. For example, winning a specific internal winning role a specified number of times, winning a specific internal winning role, playing a specified number of games on the gaming machine H2, winning a lottery for transitioning to a specified gaming state, or displaying a pattern that is predetermined to transition to a specified gaming state.

Conditions for ending a gaming state include winning a specified internal winning role, scoring a specified internal winning role, a specified amount being paid out in the current gaming state, a specified number of games being played in the current gaming state, winning a lottery to transition to a specified gaming state, or the display of a symbol that is predetermined to transition to another gaming state, etc.

As shown in FIG. 141, gaming machine H2 has the following gaming states to which it can transition: normal zone, general gaming state, RT (replay time) gaming state, BB (big bonus) gaming state, advantageous zone 1, AT (assist time) gaming state, CZ (chance zone) gaming state, ART (assist replay time) 1 gaming state, advantageous zone 2, premium BB (big bonus) gaming state, and ART 2 gaming state.

[Game status: normal section]
The normal period is divided into a general gaming state, an RT gaming state, and a BB gaming state. That is, the normal period is a gaming state including the general gaming state, the RT gaming state, and the BB gaming state.

The general gaming state is a gaming state that is not advantageous compared to other gaming states. For example, the general gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay as an internal winning role is low (low replay probability) compared to the RT gaming state. The general gaming state transitions to the RT gaming state when a bonus is determined as the internal winning role and is carried over. In other words, the general gaming state includes in its ending conditions that a bonus has been determined as the internal winning role.

The RT gaming state is initiated on the condition that a bonus has been determined as the internal winning role in the general gaming state and has been carried over. The RT gaming state is a gaming state in which there is a higher probability of winning a replay as the internal winning role (high replay probability) compared to the general gaming state. If a bonus is won in the RT gaming state, the game transitions to the BB gaming state. In other words, the RT gaming state is terminated when a bonus is won.

The BB gaming state is initiated by winning a bonus. In the BB gaming state, the RB gaming state (not shown) is repeated a predetermined number of times, and when a predetermined number of payouts are reached, the state transitions to the general gaming state. In other words, the BB gaming state has an ending condition of reaching a predetermined number of payouts. Note that in the RB gaming state, the probability of winning any of the minor winning combinations is set to be high.

[Advantageous Zone]
The gaming machine H2 has advantageous zones, ie, advantageous zone 1 and advantageous zone 2. The advantageous zone is a zone that can have a performance related to an instruction function. The instruction function is a function that notifies the player of the procedure of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player when the internal winning role is a so-called push order role, and is operated in the AT gaming state and the ART gaming state.

Advantageous Zone 1 is divided into an AT gaming state, a CZ gaming state, and an ART gaming state. In other words, advantageous zone 1 is a gaming state that has a CZ gaming state and an ART gaming state.

The AT game state is entered when the player wins the AT game transition lottery, which is held when a predetermined combination is won in the general game state. That is, the general game state includes winning the AT game transition lottery as an ending condition. Note that the probability of winning the AT game transition lottery is the same for all setting values. The AT game state is entered into the CZ game state after a predetermined number of games have been played. That is, the ending condition for the AT game state is that a predetermined number of games have been played.

The CZ gaming state is a gaming state that can transition to the ART gaming state. The CZ gaming state has a set upper limit on the number of games that can be played, and if a specific role is won within that period, the state transitions to the ART gaming state. If the maximum number of games is played without winning a specific role, the CZ gaming state ends and advantageous zone 1 ends, and the state transitions to the general gaming state of the normal zone. In other words, the conditions for ending the CZ gaming state are winning a specific role and playing the maximum number of games.

The ART gaming state is a gaming state in which the instruction function is enabled in the same way as the AT gaming state, and in which the probability of winning a replay as an internal winning role is higher than in the AT gaming state. The ART gaming state ends when a predetermined number of games have been played, and once the state ends, the game transitions to the general gaming state.

Advantageous Zone 2 is divided into a premium BB gaming state and a special ART gaming state. In other words, advantageous zone 1 is a gaming state that has a premium BB gaming state and a special ART gaming state.

The Premium BB gaming state is initiated by winning a Premium Bonus in the general gaming state. The probability of winning the Premium Bonus is the same for all setting values. Although not shown, if the internal winning combination of the Premium Bonus is carried over, the game state becomes a waiting zone until the Premium Bonus is won, and transition to the advantageous zone 2 is awaited. In the Premium BB gaming state, the RB gaming state (not shown) is repeated a predetermined number of times, and when a predetermined number of payouts are reached, the game state transitions to the special ART gaming state. In other words, the Premium BB gaming state has an end condition of having a predetermined number of payouts reached.

The special ART gaming state is similar to the ART gaming state, but differs in that it has an add-on specialization zone where the number of games played can be added. In the special ART gaming state, if a specific internal winning combination is achieved, the player enters the add-on specialization zone, and a lottery is held for each game in which a predetermined number is added to the default number of games played. When all games including the added number of games in the add-on specialization zone have been played, the special ART gaming state ends and advantageous zone 2 transitions to the general gaming state of the normal zone. In other words, the condition for ending the special ART gaming state is to play all games including the added number of games.

Note that the game state from which the transition is to occur, the game state to which the transition is to occur, the start conditions, and the end conditions are not limited to those described above. For example, they may be as described below.

It may have multiple RT gaming states, and in addition to the RT states described above, it may transition to the RT gaming state when a specific combination of replay symbols is displayed, which is displayed only when one of multiple types of predetermined replay roles is won and the stopping operation is performed in a predetermined push order according to the winning replay symbol. In that case, the RT state with a bonus carried over may be called RT1, and the above-mentioned RT state may be called RT2. The conditions for transitioning to RT2 may be when it is not RT1, when it is not in the BB gaming state, and when a specific combination of replay symbols is displayed.

The advantageous zone includes a normal state during the advantageous zone, an AT game state during the advantageous zone, and an AT+RT game state (ART game state) during the advantageous zone, and the start condition of the advantageous zone is to win the advantageous zone with a probability of no or a set difference that is predetermined in the normal zone, or to start a predetermined bonus, and it may be determined in advance whether to perform the instruction function related to the winning role only once during the advantageous zone, or to perform the game using the instruction function until a termination condition such as the winning of any bonus or the consumption of a specified number of games is satisfied. In that case, if the advantageous zone is won and it is determined that the instruction function related to the winning role is performed only once, the AT state will be entered, but if the instruction function related to the winning role is performed once (for example, the push order bell stop operation navigation), the normal zone will be automatically entered. On the other hand, if a favorable zone is entered and it is decided that the instruction function related to the winning combination will be performed until the end conditions, such as playing a specified number of games, are met, the AT state will be entered, and an instruction will be given to display a specific combination of replay symbols, and when the specific combination of replay symbols is displayed, the ART game state will begin, and the instruction function may be performed until, for example, 50 games have been played.

By winning a lottery with or without a setting difference before 50 games have been played, or by starting a pre-determined bonus, the player may enter an add-on specialized zone and add the number of games or a set of 50 games. It is also possible to simply add the number of ART games.

The above-mentioned top-up special zone does not send any signal from the external terminal board H308, but by lighting the top lamp H60 in a different manner from the ART state, it becomes possible for the data display H1 to recognize that the top-up special zone has started, and it becomes possible to collect data, such as tallying up the number of times it has started.

In addition, the AT state in which the player has entered a favorable zone and it has been determined that the instruction function related to the winning role will be performed only once, and the AT state (ART state) in which the player has entered a favorable zone and it has been determined that the instruction function related to the winning role will be performed until a termination condition is met, such as playing a specified number of games, are displayed the same on the display device such as the liquid crystal of the gaming machine, and the lighting pattern of the top lamp H60 is made different, so that the player can determine which state it is on the data display H1 side, while remaining unclear to the player whether the function will be performed in one go or multiple times.

Furthermore, in this example, in the AT state where it has been decided that the instruction function for the winning role will continue until the end conditions, such as the specified number of games played, are met when a specific replay role is won, the instruction function will notify the player of the stopping sequence in which a specific combination of replay symbols will be displayed. By playing according to that stopping sequence, the player will transition to the ART state in the advantageous zone. When a specific combination of replay symbols is displayed, the external terminal board H308 will turn on an external signal to cause the data display H1 to detect the start of ART, but it is anticipated that, depending on the player's operating mode, a specific combination of replay symbols will be displayed and a signal will be sent from the external terminal board H308 even though no instruction has been given. Even in such a case, if it is decided that the top lamp H60 will continue until an end condition, such as winning an advantageous zone and playing a specified number of games, is met, and a specific combination of replay patterns is displayed, it can be determined whether the specific combination of replay patterns was displayed by chance or in accordance with an instruction by lighting it in a detectable manner, and if the specific combination of replay patterns was displayed by chance, the number of ARTs can be measured accurately on the data display H1 side by not adding the number of ARTs.

In this way, the number of game states to which the gaming machine H2 can transition exceeds the number of "first game states" that can be transmitted from the external terminal board H308. Therefore, the gaming machine H2 displays the CZ game state, the special ART game state, the add-on specialization zone in the special ART game state, and the advantageous zone, etc., excluding the "first game state (in this embodiment, the start of the BB game state, the start of the RB game state, and the ART game state)" as the second game state by the lighting state of the top lamp H60, making it possible for the data display H1 to grasp the second game state.

The second gaming state is not limited to the gaming state determined by the main control unit H301, and may indicate, for example, the state of the main device group H303 whose execution is controlled by the main control unit H301, or the state of the sub-device group H304 whose execution is controlled by the sub-control unit H302. For example, even in the same gaming state, if successively different effects are produced as the number of games increases, these effects can be displayed as different second gaming states by the lighting state of the top lamp H60, making it possible to produce effects on the data display H1 that are linked to the effects on the gaming machine H2.

In addition, in the case of the gaming machine H2 as a pachinko machine, for example, when the reserved lamp includes an illumination color with a high reliability of a jackpot or when a relatively longer fluctuation time than other fluctuations is selected at the time of starting winning in a predetermined fluctuation time determination table, the time from this point until the jackpot determination of the reserved lamp is made may be shown as the second gaming state of the look-ahead specialization zone by the lighting state of the top lamp H60. This makes it possible to perform a performance linked to the special performance of the look-ahead specialization zone in the gaming machine H2 in the data display device H1. Similarly, the execution of a specific performance such as a premium reach during the special pattern fluctuation in a special pattern game may be shown as the second gaming state by the lighting state of the top lamp H60.

For example, in gaming machines classified as the second type (so-called pinball machines), the position of the V winning hole, which rotates constantly and results in a jackpot, is changed inside the device located in the center of the game board where the game ball rolls. If the relationship between the timing at which the game ball enters the entrance passage into the device, obtained by the sensor, and the position of the V winning hole at this timing indicates that there is a high possibility of a jackpot being awarded, this may be indicated as the second gaming state by the lighting state of the top lamp H60.

[Example of data display effects]
142 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation display linked to the presentation of the gaming machine H2 by the video display unit H405 when the data display H1 detects the lighting state of the top lamp H60 and determines that the gaming state of the gaming machine H2 is the CZ gaming state. As shown in FIG. 142, in the CZ gaming state in which the gaming machine H2 can be shifted to the ART gaming state, the data display H1 displays an image indicating that the gaming machine H2 can be shifted to the ART gaming state on the video display unit H405, and performs a presentation linked to the presentation (not shown) in the CZ gaming state executed in the gaming machine H2. At that time, the liquid crystal presentation is made equivalent between the ART state and the CZ state on the gaming machine side, and when the lighting state of the top lamp H60 is also different from each other and difficult for the player to recognize, it is possible to create the significance of looking at the display side.

Although not shown, it is desirable to have different display modes for the above-mentioned add-on specialization zone and the ART state, and for the AT state and the ART state, so that the player can distinguish states that are difficult to distinguish based on the presentation mode on the gaming machine by looking at the display mode of the data display H1. Note that the states to be compared are not limited to this, and any two or more gaming states that are difficult for the player to distinguish based on the presentation mode on the gaming machine can be used.

In addition, it is possible to provide the gaming machine with advantageous zones that end only in AT and advantageous zones that are confirmed to transition to ART, and to have the data display determine states that are difficult to distinguish from the gaming machine side using a signal from the second gaming state. Furthermore, it is also possible to have the data display determine, using a signal from the second gaming state, so-called premonition states that are difficult to distinguish from the gaming machine side and that anticipate a transition to an advantageous state over a predetermined number of games, premonitions that assume a transition to an advantageous state (real premonitions) and premonitions that do not confirm a transition to an advantageous state (false premonitions).

In this way, the data display H1 according to the present invention is configured to have a function of performing a specific presentation in conjunction with a specific presentation performed by the gaming machine H2 according to the gaming state, in a specific manner in which the data display H1 is linked to the specific presentation.

[motion]
The effect execution process executed by the control unit H401 of the data display H1 will be described with reference to Fig. 143. First, the control unit H401 judges whether or not a signal indicating a game state is received from the external terminal board H308 of the gaming machine H2 (step S4010). If a signal indicating a game state is received (step S4010: YES), the control unit H401 refers to the effect pattern table (see Fig. 138) to change the effect according to the game state indicated by the received signal, and starts counting according to the effect (step S4011).

After step S4011 is completed, or if a signal indicating the game state is not received in step S4010 (step S4010: NO), the control unit H401 judges whether or not the lighting state is detected from the image of the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2 captured by the camera unit H12 (step S4012). If the lighting state is detected (step S4012: YES), the control unit H401 judges whether or not the lighting state has changed since the previous time (step S4013). If the lighting state has changed (step S4013: YES), the control unit H401 changes the presentation according to the lighting state (step S4014) and returns the process to step S4010. On the other hand, if the lighting state has not changed (step S4013: NO), the control unit H401 continues the current presentation (step S4015) and returns the process to step S4010.

In step S4012, if the lighting state is not detected (step S4012: NO), the control unit H401 judges whether or not a specific lighting state is being detected (step S4016). If the specific lighting state is not being detected (step S4016: NO), the control unit H401 returns the process to step S4010. If the specific lighting state is being detected (step S4016: YES), the control unit H401 detects an error state (step S4017). Then, the control unit H401 judges whether or not the count value that started counting in step S4011 satisfies the end condition (step S4018). If the count value satisfies the end condition (step S4018: YES), the control unit H401 stops the performance being executed (step S4019) and returns the process to step S4010. On the other hand, if the count value does not satisfy the end condition (step S4018: NO), the control unit H401 returns the process to step S4010.

(Variation 1)
In variant example 1 of the eighth embodiment, not only is the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 set to a blinking cycle that is difficult for humans to perceive, but when the gaming machine H2 executes a continuous performance consisting of multiple stages in one gaming state, a different blinking cycle is set to correspond to each of the multiple stages in the lighting mode corresponding to this gaming state.

Specifically, the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 will be described with reference to FIG. 144. In this modified example, the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 is changed in two stages from 50 Hz to 75 Hz. That is, in this gaming state, the gaming machine H2 changes the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 from 50 Hz to 75 Hz according to each of the consecutive performances that are changed in two stages. In this way, in one gaming state, the performance is configured into multiple blocks and a blinking cycle is set for each block. Even if there is a period during the gaming state when the camera unit H12 cannot detect the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 due to some kind of obstacle (such as the player's hand or belongings being placed on the top lamp H60), when the data display H1 detects the lighting mode again, it is possible to return to the linked performance according to the performance of the corresponding block.

For example, if the gaming machine H2 outputs a song as audio during BB and displays a character that matches the song as a video, and the data display H1 displays lyrics that match the song, the gaming machine H2 divides the song into multiple blocks (e.g., A melody, B melody, etc.) and controls the lighting state of the top lamp H60 by associating a blinking pattern of a different frequency with each block. This allows the data display H1 to select and display a lyric image that corresponds to the blinking pattern of each block, and even if there is a period when the lighting state of the top lamp H60 cannot be detected because it is blocked by the player's hand or luggage, etc., when it becomes detectable again, appropriate lyrics that correspond to the audio on the gaming machine H2 can be displayed, and the linked performance can be performed again.

Here is an example of a performance in which lyrics are displayed on the data display H1 to match the music output by the gaming machine H2 when the gaming machine H2 is in the BB gaming state. The performance on the gaming machine side and the performance on the data display side in the BB gaming state are composed of a series of performance blocks consisting of multiple stages. Here, an example of a performance consisting of three stages, the first performance block to the third performance block, is explained.

The gaming machine H2 associates a series of the first to third performance blocks with the elapsed time of the song. For example, the first performance block is associated with 1st to 30th seconds, the second performance block is associated with 31st to 70th seconds, and the third performance block is associated with 71st to 130th seconds. The gaming machine H2 then controls the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 to vary according to the elapsed time of the song (each performance block). For example, when the song is the elapsed time of the first performance block, the top lamp H60 is illuminated with a blinking cycle of 50 Hz, when the song is the elapsed time of the second performance block, the top lamp H60 is illuminated with a blinking cycle of 75 Hz, and when the song is the elapsed time of the third performance block, the top lamp H60 is illuminated with a blinking cycle of 80 Hz. That is, the gaming machine H2 stores a pattern table in which the elapsed time and the blinking cycle are associated with each performance block. The data display H1 displays an image in which lyrics are sequentially displayed according to the elapsed time for each performance block of the song output by the gaming machine H2. For example, if the first performance block is the A melody, the data display H1 displays the lyrics of the A melody in the first performance block, if the second performance block is the B melody, the data display H1 displays the lyrics of the B melody in the second performance block, and if the third performance block is the chorus, the data display H1 displays the lyrics of the chorus in the third performance block. That is, the data display H1 stores a pattern table in which the blinking cycle and the image to be displayed are associated with each performance block.

When the gaming machine H2 starts outputting a song in the BB gaming state, it determines which stage of the performance block it is based on the elapsed time of the song, and controls the lighting of the top lamp H60 at a blinking cycle corresponding to the performance block. Specifically, the top lamp H60 is turned on at 50 Hz from 1 to 30 seconds after the song starts, the top lamp H60 is turned on at 75 Hz from 31 to 70 seconds, and the top lamp H60 is turned on at 80 Hz from 71 to 130 seconds. Meanwhile, when the data display H1 receives an ON signal of the BB gaming state from the external terminal board H308, if it detects that the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2 is blinking at 50 Hz, it displays the lyrics of the A melody corresponding to the first performance block, and continues to display the lyrics of the A melody while it detects the blinking at 50 Hz. Furthermore, when the data display H1 detects a change in the blinking cycle from 50 Hz to 75 Hz, it assumes that a B-melody has started in the gaming machine H2 and displays the lyrics of the B-melody corresponding to the second performance block, and continues to display the lyrics of the B-melody while it detects the blinking at 75 Hz. Furthermore, when the data display H1 detects a change in the blinking cycle from 75 Hz to 80 Hz, it assumes that a chorus has started in the gaming machine H2 and displays the lyrics of the chorus corresponding to the third performance block, and continues to display the lyrics of the chorus while it detects the blinking at 80 Hz. In this way, the data display H1 detects a change in the blinking cycle to determine the change in performance block, and uses this as an opportunity to perform a performance corresponding to the next performance block.

For example, if a situation occurs during which the data display H1 is displaying the lyrics of the second performance block and the lamp lighting state cannot be recognized due to some kind of failure, the data display H1 will stop displaying the lyrics at that point. Even if the failure is subsequently removed during the performance block and the data display H1 is able to detect the 75 Hz lighting state again, the lyrics of the B melody will not be displayed at that point, and the corresponding lyrics will be displayed the next time the lighting cycle is detected as having been changed. This makes it possible to prevent a discrepancy between the lyrics actually being played on the gaming machine H2 and the lyrics displayed on the data display H1 when the lyrics of the B melody are resumed. Specifically, if the B melody has six lines of lyrics, it is difficult for the data display H1 to determine which line of lyrics is being output on the gaming machine H2 at the timing when the data display H1 is able to detect the 75 Hz lighting state again, and there is a high possibility that a discrepancy will occur with the actual song even if the lyrics of the B melody are displayed sequentially from the beginning. Therefore, by restarting the display of lyrics when the data display H1 detects a change in the blinking cycle, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the music output by the gaming machine and the lyrics displayed, and to execute an accurate linked performance with the gaming machine H2. Note that if the BB signal goes OFF before the camera detects the lamp lighting state again, the lyric display will also stop returning.

In the above example, the series of performance blocks on gaming machine H2 correspond to the elapsed time, but they may change as the game progresses, and the blinking cycle may change accordingly. For example, the A melody may be played for the first 5 games, the B melody may start when the 6th game starts, and if the A melody lyrics finish before the 6th game starts, a loop or an intro may be played.

(Variation 2)
In the second modification of the eighth embodiment, the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 is not only set to a blinking cycle that is difficult for humans to perceive, but also adopts a lighting mode in which multiple emitted colors (rainbow colors) are changed in stages.

Specifically, referring to FIG. 145, the lighting modes of the top lamp H60 corresponding to game states 1 to 3 will be described. In game state 1, the top lamp H60 is set to have a blinking cycle of 50 Hz and a lighting mode in which the luminous color is a single color. In contrast, when the camera unit H12 operating at a frame rate of 100 fps captures an image in a frame unit, an image in which a single color is alternately turned on and off will be captured. In game state 2, the top lamp H60 is set to have a blinking cycle of 50 Hz and the luminous color is set to change to five colors in sequence each time it is turned on. In contrast, when the camera unit H12 operating at a frame rate of 100 fps captures an image in a frame unit, an image in which a five-color turn-on and turn-off are alternately captured will be captured. That is, the control unit H401 of the data display H1 determines the game state by determining whether the luminous color of the top lamp H60 is equal to or greater than a specific number in addition to the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60. In this way, by adding changes in light color to the lighting state, it is possible to set effects that correspond to different game states even with the same blinking pattern, further increasing the number of effect patterns.

In addition, FIG. 145 shows only one color change pattern, "red → orange → green → blue → purple → red → ...", but is not limited to this. For example, this may be the first color change pattern, and other color change patterns may be provided, such as a second color change pattern (e.g., "red → orange → green → blue → purple → white → red → ...") and a third color change pattern (e.g., "red → orange → blue → purple → green → red → ..."). This allows the data display H1 to be recognized as a different presentation pattern even if the rainbow lighting pattern is similar to the player viewing the gaming machine H2. For example, if the gaming machine H2 has three types of BB (red 7BB, blue 7BB, and white 7BB, which are different flags), these three types can be associated with the first color change pattern, the second color change pattern, and the third color change pattern. The player can recognize that a BB has been established by visually checking the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2, which changes its lighting state to rainbow colors, but it is difficult to distinguish whether a red 7BB, a blue 7BB, or a white 7BB has been established. However, the data display H1 can determine which BB the color change state of the top lamp H60 indicates and specify the type of BB that has been established. Then, the data display H1 can appropriately notify the player by displaying the type of BB, such as "BB confirmed! This time it's red 7BB," based on the type of BB that it has determined, thereby making it possible to reduce the loss of medals by the player. In this way, by making it possible to distinguish the establishment of a BB flag that cannot be distinguished by a normal data display and its type, it is possible to give the gaming machine H2 an advantage over other data displays, and to promote the introduction of the gaming machine to the hall manager. In addition, various conditions, such as whether or not to execute the BB type notification, may be set. For example, by recognizing a member card inserted into a sandbox or data display, if the player is a member, a notification is always given, and for visiting players, a notification is only given with a certain probability, and by differentiating between the two, it is possible to promote the recruitment of members to the hall where the introduction is being made. It goes without saying that it is possible to set it so that BB during ART is always notified, and BB during normal play is notified with a certain probability. Also, the detection by rainbow colors is not limited to BB, and it may be set for ART that has multiple internal advantageous stages, or for pachinko jackpots that do not notify the amount of balls dispensed when won. In the above example, the pattern is identified by changing the order of the color components, but it may also be identified according to the color that is not lit among the five colors. Specifically, patterns such as a pattern that does not include orange (for example, red → green → blue → purple → red → ...), a pattern that does not include green (for example, red → orange → blue → purple → red → ...), and a pattern that does not include blue (for example, red → orange → green → purple → red → ...) may be provided.

(Variation 3)
A modified example of the light emitting means that changes the lighting state according to the game state will be described. For example, one or more LED lamps may be provided on the top surface of the game machine, and the data display may detect the LED lamps. In this case, the game state may be determined by the blinking pattern as in the eighth embodiment, or the game state may be determined by a combination of the lighting or extinguishing of a plurality of LED lamps. In other words, by providing X LED lamps and turning them on or off, it is possible to determine the Xth power of 2 game state.

When a predetermined LED is provided on the gaming machine H2 and the data display H1 receives the second gaming state through the LED, the data display H1 only needs to capture the LED, and there is no problem if the capture range is narrow. Also, when a predetermined number of LEDs are provided on the gaming machine H2 and the data display H1 receives the second gaming state through the LEDs, as described above, the data display H1 can determine the second gaming state by only detecting the combination of whether the LEDs are lit or not. In this way, the gaming machine H2 may be provided with an LED for communicating the second gaming state that is driven separately from the performance. It is also possible to use any LED of the top lamp instead of a specific LED. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the gaming machine H2 side, and the freedom of arrangement of the data display H1 is increased since it is sufficient that only the top lamp is within the capture range.

In order to prevent the influence of disturbance light, the light emitting means may be provided on the rear side of the top surface of the gaming machine, and the lighting state detection means may be provided on the rear side of the data display. In addition, it is not limited to the light emitting means to execute different effects according to the gaming state. For example, the gaming state may be displayed by combining the state of the reels in a pachislot machine. In this case, the camera unit is placed in front of the gaming machine so that the reels are included in the imaging range. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the number of patterns of effects in the data display, for example, in the second modification, the light emitting means is rainbow-colored and a linked effect is executed only when the reels are performing a freeze effect. The data display determines whether the stopped state of the reels detected by the camera is due to an effect, on the condition that an IN signal is received from the external terminal board. In other words, if the data display receives the IN signal and detects the stopped state of the reels by the camera within a predetermined time, it executes a linked effect of a reel freeze effect.

In addition, when the gaming machine is started, the light emitting means is illuminated in a predetermined manner, and the light emitting means illuminated in the predetermined manner is imaged by a camera unit and analyzed to identify the position of the light emitting means within the imaging range, thereby improving the accuracy of determining the gaming state.

Ninth embodiment
Next, a gaming device according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 146 to 148. Note that components that are the same as or similar to those in the above embodiment will be given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

[Electrical configuration: Data display: Data table]
146 is a representation of an effect pattern table for executing effects according to the game state. The effect pattern table of this embodiment differs from the effect pattern table of the eighth embodiment in that a priority order is set for each effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 146, the presentation pattern table of this embodiment has the same items as the presentation pattern table of the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 138), and in addition has a priority column. In this embodiment, a priority is set for all presentations in the priority column. For example, based on a signal from the external terminal board H308 and detection of the lighting state of the top lamp H60, if similar game states are obtained from each and different presentation patterns are set for them, which presentation pattern is executed is determined according to the priority that is set. Specifically, if a BB game state is transmitted from the external terminal board H308 and a premium BB game state is detected from the top lamp H60, the premium BB game state is given priority.

However, without being limited to this, the second gaming state may be a gaming state different from the first gaming state. That is, a signal of a restricted first gaming state may be transmitted from the external terminal board H308, and the top lamp H60 may indicate a second gaming state excluding the first gaming state. In this case, for example, when a general gaming state is determined as the first gaming state (no signal from the external terminal board H308) and an advantageous zone is transmitted as the second gaming state, the presentation pattern table may be set so that the advantageous zone of the second gaming state is prioritized. Also, for example, when a BB gaming state is transmitted as the first gaming state and an advantageous zone is transmitted as the second gaming state, the presentation pattern table may be set so that the BB gaming state of the first gaming state is prioritized.

A modified example of the above example will now be described. Presentation patterns that overlap in part may be stored in the presentation mode based on the signal of the first game state from the external terminal board H308 and the presentation mode based on the second game state determined by detecting the lighting state of the top lamp H60. Note that "overlapping" means that it is set for the same element in the elements that make up the presentation. Elements that make up the presentation include, for example, the color of the lamp, the content of the text displayed on the LCD screen, the presence or absence of a character on the LCD screen, the output content from the speaker, etc. For example, if a character is displayed and the text "A" is displayed on the LCD screen in one presentation pattern, and the text "B" is displayed on the LCD screen in another presentation pattern, the content of the text displayed on the LCD screen will overlap, but the presence or absence of a character on the LCD screen will not overlap.

Here, when a signal for the first gaming state and a signal for the second gaming state are output from the gaming machine H2 at the same timing, the presentation mode based on the first gaming state may be prioritized for elements that overlap in the presentation patterns of both, and the presentation mode based on the second gaming state may be executed for non-overlapping parts. For example, a first gaming state signal related to the BB gaming state is associated with a presentation pattern having an element of displaying a "character" on the liquid crystal image and an element of displaying the text "BB in progress!" on the liquid crystal image. Also, a second gaming state signal related to the normal BB gaming state is associated with a presentation pattern having an element of displaying the text "BB in progress!" on the liquid crystal image and an element of lighting a lamp on the outer periphery of the data display H1 (for example, illumination by the light guide plate G61 shown in FIG. 126) in "red". Therefore, if the data display H1 normally receives both the first game state signal and the second game state signal when the gaming machine H2 transitions to the normal BB game state, the presentation based on the first game state signal is given priority, and the LCD image displays the "character" and the text "BB in progress!". However, an element that does not overlap with the presentation pattern based on the first game state, that is, turning on the lamp on the periphery of the data display H1 in "red", becomes effective, and this presentation is executed in addition to the presentation pattern based on the first game state. In this way, in presentation patterns that can be executed under the same conditions and at the same timing, if an element that is not set in a presentation pattern with a high priority is set in a presentation pattern with a low priority, the presentation of the presentation pattern with a low priority may be executed only for that element.

If only the first game state signal cannot be obtained, the presentation pattern associated with the second game state signal (the "BB!" display on the LCD screen and the outer lamps turning "red") is executed. If only the second game state signal cannot be obtained, only the presentation pattern associated with the second game state signal (the "Character + BB in progress!" display on the LCD screen) is executed, and no presentation is performed using the outer lamps. If both the first game state signal and the second game state signal cannot be obtained, the presentation on the data display will naturally be the same as in normal mode, and no special presentation will be performed.

In the above example, the signal of the second gaming state that occurs under the same conditions and at the same timing as the signal of the first gaming state was one-to-one, but this is not limited to this. For example, as the signal of the second gaming state related to the BB gaming state, multiple effects corresponding to two or more types of blinking patterns may be stored. Specifically, there is only one type of signal of the first gaming state as the BB gaming state, but in the gaming machine H2, when there are two types of BB gaming states, a normal BB gaming state and a BB gaming state during a favorable zone, each of them may be distinguished as a signal of the second gaming state. That is, when the normal BB gaming state occurs in the gaming machine H2, the effect pattern associated with the signal of the first gaming state is executed in the data display H1, and the effect of the effect pattern associated with the signal of the second gaming state of the normal BB gaming state is executed in the elements not set in the effect pattern. Furthermore, when a BB gaming state occurs during a favorable zone in gaming machine H2, a presentation pattern associated with a signal of the first gaming state is executed in data display H1, and in elements not set in that presentation pattern, a presentation pattern associated with a signal of the second gaming state of the BB gaming state during the favorable zone is executed.

In addition to the above example, the second gaming state signal in the BB gaming state during the advantageous zone is associated with a presentation pattern having an element of displaying the text "BB during advantageous zone!" on the liquid crystal image and an element of lighting the lamp on the periphery of the data display H1 in "blue". Then, when the gaming machine H2 transitions to the BB gaming state during the advantageous zone, if the data display H1 normally receives both the signal of the first gaming state and the signal of the second gaming state, the presentation based on the signal of the first gaming state is prioritized first, and the "character" and the text "BB in progress!" are displayed on the liquid crystal image. However, the element of lighting the lamp on the periphery of the data display H1 in "blue", which does not overlap with the presentation pattern based on the first gaming state, becomes effective, and this presentation is executed in addition to the presentation pattern based on the first gaming state.

If only the first game state signal cannot be obtained, the presentation pattern associated with the second game state signal (the presentation of "BB in favorable zone!" on the LCD image and the outer lamps turning "blue") is executed. If only the second game state signal cannot be obtained, only the presentation pattern associated with the second game state signal (the presentation of "Character + BB!" on the LCD image) is executed, and no presentation is performed by the outer lamps. If both the first game state signal and the second game state signal cannot be obtained, the presentation on the data display will naturally be the same as in normal mode, and no special presentation will be performed.

Also, the second gaming state signal relating to the BB gaming state during the advantageous zone may exceptionally take precedence over the first gaming state signal. In that case, if both the first gaming state signal and the second gaming state signal relating to the BB gaming state during the advantageous zone are successfully acquired, the presentation based on the second gaming state signal takes precedence, the text "BB during advantageous zone!" is displayed on the LCD image, and the lamp on the periphery of the data display H1 turns "blue." However, an element that does not overlap with the presentation pattern based on the second gaming state relating to the BB gaming state during the advantageous zone, namely, displaying a "character" on the LCD screen of the data display H1, becomes effective, and the presentation is executed in addition to the presentation pattern based on the second gaming state.

In this way, signals related to the second gaming state may not be uniformly assigned a lower priority, but information that is beneficial to the player may be assigned a higher priority than signals related to the first gaming state. Such priorities may be set by the server device H4 that sets the data display H1 from outside, or by the data display H1 itself. In the above example, there are two types of BB gaming states, but it is also possible to add something like a premium BB, which is more advantageous than the BB, and to set priorities by distinguishing between three types in the second gaming state, or to distinguish between more than two types and to set priorities.

In addition, in the presentation pattern table of this embodiment, presentations synchronized with other data displays H1 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as synchronous presentations) can be set. The synchronous presentation is set to a lower priority than presentations based on other game states (first game state and second game state). The synchronous presentation is a presentation executed by multiple data displays H1, and is a presentation executed by treating the video display units H405 of the data displays H1 of multiple game machines grouped in a range (for example, parallel arrangement, island arrangement, etc.) predetermined by a server or main unit as one common screen, for example, a presentation in which a character image or a text image is moved from the rightmost video display unit H405 to the leftmost video display unit H405. The priority order of the synchronous presentation and presentations based on other game states can be determined appropriately. In addition, multiple synchronous presentations may be provided, and the priority order may be set among them. For example, the priority order may be first game state>synchronous presentation 1>second game state>synchronous presentation 2, etc.

Figure 147 is an example of a game state transition table showing the possible destinations of the game state transition. The game state transition table is realized by being stored in the RAM H403 of the data display H1 via a server or a removable ROM that stores such information based on the type of gaming machine installed, or by being accessible to a dedicated ROM. Note that the storage method is not limited to this, and various methods can be applied. As shown in Figure 147, the vertical axis is the game state from which the game state is to be transitioned, and the horizontal axis is the game state to which the game state is to be transitioned, and a circle is stored in the game state to which the game state can be transitioned as the destination. When the data display H1 detects a transition of the game state, it refers to the game state transition table and checks whether the transition of the game state that has been performed is correct.

[motion]
With reference to Fig. 148, the effect execution process executed by the control unit H401 of the data display H1 of this embodiment will be described. First, the control unit H401 judges whether or not a signal indicating a game state is received from the external terminal board H308 of the gaming machine H2 (step S4020). If a signal indicating a game state is received (step S4020: YES), the control unit H401 refers to the effect pattern table (see Fig. 138) to change the effect according to the game state indicated by the received signal, and starts counting according to the effect (step S4021).

After the end of step S4021, or if no signal indicating the game state is received in step S4020 (step S4020: NO), the control unit H401 judges whether or not the lighting state is detected from the image of the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2 captured by the camera unit H12 (step S4022). If the lighting state is detected (step S4022: YES), the control unit H401 judges whether or not the lighting state has changed from the previous time (step S4023). If the lighting state has changed (step S4023: YES), the control unit H401 judges whether or not the destination of the game state is abnormal (step S4024). That is, the control unit H401 refers to the game state transition table (see FIG. 147) and judges whether or not the game state corresponding to the changed performance is abnormal as a destination of the transition from the current game state. If the destination of the game state is abnormal, the control unit H401 detects it as an error (step S4025). If an error is detected, the control unit H401 may send a signal to notify the server device H4 of the error, or may notify the error by displaying a video or outputting a sound on the data display H1. After that, the control unit H401 returns the process to step S4020.

If the destination is not abnormal (step S4024: NO), the control unit H401 judges whether the timing of the effects overlaps (step S4026), including the synchronous effects. If the timing of the effects overlaps (step S4026: YES), the control unit H401 selects the effect to be prioritized (step S4027). The selection method may be a comparison of the effects with each other, or a comparison of the game state related to the effects. If it is determined in step S4026 that the timing of the effects does not overlap, or after step S4027, the effect is changed according to the lighting state (step S4028), and the process returns to step S4020. On the other hand, if the lighting state has not changed in step S4023 (step S4023: NO), the control unit H401 continues the current effect (step S4029) and returns to step S4020.

In step S4022, if the lighting state is not detected (step S4022: NO), the control unit H401 judges whether or not a specific lighting state is being detected (step S4030). If the specific lighting state is not being detected (step S4030: NO), the control unit H401 returns the process to step S4020. If the specific lighting state is being detected (step S4030: YES), the control unit H401 detects an error state (step S4031). Then, the control unit H401 judges whether or not the count value that started counting in step S4021 satisfies the end condition (step S4032). If the count value satisfies the end condition (step S4032: YES), the control unit H401 stops the performance being executed (step S4033) and returns the process to step S4020. On the other hand, if the count value does not satisfy the end condition (step S4032: NO), the control unit H401 returns the process to step S4020.

(Variation 1)
A modified example of the ninth embodiment will be described. For example, if the data display H1 cannot read the lighting state of the top lamp H60 multiple times (or for a predetermined period of time or more), the video display, audio output, and illumination of the data display H1 may be changed to a demonstration pattern.

The light emitting means of the gaming machine H2 is not limited to visible light, and may be, for example, infrared light. This allows the data display H1 to detect the lighting state of the light emitting means using an infrared sensor in the sensor group H404, and also makes it possible to directly specify a presentation pattern.

Furthermore, the priority setting is not limited to the effects, and for example, it may be possible to set a priority for the data screen display (see FIG. 115) that is displayed when the player operates the data display H1. For example, it is preferable to give priority to the data screen display over other effect displays.

In addition, depending on the timing of the blinking of the top lamp H60 and the timing of the image acquisition of the camera unit H12, the image may not include the image of the top lamp H60 when it is lit, and the data display H1 may not accurately receive the second game state. This may be avoided by the following method. That is, when the gaming machine H2 controls the blinking of the top lamp H60, it may blink for a predetermined period of time, wait for a period of time (e.g., a time shorter than the blinking interval) that causes the blinking timing to shift, and then resume the blinking. For example, a blinking pattern of one second may be repeated four times, and then the same pattern may be repeated after waiting for several milliseconds. Similarly, imaging may be waited for a predetermined period of time so that the timing of the image acquisition of the camera on the data display H1 side is shifted. Also, the timing of imaging by the camera unit H12 on the data display H1 may be determined based on a signal from the external terminal board H308.

In the above-mentioned embodiments, a data display device is used as an example of a gaming device, but as long as the gaming device is capable of executing effects equipped with a camera unit or the like that is individually installed on the gaming machine, it is not limited to a data display device installed on the top of the gaming machine. For example, it can be applied to various gaming devices such as a rental device attached to the gaming machine or an inter-machine data display device installed between the machines.

Tenth Embodiment
Next, a gaming system according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 149 to 165.

[Configuration of gaming machine and gaming device]
As shown in FIG. 149, the gaming system PS100 of the present invention includes a gaming machine 3001 and a data display 2501 arranged on the upper part of the gaming machine 3001. The gaming machine 3001 is provided with a lamp 3305 for transmitting data such as a presentation pattern on the upper part, and the data display 2501 receives data such as a game state and a presentation pattern from the gaming machine 3001 by receiving light from the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001. In this way, data such as a game state and a presentation pattern is transmitted from the gaming machine 3001 to the data display 2501 by receiving light from the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 by the data display 2501, so that a lot of information can be transmitted efficiently and with high accuracy. Note that such communication can be said to be a one-way non-contact communication from the gaming machine 3001, which is an external device to the data display 2501, to the data display 2501.

Here, the gaming machine 3001 is, for example, a gaming machine such as the gaming machine 5002 or H2 described above, which includes a pachinko gaming machine 5002a and a pachislot gaming machine 5002b. The data display device 2501 is, for example, similar to the gaming display device 5001 described above, but can be various gaming devices including a gaming medium lending device and a unit for decorating the gaming machine that is provided on the gaming machine.

The data display 2501 shown in FIG. 149 is, for example, a data display called signage. This data display 2501 includes a liquid crystal display 2502, an LED 2503, a speaker 2504, a call button 2505, and an image sensor unit 2811. The call button 2505 is a button for calling a staff member of the arcade, and when the touch sensor detects that the call button 2505 has been pressed, the liquid crystal display 2502, the LED 2503, the speaker 2504, etc. are controlled to output in response to the detection.

The data display 2501 detects light from the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 with the image sensor unit 2811, and based on the detection result, determines the presentation pattern of the gaming machine 3001, etc., and controls the liquid crystal display 2502 to display a corresponding image according to the determined presentation pattern. In addition, if necessary, it controls to output a sound corresponding to the presentation pattern from the speaker and to light up the LED 2503.

The image sensor unit 2811 includes, for example, a CMOS image sensor that captures an image including the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 at a predetermined time interval. This CMOS image sensor is configured to capture images of the lamp 3305 at, for example, 220 fps or 440 fps.

This CMOS image sensor also captures an image of the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 and its surroundings at a predetermined angle of view (e.g., an angle of view of 30° or less) and light source distance (i.e., the distance between the CMOS image sensor and the lamp 3305, e.g., 30 mm to 300 mm). Therefore, the captured image obtained by the CMOS image sensor includes not only the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001, but also the performance lamps of the gaming machine 3001 (e.g., a lamp such as the top lamp H60 of gaming machine H2), light from the adjacent gaming machine 3001, light from the lighting fixtures in the amusement facility, and reflected light from these lights.

In this embodiment, the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 is composed of one or more light output devices such as LEDs, but is not limited to such a configuration. The lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 can function as a dedicated light output device for transmitting data such as the performance patterns of the gaming machine 3001, or can function as a dual-purpose light output device that performs the performance expression of the gaming machine 3001 and transmits data such as the game status and performance patterns. The top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2 described above is the latter dual-purpose light output device.

Next, referring to FIG. 150, the configuration of the gaming machine 3001 as a pachislot machine will be described. The gaming machine 3001 comprises a main control unit 3301 that controls a main device group 3303, and a sub-control unit 3302 that controls a sub-device group 3304, and the main control unit 3301 is connected to the sub-control unit 3302 via one-way communication. An external terminal board 3308 is also connected to the main control unit 3301 via one-way communication. The main control unit 3301 and the sub-control unit 3302 each comprise a CPU, a ROM in which programs and the like are stored, and an RWM in which information relating to games and presentations is stored.

The main device group 3303 is composed of, for example, a reel control circuit, a medal sensor, a start lever sensor, a stop button sensor, a hopper control circuit, etc., and the main control unit 3301 controls the progress of the game in the gaming machine 3001 by controlling these devices. The main control unit 3301 also transmits commands to the sub-control unit 3302 in response to changes in the game state, etc.

The sub-device group 3304 has a lamp 3305 and a lamp control circuit 3306 that controls the lamp 3305 and other lamps. The sub-device group 3304 is also composed of, for example, a liquid crystal module, a performance button sensor, a role control circuit, an illumination control circuit, a speaker control circuit, and the like, and the sub-control unit 3302 controls the performance in the gaming machine 3001 by controlling these devices based on commands sent from the main control unit 3301.

The main control unit 3301 is connected to the data display 2501 via the external terminal board 3308, and outputs game information signals, error signals, etc. after each game or when there is a change in the internal state. The information input from the external terminal board 3308 is, for example, information including external signals 1 to 4, as shown in FIG. 140.

The sub-controller 3302 controls the light output from the lamp 3305 via the lamp control circuit 3306, thereby transmitting data such as the game status and presentation pattern to the data display 2501 (via non-contact communication). When the lamp 3305 also functions as a presentation lamp, the sub-controller 3302 controls the lamp 3305 via the lamp control circuit 3306 to light up in a specified color in accordance with the presentation.

In FIG. 150, the gaming machine 3001 is described as a pachinko machine, but the data display 2501 is also configured for pachinko machines, with information being input from an external terminal board (see FIG. 139) and lamps in the sub-device group.

Next, the configuration of the data display 2501 will be described with reference to FIG. 151. The data display 2501 includes a video display unit 2805 such as an LCD 2502, an illumination unit 2806 such as an LED 2503, and an audio output unit 2807 such as a speaker 2504 (see FIG. 149). The data display 2501 also includes a sensor group 2804, a control unit 2801, a ROM 2802, and a RAM 2803. The control unit 2801 includes a CPU and a control circuit board on which the CPU is provided, and controls the devices to which it is connected.

The ROM 2802 stores a control program for implementing the functions of the data display 2501. The control unit 2801 reads out and executes the control program stored in the ROM 2802 to control each component and implement functions such as executing presentations in a manner that corresponds to the game state, presentation pattern, etc., of the gaming machine 3001.

The control unit 2801 also controls communications with the gaming machine 3001 and with the server device 3901. The server device 3901 has the same functions as the server device H4 described above.

The sensor group 2804 is a sensor group including a touch sensor that determines whether the call button 2505 shown in FIG. 149 is pressed. When an operation is detected by these sensors, the control unit 2801 controls the display content in the video display unit 2805, the light emission state in the illumination unit 2806, and the audio output state in the audio output unit 2807 in accordance with the operation. When the display screen of the video display unit 2805 is caused to function as a touch panel, the sensor group 2804 includes a sensor for detecting a touch operation on this touch panel.

The communication interface 2810 is an interface for communicating with the gaming machine 3001 and the server device 3901, and is also a conversion module that converts input information into the optimal format when outputting it.

The communication interface 2810 receives information from the gaming machine 3001 in two communication modes. One is the non-contact communication via light as described above, and the other is a one-way communication mode in which the communication interface 2810 is connected to the external terminal board 3308 of the gaming machine 3001 via a contact input method, resulting in one-way communication from the gaming machine 3001 to the data display 2501.

Although not shown, the communication interface 2810 is connected to the game media lending device 5003 (see FIG. 111) by a harness using a contact input/output method, enabling two-way communication. The communication interface 2810 and the server device 3901 are connected by a coaxial cable using a wired LAN method, and are also connected by a harness using a contact output method, enabling two-way communication.

The RAM 2803 functions as a storage means for storing various data. For example, the control unit 2801 stores the control results of each connected component in the RAM 2803. The RAM 2803 also stores a data table (game state determination table) for determining the game state and presentation pattern of the gaming machine 3001, and a data table (presentation pattern table) for executing presentations according to the game state and presentation pattern.

In this embodiment, the data display 2501 can download a game status determination table and a presentation pattern table (including video data and audio data used for presentation) from the server device 3901 via the communication interface 2810.

In addition, data tables for determining the gaming state and presentation pattern of the gaming machine 3001, and data tables for executing presentations according to the gaming state and presentation pattern, etc., may be transferred from an external storage device, etc. to the RAM 2803 via the USB connection terminal of the communication interface 2810, and the above data tables can be transferred by various other methods and routes.

As described above, the image sensor unit 2811 is provided to capture an image of the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001. When the image sensor unit 2811 acquires an image including the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001, it transmits data such as the game status and presentation pattern based on the image to the control unit 2801 of the data display device 2501, and the control unit 2801 then executes presentation according to the data. The control unit 2801 controls the video display unit 2805, the illumination unit 2806, and the audio output unit 2807 to execute the presentation.

Next, the configuration of the image sensor unit 2811 will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the CMOS image sensor 2932 and the control LSI 2934 included in the image sensor unit 2811.

The CMOS image sensor 2932 is, for example, a CMOS image sensor with a resolution of 640 x 240 pixels and a frame rate of 220 fps or 440 fps. Note that in this embodiment, the CMOS image sensor 2932 is used as an imaging device that captures an image of the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 and acquires image data, but other imaging devices such as a CCD image sensor can also be used.

The control LSI 2934 includes a host controller 2941, a DSP (digital signal processor) circuit 2942, a SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) 2943 connected to a backup power supply (not shown), a flash memory 2944, an ISP (Image Signal Processing) circuit 2945, and a UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) 2952. These devices constituting the control LSI 2934 are interconnected via a bus, and the control LSI 2934 of this embodiment uses AXI (Advanced eXtensible Interface) as the bus protocol.

The control LSI 2934 also includes an ISI (Image Sensor Interface) circuit 2951. The ISI circuit 2951 is electrically connected to the CMOS image sensor 2932 and the ISP circuit. The ISI circuit 2951 converts image data transmitted from the CMOS image sensor 2932 in the LVDS (Low voltage differential signaling) format into an RGB Bayer image and outputs it. At this time, a unique image ID is assigned to the RGB image output from the ISI circuit 2951. This image ID makes it possible to identify each image acquired sequentially over time.

The ISP circuit 2945 inputs the RGB Bayer image from the ISI circuit 2951. Here, the ISP circuit 2945 can be configured to perform lens distortion processing. The lens distortion correction processing is a process for correcting distortion caused by the lens characteristics in the image data captured by the CMOS image sensor 2932 in order to improve the accuracy of the processing described below.

Next, the ISP circuit 2945 performs color conversion processing to convert the RGB Bayer image (or the image after lens correction processing, if such processing has been performed) into various formats. In the color conversion processing, the ISP circuit 2945 converts the RGB Bayer image into image data (YUV image data) corresponding to the YUV color space, and stores this YUV image data in the SRAM 2943. Note that the SRAM 2943 is provided with a storage area capable of storing a predetermined number of YUV image data. When the number of YUV image data stored in the SRAM 2943 reaches the upper limit, the oldest YUV image data is overwritten in the stored order.

In addition, when storing YUV image data in the SRAM 2943, the ISP circuit 2945 outputs a VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) interrupt signal to the host controller 2941.

In addition, in the color conversion process, the ISP circuit 2945 can convert the RGB Bayer image into image data (HSV image data) corresponding to a color space (HSV color space) consisting of three components (H: hue, S: saturation, V: brightness) as necessary, and store this HSV image data in the SRAM 2943.

When only RGB image data is used, the ISP circuit 2945 stores the RGB image data directly in the SRAM 2943.

The DSP circuit 2942 performs data reception processing (e.g., light source detection processing, noise removal processing, decoding processing, etc.) in this embodiment under the control of the host controller 2941, and acquires data such as the game status and presentation pattern transmitted by the gaming machine 3001 from the input image data (YUV image data) captured by the CMOS image sensor 2932.

The DSP circuit 2942 performs Fourier transform and inverse Fourier transform as described below in the noise removal process under the control of the host controller 2941, and these processes can also be configured to be performed using dedicated circuits provided in the image sensor unit 2811. Also, when decoding error correction codes, CDMA codes, PSM codes, etc. in the decoding process, these processes can also be configured to be performed using dedicated circuits provided in the image sensor unit 2811.

The UART 2952 is a serial communication device for transmitting data generated by the image sensor unit 2811 (e.g., data on the game status, presentation patterns, etc. transmitted by the gaming machine 3001) to the control unit 2801 of the data display device 2501 via the communication interface 2810.

The host controller 2941 controls each device that constitutes the control LSI 2934, such as the DSP circuit 2942, UART 2952, etc.

In addition, when the host controller 2941 receives a VSYNC interrupt signal from the ISP circuit 2945 (when YUV image data is stored in the SRAM 2943), it instructs the DSP circuit 2942 to perform various processes as necessary in order to perform the data reception process described below.

The flash memory 2944 stores parameters and data required for various processes used by various devices constituting the control LSI 2934, such as the host controller 2941 and the DSP circuit 2942. It also stores the encoding method used in the data reception process of the image sensor unit 2811.

In this embodiment, the ISP circuit 2945 converts the image data captured by the CMOS image sensor 2932 into image data corresponding to the YUV color space (YUV image data) and stores the converted data in the SRAM 2943 as input image data (input information), forming an input information generating means.

[Performance execution process in data display device]
Next, a description will be given of the performance execution process executed by the control unit 2801 of the data display 2501 with reference to Fig. 153. This process is basically started when the data display 2501 is powered on, and is executed periodically at a predetermined interval until the power is turned off.

First, the control unit 2801 inputs an output signal output from the external terminal board 3308 of the gaming machine 3001 (step S4050). Next, in step S4051, it is determined whether any of the external signals 1 to 4 has changed. The external signals 1 to 4 are contents that can be adjusted appropriately between the gaming machine 3001 and the data display 2501. For example, as shown in FIG. 140, "external signal 1" can be a signal indicating that an RB has occurred in the gaming machine 3001 or that an RB is in progress, "external signal 2" can be a signal indicating that a BB has occurred in the gaming machine 3001 or that an BB is in progress, "external signal 3" can be a signal indicating that an ART has occurred in the gaming machine 3001 or that an ART is in progress, and "external signal 4" can be a signal indicating that the front door of the gaming machine 3001 is open.

If there is a change in any of the external signals 1 to 4 (step S4051: YES), the control unit 2801 refers to a presentation pattern table such as that shown in FIG. 138, changes the presentation according to the state of the external signals 1 to 4, and starts counting according to that presentation (step S4052).

After step S4052 is completed, or if there is no change in any of the external signals 1 to 4 in step S4051 (step S4051: NO), the control unit 2801 acquires communication data (sent by the gaming machine 3001) from the image sensor unit 2811 (step S4053). This communication data is data generated by the image sensor unit 2811 from an image of the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 through a data reception process described below, and if decoding is successful, it is stored in the communication data storage area of the RAM 2803.

Next, in step S4054, it is determined whether the control unit 2801 has acquired communication data from the gaming machine 3001. If communication data has been acquired (step S4054: YES), the control unit 2801 determines whether the acquired data is a performance instruction command including a performance pattern (step S4055). If the acquired data is a performance instruction command (step S4055: YES), the control unit 2801 refers to the performance pattern table, changes the performance to one corresponding to the performance instruction command (step S4056), and returns to step S4050. On the other hand, if the acquired data is not a performance instruction command (step S4055: NO), the control unit 2801 continues the current performance (step S4057) and returns to step S4050.

If communication data has not been received from the gaming machine 3001 in step S4054 (step S4054: NO), the control unit 2801 detects an error state (step S4058). Next, it is determined whether the count value that started counting in step S4052 satisfies the end condition (step S4059). If the count value satisfies the end condition (step S4059: YES), the control unit 2801 stops the performance being performed (step S4060) and returns processing to step S4050. On the other hand, if the count value does not satisfy the end condition (step S4059: NO), the control unit 2801 returns processing to step S4050.

[LED control process (data transmission process) in gaming machine]
Next, the LED control process executed by the sub-control unit 3302 of the gaming machine 3001 will be described with reference to Fig. 154. This process is basically started when the gaming machine 3001 is powered on, and is executed periodically at a predetermined interval until the power is turned off.

First, the sub-control unit 3302 determines whether there is any transmission data to be sent to the data display 2501 due to a change in the game state, etc. (step S4080). If it is determined that there is no transmission data (step S4080: NO), the process ends.

If it is determined that there is data to be transmitted (step S4080: YES), in step S4081, the sub-control unit 3302 performs error coding processing. This error coding processing is, for example, processing to convert 8 bits of original data into a 16-bit error correction code (error correction code (16, 8)).

Next, in step S4082, it is determined whether the encoding is to be CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access). This process is determined, for example, by referring to the encoding method stored in the RWM of the sub-control unit 3302. It is assumed that the encoding method stored in the RWM of the sub-control unit 3302 (of the gaming machine 3001), which is the sender of the communication data, matches the encoding method stored in the flash memory 2944 of the image sensor unit 2811 (of the data display device 2501), which is the receiver of the communication data. In this embodiment, this encoding method is CDMA or PSM (Manchester coding) encoding.

If it is determined that the encoding is CDMA (step S4082: YES), CDMA encoding processing is performed in step S4083. In this processing, the transmission data converted into the error correction code in step S4081 is encoded by CDMA. This CDMA encoding will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 166.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the coding is not CDMA (step S4082: NO), PSM coding processing is performed in step S4084. In this processing, the transmission data converted into an error correcting code in step S4081 is coded by PSM. This PSM coding will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 167.

After step S4083 or step S4084 is completed, in step S4085, the LED performance pattern that is being executed or will be executed is obtained. This process is, for example, a process of extracting an illumination pattern (i.e., the light emission pattern of the LED (lamp 3305)) in the performance pattern that is being executed or will be executed, which is determined based on the performance pattern table shown in FIG. 138. The light emission pattern extracted in this way is expanded, for example, in the RWM of the sub-control unit 3302.

Next, in step S4086, the LED light emission pattern based on the transmission data encoded by CDMA or PSM is synthesized with the LED light emission pattern based on the performance pattern acquired in step S4085. The synthesized LED light emission pattern is then registered as the performance pattern being executed (step S4087), and the process ends. This registration process is realized, for example, by rewriting the LED light emission pattern deployed in the RWM of the sub-controller 3302 to the synthesized light emission pattern. The sub-controller 3302 then controls the lamp control circuit 3306 based on this registered performance pattern, and the lamp control circuit 3306 controls the lighting (brightness and light color) of the lamp 3305 based on this.

When synthesizing an LED lighting pattern based on encoded transmission data with an LED lighting pattern in an active performance pattern, for example, if the bit of the transmission data is "1", the LED is made slightly brighter, and if the bit of the transmission data is "0", the LED is made slightly dimmer, thereby expressing a pulse related to the transmission data. With this synthesis, the player can visually recognize the LED (lamp 3305) that is lighting up due to the performance as a natural lamp performance without realizing that it contains encoded transmission data, and as a result, the transmission data can be transmitted to the data display 2501 without the player being aware of it.

In the example shown in FIG. 154, the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 is configured to function as a dual-purpose light output device that performs the presentation of the gaming machine 3001 and transmits data such as the game status and presentation patterns, but it can also be configured as a dedicated light output device that only transmits data such as the game status and presentation patterns.

When the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 is configured as a dedicated light output device, instead of the processing of steps S4085 to S4087, the light emission mode of the lamp 3305 is controlled based on the transmission data encoded by CDMA or PSM and the LED light emission pattern based on a certain reference brightness value. This is to address the problem that when the brightness of the transmission data itself is weak, the amount of light is too small to capture, and the problem that light emission data in the negative direction cannot be generated when the brightness is 0.

In the example of Fig. 154, when data such as game status and performance pattern is transmitted, for example, error correction information is added by error correction coding, and 8 bits of original data are converted into a 16-bit error correction code, and such coding makes it possible to correct 2-bit random errors and further 3-bit burst errors. The error correction code in this embodiment is, for example, a BCH code, which is a type of cyclic code, and the transmission data is encoded by the generating polynomial shown in the following formula 1.
G(x)= ^x8 + ^x7 + ^x6 + ^x4 + ^x2 +x+1... (Equation 1)

In the example of FIG. 154, CDMA coding and PSM coding are selectively used as coding, but it can also be configured to use other coding.

In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 3302 that executes the LED control process constitutes a transmission data generating means and an information-attached luminance generating means.

[Data Reception Processing in the Image Sensor Unit of the Data Display]
155, a data reception process controlled by the host controller 2941 of the image sensor unit 2811 will be described. This process is basically started when the data display 2501 is powered on, and is executed periodically at a predetermined interval until the power is turned off.

First, the host controller 2941 receives multiple pieces of image data (YUV image data) of the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 acquired by the ISP circuit 2945, and performs a light source detection process to identify the light source, i.e., the position (area) of the lamp 3305 in the image, from the image data (step S4100). Details of the light source detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

Next, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the light source has been identified. If the light source has not been identified (step S4101: NO), the process returns to step S4100. On the other hand, if the light source has been identified (step S4101: YES), image data acquisition processing is performed in step S4102. This processing is a processing for sequentially acquiring image data (YUV image data) of the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 acquired by the ISP circuit 2945.

Next, noise removal processing is performed on the received data determined based on the position of the light source determined in step S4100 and the image data acquired in step S4102 (step S4103). Details of the noise removal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 161.

Here, it is determined whether the amount of received data accumulated to enable decoding has not been reached, i.e., whether a delay is occurring (step S4104). Specifically, in the noise removal process of step S4103, if the noise removal process delay counter and the flicker removal delay counter have not reached their prescribed values, it is determined that the decoding process is not yet ready and is therefore delayed.

If it is determined that the image data is being delayed (step S4104: YES), the image data import process of step S4102 is further executed. If it is determined that the image data is not being delayed (step S4104: NO), the decoding process is performed (step S4105). Details of the decoding process will be described later with reference to FIG. 165.

After the decoding process, in step S4106, it is determined whether the decoding is successful. If the decoding is successful (step S4106: YES), an error correction process is performed to convert the error correction code to the original data (step S4107). Next, in step S4108, it is determined whether the error correction in the error correction code process is successful.

If the error correction was successful (step S4108: YES), in step S4109, the decoded data (received data received from the gaming machine 3001) is stored in the communication data storage area of the RAM 2803 of the data display unit 2501. Next, in step S4110, the reception error counter is cleared, and the process returns to the image data import process of step S4102.

If it is determined in step S4106 that the decoding is not successful (step S4106: NO), or if it is determined in step S4108 that the error correction in the error correction code processing is not successful (step S4108: NO), in step S4111, the reception error counter stored in SRAM2943 is updated by 1 (i.e., incremented by 1).

Next, in step S4112, it is determined whether the reception error counter is greater than ERROR_MAX. If it is determined that the reception error counter is not greater than ERROR_MAX (step S4112: NO), the process returns to the image data import process of step S4102. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reception error counter is greater than ERROR_MAX (step S4112: YES), the process clears the reception error counter in step S4113, and sets the noise reduction counter to 0 and the flicker reduction counter to 0 in step S4114. Thereafter, the process returns to the image data import process of step S4102.

In this embodiment, the host controller 2941, the DSP circuit 2942, and the ISP circuit 2945, which extract received data from image data captured by the CMOS image sensor 2932, constitute an information extraction means and a light reception control means.

[Light source detection process in the image sensor unit of the data display device]
Next, with reference to Fig. 156 to Fig. 160, a light source detection process controlled by the host controller 2941 of the image sensor unit 2811 will be described. The light source detection process uses the blinking control characteristics of the LED light source to identify the position of the LED light source in the image captured by the image sensor unit 2811. In this embodiment, the LED light source is analyzed and identified based on four characteristics of the light source, namely, brightness, periodicity, color, and size.

First, the host controller 2941 waits until it receives a VSYNC interrupt signal from the ISP circuit 2945 described above (step S4170). Then, in step S4171, it is determined whether or not the time filter is in progress. If it is determined that the time filter is in progress (step S4171: YES), the process returns to step S4170 and waits for the generation of a VSYNC interrupt signal. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time filter is not in progress (step S4171: NO), the process proceeds to step S4172.

Such a time filter is for thinning out YUV image data obtained at, for example, 220 fps or 440 fps, and is a time thinning filter that acquires YUV image data at a rate of, for example, once every 3 to 8 VSYNC interrupt signals. As described above, the time filter of this embodiment simply thins out the YUV image data, but various other time-direction LPFs (Low-pass filters) can also be applied.

If it is determined that the time filter is not in progress (step S4171: NO), the input image data is acquired in step S4172. This process acquires the YUV image data stored in SRAM2943.

Figure 157 shows an example of acquired input image data. The input image data is YUV image data, and is represented as a two-dimensional array consisting of Y, U, and V components. Each element of the two-dimensional array corresponds to each pixel of the captured image, and for convenience, Figure 157 shows the value of each component in a 12 x 12 pixel array. In the image sensor unit 2811 of this embodiment, for example, YUV image data captured at 640 x 240 pixels is provided.

Each component in the YUV image data (i.e., the Y component, U component, and V component) can have an 8-bit value per pixel, in which case the resolution of each component is 256 (tones) from 0 to 255. It is also possible to adopt a different resolution depending on the component; for example, the Y component can be 8 bits, and the U and V components can each be 4 bits. Also, although this embodiment uses YUV image data as the input image data, RGB image data or HSV image data can also be used.

Next, in step S4173, the host controller 2941 instructs the DSP circuit 2942 to perform average image generation processing. The average image generation processing is processing for generating the current average image data from the average image data generated based on the YUV image data, which is the input image data input up to the previous time, and the YUV image data, which is the input image data input this time.

Figure 157 shows an example of the current average image data. Like the input image data, the average image data is YUV image data, and is represented as a two-dimensional array consisting of Y, U, and V components. Like the input image data, each element of the two-dimensional array corresponds to each pixel of the captured image.

The average image data is calculated for each component and for each pixel by the following formula 2. Note that the initial value of the average image data is the first input image data in the monitoring time.
Average image data (x, y) = previous average image data (x, y) + difference * learning coefficient ... (Equation 2)
The "previous average image data" is average image data that is updated every time input image data is acquired from previously input image data. The "difference" is the current input image data (x, y) - the previous average image data (x, y), and the "learning coefficient" is a constant such as "0.91."
Here, if the "learning coefficient" is 0.91, the above formula 2 can be rewritten as the following formula 3.
Average image data (x, y)=previous average image data (x, y)*0.09+current input image data (x, y)*0.91 (Equation 3)
That is, as is clear from Equation 3, this average image data is calculated by taking a weighted average of the previous average image data and the current input image data, and 91% of the elements of the latest input image data are reflected by 9% of the elements of the past input image data.

Next, in step S4174, the host controller 2941 instructs the DSP circuit 2942 to perform a differential image generation process. The differential image generation process is a process in which the difference between the Y component of the input image data and the Y component of the average image data is calculated for each pixel in the same position, and the difference is obtained as differential image data.

Figure 157 shows an example of differential image data. This differential image data shows the difference between the input image data (Y component) shown in Figure 157 and the average image data (Y component). In the example of Figure 157, differences occur for the three pixels surrounded by thick lines, and (if the position of the upper left pixel is represented as (0,0)), pixels (1,7) and (4,6) are assigned a value of "1", and pixel (7,6) is assigned a value of "2".

Next, in step S4175, the host controller 2941 instructs the DSP circuit 2942 to perform cumulative value calculation processing. The cumulative value calculation processing is a process in which, when a value related to a pixel that has become a value other than "0" in the differential image data satisfies a predetermined condition, "1" is added to the pixel at the corresponding position for a certain period of time, and this is calculated as cumulative image data. In this embodiment, in order to efficiently search for a light source, the cumulative image data is calculated by focusing on not only the fluctuation components but also the color components.

For example, for each pixel in the differential image data that has a value other than "0", if both of the following conditions 1 and 2 are met, "1" is added to the position of the corresponding pixel in the accumulated image data.
<Condition 1>
Threshold value 1a≦difference image data (Y component) (x, y)≦threshold value 1b (Equation 4)
<Condition 2>
(threshold value 3≦average image data 1 (x, y)≦threshold value 4) & (threshold value 5≦average image data 2 (x, y)≦threshold value 6) ... (Equation 5)

Equation 4 in condition 1 requires that the fluctuation component (vibration component) is within a specified range (for example, 0.5 to 3.0), and the value of the differential image data (x, y) represents this fluctuation component, which is the difference between the Y component of the input image data and the Y component of the average image data. In addition, because the fluctuation component is small, condition 1 can also be determined using other values calculated based on the value of the differential image data (x, y), such as the value obtained by squaring the value of the differential image data (x, y).

Equation 5 of condition 2 requires that the color components are within a specified range, where "average image data 1 (x, y)" is the value of the corresponding pixel in the (U component) of the average image data shown in FIG. 157, and "average image data 2 (x, y)" is the value of the corresponding pixel in the (V component) of the average image data shown in FIG. 157. Note that other values representing the color components of the average image data can also be used to determine the conditions related to the color components.

Figure 157 shows an example of cumulative image data obtained as a result of performing the above-mentioned cumulative value calculation process for a specified period of time based on data including the average image data and differential image data of Figure 157.

When the cumulative image data is found in step S4175, the host controller 2941 performs light source identification processing in step S4176. In the light source identification processing, an area having an area equal to or greater than a certain area based on the cumulative image data and having the largest sum of cumulative values (values assigned to the pixels of that area in the cumulative image data) is regarded as an LED light source.

In the light source identification process of this embodiment, when a pixel set in which pixels with a cumulative value of 1 or more are adjacently arranged in the cumulative image data is enclosed in a rectangular area, if the area is 3 pixels or more in the x coordinate and 2 pixels or more in the y coordinate (i.e., an area of 3 x 2 (pixels) or more), this area (pixel area) becomes a light source candidate. In this example, even if two pixels with a cumulative value of 1 or more are in a diagonal positional relationship (i.e., diagonally upper left, diagonally upper right, diagonally lower left, diagonally lower right), these pixels are considered to be adjacent, but it is also possible to not consider such diagonal positions as adjacent.

Now, with reference to Figures 158 to 160, the light source identification process for identifying pixel regions that are candidate light sources will be described. Note that the light source identification process described in this embodiment is merely an example, and the pixel regions can be identified by various methods.

To explain an example of the light source identification process according to the present invention, Figs. 158 to 160 show an example of cumulative image data in which cumulative values are arranged in a two-dimensional array. This is similar to the cumulative image data shown in Fig. 157. Here, a two-dimensional array of 9 x 5 pixels consisting of pixels (0, 0) to (8, 4) is shown as an example.

In this two-dimensional array, the search points for searching the cumulative value are detected in order, and labeling and linking are performed according to the cumulative value of the pixel. Finally, pixel regions having an area equal to or greater than the above-mentioned certain area (here, 3 x 2 pixels) are identified as light source candidates. Labeling is a process of provisionally marking pixels in pixel regions that may be identified as light source candidates. From this point on, each pixel of the cumulative image data shown in Figures 158 to 160 will be referred to as a "cell." This cell corresponds to the pixel position of the image data obtained as a result of imaging the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 with the image sensor unit 2811.

In Figures 158 to 160, the current exploration point (the cell being explored) is indicated by vertical hatching, the previous or previous exploration points are indicated by horizontal hatching, and the labeled cells are indicated by diagonal hatching.

Figures 158 to 160 also show search areas indicated by thick lines as P1-1 to P1-8, which are areas that include the search point and four inspection points located to the left, upper left, above, and upper right of the search point. The search area is controlled so that its range is moved sequentially by the search, but at least the accumulated value of this search area is loaded into SRAM 2943 together with the cell position information during the search.

Here, we will explain the process flow for sequentially detecting search points in the accumulated image data shown in Figures 158 to 160, until the area of the light source candidate is finally identified.

First, detection of the search point begins at cell (0,0). The search point detection starts by moving to the right from cell (0,0) to search the first row of the accumulated image data, and then searches the second row below that. That is, in FIG. 158, the search goes from cell (0,0) -> cell (8,0), to cell (0,1) -> cell (4,1). Up to this point, the accumulated values of each cell are all "0", and these cells do not contribute to light source identification, so they are skipped.

When the search point advances to cell (5,1), the accumulated value of this cell (5,1) is "67", and this situation is shown in Figure 158A. As shown above, a search area P1-1 is shown that includes the search point, cell (5,1), and the four inspection points located to the left, upper left, above, and upper right of this search point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158B, the search point advances to cell (6,1), and the cumulative value of this cell (6,1) is "57." At this time, cell (5,1) is recognized as the search point before the previous time.

Here, cell (5,1), which is recognized as the previous search point, is included in search area P1-2, so cell (5,1) is labeled as shown in FIG. 158C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158D, the search point advances to cell (7,1), and the cumulative value of this cell (7,1) is "39." At this time, cell (6,1) is recognized as the search point before the previous time.

Here, cell (6,1), which is recognized as the previous search point, is included in search area P1-3, and cell (6,1) is labeled as shown in FIG. 158E. Also, cell (6,1) is adjacent to cell (5,1), which has already been labeled, so these cells are recognized as connected.

Next, the search continues with cells (8,1), (0,2), and (1,2), but these cells are skipped because their cumulative values are "0". After that, as shown in FIG. 159A, the search point advances to cell (2,2), whose cumulative value is "76". At this time, cell (7,1) is recognized as the search point before the previous time.

Here, cell (7,1), which is recognized as the previous search point, is not included in search area P1-4, so cell (7,1) is not labeled at this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159B, the search point advances to cell (3, 2), and the cumulative value of this cell (3, 2) is "103." At this time, cell (2, 2) is recognized as the search point before the previous time.

Here, cell (7,1), which is recognized as a search point from the previous time or earlier, is still not included in search area P1-5, so cell (7,1) is not labeled at this point. Therefore, cell (7,1) and cell (2,2) are recognized as search points from the previous time or earlier.

Here, as shown in FIG. 159C, cell (2, 2), which is recognized as the previous search point, is included in search area P1-5, and cell (2, 2) is labeled.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159D, the search point advances to cell (4, 2), and the cumulative value of this cell (4, 2) is "141." At this time, cell (3, 2) is recognized as the search point before the previous time.

As shown in FIG. 159E, cell (3, 2), which is recognized as the previous search point, is included in search area P1-6 and is therefore labeled. Also, cell (3, 2) is adjacent to cell (2, 2), which has already been labeled, and so these cells are recognized as being connected.

In addition, cell (7,1), which is recognized as the previous search point, is adjacent to cell (6,1), which is joined to cell (5,1) that is now included in search area P1-6, so it is labeled here, and cells (5,1), (6,1), and (7,1) are recognized as being connected.

Next, the search continues with cells (5,2) through (8,2) and (0,3), but these cells are skipped because their cumulative values are "0". After that, as shown in FIG. 160A, the search point advances to cell (1,3), whose cumulative value is "49". At this time, cell (4,2) is recognized as the search point from before the previous time.

As shown in FIG. 160B, cell (4,2), which is recognized as the previous search point, is adjacent to cell (3,2) which is connected to cell (2,2) which is included in search area P1-7, so it is labeled here. Also, cell (4,2) is adjacent to cell (3,2) which has already been labeled, so cell (2,2), cell (3,2), and cell (4,2) are recognized as connected. Furthermore, these connected cells (2,2), cell (3,2), and cell (4,2) are adjacent to the connected cells (5,1), cell (6,1), and cell (7,1) in the diagonal direction, so cell (2,2), cell (3,2), cell (4,2), cell (5,1), cell (6,1), and cell (7,1) are recognized as connected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160C, the search point advances to cell (2, 3), and the cumulative value of this cell (2, 3) is "4." At this time, cell (1, 3) is recognized as the search point before the previous time.

As shown in FIG. 160D, cell (1,3), which is recognized as the previous search point, is included in search area P1-8 and is therefore labeled. Also, cell (1,3) is adjacent to cell (2,2), which has already been labeled, so it is linked to this cell (2,2) and recognized. Furthermore, cell (2,3), which is the search point, also has a cumulative value of "4" and is adjacent to cell (2,2), so cell (2,3) is also linked to cell (2,2) and recognized. Finally, cell (1,3), cell (2,3), cell (2,2), cell (3,2), cell (4,2), cell (5,1), cell (6,1), and cell (7,1) are all linked and recognized.

Next, the search continues with cells (3,3) through (8,3), and cells (0,4) through (8,4), and because the cumulative values of these cells are "0", they are skipped and all search is completed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 160E, a pixel area P2 consisting of rectangular cells including the combined and recognized cells (i.e., cell (1,3), cell (2,3), cell (2,2), cell (3,2), cell (4,2), cell (5,1), cell (6,1), cell (7,1)) is obtained, and because this pixel area P2 is an area of a certain area or more (here, 3 x 2 pixels), it is finally identified as a light source candidate.

By applying the process described above to the entire accumulated image data, pixel regions consisting of a collection of cells with a non-zero accumulated value can be identified as light source candidates; if there are multiple such collections, multiple light source candidates will be identified.

In this embodiment, the pixel region identified as a light source candidate is a rectangular region that includes a collection of cells whose cumulative value is not zero, but it is also possible to identify the collection of cells whose cumulative value is not zero itself, or an area obtained based on that collection, as the pixel region.

In addition, in this embodiment, when searching for each cell, cells with an accumulated value of zero are skipped so that such cells with an accumulated value of zero are not involved in identifying pixel regions that are candidate light sources. However, it is also possible to skip cells with accumulated values smaller than a predetermined value (for example, a value greater than zero, such as 5 or 10) so that these cells are not involved in identifying pixel regions that are candidate light sources.

When the above light source identification process determines that multiple pixel regions are candidate light sources, the region with the largest sum of accumulated values within that pixel region is identified as the position of the LED light source. Note that in this embodiment, there is one LED light source, and one corresponding pixel region is identified as the position of the LED light source.

For example, taking the cumulative image data shown in Figure 157, pixel region R1 surrounded by a thick line has pixels with a cumulative value of 1 or more arranged in a 2 x 2 (pixel) area, but as mentioned above, it is not an area of 3 x 2 (pixels) or more, so it cannot be a candidate light source.

Furthermore, pixel regions R2 and R3 enclosed by thick lines are both regions of 3 x 2 (pixels) or more with cumulative values of 1 or more, and are candidates for light sources. However, the total cumulative value contained in region R2 is "469," and the total cumulative value contained in region R3 is "162." Ultimately, region R2, which has the larger sum of the cumulative values, is identified as the location of the LED light source.

Next, in the light source identification process of step S4176, it is determined whether or not the position of the LED light source has been identified (step S4177). If the position of the LED light source has been identified (step S4177: NO), the process ends. In this manner, in this embodiment, the input image data and average image data shown in FIG. 157 are updated for each frame (each thinned frame), and the position of the LED light source is identified based on the differential image data and cumulative image data that are updated accordingly.

If the position of the LED light source is not identified (step S4177: YES), in step S4178, it is determined whether or not it is within the monitoring time. In this embodiment, the monitoring time is 2 to 7 seconds. If it is within the monitoring time (step S4178: YES), the process returns to step S4170 and waits for the generation of a VSYNC interrupt signal. If it is not within the monitoring time (step S4178: NO), an initialization process is performed (step S4179). In this initialization process, the average image data of each of the Y, U, and V components is set as the corresponding input image data for each pixel, and the difference image data and accumulated image data are cleared. After step S4179, the process returns to step S4170 and waits for the generation of a VSYNC interrupt signal.

By using the above-described light source detection process, it is possible to effectively find an LED light source. The transmission signal of an LED light source has characteristics in frequency and amplitude, and when the disturbance components are suppressed and the signal is passed through threshold filters for color, amplitude, and periodic components, characteristics appear near the LED light source. In addition, the pulses of the transmission data are spread over a wide band, but by taking the background difference (difference from the average image), it becomes easier to extract the plateau area. Furthermore, disturbance components can be suppressed to some extent by using a time filter. The light source detection process of the present invention is built based on these principles, and this makes it possible to realize effective light source detection.

In this embodiment, the host controller 2941, DSP circuit 2942, and ISP circuit 2945 that execute the light source detection process constitute a light output determination means, the host controller 2941 that instructs the DSP circuit 2942 to execute an average image generation process and generate average image data (average information) constitutes an average information generation means, the host controller 2941 that instructs the DSP circuit 2942 to execute a difference image generation process and generate difference image data (difference information) constitutes a difference information generation means, and the host controller 2941 that instructs the DSP circuit 2942 to execute a cumulative value calculation process and generate cumulative image data (cumulative information) constitutes a cumulative information generation means.

[Noise Removal Processing in the Image Sensor Unit of a Data Display]
161 to 164, a description will be given of the removal process controlled by the host controller 2941 of the image sensor unit 2811. The noise removal process is a process for removing noise such as blinking or flicker of an LED light source for effect.

First, the host controller 2941 determines whether the noise removal delay counter is 10 or greater (step S4130). If the noise removal delay counter is 10 or greater (step S4130: YES), in step S4132, a light source image data acquisition process is performed to obtain time series observation values.

This light source image data acquisition process extracts the Y component value from the pixel area (the position of the LED light source in the YUV image data) identified in the light source identification process (see FIG. 156) of the light source exploration process, and calculates the average. In the example of FIG. 157, pixel area R2 (8×2 (pixels)) is identified as the LED light source, so in the input image data (Y component) obtained sequentially, the Y component values of the pixels corresponding to this area are summed up, and the sum is divided by the number of pixels in pixel area R2, 16. Note that here, the average value of the Y component values corresponding to pixel area R2 is grasped as the observed value, but the observed value may be obtained by other methods. For example, the Y component value may be weighted based on the cumulative value of each pixel in pixel area R2, or the Y component value corresponding to a specific pixel in pixel area R2 or the average value of those, or the average value of a certain area (for example, 3×2 (pixels)) centered on the largest value in pixel area R2 may be used as the observed value.

Next, in step S4133, edge-preserving smoothing filter processing is performed to estimate the performance value of the LED lighting pattern related to the performance. The edge-preserving smoothing filter, also known as a domain transform filter, is a filter that smoothes small edges while preserving large edge signals. This filter makes it possible to estimate and extract the LED lighting pattern related to the performance from the observed value on which the transmission data (data on the game status, performance pattern, etc.) sent from the gaming machine 3001 is superimposed.

Figure 162 is a conceptual diagram showing observed values superimposed with transmission data (data on game status, presentation pattern, etc.) transmitted from the gaming machine 3001. As shown in Figure 162, the value of the Y component at a specific position extracted from the YUV image data varies between the maximum brightness value (e.g., MAX = 255) and the minimum brightness value (e.g., MIN = 0), and the transmission data is superimposed on the LED light emission pattern related to the presentation represented by the thick line. That is, when the LED light emission pattern based on the transmission data is superimposed (combined) on the LED light emission pattern related to the presentation, for example, if the bit of the transmission data is "1", the LED light emission related to the presentation is slightly brighter, and if the bit of the transmission data is "0", the LED light emission related to the presentation is slightly dimmer.

For example, if the LED brightness in the LED lighting pattern for the effect is "128", and the bit in the transmitted data is ON (i.e., "1"), the LED brightness in the combined LED lighting pattern is adjusted to "130", whereas if the bit in the transmitted data is OFF (i.e., "0"), the LED brightness in the combined LED lighting pattern is adjusted to "126". In this way, the fluctuation range of the brightness value superimposed by the transmitted data is "2", which is extremely small compared to the range between the maximum and minimum brightness values as shown in FIG. 162, and is also considerably smaller than the fluctuation range of the LED lighting pattern for the effect represented by the thick line in FIG. 162.

In addition, Figure 162 shows an enlarged view of the left and right ends of the observed values, and as these views show, the period of change in the brightness value superimposed by the transmitted data is significantly shorter than the timing of change in the LED lighting pattern related to the performance, shown by the thick line in Figure 162 (the basic timing of change in LED lighting due to the performance).

Figure 163A shows the observed values superimposed with the transmitted data in a more specific manner. In Figure 163A, each of the continuously captured YUV image data is shown as a frame. This shows that, over time, there is a large fluctuation in the Y component as the LED light emission pattern related to the performance, and in addition, small fluctuations in the Y component related to the transmitted data are superimposed.

Next, in step S4134, a performance light emission removal process is performed. This performance light emission removal process subtracts the performance value extracted in step S4133 (a value corresponding to the LED light emission pattern related to the performance) from the observation value acquired in step S4132 (a value obtained by superimposing the LED light emission pattern related to the performance and the transmission data sent from the gaming machine 3001) to obtain a signal value.

Figure 163B shows an example of the signal value obtained by subtracting the performance value from the observation value.

Note that if the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 is configured as a dedicated light output device that only transmits data such as the game status and presentation pattern, no presentation value is included, so a certain reference brightness value can be subtracted.

Next, the host controller 2941 determines whether the flicker elimination delay counter is equal to or greater than 64 (step S4135). If the flicker elimination delay counter is equal to or greater than 64 (step S4135: YES), then in step S4137, flicker elimination processing is performed to remove the flicker component.

Figure 164 shows the above flicker removal process. In Figure 164A, the signal value after subtraction of the performance value shown in Figure 163B is shown by a dotted line. The result of Fourier transforming the data represented in this way is shown in Figure 164B. At this time, a signal (flicker component) is extracted and suppressed from periodic noise with a frequency of, for example, 100 Hz or 120 Hz caused by disturbances such as fluorescent lights. The suppressed flicker component is shown as a dotted line in Figure 164B.

Next, the host controller 2941 instructs the DSP circuit 2942 to perform an inverse Fourier transform to generate a signal value from which flicker has been removed. The solid line portion shown in FIG. 164A indicates the pulse sequence generated by the inverse Fourier transform. In this way, in the flicker removal process, a signal value from which flicker components have been removed is generated using a Fourier transform and an inverse Fourier transform, as shown in FIG. 164A. Note that the Fourier transform performed in this embodiment employs a discrete Fourier transform (DFT), but other Fourier transforms can also be used depending on the characteristics of the light source, the lens used in the image sensor, and the like.

If the noise removal delay counter is not 10 or more (step S4130: NO), in step S4131, the noise removal delay counter is incremented by 1. If the flicker removal delay counter is not 64 or more (step S4135: NO), the flicker removal delay counter is incremented by 1. As described in the data reception process shown in FIG. 155, if the noise removal process delay counter and the flicker removal delay counter have not reached their specified values, control is performed so that the decoding process is not performed. In this embodiment, however, control is performed so that the noise removal process is delayed by 10 frames in steps S4132 to S4134, and the flicker removal process using Fourier transform in step S4137 is delayed by 64 frames.

After steps S4137, S4131, and S4136, the noise removal process ends.

[Decoding process in the image sensor unit of the data display device]
165, a description will be given of a decoding process controlled by the host controller 2941 of the image sensor unit 2811. The decoding process is a process for obtaining transmission data (data on game status, presentation pattern, etc.) transmitted from the gaming machine 3001 based on a signal value (pulse wave) obtained as a result of the noise removal process.

First, in step S4150, the host controller 2941 determines whether the encoding is CDMA. This process is performed based on, for example, data stored in the flash memory 2944 of the image sensor unit 2811.

If it is determined that the encoding is CDMA (step S4150: YES), then in step S4151, a CDMA decoding process is performed. In this process, the signal value obtained as a result of the noise removal process is decoded by CDMA. The fact that the encoding is CDMA indicates that CDMA encoding was used to encode the transmission data in the LED control process in the gaming machine 3001 shown in FIG. 154. This CDMA decoding will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 166.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the coding is not CDMA (step S4150: NO), PSM decoding processing is performed in step S4152. In this processing, the signal value obtained as a result of the noise removal processing is decoded by PSM. The fact that the coding is PSM indicates that PSM coding was used to code the transmission data in the LED control processing in the gaming machine 3001 shown in FIG. 154. This PSM decoding will be explained in detail later with reference to FIG. 167.

In the example of FIG. 165, CDMA decoding or PSM decoding is used depending on the encoding selection in the LED control processing in the gaming machine 3001 shown in FIG. 154, but if any other encoding is used in the LED control processing in the gaming machine 3001, it can be configured to use the corresponding decoding method accordingly.

[Encoding and Decoding Methods]
As described above, in this embodiment, the gaming machine 3001 encodes transmission data consisting of data on game status, presentation patterns, etc., in units of 1 bit, and transmits the data to the data display 2501 in the form of a pulse wave via the emission of an LED. The data display 2501 receives the data based on an image of the emission of an LED, calculates a correlation value with the code from the received pulse wave, and recognizes a pulse wave whose correlation value is equal to or greater than a threshold value as transmission data received from the gaming machine 3001.

For example, if the transmission data is 4-bit data "0011", and bit "1" is assigned a code bit "0101", and bit "0" is assigned a code bit "1010" that is the inverse of the code bit corresponding to bit "1", the transmission data after encoding will be the bit string "1010, 1010, 0101, 0101" (note that the commas in the bits are inserted for convenience to separate the 4 bits of the transmission data for easy understanding).

In such encoded bit strings, the starting position of the code is unclear, and furthermore, when the bit string data is slid to process with a window size of 4 bits, the same code appears in the window, resulting in a high correlation value with the code, which poses problems when decoding.

Therefore, in this embodiment, it is important to select a code whose starting position is easy to understand (i.e., easy to synchronize) and whose autocorrelation and cross-correlation are low. Note that autocorrelation is a measure of how well a signal matches a signal when the signal itself is time-shifted, and cross-correlation is a measure of the similarity between two signals.

To solve the above-mentioned problems during decoding, this embodiment employs a unique spreading code in CDMA encoding. CDMA encoding is a method used to perform two or more communications (multiple access) within the same frequency band.

Here, the CDMA code is set from the following viewpoints.
A. Select a CDMA code with low autocorrelation and cross-correlation. In other words, a spreading code that reduces both the autocorrelation and cross-correlation when inverted and reduces the correlation value when a window (a partition window based on a processing unit, etc.) is slid is used.
B. Two types of 16-bit spreading codes are prepared. That is, the two spreading codes are arranged so that the correlation value becomes low when the window is slid.
C. A 32-bit spreading code is associated with only the first bit of the transmission data, and a 16-bit spreading code is associated with the remaining bits. By configuring in this way, the start position of the transmission data can be clearly grasped.

Figure 166 shows an example of CDMA encoding using the above spreading code. Figure 166A shows (in hexadecimal) the leading 32-bit code set according to the bits of the transmission data, and two 16-bit codes (16-bit code (1) and 16-bit code (2)). When the leading bit of the transmission data is "1", the leading 32-bit code associated with it is "36553cca", and when it is "0", it is "c9aac335". When a bit other than the leading bit of the transmission data is "1", the 16-bit code (1) associated with it is "3c35", and the 16-bit code (2) is "91da". When a bit other than the leading bit of the transmission data is "0", the 16-bit code (1) associated with it is "c3ca", and the 16-bit code (2) is "6e25".

When the transmitted data bit is "1", the leading 32-bit code, 16-bit code (1), and 16-bit code (2) are the inverted values of bit "0" and bit "1" when the transmitted data bit is "0".

For example, the 16-bit code (1) when the corresponding bit in the transmitted data is "1" is "3c35" as shown in FIG. 166A, and is expressed in binary as "0011110000110101". On the other hand, the 16-bit code (1) when the corresponding bit in the transmitted data is "0" is "c3ca" as shown in FIG. 166A, and is expressed in binary as "1100001111001010". Comparing the two binary representations, it can be seen that the bit "1" and the bit "0" are inverted in each corresponding digit.

Figure 166B shows what code sequences are associated with the transmission data. The leading 32-bit code, 16-bit code (1), and 16-bit code (2) are shown as "leading", "(1)", and "(2)", respectively. Here, the transmission data is shown as 2 bytes of data. The leading 32-bit code is placed in the first bit (first bit) of the transmission data, and if this bit is "1", the leading 32-bit code "36553cca" corresponding to bit "1" shown in Figure 166A is associated, and if this bit is "0", the leading 32-bit code "c9aac335" corresponding to bit "0" shown in Figure 166A is associated.

A 16-bit code (1) is placed in the second bit of the transmission data, and if that bit is "1", the 16-bit code (1) "3c35" corresponding to the bit "1" shown in FIG. 166A is associated with it, and if that bit is "0", the 16-bit code (1) "c3ca" corresponding to the bit "0" shown in FIG. 166A is associated with it. Furthermore, a 16-bit code (2) is placed in the third bit of the transmission data, and if that bit is "1", the 16-bit code (2) "91da" corresponding to the bit "1" shown in FIG. 166A is associated with it, and if that bit is "0", the 16-bit code (2) "6e25" corresponding to the bit "0" shown in FIG. 166A is associated with it. Thereafter, the transmission data is similarly encoded according to the sequence of codes shown in FIG. 166B and the contents of the corresponding bits.

The results of encoding using the above method are shown in Figure 166C. In Example 1 of Figure 166C, the transmission data (2-byte error correction code "c53a" (hexadecimal) that has been error encoded) is converted using the above encoding to obtain the CDMA encoded data shown in the bottom row. Note that this CDMA encoded data is expressed in hexadecimal, and ultimately becomes 34 bytes (272 bits) long.

For example, in the case of Example 1, the first bit (B0) is a "1", so it is associated with the leading 32-bit code "36553cca" which corresponds to the bit "1", the second bit (B1) is a "1", so it is associated with the 16-bit code (1) "3c35" which corresponds to the bit "1", the third bit (B2) is a "0", so it is associated with the 16-bit code (2) "6e25" which corresponds to the bit "0", and so on.

Example 2 in Figure 166C shows an example of encoding different transmission data. Here, the 2-byte error correction code "453a" (hexadecimal) that has been subjected to error encoding processing is converted by the above-mentioned encoding to obtain the CDMA encoded data shown in the bottom row. Note that this CDMA encoded data is expressed in hexadecimal, and ultimately becomes 34 bytes (272 bits) long data.

When comparing the bit order of the transmission data in Example 2 (error correction code "453a") with the transmission data in Example 1 (error correction code "c53a"), only the first bit is different. Therefore, the first bit (B0) is assigned the leading 32-bit code "c9aac335" which corresponds to bit "0", and the remaining bits are encoded in the same way as in Example 1.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 166A, the leading 32-bit code and two 16-bit codes (16-bit code (1) and 16-bit code (2)) are defined according to the bit contents of the transmission data, but the values of each code are not limited to these, and the effects of the present application can be achieved by using a combination of codes composed of other values.

In addition, the code sequence shown in FIG. 166B can be modified to achieve the effects of the present application by using various other patterns. In addition, in the encoding process for generating CDMA encoded data as shown in FIG. 166C, the sequence of the transmission data (error correction code) may be rearranged in bit units or other units before the encoding process is performed.

By using such CDMA encoded data, the start position of the code becomes clear, and favorable encoding is achieved in which the correlation value becomes small when the delimiter window is slid.

CDMA decoding is ideal for recovering the original transmitted data by reversing the encoding process described above.

Next, we will explain how this embodiment deals with solving the above-mentioned problems that occur when decoding PSM coding. PSM coding uses Manchester coding, and in this Manchester coding, the bit "0" is represented by a transition from low level to high level, and the bit "1" is represented by a transition from high level to low level, respectively (they may also be set in the opposite correspondence).

Here, the Manchester code is set from the following viewpoints.
A. One bit of transmission data is expressed by two bits. This configuration prevents the code from becoming monotonous and prevents noise from being recognized as a code.
B. Introducing a preamble (synchronization signal). That is, a 32-bit preamble is introduced into one transmission data, and the preamble is made complex. By configuring it in this way, the start position of the signal becomes clear, and the identification rate during decoding can be improved.

In this embodiment, Manchester code is used, in which the bit "1" of the transmitted data is coded to two bits "01" and the bit "0" of the transmitted data is coded to two bits "10".

Figure 167 shows an example of PSM encoding using the Manchester code. Figure 167A shows an example of transmission data (error correction code). This transmission data is the same 2-byte data "c53a" (hexadecimal) as the error correction code shown in Figure 166C.

Figure 167B shows an example of encoding the transmission data "c53a" shown in Figure 167A. As a result of the encoding process, a bit string consisting of 2 bits of "10" repeated 15 times and then 2 bits of "01" added once is placed at the beginning of the data as a preamble. This is followed by a Manchester code corresponding to each bit of the transmission data. The resulting PSM encoded data is 8 bytes (64 bits) long.

This type of encoding makes the coded data more complex, preventing noise from being recognized as a code, and the preamble makes the start of the signal clearer, improving the recognition rate during decoding.

PSM decoding advantageously recovers the original transmitted data by reversing the encoding process described above.

Although the gaming system according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment. Moreover, the present invention can be applied to the embodiments and modified examples described in the third to ninth embodiments. Furthermore, the data display 2501 may be the gaming device or gaming display device shown in the third to ninth embodiments, and further, it can be various gaming devices including a gaming medium lending device and a unit for decorating a gaming machine that is provided on the gaming machine.

In addition, with regard to the gaming display device, a different screen unit may be applied to each gaming machine, or the same type of screen unit may be applied to each so-called island.

The gaming display device may be configured as a transmissive projector device and may be configured to be replaceable with a screen unit having a different screen shape. For example, the projector body may be installed on the top or side of the housing. Also, for example, the light projected from the projector body may be directly incident on the entrance surface on the rear side of the screen without using a reflector.

The number of replaceable types of screen units is not limited to the three types in the above embodiment, but may be two or four or more types as long as the screen shapes are different. Also, the screen shapes are not limited, and the materials of the screens may be different.

The location of the light-emitting surface is not limited to the left and right ends of the front surface, but may be, for example, the top or bottom of the front surface, or a side surface.

The second display surface is not limited to the shape described above, and may be, for example, a parallelogram, diamond, or circle, as long as it has a thickness in front of the first display surface.

The operation unit including the buttons may be provided integrally with the screen unit.

When replacing a screen unit, it may be necessary to change the projection data corresponding to the projected image or to optically correct the projected image because the screen shape and characteristics differ. To deal with such cases, the control unit of the gaming display device may store in advance setting information related to the projection image data and optical correction data corresponding to the shape of each screen, and may call up and apply the corresponding setting information for each screen.

In addition, to realize a configuration that can apply corresponding setting information when replacing a screen unit, (1) a process can be provided in which the control unit determines whether or not the LED board (cable) is connected, (2) a separate control device can be provided in the screen unit, and when the control unit of the housing is started after replacing the screen unit, the control device can send a specific command to the control unit, and the control unit can determine which control device of which screen unit is connected, or (3) a setting screen can be displayed by operating a button on the operation unit, and an administrator can input the type of the replaced screen unit as setting information on this setting screen.

Such setting information can be said to be information that determines the projection method (method) by which a certain image data is to be projected. Furthermore, the setting information may be changeable from a server device acting as a hall computer, or may be configured in a master-slave manner so that when the setting information is changed in one gaming display device, it is similarly changed in other gaming display devices.

[Scalability of gaming machines]
In the gaming machines of the third to tenth embodiments, a game is started when the player inserts a medal (i.e., inserting a medal that the player has in hand into the medal insertion port, or inserting a credited medal by operating the MAX BET button or 1 BET button), and if a medal is to be paid out when the game ends, the hopper device is driven to pay out or credit the medal from the medal payout port, but this is not limited to the above.

For example, the present invention can be applied to all formats in which a player inserts gaming media required for a game, plays the game based on that, and a bonus is awarded (for example, medals are paid out) based on the results of the game. In other words, not only are gaming media inserted (bet) and gaming media paid out by the physical actions of the player, but the main control circuit (main control board) itself may electromagnetically manage the gaming media held by the player, allowing for medal-free play. Furthermore, the device that electromagnetically manages the gaming media held by the player may be a gaming media management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit (main control board) and manages the gaming media.

In this case, the gaming media management device is a device having a ROM and a RWM (or a RAM) and installed in the gaming machine, and is connected to an external gaming media handling device (not shown) via a specified interface for two-way communication, and can perform the operation of lending gaming media (i.e., the operation of providing gaming media necessary for the player to insert gaming media), or the operation of paying out gaming media when a winning combination related to the payout of gaming media is won (the winning combination is established) (i.e., the operation of making the player acquire the gaming media necessary for the payout of gaming media), or the operation of electromagnetically recording the gaming media used for play. In addition, the gaming media management device may not only manage the actual number of gaming media, but may also, for example, be provided with a held gaming media number display device (not shown) on the front of the gaming machine that displays the number of held gaming media based on the results of the management of the number of gaming media, and manage the number of gaming media displayed on this held gaming media number display device. In other words, the gaming media management device should be capable of electromagnetically recording and displaying the total number of gaming media that a player can use for gaming.

In this case, the gaming media management device should have the capability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming media to an external gaming media handling device, and should also have the capability to prevent the number of recorded gaming media from being reduced except by direct operation by the player, and if an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and the external gaming media handling device, it is desirable that the device should have the capability to prevent the player from transmitting a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming media except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a loan operation means, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming medium handling device may be provided with an insertion slot for valuables such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, and various other operation means such as a loan operation means and a return operation means, and an external connection terminal board on the gaming medium handling device side (all not shown).

In this case, the game flow is as follows: the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, subtracts a predetermined amount of value by operating any of the above-mentioned lending operation means, and increases the game media corresponding to the subtracted value from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and repeats the above operation if more game media are required. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of playing, and when the game ends, the player operates any of the return operation means to transmit the number of game media from the game media management device to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the game media number is transmitted, the game media management device clears the number of game media stored in itself. The player then takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange it for a prize, or moves to another game machine to play based on the game media recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media were sent to the game media handling device, but the game machine or game media handling device may send only the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media owned by the player may be divided and processed. Also, instead of just discharging the recording medium, cash or cash equivalents may be dispensed, or the media may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Also, the game media handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the amusement center, and the member recording medium may be stored so that it can be played again at a later date.

In addition, in the gaming machine or gaming media handling device, a locking operation may be performed to lock the gaming media or data communication of valuables to the gaming media handling device or gaming media management device by operating a specified operating means (not shown). In this case, information known only to the player, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be stored using an imaging means provided in the gaming machine or gaming media handling device.

As described above, this gaming media management device may be one that allows only medal-less play, or one that allows play in both forms, where gaming media are inserted (bets) and gaming media are paid out by the physical action of the player, and one that allows medal-less play. In this case, the gaming media management device may adopt a system in which the above-mentioned selector 4461 and hopper device 4040 are directly controlled, or a system in which these are controlled by a main control circuit (main control board) and the total number of gaming media that the player can use for play is recorded by an electromagnetic method based on the control results transmitted, allowing control to be performed to display the information.

In addition, the above describes the case where the gaming media management device is applied to a pachislot gaming machine, but the gaming media management device can also be installed in slot machines and sealed gaming machines that use the gaming balls mentioned above, so that the gaming media of the players can be managed.

In this way, by providing the gaming medium management device described above, it is possible to reduce the number of selectors and hopper devices inside the gaming machine compared to when gaming media are physically provided for play, which not only reduces the cost and manufacturing costs of the gaming machine, but also prevents players from directly touching the gaming media, improving the gaming environment and reducing noise, and by reducing the number of devices, it also reduces the power consumption of the gaming machine. It is also possible to prevent fraudulent activities via the gaming media and the gaming medium insertion and payout slots. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

Eleventh Embodiment
The first to tenth embodiments have been described above. An eleventh embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the gaming system PS100 according to the eleventh embodiment is the same as that of the gaming system PS100 according to the tenth embodiment. In the following, components that are the same as those of the gaming system PS100 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, descriptions of portions that apply to the eleventh embodiment from the first to tenth embodiments will be omitted.

[Gaming System PS100]
Figure 168 is a diagram showing a gaming system according to the eleventh embodiment.

The gaming system PS100 includes a gaming machine 3001, a data display 2501, and a management server 3905. As in the tenth embodiment, the data display 2501 is disposed above the gaming machine 3001. The data display 2501 is also configured to be capable of communicating with the management server 3905.

In the tenth embodiment, the gaming machine 3001 is described as having a lamp 3305 on its upper portion (see FIG. 149). In contrast, as shown in FIG. 168, in this embodiment, the gaming machine 3001 is provided with lamps 3305a and 3305b on its upper portion as the lamps 3305.

As in the tenth embodiment, in this embodiment, the data display 2501 also includes an image sensor unit 2811. The image sensor unit 2811 includes a CMOS image sensor and is capable of capturing an image including the lamps 3305a and 3305b at a predetermined time interval.

Lamps 3305a and 3305b are each configured with a full-color LED and are capable of emitting multiple colors including white, red, yellow, yellow-green, green, cyan, blue, purple, magenta, and pink.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine 3001 is configured to be able to light up the lamps 3305a and 3305b in colors that correspond to the state of the gaming machine 3001. That is, the combination of the light color of the lamps 3305a and 3305b corresponds to the state of the gaming machine 3001 (see FIG. 169). In this specification, the "combination of the light color of the lamps 3305a and 3305b" is also referred to as the lighting pattern of the lamps 3305.

The data display 2501 can recognize the light color of the lamp 3305a and the light color of the lamp 3305b by capturing images of the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b with a CMOS image sensor. This allows the data display 2501 to control the liquid crystal display 2502, the LED 2503, the speaker 2504, etc., and to communicate with the management server 3905 in a manner that corresponds to the lighting pattern of the lamp 3305 in the gaming machine 3001 (the state of the gaming machine 3001).

[Lighting pattern of lamp 3305]
FIG. 169 is a diagram for explaining the lighting pattern of the lamp.

There are many lighting patterns for the lamp 3305, but FIG. 169 shows only some of the lighting patterns. In the figure, "LED Left" indicates lamp 3305a, and "LED Right" indicates lamp 3305b.

In "Pattern 1", the lamp 3305a emits red light, and the lamp 3305b emits blue-green light. "Pattern 1" is a lighting pattern that appears when the power is turned off and it is detected that the front door has been opened. The gaming machine 3001 according to this embodiment can adopt a configuration similar to that of the slot machine 4001 according to the third embodiment, and in this case, the front door is the upper door 5062a or the lower door 5062b (see FIG. 108). Note that while the lamps 3305a and 3305b cannot be lit when the power is turned off, when the power is turned on and the door monitoring unit, which is constantly monitoring (always monitoring the open/closed state of the door), receives information that the above detection has been made, the lamps 3305a and 3305b will light up in this pattern at a predetermined timing after the power is turned on.

In "Pattern 2," lamp 3305a emits red light and lamp 3305b emits green light. "Pattern 2" is a lighting pattern that appears when it is detected that a setting change or confirmation may have been performed with the front door closed.

To change settings on the pachislot machine 4001, first (1) update the power supply to OFF, and after the power supply is OFF, (2) use a specified key to set the setting key switch 4430 to ON. After that, (3) turn the power supply back ON, (4) perform a specified operation to change the settings, and finally (5) use a specified key to return the setting key switch 4430 to OFF. In this way, when changing settings on the pachislot machine 4001, it is necessary to first turn the power supply OFF before operating the setting key switch 4430. Note that operating the setting key switch 4430 with the power supply still ON becomes a setting confirmation operation to confirm the current setting value.

In "Pattern 3", lamp 3305a emits red light, and lamp 3305b emits magenta light. "Pattern 3" is a lighting pattern that appears when it is detected that the hopper is empty. As explained in the second embodiment, the hopper is empty when the medals in the hopper device run out.

In "Pattern 4", lamp 3305a emits red light, and lamp 3305b emits yellow-green light. "Pattern 4" is a lighting pattern that appears when it is detected that a medal overflow has occurred. As explained in the second embodiment, medal overflow refers to the auxiliary medal storage becoming full.

"Pattern 1" to "Pattern 4" are each an example of an "error pattern." An error pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when an abnormality (error) is detected in the gaming machine 3001.

In "Pattern 10", lamp 3305a emits a yellow light, and lamp 3305b emits a red light. "Pattern 10" is a lighting pattern that appears when custom play with character A begins. In "Pattern 11", lamp 3305a emits a yellow light, and lamp 3305b emits a yellow-green light. "Pattern 11" is a lighting pattern that appears when custom play with character B begins. In "Pattern 12", lamp 3305a emits a yellow light, and lamp 3305b emits a green light. "Pattern 12" is a lighting pattern that appears when custom play with character C begins.

"Pattern 10" to "Pattern 12" are each an example of a "custom start pattern." A custom start pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when custom play has begun (when a custom start operation has been performed). Custom play (character customization) will be explained later using Figures 171 and 172.

In "Pattern 20," lamp 3305a emits yellow light, and lamp 3305b emits pink light. "Pattern 20" is a lighting pattern (custom end pattern) that appears when custom play ends (when a custom end operation is performed).

In "Pattern 30", the lamp 3305a emits yellow-green light, and the lamp 3305b emits pink light. "Pattern 30" is a lighting pattern that appears during the AT and when custom play is not being performed. In "Pattern 31", the lamp 3305a emits yellow-green light, and the lamp 3305b emits green light. "Pattern 31" is a lighting pattern that appears during the AT and when custom play is being performed by character A. In "Pattern 32", the lamp 3305a emits yellow-green light, and the lamp 3305b emits blue-green light. "Pattern 32" is a lighting pattern that appears during the AT and when custom play is being performed by character B. In "Pattern 33", the lamp 3305a emits yellow-green light, and the lamp 3305b emits blue light. "Pattern 33" is a lighting pattern that appears during the AT and when custom play is being performed by character C.

"Pattern 30" to "Pattern 33" are each an example of a "pattern for use during the AT." A pattern for use during the AT is a lighting pattern that appears during the AT. A pattern for use during the AT is an example of a pattern for effects during play (lighting patterns corresponding to effects performed during play). Note that during the AT, a specified effect is performed by a liquid crystal display device, speaker, etc., so a pattern for use during the AT can also be said to be a lighting pattern that appears when the specified effect is performed.

In "Pattern 40", the lamp 3305a emits green light, and the lamp 3305b emits pink light. "Pattern 40" is a lighting pattern that appears when the AT starts in a state where custom play is not being performed. In "Pattern 41", the lamp 3305a emits green light, and the lamp 3305b emits red light. "Pattern 41" is a lighting pattern that appears when the AT starts in a state where custom play is being performed by character A. In "Pattern 42", the lamp 3305a emits green light, and the lamp 3305b emits yellow light. "Pattern 42" is a lighting pattern that appears when the AT starts in a state where custom play is being performed by character B. In "Pattern 43", the lamp 3305a emits green light, and the lamp 3305b emits yellow-green light. "Pattern 43" is a lighting pattern that appears when the AT starts in a state where custom play is being performed by character C.

"Pattern 40" to "Pattern 43" are each an example of an "AT start pattern." An AT start pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when the AT starts (entering the AT). An AT start pattern is an example of a pattern for effects during play. Note that when the AT starts, a specified effect is performed by a liquid crystal display device, speaker, etc., so an AT start pattern can also be said to be a lighting pattern that appears when the specified effect is performed.

In "Pattern 50", lamp 3305a emits a reddish purple light, and lamp 3305b emits a red light. "Pattern 50" is a lighting pattern that appears when performance A is performed. In "Pattern 51", lamp 3305a emits a reddish purple light, and lamp 3305b emits a yellow light. "Pattern 51" is a lighting pattern that appears when performance B is performed. In "Pattern 52", lamp 3305a emits a reddish purple light, and lamp 3305b emits a yellow-green light. "Pattern 52" is a lighting pattern that appears when performance C is performed.

"Pattern 50" to "Pattern 52" are each an example of a "pattern for effects during play." Effects A to C are effects that are performed based on the type of internal winning role when the start lever is operated. Effects A to C can be, for example, effects that are performed when a role that determines a transition to the AT, a rare role, a bonus role, etc. is determined as the internal winning role.

As explained above, the in-game presentation patterns include lighting patterns that appear during a specific game state (e.g., AT, ART, BB, etc.), lighting patterns that appear when a specific game state (e.g., AT, ART, BB, etc.) starts, lighting patterns that appear when the start lever is operated, lighting patterns that appear when a specific game state (e.g., AT, ART, BB, etc.) ends, lighting patterns that appear when a combination of symbols is displayed stationary along an active line, etc.

The in-play performance patterns include a lighting pattern in which the state in which lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in a predetermined color occurs during one unit game (this state is not carried over to the next unit game), and a lighting pattern in which the state in which lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in a predetermined color continues over multiple unit games. For example, "Pattern 50" to "Pattern 52" are lighting patterns in which the state in which lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in a predetermined color occurs during one unit game, and in "Pattern 50," after lamp 3305a emits a magenta light and lamp 3305b emits a red light in response to the operation of the start lever, lamp 3305a stops emitting magenta light and lamp 3305b stops emitting red light by the time the unit game ends. Additionally, "Pattern 30" to "Pattern 33" are lighting patterns in which lamps 3305a and 3305b remain lit in a predetermined color for multiple unit games, and in "Pattern 30," lamp 3305a continues to emit a yellow-green light and lamp 3305b continues to emit a pink light until the AT ends.

Although not shown, when a demo screen is displayed or during normal non-customization (when character customization is not performed and no special effects occur), lamps 3305a and 3305b both emit white light. The special effects are effects that trigger the lighting of lamps 3305a and 3305b in the pattern shown in FIG. 169 (causes changes in the lighting pattern). In other words, when custom gameplay is not being performed, lamps 3305a and 3305b will both basically be lit in white.

[Model identification pattern]
FIG. 170 is a diagram for explaining the model identification pattern.

In addition to the lighting patterns described using FIG. 169, the lamp 3305 also has a model identification pattern shown in FIG. 170. The model identification pattern is a lighting pattern that corresponds to the model to which the gaming machine 3001 belongs, and is used to allow the data display 2501 or management server 3905 to recognize the model.

After the power is turned on in the gaming machine 3001 and a predetermined initialization process is performed, the lamps 3305a and 3305b light up in the pattern shown in FIG. 170. Normally, in a parlor (game establishment), it is common to start up the gaming machines and peripheral devices on an island-by-island basis all at once. As a result, the initialization process on the peripheral device (data display 2501) side is completed before the initialization process on the gaming machine (gaming machine 3001) side, and when the lamps 3305a and 3305b light up, the camera (CMOS image sensor) of the data display 2501 is in a started-up state. Therefore, the data display 2501 can recognize the model identification pattern shown in FIG. 170 without missing any.

Specifically, in the model identification pattern, first, as a first step, lamp 3305a emits white light and lamp 3305b emits white light, and this state continues for 10 seconds. Next, as a second step, lamp 3305a emits blue-green light and lamp 3305b emits blue-green light, and this state continues for 1 second. Similarly, as a third step, lamp 3305a emits pink light and lamp 3305b emits pink light, and this state continues for 1 second. As a fourth step, lamp 3305a emits green light and lamp 3305b emits green light, and this state continues for 1 second. As a fifth step, lamp 3305a emits red-purple light and lamp 3305b emits red-purple light, and this state continues for 1 second. As a sixth step, lamp 3305a emits yellow-green light, and In the seventh step, lamp 3305a lights up and lamp 3305b emits a yellow-green light, and this state continues for one second; in the seventh step, lamp 3305a emits purple light and lamp 3305b emits purple light, and this state continues for one second; in the eighth step, lamp 3305a emits yellow light and lamp 3305b emits yellow light, and this state continues for one second; in the ninth step, lamp 3305a emits blue light and lamp 3305b emits blue light, and this state continues for one second; in the tenth step, lamp 3305a emits red light and lamp 3305b emits red light, and this state continues for one second.

Next, in the 11th step, lamp 3305a emits blue light and lamp 3305b emits blue light, and this state continues for one second; in the 12th step, lamp 3305a emits red light and lamp 3305b emits blue light, and this state continues for one second; and in the 13th step, lamp 3305a emits blue light and lamp 3305b emits red light, and this state continues for one second.

The lighting pattern in the 11th step corresponds to the manufacturer (manufacturer information) that manufactured the gaming machine 3001. For example, in the 11th step, the lamp 3305a lights up in blue and the lamp 3305b lights up in blue, which indicates that the gaming machine 3001 is a product of gaming machine manufacturer X. In addition, the lighting patterns in the 12th and 13th steps correspond to the model (model information) to which the gaming machine 3001 belongs. For example, in the 12th step, the lamp 3305a lights up in red and the lamp 3305b lights up in blue, and in the 13th step, the lamp 3305a lights up in blue and the lamp 3305b lights up in red, which indicates that the gaming machine 3001 belongs to model A.

In addition, lamps 3305a and 3305b are configured to light up in a predetermined pattern (learning pattern) in steps 1 to 10 before lighting up in a pattern according to manufacturer information and model information in steps 11 to 13.

[Character Customization]
Fig. 171(A) is a diagram showing an outline of a menu screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device, Fig. 171(B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the menu screen, and Fig. 172 is a diagram showing a character customization screen for customizing a character.

When the decision button of the operation buttons is operated when no game is being played, the sub-control unit 3302 (see FIG. 150) calls up the menu screen shown in FIG. 171 (A) and displays it on the liquid crystal display device. Although not shown, the operation buttons include a cross key and a decision button, and when the player operates the cross key, the selection cursor moves in the direction of the operation, and when the player operates the decision button, the item pointed to by the selection cursor is selected (decided). The liquid crystal display device is included in the sub-device group 3304 (see FIG. 150). Note that the screens shown in FIGS. 171 and 172 (including the character customization screen) may be displayed on a dedicated touch panel liquid crystal provided separately from the liquid crystal display device.

As shown in FIG. 171(B), the menu screen has main menus such as "Custom Game," "Volume Adjustment," "Game Data," "Payments/Layout," and "Special Site," and some main menus have more detailed submenus. For example, the main menu "Custom Game" has submenus such as "Character Selection," "Easy Start," "Enter Password," "View Intermediate Record," "Record and Finish," and "Member Registration."

The "Character Selection" submenu is a menu for customizing the characters used in the performances on the LCD display device.

The submenus "Easy Start" to "Member Registration" are menus used for registering a player's game. In recent years, by registering a player who plays a slot machine, a special bonus that does not affect the number of balls won may be given to a player who does not register. Specifically, when a player is registered, the sub-controller 3302 manages the game history after registration (for example, the game history such as the number of bonuses and the probability of winning a small role, as well as the performance history of the performances that have been performed) and grants a certain special bonus based on this history. This game history can include not only the current game, but also the previous game. Specifically, the game history for each player is managed on the server, and when playing a game, the game history is notified to the gaming machine from the server via a mobile phone or the like, so that the previous game history can be inherited and played.

The submenu "Easy Start" is a menu operated when only storing the history of the current game without carrying over the history of the previous game, i.e., when performing a simplified login. The submenu "Enter Password" is a menu operated when storing the history of the current game while carrying over the history of the previous game, i.e., when performing a formal login. Here, a simplified login is completed by simply operating the submenu "Easy Start", whereas a formal login is performed by registering as a member and then entering a password into the gaming machine 3001. Therefore, when comparing a simplified login with a formal login, it can be said that the registration procedure for the simplified login is simpler than that of the formal login, and conversely, it can be said that the formal login is a more complicated registration procedure than that of the simplified login.

The submenu "View Interim Records" is a menu operated when logging in (simple or formal) and wanting to check the interim records of the game history accumulated up to that point. The submenu "Record and Exit" is a menu operated when logging in (simple or formal) and wanting to record the game history accumulated up to that point on the server. When the submenus "View Interim Records" and "Record and Exit" are operated, the accumulated game history is read from the gaming machine 3001 onto the player's mobile phone or the server. The submenu "Member Registration" is a menu operated to perform the initial registration of the player on the server.

The character customization screen shown in FIG. 172 has a "Character" selection field, a "Costume" selection field, a "Pose" selection field, and an "Accessory" selection field, and each selection field has a number of selectable icons. In the gaming machine 3001, the character is customized based on the icon content selected in each selection field at the time the confirm icon is operated.

The "Character" selection field is used to select a character, and the sub-control unit 3302 determines one character selected in the "Character" selection field from among multiple types of characters. The "Costume" selection field is used to select a costume for the character, the "Pose" selection field is used to select a pose for the character, and the "Accessory" selection field is used to select an accessory for the character. The "Costume" selection field to the "Accessory" selection field are each used to customize the display mode (costume, pose, accessories) of the character. The sub-control unit 3302 determines one display mode selected in the selection field from multiple display modes corresponding to the corresponding selection field.

On this character customization screen, the player can customize the character by performing touch operations on the touch panel provided on the entire surface of the liquid crystal display device, or by performing button operations using the operation buttons. When the character is customized, the sub-control unit 3302 displays on the liquid crystal display device the character selected in the "Character" selection field wearing the costume selected in the "Costume" selection field and the accessory selected in the "Accessory" selection field, in the pose selected in the "Pose" selection field.

In custom play, effects are created using characters that correspond to the content of the customization. Custom play begins when the confirm icon is operated (a customization start operation is performed) and ends when the end icon (not shown) is operated (a customization end operation is performed).

Character customization may be performed by operating a portable terminal device (e.g., the portable terminal device 3950 shown in FIG. 178) owned by the player. For example, a player who has registered as a member in a predetermined manner may have a character customization screen (similar to that shown in FIG. 172) displayed on the portable terminal device while a predetermined application is running on the portable terminal device, and may customize a character by performing touch operations or button operations on the character customization screen on the portable terminal device. In this case, the content of the customization may be configured to be transmittable to the gaming machine 3001 via the management server 3905, or may be configured to be transmittable directly from the portable terminal device to the gaming machine 3001 by non-contact short-range communication (NFC communication) or the like.

[Lamp control process (when power is turned on)]
Figure 173 is a flowchart showing the lamp control processing (when power is turned on) performed in the gaming machine.

The lamp control process (when power is turned on) shown in FIG. 173 is a process performed by the sub-control unit 3302 when power is turned on to the gaming machine 3001.

In the lamp control process (when the power is turned on), the sub-controller 3302 first determines whether the front door (upper door 4062a or lower door 4062b) is opened while the power is turned off (during power cut) (step S4201). The gaming machine 3001 according to this embodiment can adopt a configuration similar to that of the slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, and the door open/close monitoring switch 4462 (see FIG. 109) is connected to the main controller 3301 (see FIG. 150) via the door relay terminal board 4460. The door open/close monitoring switch 4462 constitutes a 24H door monitoring unit capable of monitoring the open/close state of the front door when the power is turned off, and when the front door is opened, this fact is stored. Information indicating the open/close state of the front door is transmitted as a command from the main controller 3301 to the sub-controller 3302, and the sub-controller 3302 can recognize the open/close state of the front door when the power is turned off.

If it is determined that the front door has been opened while the power is OFF, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 (see FIG. 150) to illuminate lamps 3305a and 3305b according to "Pattern 1" shown in FIG. 169 (step S4202). This causes lamp 3305a to emit red light and lamp 3305b to emit blue-green light. After executing the process of step S4202, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

If the front door is opened while the power is OFF, there is a possibility that cheating (e.g., unauthorized setting changes) has occurred. The open/closed state of the front door while the power is OFF can be displayed on the LCD display device in the hall menu by performing a specific operation, allowing arcade staff to confirm whether the front door was opened while the power was OFF. In contrast, the illumination control of lamps 3305a and 3305b according to "Pattern 1" is performed automatically when the power is turned on, without requiring any special operation. This makes it possible to more reliably and quickly discover cheating, thereby enhancing security.

Here, in step S4201, it is determined whether the front door has been opened (at least once) while the power is OFF, but the number of times the front door has been opened (monitoring number) can be designed as appropriate, and it may be determined whether the front door has been opened a predetermined number of times (twice) or more while the power is OFF. The predetermined number (monitoring number) may be configured to be set by the gaming establishment. In gaming establishments where the power is turned on manually, the front door is always opened once while the power is OFF, and by adopting this configuration, it is possible to adapt to the circumstances of such gaming establishments. Note that by executing the processing of step S4202, lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in pattern 1 for a predetermined time, and then other processing (processing of steps S4203 to S4207) may be executed.

If it is determined in step S4201 that the power is OFF and the front door is not open, the sub-controller 3302 determines whether the setting key switch 4430 (see FIG. 109) is set ON with the front door closed (step S4203). The setting key switch 4430 is connected to the main controller 3301, and when the setting key switch 4430 is set ON, information indicating this is sent as a command from the main controller 3301 to the sub-controller 3302. This allows the sub-controller 3302 to recognize whether the setting key switch 4430 is set ON.

When it is determined that the setting key switch 4430 is set to ON while the front door is closed, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to illuminate lamps 3305a and 3305b according to "Pattern 2" shown in FIG. 169 (step S4204). This causes lamp 3305a to emit red light and lamp 3305b to emit green light. After executing the process of step S4204, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

As described above, in order to perform the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation, the setting key switch 4430 needs to be set to ON. However, since the setting key switch 4430 is provided inside the cabinet 4061 (see FIG. 108), the front door needs to be opened in order to set the setting key switch 4430 to ON. If the setting key switch 4430 is set to ON with the front door closed, there is a possibility that an unauthorized setting change operation has been performed. In this embodiment, the possibility that an unauthorized setting change operation has been performed can be detected by executing the process of step S4203. Note that the method of detecting the possibility that an unauthorized setting change operation has been performed is not limited to this example, and various other methods may be used to detect the possibility that an unauthorized setting change operation has been performed.

In addition, in pachinko gaming machines, the setting change switch is located on the back (rear side) of the main body, and since people are generally not allowed to enter the island, it is necessary to rotate the frame using a key in order to operate the back of the main body (the setting change switch housed in a circuit board case or the like arranged on the back). Such frame rotation may be configured to be detectable, and if the setting change switch is set to ON when the frame is not rotating (a state in which frame rotation is not detected), a YES determination may be made in step S4203.

If it is determined in step S4203 that the setting key switch 4430 is not set to ON with the front door closed, the sub-control unit 3302 determines whether any other error (other than the front door being opened with the power OFF, or the setting key switch 4430 being set to ON with the front door closed) has occurred (step S4205).

Examples of errors include "abnormalities strongly suggestive of fraudulent activity" as described in the second embodiment (for example, detection of RAM clear, inability to read and write RAM, RAM software abnormality, magnetic detection, radio wave detection, communication abnormality, internal voltage abnormality, winning abnormality in which a symbol related to a role that has not been internally won is displayed on an active line, detection of a payout at a timing when a payout should not be made, when a set value shows a value other than the six levels, etc.), and "abnormalities occurring during normal play" (for example, hopper empty in which the medals in the hopper device run out, detection of a medal jam at the payout outlet of the hopper device, medal overflow in which the auxiliary medal storage becomes full, detection of a medal jam or medal backflow when medals are inserted, detection of an abnormal number of medals inserted such as four medals, door open error due to the hall staff opening the front door (upper door 4062a or lower door 4062b) for medal refilling, detection of a hopper wiring coming loose when medals are refilled, etc.) are the errors that may occur when the power is turned on. In step S4205, the errors that may occur when the power is turned on are the ones to be judged.

If it is determined that another error has occurred, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to make the lamps 3305a and 3305b emit light in a lighting pattern according to the type of error (step S4206). For example, if it is determined that a hopper empty has occurred, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to make the lamps 3305a and 3305b emit light in "pattern 3" shown in FIG. 169. As a result, the lamp 3305a emits red light, and the lamp 3305b emits reddish purple light. Also, if it is determined that a medal overflow has occurred, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to make the lamps 3305a and 3305b emit light in "pattern 4" shown in FIG. 169. As a result, the lamp 3305a emits red light, and the lamp 3305b emits yellow-green light. After executing the process of step S4206, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

When the lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in a lighting pattern (see FIG. 169) corresponding to such an error pattern and the lighting pattern is detected by the data display 2501, for example, an image corresponding to the type of error is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2502 (see step S4307 in FIG. 176). Also, as described in the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to light up (blink) the LED 2503 in a manner corresponding to the type of error (see step S4512 in FIG. 185). As a result, for example, when a hopper empty error occurs during normal play, which is a common error (such as the above-mentioned "abnormality occurring during normal play"), or a selector error (see step S4212 in FIG. 174), which occurs frequently, the type of error that has occurred can be identified through the liquid crystal display 2502 (liquid crystal display) or LED 2503 (illuminated display), which are easily visible from the outside, and the type of error can be notified to a staff member at the gaming facility (gaming center manager), allowing an appropriate and prompt response to the circumstances of the error to be made, even if the staff member does not come to the gaming machine 3001.

When multiple errors occur at the same time, it is predefined which lighting pattern should be given priority when illuminating lamps 3305a and 3305b. Specifically, the lighting pattern (pattern 1) corresponding to the front door being opened with the power OFF is given the highest priority, followed by the lighting pattern (pattern 2) corresponding to the front door being closed and the setting key switch 4430 being set to ON. In addition, lighting patterns corresponding to "abnormalities highly suspected of cheating" are generally given priority over lighting patterns corresponding to "abnormalities occurring during normal play". Even when an error occurs, if an error with a higher priority occurs at the same time, the lighting pattern corresponding to that error does not appear immediately (it appears after the error with the higher priority is resolved).

If it is determined in step S4205 that no other errors have occurred, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to cause the lamps 3305a and 3305b to emit light in the model identification pattern (step S4207). As a result, the lamps 3305a and 3305b emit light in the pattern shown in FIG. 170. After executing the process of step S4207, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

In the "model identification pattern", the illumination control of lamps 3305a and 3305b is repeated in the first to thirteenth steps shown in FIG. 170. That is, when the illumination control of lamps 3305a and 3305b in the first to thirteenth steps is completed, the illumination control of lamps 3305a and 3305b in the first to thirteenth steps is performed again. In this specification, one cycle of illumination control of lamps 3305a and 3305b in the first to thirteenth steps is also referred to as one "loop". The "loop" continues until a factor that changes the illumination pattern occurs (for example, operation of the start lever or customization start operation).

Alternatively, the light emission control of lamps 3305a and 3305b in steps 1 to 13 may be performed only once (no "loop" may be performed). In this case, after the light emission control of lamps 3305a and 3305b in steps 1 to 13 is performed once, both lamps 3305a and 3305b may be made to emit white light. The state in which lamps 3305a and 3305b emit white light may be continued until the next occurrence of a factor for changing the lighting pattern (the condition for changing the light emission color of lamp 3305 is satisfied). Furthermore, the light emission control of lamps 3305a and 3305b using the "model identification pattern" (processing of step S4207) may be performed before the processing of step S4201, and the processing of step S4201 may be executed after the light emission control (steps 1 to 13) is completed.

Furthermore, if an error occurs, the lighting pattern corresponding to the error takes priority, and the lighting control of lamps 3305a and 3305b using the "model identification pattern" is performed after the error is resolved. After the error is resolved, the "loop" continues as described above until a factor that changes the lighting pattern occurs. Alternatively, after the error is resolved and lighting control of lamps 3305a and 3305b has been performed once in steps 1 to 13, lamps 3305a and 3305b may be left emitting white light while waiting for a factor that changes the lighting pattern to occur.

[Lamp control process]
Figure 174 is a flowchart showing the lamp control processing performed in the gaming machine.

The lamp control process shown in FIG. 174 is a process that is repeatedly performed at a predetermined timing by the sub-control unit 3302 after the processes of steps S4201 to S4207 in FIG. 173 are completed.

In the lamp control process, first, the sub-control unit 3302 judges whether an error has occurred (step S4211). Examples of errors include the above-mentioned "abnormalities that are highly suspected to be fraudulent activities" and "abnormalities that occur during normal play." In step S4211, a judgment is also made as to "whether the setting key switch 4430 has been set to ON with the front door closed" (a judgment similar to step S4203 in FIG. 173).

If it is determined that an error has occurred, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to cause the lamps 3305a and 3305b to emit light in a lighting pattern according to the type of error (step S4212). The sub-control unit 3302 then ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that no error has occurred, the sub-control unit 3302 determines whether or not a game is being played (step S4213). Here, "a game is being played" refers to a state in which the main control unit 3301 is not performing game processing (i.e., one game has ended and the game is not waiting for a BET operation or a start lever operation). The game processing is, for example, processing related to a game performed between a BET operation (start lever operation) and the dispensing of medals. "A game is being played" may refer to a state in which a demo screen is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device. The demo screen is a screen to which a game is transitioned when it is determined that a game is not being played (a customer waiting state). As a condition for transitioning to the demo screen, a conventionally known condition can be appropriately adopted, and for example, the demo screen can be configured to be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed without a BET being performed after a medal has been dispensing. For example, when a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed without a bet being placed after a medal has been paid out, the main control unit 3301 may be configured to send a demo transition command to the sub-control unit 3302. This allows the sub-control unit 3302 to recognize that the conditions for transitioning to the demo screen have been met.

If it is determined that a game is being played, the sub-control unit 3302 determines whether at least one "loop" has been completed in controlling the illumination of lamps 3305a and 3305b using the model identification pattern (step S4214).

When it is determined that at least one "loop" has been completed, the sub-controller 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to make the lamps 3305a and 3305b emit light in a lighting pattern corresponding to the effect performed during play (step S4215). The "lighting pattern corresponding to the effect performed during play" is the above-mentioned "pattern for effect during play" (see FIG. 169). The "effect performed during play" is an effect performed by a liquid crystal display device, speaker, etc. according to the game situation (effect generally performed in a pachislot machine). The sub-controller 3302 determines the "effect performed during play" based on information corresponding to the type of internal winning combination and the game state contained in the start command data (see step S3510 in FIG. 110) and information corresponding to the combination (combination of symbols stopped and displayed along the winning line) contained in the winning operation command data (see step S3514 in FIG. 110).

A data table (a table corresponding to FIG. 169) in which such "effects performed during play" (for example, effects A to C shown in FIG. 169) are associated with "lighting patterns" is stored in a storage device such as a ROM, and in the processing of step S4215, the sub-control unit 3302 refers to the table to cause lamps 3305a and 3305b to light up in a "lighting pattern" corresponding to the "effects performed during play." After executing the processing of step S4215, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

As an "effect performed during a game", an effect triggered by a BET operation may be provided, and the lighting pattern of lamps 3305a and 3305b may be changed based on this effect. For example, when lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in a predetermined pattern in association with a victory effect being performed as an effect in one game (unit game), a confirmation effect is performed in response to a BET operation to start the next game (unit game), and the lighting pattern of lamps 3305a and 3305b may be changed to a lighting pattern corresponding to the confirmation effect.

If it is determined in step S4213 that a game is not being played, or if it is determined in step S4214 that one "loop" has not yet ended, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to make the lamps 3305a and 3305b emit light using the model identification pattern (step S4216). As a result, if the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b using the model identification pattern is in progress, the sub-control unit 3302 continues the light emission control (continues the ongoing step among the first step to the thirteenth step). On the other hand, if the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b using the model identification pattern is not being performed, the sub-control unit 3302 starts the light emission control from the first step. After executing the process of step S4216, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

Because of the above configuration, for example, if the start lever is operated before one "loop" ends as the light emission control of lamps 3305a and 3305b based on the model identification pattern after the power is turned on, the "loop" will continue. In other words, the light emission control based on the lighting pattern corresponding to the performance performed by operating the start lever is not performed (the lighting pattern is discarded). As described above, the in-play performance patterns include a lighting pattern that occurs during one unit game in which lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in a predetermined color, and a lighting pattern that continues over multiple unit games in which lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in a predetermined color. If an effect corresponding to the former lighting pattern occurs before one "loop" is completed as the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b according to the model identification pattern, the lighting pattern may be discarded, while if an effect corresponding to the latter lighting pattern occurs, the lamps 3305a and 3305b may be made to light up according to the latter lighting pattern after one "loop" is completed. Also, even if an effect corresponding to the former lighting pattern occurs before one "loop" is completed as the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b according to the model identification pattern, if the one "loop" is completed before the unit game is completed, the process of step S4215 may be continued. This allows the lamps 3305a and 3305b to light up in a pattern corresponding to the effect without missing any of the effects in the unit game.

[Lamp control process (custom start)]
Figure 175 is a flowchart showing the lamp control processing (at the start of customization) performed in the gaming machine.

The lamp control process (at the start of customization) shown in FIG. 175 is a process that is performed in the sub-control unit 3302 when a customization start operation is performed.

During the lamp control process (at the start of customization), the sub-control unit 3302 first determines whether at least one "loop" has been completed for controlling the illumination of lamps 3305a and 3305b using the model identification pattern (step S4221).

When it is determined that at least one "loop" has been completed, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to illuminate the lamps 3305a and 3305b with a lighting pattern according to the content of the customization (step S4222). The lighting pattern is the above-mentioned "customization start pattern" (see FIG. 169), and is a lighting pattern according to the type of character selected by the customization start operation. As a result, for example, when character A is selected by the customization start operation, lighting control is performed according to "pattern 10" shown in FIG. 169, when character B is selected by the customization start operation, lighting control is performed according to "pattern 11", and when character C is selected by the customization start operation, lighting control is performed according to "pattern 12".

After executing the processing of step S4222, the sub-control unit 3302 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4221 that one "loop" has not yet ended, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to cause the lamps 3305a and 3305b to emit light using the model identification pattern (step S4223). As a result, if the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b using the model identification pattern is in progress, the sub-control unit 3302 continues the light emission control (continues the ongoing step among the first to thirteenth steps).

Next, the sub-control unit 3302 sets the customization standby flag to ON (step S4224). The customization standby flag is a flag indicating that the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b according to the customization start pattern is on hold. When one "loop" of the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b according to the model identification pattern is completed, if the customization standby flag is set to ON, the sub-control unit 3302 causes the lamps 3305a and 3305b to light up according to a lighting pattern that corresponds to the type of character selected by the customization start operation.

After executing the processing of step S4224, the sub-control unit 3302 terminates this subroutine.

[Lighting pattern detection process]
Fig. 176 is a flow chart showing the lighting pattern detection process carried out in the data display unit, and Fig. 177 is a diagram showing a model identification table.

The lighting pattern detection process shown in FIG. 176 is a process that is repeatedly performed at a predetermined timing by the control unit 2801 (see FIG. 151) of the data display device 2501. As described in the ninth embodiment, the image sensor unit 2811 (see FIG. 152) is capable of detecting the light source (the positions of lamps 3305a and 3305b) while eliminating the effects of ambient light, and this enables the control unit 2801 to identify the light emission color of lamp 3305a and the light emission color of lamp 3305b (detect the lighting pattern of lamp 3305).

In the lighting pattern detection process, first, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not the combination of the light color of the lamp 3305a and the light color of the lamp 3305b is a lighting pattern that corresponds to a model identification pattern (see step S4207 in FIG. 173 and step S4216 in FIG. 174) (step S4301). Specifically, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not the lighting pattern in the 11th to 13th steps shown in FIG. 170 has been detected as a combination of the light color of the lamp 3305a and the light color of the lamp 3305b.

If it is determined that the lighting patterns in the 11th to 13th steps of the model identification pattern have been detected, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not a lighting pattern corresponding to the learning pattern has been detected as a combination of the light color of the lamp 3305a and the light color of the lamp 3305b (step S4302). As described above, the learning pattern is a lighting pattern that appears before the lamps 3305a and 3305b light up in a pattern corresponding to the manufacturer information and model information (the lighting pattern in the 1st to 10th steps shown in FIG. 170). In the process of step S4302, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not the lighting pattern in the 1st to 10th steps has been detected for a predetermined time (19 seconds) before the lighting pattern in the 11th step is detected. Note that the combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b in the model identification pattern (each lighting pattern in steps 1 to 13) may be the same as the combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b in any of the lighting patterns shown in FIG. 169. Even if these combinations are the same, by varying the lighting time, control unit 2801 can determine the type of lighting pattern and recognize the model identification pattern by detecting the combination of light colors and the lighting time.

If it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to the learning pattern has not been detected, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to the learning pattern has been detected, the control unit 2801 determines whether data for the model corresponding to the lighting pattern in steps 11 to 13 has been stored (step S4303).

Prior to performing the processing of step S4303, the control unit 2801 detects the lighting pattern in steps 11 to 13. The control unit 2801 identifies the model that corresponds to the lighting pattern in steps 11 to 13 by referring to a model identification table (see FIG. 177) stored in a storage device such as the ROM 2802 (see FIG. 151).

In the model identification table shown in FIG. 177, three lighting patterns (in the figure, "11", "12", and "13") are associated with one model and one manufacturer. "11", "12", and "13" respectively indicate the 11th, 12th, and 13th steps in the model identification pattern. The control unit 2801 identifies the model corresponding to the three detected lighting patterns (steps 11 to 13) based on the model identification table. For example, if the three most recently detected lighting patterns are a pattern in which the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light, a pattern in which the lamp 3305a emits red light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light, and a pattern in which the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits red light, the control unit 2801 identifies model A.

In the process of step S4303, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not data for the identified model (the model corresponding to the lighting patterns in steps 11 to 13) is stored in a storage device such as the RAM 2803 (see FIG. 151). "Data for the model" is performance data for producing a performance according to the identified model. As will be described later, the performance data is configured to be downloaded from the management server 3905, and therefore the process of step S4303 can also be rephrased as a process for determining whether or not performance data according to the identified model has been downloaded.

If it is determined that the performance data for the identified model has already been downloaded, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the performance data corresponding to the identified model has not been downloaded, the control unit 2801 requests the management server 3905 to transmit the performance data corresponding to that model (step S4304). The control unit 2801 then receives the performance data corresponding to that model from the management server 3905 (step S4305).

In the process of step S4304, the control unit 2801 transmits a performance data request signal including information (model information) indicating the identified model to the management server 3905. In the management server 3905, performance data corresponding to a plurality of models including models A to F shown in FIG. 177 is stored in a storage device such as a hard disk drive. Upon receiving the performance data request signal, the management server 3905 transmits performance data corresponding to one model indicated by the model information included in the performance data request signal to the data display 2501. This allows the data display 2501 to download performance data corresponding to the model to which the gaming machine 3001 belongs from the management server 3905. In the process of step S4305, the control unit 2801 stores the downloaded performance data in a storage device such as the RAM 2803.

After executing the processing of step S4305, the control unit 2801 terminates this subroutine.

In this embodiment, the model is identified by the data display 2501, but the model may be identified by the management server 3905. In this case, for example, a model identification table may be stored in the management server 3905, and information indicating the model identification pattern detected by the data display 2501 may be transmitted to the management server 3905.

Although it has been described that the performance data corresponding to the model is stored in the management server 3905, the performance data may not be stored in the management server 3905. In this case, the management server 3905 may be configured to download performance data from an external device each time a performance data request signal is received, and transmit the downloaded performance data to the data display 2501. Furthermore, in the data display 2501, each time performance data is downloaded from the management server 3905, the old performance data may be deleted and replaced with new performance data as the performance data stored in the storage device, or performance data corresponding to a predetermined number of models (for example, the performance data for the three most recently downloaded models) may be stored.

When it is determined in step S4301 that the lighting patterns in steps 11 to 13 have not been detected, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not a lighting pattern corresponding to an error pattern (see steps S4202, S4204, and S4206 in FIG. 173, and step S4212 in FIG. 174) has been detected as a combination of the light color of the lamp 3305a and the light color of the lamp 3305b (step S4306). As described above, an error pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when an abnormality (error) is detected in the gaming machine 3001 (see FIG. 169). Note that a data table (a table corresponding to FIG. 169) in which lighting patterns are associated with pattern types (error patterns, custom start patterns, custom end patterns, patterns for effects during play, etc.) is stored in a storage device such as the ROM 2802, and the control unit 2801 can recognize the pattern type by referring to the data table.

When it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to an error pattern has been detected, the control unit 2801 notifies the occurrence of an error (step S4307). Specifically, the control unit 2801 controls the video display unit 2805 and the audio output unit 2807 (see FIG. 151) to cause an image notifying the occurrence of an error to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 2502, or to cause a sound notifying the occurrence of an error to be output from the speaker 2504. At that time, the control unit 2801 changes the notification mode depending on the type of error corresponding to the detected error pattern.

Then, the control unit 2801 sends an error signal indicating that an error has occurred to the management server 3905 (hall computer) (step S4308). The error signal includes information indicating the type of error. After executing the process of step S4308, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4306 that a lighting pattern corresponding to an error pattern has not been detected, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not a lighting pattern corresponding to a custom start pattern (see step S4222 in FIG. 175) has been detected as a combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b (step S4309). As described above, a custom start pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when a custom game is started (a custom start operation is performed) (see FIG. 169).

If it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to a custom start pattern has been detected, the control unit 2801 executes a custom start effect (step S4310). The custom start effect is an effect indicating that custom play is about to begin, and is an effect according to the type of character corresponding to the detected custom start pattern. This causes an image corresponding to the character selected by the custom start operation to be displayed on the LCD display 2502, and/or a sound corresponding to that character to be output from the speaker 2504. After executing the process of step S4310, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4309 that a lighting pattern corresponding to the custom start pattern has not been detected, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not a lighting pattern corresponding to the custom end pattern has been detected as a combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b (step S4311). As described above, the custom end pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when a custom game is ended (a custom end operation is performed) (see FIG. 169). In other words, when a custom end operation is performed, lamps 3305a and 3305b emit light according to lighting pattern 20 (custom end pattern) shown in FIG. 169.

If it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to a custom end pattern has been detected, the control unit 2801 executes a custom end effect (step S4312). The custom end effect is an effect that indicates the end of custom play, and an image corresponding to the character selected by customization is displayed on the LCD display 2502, and a sound corresponding to that character is output from the speaker 2504. After executing the process of step S4312, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4311 that a lighting pattern corresponding to a custom end pattern has not been detected, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not a lighting pattern corresponding to a pattern for during play (see step S4215 in FIG. 174) has been detected as a combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b (step S4313). As described above, a pattern for during play is a lighting pattern corresponding to a performance performed during play (a performance generally performed in a slot machine) (see FIG. 169).

When it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to a pattern for in-play effects has been detected, the control unit 2801 executes an in-play effect (step S4314). The in-play effect is an effect according to the type of the detected in-play effect pattern (an effect corresponding to an effect performed during play on the gaming machine 3001), and an image according to the game status is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2502, and a sound according to the game status is output from the speaker 2504. This allows the effects performed on the gaming machine 3001 to be linked with the effects performed on the data display 2501. Also, during the period when a custom game is being played (the period from when a custom start operation is performed to when a custom end operation is performed), an effect according to the content of the customization and the game status may be performed.

If it is determined in step S4313 that a lighting pattern corresponding to a pattern for in-game effects has not been detected, or after executing the processing of step S4314, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

The gaming system PS100, gaming machine 3001, and data display 2501 according to the 11th embodiment have been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Twelfth embodiment>
The first to eleventh embodiments have been described above. The twelfth embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the gaming system PS100 according to the twelfth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming system PS100 according to the eleventh embodiment. In the following, components that are the same as those of the gaming system PS100 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, descriptions of portions that apply to the twelfth embodiment from the first to eleventh embodiments will be omitted.

[Gaming system PS100]
Figure 178 is a diagram showing a gaming system according to the twelfth embodiment.

The gaming system PS100 includes a gaming machine 3001, a data display 2501, a management server 3910, and a portable terminal 3950. The portable terminal 3950 and the management server 3910 can exchange data with each other by communicating via the Internet. Although not shown, the gaming system PS100 also includes the management server 3905 described in the eleventh embodiment.

Prior to starting a game, the player, with a specified application running on his/her mobile terminal 3950, receives a password from the management server 3910. The password is an encrypted version of the game history played up to that point. The management server 3910 stores game history information indicating the game history played up to that point, and the management server 3910 converts the game history into a symbol string consisting of multiple symbols (including letters and numbers). The password is a symbol string corresponding to this game history. The player can display the password on the mobile terminal 3950 by performing a specified operation.

Thereafter, to start playing, the player operates the operation buttons on the gaming machine 3001 to display a menu screen (see FIG. 171(A)) on the liquid crystal display device, and selects the main menu "Custom Game" on the menu screen. This causes a sub-menu screen (see FIG. 171(B)) for selecting one of "Character Selection," "Easy Start," "Enter Password," "View Intermediate Record," "Record and Finish," and "Member Registration" to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

Then, the player selects the submenu "Enter password" on the submenu screen. This causes a screen for entering a password (password entry screen) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device. The player can officially log in by performing a touch operation on the touch panel or a button operation using the operation buttons on the password entry screen to enter the password issued by the management server 3910. This allows the history of the current game to be accumulated while carrying over the history of previous games.

The game history (game history) includes the total number of games played, the number of times a game state advantageous to the player (specific game state) occurred (for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, etc.), the number of times each role won and the probability of winning, the number of game media inserted and the number of game media paid out, as well as the history of the effects that were executed (effect history). The effect history includes the number of times various effects occurred, as well as history related to custom games (character customization). Examples of custom game history include the number of times various characters were selected, and game history for each type of custom game (type of selected character). Examples of game history for each type of selected character include the number of games played when various characters were customized (for example, the number of games played when character A was selected, and the number of games played when character B was selected), and the number of times a specific game state (for example, bonuses, ARTs, etc.) occurred when various characters were customized (for example, the number of times a specific game state occurred when character A was selected, and the number of times a specific game state occurred when character B was selected).

The management server 3910 manages such game play history in association with a member ID assigned to each player who has registered as a member. For example, the management server 3910 stores the number of games played by one player with character A selected and the number of games played by one player with character B selected, and also stores the number of games played by other players with character A selected and the number of games played by other players with character B selected. This allows the management server 3910 to compare the game play history of each player.

The password also contains the encrypted results of the comparison of the gaming histories of each player (ranking determined by a specified method). The gaming machine 3001 has a table or other configuration for identifying information encrypted by the password, and is capable of decrypting the information. The technology related to decrypting passwords is well known in the gaming machine field (see, for example, JP 2013-081521 A), so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

When the player wishes to end the game, he or she selects the submenu "Record and End" on the submenu screen. This causes a two-dimensional code to be displayed on the liquid crystal display. This two-dimensional code is a coded version of the address information of the management server 3910 and the game history information stored in the gaming machine 3001. The player can capture the two-dimensional code using the camera of the portable terminal device 3950. The portable terminal device 3950 recognizes the two-dimensional code from the image data obtained when the camera captures the two-dimensional code, and generates address information for the management server 3910 from the recognized two-dimensional code. As a result, it becomes possible to access the management server 3910. In addition, the game history information is transmitted from the portable terminal device 3950 to the management server 3910. This causes the game history to be managed by the management server 3910.

[Lighting pattern of lamp 3305]
FIG. 179 is a diagram for explaining the lighting pattern of the lamp.

Figure 179 shows the "password pattern" among the lighting patterns of lamp 3305. The password pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when a password is entered on the password entry screen. As in Figure 169, "LED left" in the figure indicates lamp 3305a, and "LED right" indicates lamp 3305b.

In "Pattern 50", lamp 3305a lights up blue and lamp 3305b lights up green. "Pattern 50" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the total number of games played in history is number one in the nation. In "Pattern 51", lamp 3305a lights up blue and lamp 3305b lights up blue-green. "Pattern 51" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the total number of games played in history is number two in the nation. In "Pattern 52", lamp 3305a lights up blue and lamp 3305b lights up purple. "Pattern 52" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the total number of games played in history is number three in the nation.

In "Pattern 53", lamp 3305a lights up blue, and lamp 3305b lights up magenta. "Pattern 53" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the total number of games played on the previous day is number one in the nation. In "Pattern 54", lamp 3305a lights up blue, and lamp 3305b lights up pink. "Pattern 54" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the total number of games played on a weekly basis is number one in the nation. In "Pattern 55", lamp 3305a lights up purple, and lamp 3305b lights up red. "Pattern 55" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the total number of games played on a monthly basis is number one in the nation.

In "Pattern 60", lamp 3305a emits yellow light, and lamp 3305b emits yellow-green light. "Pattern 60" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with character A selected is the highest in the nation of all time. In "Pattern 61", lamp 3305a emits yellow light, and lamp 3305b emits green light. "Pattern 61" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with character A selected is the second highest in the nation of all time. In "Pattern 62", lamp 3305a emits yellow light, and lamp 3305b emits blue-green light. "Pattern 62" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with character A selected is the third highest in the nation of all time.

In "Pattern 63", lamp 3305a lights up in yellow, and lamp 3305b lights up in blue. "Pattern 63" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with character A selected was number one in the nation on the previous day. In "Pattern 64", lamp 3305a lights up in yellow, and lamp 3305b lights up in purple. "Pattern 64" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with character A selected was number one in the nation for the week. In "Pattern 65", lamp 3305a lights up in yellow, and lamp 3305b lights up in reddish purple. "Pattern 65" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with character A selected was number one in the nation for the month.

Similarly, "Pattern 70" to "Pattern 75" are lighting patterns that appear when the password contains information indicating the ranking of the number of games played with character B selected. Furthermore, "Pattern 80" to "Pattern 85" are lighting patterns that appear when the password contains information indicating the ranking of the number of games played with character C selected.

The management server 3910 is configured to update the above rankings (comparison results of the game history of each player) at a predetermined timing. Any timing can be used as the predetermined timing, and the rankings may be updated once a day (e.g., at a predetermined time), once a week (e.g., on a predetermined day of the week (Monday, etc.)), or in real time (e.g., every predetermined seconds or minutes).

[Lamp control process (when password is entered)]
Figure 180 is a flowchart showing the lamp control processing (when a password is entered) performed in a gaming machine.

The lamp control process (when a password is entered) shown in FIG. 180 is a process that is performed by the sub-control unit 3302 when the password input operation is completed.

In the lamp control process (when a password is entered), the sub-control unit 3302 first determines whether at least one "loop" has been completed for controlling the illumination of lamps 3305a and 3305b using the model identification pattern (see FIG. 170) (step S4401).

When it is determined that at least one "loop" has been completed, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to illuminate the lamps 3305a and 3305b in a lighting pattern corresponding to the game history (step S4402). The lighting pattern is the above-mentioned "password pattern" (see FIG. 179), and is a lighting pattern corresponding to the game history information included in the password. As a result, for example, if the password contains information indicating that the total number of games played in history is number one in the country, lighting control is performed using "pattern 50" shown in FIG. 179, and if the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with character A selected is number one in the country, lighting control is performed using "pattern 60".

After executing the processing of step S4402, the sub-control unit 3302 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4401 that one "loop" has not yet ended, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to cause the lamps 3305a and 3305b to emit light using the model identification pattern (step S4403). As a result, if the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b using the model identification pattern is in progress, the sub-control unit 3302 continues the light emission control (continues the ongoing step among the first to thirteenth steps).

Next, the sub-control unit 3302 sets the password illumination standby flag to ON (step S4404). The password illumination standby flag is a flag indicating that the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b according to the password pattern is on hold. When one "loop" of the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b according to the model identification pattern is completed, if the password illumination standby flag is set to ON, the sub-control unit 3302 causes the lamps 3305a and 3305b to illuminate according to a lighting pattern corresponding to the game history information included in the password.

After executing the processing of step S4404, the sub-control unit 3302 terminates this subroutine.

[Lighting pattern detection process]
FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing the lighting pattern detection process carried out in the data display.

The lighting pattern detection process shown in FIG. 181 is a process that is repeatedly performed at a predetermined timing by the control unit 2801 (see FIG. 151) of the data display device 2501. As in the eleventh embodiment, the image sensor unit 2811 (see FIG. 152) is capable of detecting the light source (the positions of lamps 3305a and 3305b) while eliminating the effects of ambient light, and this enables the control unit 2801 to identify the light emission color of lamp 3305a and the light emission color of lamp 3305b (detect the lighting pattern of lamp 3305).

In the lighting pattern detection process, the control unit 2801 executes steps S4451 to S4464, but because these steps are similar to steps S4301 to S4314 in FIG. 176, a description of these steps will be omitted here.

If it is determined in step S4463 that a lighting pattern corresponding to a pattern for in-game effects has not been detected, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not a lighting pattern corresponding to a password pattern (see step S4402 in FIG. 180) has been detected as a combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b (step S4465). As described above, a password pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when a password is entered on the password entry screen (see FIG. 179).

When it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to a password pattern has been detected, the control unit 2801 displays information about the game history corresponding to the detected password pattern (step S4466). Specifically, the control unit 2801 controls the video display unit 2805 (see FIG. 151) to display an image about the game history corresponding to the detected password pattern on the liquid crystal display 2502. As a result, for example, if the detected password pattern is pattern 50 shown in FIG. 179, a text image corresponding to the content "Number 1 in the nation for total number of games played by all time" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2502, and if the detected password pattern is pattern 60 shown in FIG. 179, a text image corresponding to the content "Number 1 in the nation for number of games played by character A" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2502.

If it is determined in step S4465 that a lighting pattern corresponding to a password pattern has not been detected, or after executing the processing of step S4466, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

The gaming system PS100, gaming machine 3001, and data display 2501 according to the 12th embodiment have been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

Thirteenth Embodiment
The first to twelfth embodiments have been described above. The thirteenth embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the gaming system PS100 according to the thirteenth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming system PS100 according to the twelfth embodiment. In the following, components that are the same as those of the gaming system PS100 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, where the description of the first to twelfth embodiments is applicable to the thirteenth embodiment, the description will be omitted.

[Lighting pattern of lamp 3305]
FIG. 182 is a diagram for explaining the lighting pattern of the lamp.

As explained using FIG. 169, there are many lighting patterns for lamp 3305, but FIG. 182 shows only some of the lighting patterns. In the figure, "LED Left" indicates lamp 3305a, and "LED Right" indicates lamp 3305b. Of the lighting patterns shown in FIG. 182, "Pattern 1" to "Pattern 52" are the same as "Pattern 1" to "Pattern 52" shown in FIG. 169.

In "Pattern 90", lamp 3305a emits a purple light, and lamp 3305b emits a yellow light. "Pattern 90" is a lighting pattern that appears when setting suggestion presentation I occurs. In "Pattern 91", lamp 3305a emits a purple light, and lamp 3305b emits a green light. "Pattern 91" is a lighting pattern that appears when setting suggestion presentation II occurs. In "Pattern 92", lamp 3305a emits a purple light, and lamp 3305b emits a blue light. "Pattern 92" is a lighting pattern that appears when setting suggestion presentation III occurs.

In "Pattern 93", lamp 3305a emits a purple light, and lamp 3305b emits a reddish purple light. "Pattern 93" is a lighting pattern that appears when setting suggestion effect IV occurs. In "Pattern 94", lamp 3305a emits a purple light, and lamp 3305b emits a pink light. "Pattern 94" is a lighting pattern that appears when setting suggestion effect V occurs. In "Pattern 99", lamp 3305a emits a pink light, and lamp 3305b emits a purple light. "Pattern 99" is a lighting pattern that appears when a reservation lock is established.

"Pattern 90" to "Pattern 94" are each an example of a "setting suggestion presentation pattern." A setting suggestion presentation pattern is an example of a pattern for presentation during play (a lighting pattern corresponding to a presentation performed during play), and is a lighting pattern that appears when a setting suggestion presentation occurs. Setting suggestion presentations are explained using Figure 183.

"Pattern 99" is an example of a "reservation lock pattern." A reservation lock pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when reservation lock is established. Reservation lock will be explained in the 14th embodiment.

[Setting suggestion]
Figure 183 shows a setting suggestion performance lottery table.

In the setting suggestion effect lottery table shown in FIG. 183, lottery values are associated with each setting value for each of setting suggestion effects I, II, III, IV, and V. As a result, FIG. 183 specifies the probability of selection of setting suggestion effects I to V for each setting value.

Specifically, when the setting value is 1, setting suggestion effect IV is selected with a probability of 256/256. When the setting value is 2, setting suggestion effect III is selected with a probability of 128/256, and setting suggestion effect V is selected with a probability of 128/256. When the setting value is 3, setting suggestion effect III is selected with a probability of 96/256, and setting suggestion effect IV is selected with a probability of 160/256. When the setting value is 4, setting suggestion effect II is selected with a probability of 32/256, setting suggestion effect III is selected with a probability of 96/256, and setting suggestion effect V is selected with a probability of 128/256. When the setting value is 5, setting suggestion effect II is selected with a probability of 32/256, setting suggestion effect III is selected with a probability of 96/256, and setting suggestion effect IV is selected with a probability of 128/256. When the setting value is 6, setting suggestion effect I is selected with a probability of 8/256, setting suggestion effect II is selected with a probability of 24/256, setting suggestion effect III is selected with a probability of 96/256, and setting suggestion effect V is selected with a probability of 128/256.

As a result, the setting suggestion effect I can only be selected when the setting value is 6. The "6 confirmed" in "Pattern 90" shown in FIG. 182 indicates this. The setting suggestion effect II can only be selected when the setting value is any of 4 to 6. The "4 to 6 confirmed" in "Pattern 91" shown in FIG. 182 indicates this. The setting suggestion effect III cannot be selected when the setting value is 1. The "1 not confirmed" in "Pattern 92" shown in FIG. 182 indicates this. The setting suggestion effect IV can only be selected when the setting value is odd (1, 3, or 5). The "odd confirmed" in "Pattern 93" shown in FIG. 182 indicates this. The setting suggestion effect V can only be selected when the setting value is even (2, 4, or 6). The "even confirmed" in "Pattern 94" shown in FIG. 182 indicates this.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be suggested using the setting suggestion effects I to V. Specifically, in each setting suggestion effect, an image (setting suggestion image) for suggesting the setting value is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. For example, in setting suggestion effect I, an image including a number corresponding to "666" (for example, a text image such as "You have defeated 666 enemies") is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, thereby suggesting that the setting value is 6. In setting suggestion effect II, an image including a number corresponding to "456" (for example, a text image such as "You have defeated 456 enemies") is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, thereby suggesting that the setting value is one of 4 to 6. Similarly, in setting suggestion effect III, an image suggesting that the setting value is not 1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, in setting suggestion effect IV, an image suggesting that the setting value is an odd number is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, and in setting suggestion effect V, an image suggesting that the setting value is an even number is displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

When a predetermined condition for performing a setting suggestion effect is met, the sub-control unit 3302 of the gaming machine 3001 refers to the setting suggestion effect lottery table, and selects one setting suggestion effect from among setting suggestion effects I, II, III, IV, and V based on the extracted random number value and the currently set setting value. As a result, a setting suggestion image corresponding to the selected setting suggestion effect (any of setting suggestion effects I to V) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. The player can obtain information about the setting value by visually checking the setting suggestion image. Note that the setting suggestion effect (display of the setting suggestion image) is performed for only a very short time (for example, within one second), and when a setting suggestion effect is started in one unit game, the setting suggestion effect is completed by the end of that unit game (the state in which the setting suggestion image is displayed ends immediately and is not carried over to the next unit game). Alternatively, the setting suggestion effect ends when the start lever is operated to start the next unit game.

The predetermined conditions for performing the setting suggestion effect are not particularly limited, but may include, for example, a condition that a predetermined role is determined as the internal winning role, a condition that a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed along an active line, and a condition that the current game state is a predetermined game state. These conditions may be used alone or in combination. When multiple conditions are used in combination as the predetermined conditions for performing the setting suggestion effect, the probability of selecting setting suggestion effects I to V may be made different depending on each condition (a setting suggestion effect lottery table may be provided according to each condition). For example, when a setting suggestion effect is performed on the condition that a predetermined role is determined as the internal winning role, and multiple types of roles are provided as the predetermined roles, a setting suggestion effect lottery table may be provided in which the probability of selecting setting suggestion effects I to V varies depending on the type of role determined as the internal winning role.

Note that each setting suggestion effect may be an effect that occurs only when a specified setting value is present (determining that the specified setting value is present), or it may be an effect that suggests that there is a high probability that the specified setting value is present. For example, unlike FIG. 183, setting suggestion effect I is associated with a lottery value of "2" when the setting value is 5 (other setting values are associated with the same lottery value as in FIG. 183). In this example, it can be said that setting suggestion effect I is an effect that suggests with an 80% probability that the setting value is 6 (there is an 80% probability that the setting value is 6 when this effect appears).

The sub-control unit 3302 selects one setting suggestion effect by referring to the setting suggestion effect lottery table based on information corresponding to the type of internal winning role and game status included in the start command data (see step S3510 in FIG. 110) and information corresponding to the combination (combination of symbols stopped and displayed along the winning line) included in the winning activation command data (see step S3514 in FIG. 110). At that time, even if a specified condition is met, there may be cases where the setting suggestion effect is not performed. The setting suggestion effect lottery table is stored in a storage device such as a ROM.

When a setting suggestion effect is selected (executed) in the manner described above, the sub-controller 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 (see FIG. 150) to cause the lamps 3305a and 3305b to emit light in a lighting pattern corresponding to the setting suggestion effect. The lighting pattern is the "setting suggestion effect pattern" (see FIG. 182) described above. As a result, for example, when setting suggestion effect I is selected, the lighting is controlled by "pattern 90" shown in FIG. 182, when setting suggestion effect II is selected, the lighting is controlled by "pattern 91", when setting suggestion effect III is selected, the lighting is controlled by "pattern 92", when setting suggestion effect IV is selected, the lighting is controlled by "pattern 93", and when setting suggestion effect V is selected, the lighting is controlled by "pattern 94".

The lamps 3305a and 3305b are illuminated by the setting suggestion performance pattern for a predetermined period of time. The timing of the start of the illumination may be when the setting suggestion performance starts, during the setting suggestion performance, after the setting suggestion performance ends (for example, when the start lever is operated to start the next unit game), or before the setting suggestion performance starts. The timing of the end of the illumination may be appropriately selected when a factor that changes the lighting pattern of the lamps 3305a and 3305b occurs. For example, the lamps 3305a and 3305b may start illuminating by the setting suggestion performance pattern when the setting suggestion performance starts, and the illumination may end when the start lever is operated to start the next unit game. Also, the lamps 3305a and 3305b may start illuminating by the setting suggestion performance pattern when the start lever is operated to start the next unit game, and the illumination may end when a factor that changes the lighting pattern (any of the "game machine states" shown in FIG. 182) occurs.

[Processing when detecting a pattern for performance during gameplay]
Figure 184 is a flowchart showing the processing performed in the data display machine when detecting a pattern for presentation during play.

The process for detecting a pattern for in-game effects shown in FIG. 184 is performed when the control unit 2801 (see FIG. 151) of the data display device 2501 determines in step S4463 of FIG. 181 that a lighting pattern corresponding to a pattern for in-game effects has been detected.

In the process of detecting a pattern for in-play effects, the control unit 2801 first determines whether the detected pattern for in-play effects is a pattern for setting suggestion effects (step S4501). As described above, a pattern for setting suggestion effects is a lighting pattern that appears when a setting suggestion effect occurs (see FIG. 182).

If it is determined that the detected in-game presentation pattern is a setting suggestion presentation pattern, the control unit 2801 executes a setting suggestion presentation (step S4502). In this process, the control unit 2801 controls the video display unit 2805, the audio output unit 2807, and the illumination unit 2806 (see FIG. 151) to display an image suggesting a setting value on the liquid crystal display 2502, output a sound suggesting a setting value from the speaker 2504, and output a light suggesting a setting value from the LED 2503 (see FIG. 149). In this case, the control unit 2801 changes the output mode of the image, sound, or light depending on the type of setting suggestion presentation corresponding to the detected setting suggestion presentation pattern. As a result, for example, when pattern 90 shown in FIG. 182 is detected, when pattern 91 is detected, when pattern 92 is detected, when pattern 93 is detected, and when pattern 94 is detected, different images (for example, images similar to the images displayed on the gaming machine 3001 in setting suggestion presentations I to V) are displayed on the liquid crystal display 2502, or the LED 2503 is lit in different ways.

Here, LED2503 is configured with multiple full-color LEDs and can emit multiple colors including red, blue, and green. This allows, for example, LED2503 to be illuminated in rainbow colors (including the seven colors of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple) when pattern 90 is detected, LED2503 to be illuminated in orange when pattern 91 is detected, LED2503 to be illuminated in yellow when pattern 92 is detected, LED2503 to be illuminated in indigo when pattern 93 is detected, and LED2503 to be illuminated in purple when pattern 94 is detected.

After executing the process of step S4502, the control unit 2801 sets the setting suggestion flag to ON (step S4503). The setting suggestion flag is a flag that indicates that the conditions for lighting the LED 2503 in a manner that can suggest a setting value have been met (see step S4513 in FIG. 185). After executing the process of step S4503, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

The processing of steps S4502 and S4503 may be configured to be executed only when some of the lighting patterns (e.g., patterns 90 and 91) among the multiple setting suggestion patterns (patterns 90 to 94) are detected. In this case, for example, when setting suggestion I is selected and when setting suggestion II is selected, a presentation to suggest the setting value is performed on both the gaming machine 3001 and the data display 2501, whereas when any of setting suggestion presentations III to V is selected, a presentation to suggest the setting value is performed only on the gaming machine 3001 (no presentation to suggest the setting value is performed on the data display 2501).

In addition, the setting suggestion effect (see step S4502) generated on the data display 2501 side may be configured to be executed for a longer period of time than the setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 183) generated on the gaming machine 3001 side. For example, in the setting suggestion effect performed on the gaming machine 3001 side, the setting suggestion image may be displayed for only one second (the image disappears by the time the unit game ends), while in the setting suggestion effect performed on the data display 2501 side, the setting suggestion image may be continued to be displayed until the next unit game starts. This can improve the advantage of the gaming machine 3001 with the data display 2501 installed when comparing the gaming machine 3001 with the gaming machine 3001 without the data display 2501 installed.

In addition, when the setting suggestion flag is set to on (see step S4503), as described below, it is possible to continue lighting the LED 2503 (setting suggestion LED display) according to the type of setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effects I to V) performed on the gaming machine 3001 side until the power of the data display 2501 is turned off (see FIG. 185). Such setting suggestion LED display may be executed only when a specified operation is performed on the data display 2501. In addition, when the setting suggestion flag is set to on (when a pattern for setting suggestion effect is detected), a lottery may be performed on the data display 2501 side, and the setting suggestion LED display may be continued only if the lottery is won. Whether or not such setting suggestion LED display is performed (continued) may be configured to be arbitrarily set by the gaming facility side or the player side.

If it is determined in step S4501 that the detected in-play presentation pattern is not a setting suggestion presentation pattern, the control unit 2801 executes an in-play presentation (step S4504). The in-play presentation is a presentation according to the type of the detected in-play presentation pattern (a presentation corresponding to a presentation performed during play in the gaming machine 3001), and an image according to the game status is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2502, and a sound according to the game status is output from the speaker 2504. This in-play presentation is the same as the in-play presentation described in step S4314 of FIG. 176. After executing the process of step S4504, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

[Illumination control process]
Figure 185 is a flowchart showing the illumination section control processing performed in the data display device.

The illumination unit control process shown in FIG. 185 is a process that is repeatedly performed at a predetermined timing by the control unit 2801.

In the illumination control process, the control unit 2801 first determines whether the error flag is set to ON (step S4511). Although not shown, the error flag is set to ON when an error occurs in the gaming machine 3001, and is set to OFF when the error is resolved in the gaming machine 3001. The control unit 2801 can recognize that an error has occurred in the gaming machine 3001 by detecting a lighting pattern corresponding to an error pattern (see step S4456 in FIG. 181). Also, although not shown, when an error is resolved in the gaming machine 3001, the sub-control unit 3302 (see FIG. 150) of the gaming machine 3001 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to light up the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b according to the error resolution pattern (for example, to light up the lamp 3305a in red and the lamp 3305b in pink). The control unit 2801 can recognize that an error has been resolved in the gaming machine 3001 by detecting a lighting pattern that corresponds to an error resolution pattern as a combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b.

If it is determined that the error flag is set to ON, the control unit 2801 controls the illumination unit 2806 to light (blink) the LED 2503 in a manner corresponding to the type of error (step S4512). The error flag is managed in association with the type of error corresponding to the error pattern detected in step S4456 of FIG. 181, and the control unit 2801 can recognize the type of error. As a result, for example, when a hopper empty occurs, the LED 2503 lights (blinks) blue, and when another error occurs (for example, a selector error in which normal detection is no longer performed in the selector that guides medals that are determined to be appropriate to the hopper), the LED 2503 lights (blinks) red. The lighting (blinking) of the LED 2503 according to the type of error continues until the error is resolved. Also, as described above, when an error occurs, an image according to the type of error (an image notifying the user that an error has occurred) is displayed on the LCD display 2502 (see step S4307 in FIG. 176). In this embodiment, this error notification on the LCD display 2502 continues until the error is resolved.

As described in the tenth embodiment, the external terminal board 3308 is connected to the main control unit 3301 of the gaming machine 3001 (see FIG. 150). When an error occurs in the gaming machine 3001, information indicating the occurrence of the error is transmitted from the gaming machine 3001 to the data display 2501 via the external terminal board 3308. However, information indicating the type of the error that has occurred is not transmitted to the data display 2501 via the external terminal board 3308. In this regard, the data display 2501 can recognize the type of error through the light emission state of the lamps 3305a and 3305b, and can turn on (blink) the LED 2503 (display an image on the liquid crystal display 2502) in a state corresponding to the type of error. Therefore, it is possible to notify the type of error to the staff of the gaming establishment through the light emission (blink) state of the LED 2503 (display state of the image on the liquid crystal display 2502), and to take appropriate and prompt action according to the occurrence of the error.

After executing the processing of step S4512, the control unit 2801 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4511 that the error flag is not set to on, the control unit 2801 determines whether the setting suggestion flag (see step S4503 in FIG. 184) is set to on (step S4513).

If it is determined that the setting suggestion flag is set to on, the control unit 2801 controls the illumination unit 2806 to light the LED 2503 in a manner corresponding to the type of setting suggestion effect (step S4514). The setting suggestion flag is managed in association with the type of setting suggestion effect pattern (type of setting suggestion effect) detected in step S4501 of FIG. 184. As a result, for example, when pattern 90 shown in FIG. 182 is detected (when setting suggestion presentation I occurs), LED 2503 lights up in rainbow colors (including the seven colors of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple); when pattern 91 is detected (when setting suggestion presentation II occurs), LED 2503 lights up orange; when pattern 92 is detected (when setting suggestion presentation III occurs), LED 2503 lights up yellow; when pattern 93 is detected (when setting suggestion presentation IV occurs), LED 2503 lights up indigo; and when pattern 94 is detected (when setting suggestion presentation V occurs), LED 2503 lights up purple.

The lighting of the LED2503 corresponding to the type of setting suggestion presentation (setting suggestion presentation I to V) basically continues until the power of the data display 2501 is turned off. However, if an error occurs, the LED2503 lights (blinks) in a manner corresponding to the type of error until the error is resolved (see step S4512), during which the lighting of the LED2503 corresponding to the type of setting suggestion presentation (setting suggestion presentation I to V) is suspended. After the error is resolved, the lighting of the LED2503 corresponding to the type of setting suggestion presentation (setting suggestion presentation I to V) resumes. In contrast, if a factor that changes the lighting pattern other than an error (any of the "game machine states" shown in FIG. 182) occurs, the lighting of the LED2503 corresponding to the type of setting suggestion presentation (setting suggestion presentation I to V) continues uninterrupted.

In addition, when a setting suggestion effect (e.g., setting suggestion effect II) occurs and LED2503 is lit in a manner corresponding to the setting suggestion effect, if a setting suggestion effect (e.g., setting suggestion effect I) occurs that may suggest information that is more advantageous to the player than the setting suggestion effect, the lighting mode of LED2503 may be switched to a mode corresponding to the setting suggestion effect (e.g., setting suggestion effect I) that may suggest the more advantageous information. On the other hand, when a setting suggestion effect (e.g., setting suggestion effect II) occurs and LED2503 is lit in a manner corresponding to the setting suggestion effect, if a setting suggestion effect (e.g., setting suggestion effect III) occurs that may not suggest information that is more advantageous to the player than the setting suggestion effect, the lighting mode of LED2503 may not be switched.

If it is determined in step S4513 that the setting suggestion flag is not set to on, or after executing the processing of step S4514, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

The gaming system PS100, gaming machine 3001, and data display 2501 according to the 13th embodiment have been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
The first to thirteenth embodiments have been described above. The fourteenth embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the gaming system PS100 according to the fourteenth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming system PS100 according to the thirteenth embodiment. In the following description, components that are the same as those of the gaming system PS100 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals. Furthermore, descriptions of portions that apply to the fourteenth embodiment from the first to thirteenth embodiments will be omitted.

[Gaming system PS100]
FIG. 186 is a diagram showing a gaming system according to the fourteenth embodiment.

As described in the eleventh embodiment, the gaming system PS100 includes a gaming machine 3001, a data display 2501, and a management server 3910. As shown in FIG. 186, the gaming system PS100 according to this embodiment includes a plurality of gaming machines 3001 (gaming machine 3001a, gaming machine 3001b, gaming machine 3001c, and gaming machine 3001d) and a plurality of data displays 2501 (data display 2501a, data display 2501b, data display 2501c, and data display 2501d).

The multiple gaming machines 3001 and the multiple data displays 2501 are in one-to-one correspondence, and each data display 2501 (data display 2501a, data display 2501b, data display 2501c, and data display 2501d) is positioned above each gaming machine 3001 (gaming machine 3001a, gaming machine 3001b, gaming machine 3001c, and gaming machine 3001d).

Each gaming machine 3001 (gaming machine 3001a, gaming machine 3001b, gaming machine 3001c, and gaming machine 3001d) and each data display 2501 (data display 2501a, data display 2501b, data display 2501c, and data display 2501d) has the same configuration as the gaming machine 3001 and data display 2501 in the above-mentioned embodiment. In addition, each data display 2501 (data display 2501a, data display 2501b, data display 2501c, and data display 2501d) is capable of communicating with the management server 3910. The communication between each data display 2501 and the management server 3910 may be performed directly or indirectly via an island computer.

As a result, each data display 2501 (data display 2501a, data display 2501b, data display 2501c, and data display 2501d) can recognize the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b by capturing images of lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b provided on the corresponding gaming machine 3001 (gaming machine 3001a, gaming machine 3001b, gaming machine 3001c, and gaming machine 3001d) using a CMOS image sensor. Each data display 2501 (data display 2501a, data display 2501b, data display 2501c, and data display 2501d) controls the liquid crystal display 2502, LED 2503, speaker 2504, etc., and communicates with the management server 3910 in a manner that corresponds to the lighting pattern of the lamp 3305 (state of the gaming machine 3001) of the corresponding gaming machine 3001 (gaming machine 3001a, gaming machine 3001b, gaming machine 3001c, and gaming machine 3001d).

[Lock-related processing]
Figure 187 is a flowchart showing the lock-related processing performed in the gaming machine.

The lock-related process shown in FIG. 187 is a process performed in the main control unit 3301 (see FIG. 150) of the gaming machine 3001 after the process (internal lottery process) of step S3504 in FIG. 110 is executed. As in the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine 3001 according to this embodiment can adopt a configuration similar to that of the slot machine 4001 according to the third embodiment, and the gaming machine 3001 has the configuration shown in FIG. 108. The main control unit 3301 and the sub-control unit 3302 (see FIG. 150) correspond to the main control board 4071 (main control circuit) and the sub-control board 4072 (sub-control circuit) described in relation to FIG. 108, respectively.

In the lock-related processing, the main control unit 3301 first determines whether the reservation lock flag is set to ON (step S4601). The reservation lock flag is a flag that indicates that a game lock has been reserved (see step S4610), and is used to perform a game lock after a predetermined number (three) of unit games have been played (after the reserved number of games has elapsed).

The game lock is a presentation that disables the operation by the player for a predetermined time. In this embodiment, the game lock (freeze) may be performed before the first stop operation is performed as a stop operation for each reel 4003L, 4003C, 4003R (see FIG. 109). When the freeze is performed, all reels 4003L, 4003C, 4003R are locked (all reels locked), and the operation by the player (for example, the operation of the stop buttons 4007L, 4007C, 4007R) is disabled until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the start lever 4006 (see FIG. 108) is operated. In addition to disabling the operation by the player, a predetermined reel action (for example, slow rotation, high-speed rotation, reverse rotation, etc.) may be performed. Also, unlike this embodiment, the game lock may be performed after all or some of the reels 4003L, 4003C, 4003R have stopped rotating.

The freeze is a lock effect that can occur only when a specific role (see step S4606) is determined as the internal winning role, and when the freeze occurs, the player is definitively notified that the specific role has been internally won. As described later, while the freeze occurs, the effect (freeze effect) is also performed on the liquid crystal display device. As the specific role, a role that is advantageous to the player (for example, a role that determines the transition to the AT, a rare role, a bonus role, etc.) can be adopted. In this embodiment, multiple predetermined roles are provided as roles that determine the start of the AT after a predetermined number (three) of unit games have been played (after the premonition game has been played), and some of the multiple predetermined roles are adopted as the above-mentioned specific roles. In other words, when some of the predetermined roles are determined as the internal winning roles, the reservation lock flag may be set to on.

If it is determined that the reservation lock flag is set to ON, the main control unit 3301 subtracts 1 from the reservation lock game number counter (step S4602). The reservation lock game number counter value indicates the remaining number of unit games to be played before the game is locked (freezed), and is stored in the main RAM 4033.

Next, the main control unit 3301 determines whether the value of the reserved lock game number counter is 0 (step S4603). If it is determined that the value of the reserved lock game number counter is not 0, the main control unit 3301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main control unit 3301 determines that the value of the reserved lock game number counter is 0, it sets the lock activation flag to ON (step S4604). The lock activation flag is a flag that indicates that a game lock can be activated, and this results in a game lock (freeze) (see FIG. 188).

In this embodiment, if the reservation lock lottery is not won, the game is locked (freezed) without waiting for a predetermined number (three) of unit games to be played (in the unit game in which a specific role has been determined as the internal winning role) (see step S4609). However, if the reservation lock lottery is not won, the game is not locked (freezed) in the unit game, and after a predetermined number (three) of unit games have been played, it may be notified (by a presentation other than the game lock (such as a liquid crystal presentation)) that the AT has been won (the AT will start).

Then, the main control unit 3301 sets the reservation lock flag to off (step S4605) and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4601 that the reservation lock flag is not set to on, the main control unit 3301 determines whether or not a specific role has been determined as the internal winning role (step S4606). If it is determined that a specific role has not been determined as the internal winning role, the main control unit 3301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a specific role has been determined as the internal winning role, the main control unit 3301 executes a reservation lock lottery (step S4607). In this process, the main control unit 3301 determines whether the lottery will be a winning lottery or not by performing a lottery based on a random number value. For example, the main control unit 3301 determines a winning lottery with a 10% probability and a non-winning lottery with a 90% probability.

Next, the main control unit 3301 determines whether the reservation lock lottery has been won (step S4608). If it is determined that the reservation lock lottery has not been won, the main control unit 3301 sets the lock activation flag to ON (step S4609). As a result, if the reservation lock lottery has not been won, the game will be locked (freezed) without waiting for a predetermined number (three) of unit games to be played (in the unit game in which a specific role has been determined as the internal winning role) (see FIG. 188).

After executing the processing of step S4609, the main control unit 3301 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4608 that the reservation lock lottery has been won, the main control unit 3301 sets the reservation lock flag to on (step S4610) and sets the reservation lock game count counter to "3" (step S4611).

Next, the main control unit 3301 generates reservation lock command data and transmits the generated reservation lock command data to the sub-control unit 3302 (step S4612). This allows the sub-control unit 3302 to recognize that a game lock will occur after the reserved number of games has elapsed (reservation lock has been established). Then, upon receiving the reservation lock command data, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 (see FIG. 150) to cause the lamps 3305a and 3305b to emit light in a lighting pattern corresponding to the "reservation lock pattern" (see FIG. 182). This causes light emission control in accordance with "pattern 99" shown in FIG. 182 to be performed. As described above, the reservation lock pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when a reservation lock is established.

After executing the processing of step S4612, the main control unit 3301 terminates this subroutine.

[Reel spin start process]
Figure 188 is a flowchart showing the reel spin start processing performed in the gaming machine.

The reel spin start processing shown in FIG. 188 is processing performed by the main control unit 3301 in step S3511 of FIG. 110.

In the reel spin start process, first, the main control unit 3301 determines whether the lock activation flag (see steps S4604 and S4609 in FIG. 187) is set to on (step S4621).

If it is determined that the lock activation flag is set to on, the main control unit 3301 sets a value corresponding to a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) in the lock timer (step S4622). Although not shown, the lock timer is updated by a timer update process executed in the interrupt process. The interrupt process is executed at a fixed cycle (1.1172 msec).

Next, the main control unit 3301 determines whether the lock timer is 0 (step S4623). If it is determined that the lock timer is not 0, the main control unit 3301 returns the process to step S4623. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock timer is 0, the main control unit 3301 sets the lock activation flag to off (step S4624).

This causes the game to be locked (freezed), all reels 4003L, 4003C, 4003R to be locked (all reels locked), and operations by the player (e.g., operation of stop buttons 4007L, 4007C, 4007R) are disabled until a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed after the start lever 4006 is operated.

Although not shown, after executing the process of step S4622, the main control unit 3301 generates lock command data and transmits the generated lock command data to the sub-control unit 3302. This allows the sub-control unit 3302 to recognize that a game lock (freeze) has occurred. Then, upon receiving the lock command data, the sub-control unit 3302 sets effect data corresponding to the effect (freeze effect) that is performed while the freeze is occurring. As a result, an effect such as the screen of the liquid crystal display going dark is performed as the freeze effect.

If it is determined in step S4621 that the lock activation flag is not set to ON, or after executing the process of step S4624, the main control unit 3301 executes normal acceleration processing (step S4625). In this processing, the main control unit 3301 requests the start of rotation of the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R. When the start of rotation of the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R is requested, the drive of the stepping motors 4049L, 4049C, and 4049R is controlled by the interrupt processing described above, and each of the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R starts to rotate. Then, each of the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R is accelerated until its rotation reaches a constant speed, and is then controlled to maintain the constant speed.

After executing the processing of step S4625, the main control unit 3301 terminates this subroutine.

[Reservation lock effect related processing]
FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the reservation lock effect-related processing performed in the data display device.

The reservation lock effect-related processing shown in FIG. 189 is processing that is repeatedly performed at a predetermined timing in the control unit 2801 (see FIG. 151) of the data display device 2501.

In the reservation lock effect-related processing, first, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not a lighting pattern corresponding to a reservation lock pattern (see step S4612 in FIG. 187) is detected as a combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b (step S4651). As described above, the reservation lock pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when a reservation lock is established (see FIG. 182).

If it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to a reservation lock pattern has been detected, the control unit 2801 transmits a reservation lock detection signal to the management server 3910 (step S4652). The reservation lock detection signal is a signal indicating that a reservation lock has been established in the gaming machine 3001 associated with the data display 2501 that transmitted the signal.

In this embodiment, the multiple data display devices 2501 installed in the gaming center are classified into multiple groups (group I, group II, group III, etc.) and are managed by the management server 3910 on a group basis. Specifically, a group identification number (I, II, III, etc.) is associated with each data display device 2501. For example, if group identification number I is associated with one data display device 2501, the data display device 2501 belongs to group I, and if group identification number II is associated with one data display device 2501, the data display device 2501 belongs to group II.

When the group identification numbers associated with one data display 2501 and another data display 2501 are the same, the management server 3910 can treat these data displays 2501 as belonging to the same group. Data display 2501a, data display 2501b, data display 2501c, and data display 2501d shown in FIG. 186 are all associated with the same group identification number (I), and these data displays 2501 belong to the same group (group I). Note that multiple data displays 2501 belonging to the same group are installed on the same island.

When the management server 3910 receives the reservation lock detection signal transmitted from the data display 2501 in step S4652, the management server 3910 transmits a reservation lock effect execution signal to all data display devices 2501 (e.g., data display 2501a, data display 2501b, data display 2501c, and data display 2501d) that belong to the same group as the data display device 2501 (e.g., data display 2501a) that transmitted the reservation lock detection signal. Since the reservation lock detection signal contains information indicating the group identification number associated with the data display device 2501 that transmitted the signal, the management server 3910 can recognize the group to which the data display device 2501 belongs. The reservation lock effect execution signal is a signal indicating that a reservation lock has been established in one gaming machine 3001 (e.g., gaming machine 3001a) that is associated with one data display 2501 (e.g., data display 2501a) that belongs to the same group as the data display device 2501 that transmitted the signal.

In addition, when the management server 3910 receives a reservation lock detection signal transmitted from the data display 2501 in step S4652, the management server 3910 may transmit a reservation lock performance execution signal to all data display devices 2501 (e.g., data display 2501a, data display 2501b, data display 2501c, and data display 2501d) belonging to the same group as the data display device 2501 (e.g., data display 2501a) that transmitted the reservation lock detection signal, other than the data display device 2501 that transmitted the reservation lock detection signal. In other words, since the data display 2501 (e.g., data display 2501a) that is the sender of the reservation lock detection signal can recognize that a reservation lock has been established in the gaming machine 3001 (e.g., gaming machine 3001a) associated with the data display 2501 (see step S4651), it is possible not to send a reservation lock effect execution signal to the data display 2501.

If it is determined in step S4651 that a lighting pattern corresponding to a reservation lock pattern has not been detected, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not a reservation lock performance execution signal has been received from the management server 3910 (step S4653).

After executing the process of step S4652, or when it is determined that the reservation lock effect execution signal has been received in step S4653, the control unit 2801 executes the reservation lock effect (step S4654). The reservation lock effect is an effect that suggests that the reservation lock has been established, and is performed on a grand scale using images, sounds, lights, etc., thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation. In the process of step S4654, the control unit 2801 controls the image display unit 2805, the audio output unit 2807, and the illumination unit 2806 (see FIG. 151) to output images, sounds, and lights that will lift the player's spirits from the liquid crystal display 2502, the speaker 2504, and the LED 2503, respectively. Note that if the LED 2503 is lit in a manner that suggests a set value (see step S4514 in FIG. 185), the control unit 2801 executes the reservation lock effect with priority.

Such reservation lock effects are executed simultaneously on all data displays 2501 belonging to one group. This makes it possible to link the reservation lock effects executed on each data display 2501, and to realize an attractive effect in the group. The execution of the reservation lock effect means that a reservation lock has been established on one gaming machine 3001 associated with one data display 2501 belonging to the group, and this can heighten the player's anticipation for the possibility that a game lock (freeze) will occur on the gaming machine 3001 on which the player is playing after the number of reserved games has elapsed. This allows the player to play with excitement during the reservation period (until the number of reserved games has elapsed), and this period can be a great pleasure in the gaming system PS100.

If it is determined in step S4653 that the reservation lock performance execution signal has not been received, or after executing the processing of step S4654, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

The gaming system PS100, gaming machine 3001, and data display 2501 according to the 14th embodiment have been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of a gaming system PS200 according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.

The gaming system PS200 of the present application is configured to include a pachinko machine 6001 and a gaming device 7001, as shown in FIG. 190(A). In FIG. 190(A), the pachinko machine 6001 has the same configuration as the first pachinko machine in the first embodiment, but may be the second pachinko machine of the first embodiment, the third pachinko machine, or a pachinko machine according to other embodiments. In addition, in this embodiment, the machine is not limited to a pachinko machine, and may be a pachislot machine, which is mainly described in the third to fourteenth embodiments. In addition, the machine may be an enclosed gaming machine described in the second embodiment, etc. (i.e., a gaming machine in which the main control circuit itself electromagnetically manages the gaming medium held by the player, and allows games to be played by circulating enclosed gaming balls, or games to be played without medals).

[External appearance of pachinko machine]
Fig. 190(A) is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko machine 6001 when viewed from the front right upper side. As shown in Fig. 190(A), the pachinko machine 6001 includes an outer frame 6002, a base door 6003, a glass door 6004, a tray unit 6005, a launching device 6006, a display device 6007 (see Fig. 192), a payout unit 6008 (not shown), a board unit 6009 (not shown), and a game board unit 6010 (not shown). Furthermore, an LED unit 6160 (not shown) is provided at the lower right of the game board unit 6010. Here, the outer frame 6002, the base door 6003, the glass door 6004, the tray unit 6005, the launching device 6006, the display device 6007, the payout unit 6008, and the board unit 6009 will be briefly described.

The outer frame 6002 is a generally rectangular frame body when viewed from the front, and has an opening 6021 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction. This outer frame 6002 is fixedly attached to the island equipment of the amusement park. A hinge (no reference number) is provided on the front side of, for example, the left end of the outer frame 6002, and the base door 6003 is supported on this hinge. In this way, it is possible to rotate the base door 6003 forward relative to the outer frame 6002, using the hinge as an axis.

The outer frame 6002 must be strong to support a large number of components, such as the payout unit 6008, the base unit 6009, the display device 6007, the game board unit 6010, the glass door 6004, and the tray unit 6005, which will be described later, via the base door 6003. On the other hand, there is a demand for larger display devices 6007 and game board units 6010, for example, in order to enhance the presentation effect. For this reason, by constructing the outer frame 6002 from, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 6007 and the game board unit 6010 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 6002 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

The base door 6003 has, for example, a dispensing unit 6008 and a base unit 6009 attached to its back side and supports these.

A game board unit 6010 is fitted onto the front side of the base door 6003. In addition, hinges (without reference numbers) are provided at the top end, the middle part below the vertical center, and the bottom end of the base door 6003, for example at the front left end, and the glass door 6004 is supported by the hinges at the top end and the middle part, and the plate unit 6005 is supported by the hinges at the middle part and the bottom end. In this way, the glass door 6004 and the plate unit 6005 can be rotated forward together or individually relative to the base door 6003, with the hinges as axes.

A launching device 6006 is fixedly attached to the front side of the base door 6003, for example, on the lower right side, and speakers 6032 are fixedly attached, for example, on the left and right sides of the upper side. The speakers 6032 output, for example, sound effects such as voice performances of characters displayed on the display device 6007, music, sound effects, audio notifications, error notifications, and other performance sounds.

Furthermore, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the side opposite the hinge of the base door 6003 (i.e., the right end). This locking device has the function of locking the base door 6003 to the outer frame 6002 and locking the glass door 6004 to the base door 6003.

The glass door 6004 is a frame-shaped member in which an opening 6041 is formed. A transparent protective glass 6043 is attached to this opening 6041 from the rear side. When the glass door 6004 is closed to the base door 6003, the play area 6105 (not shown) formed in the game board unit 6010 and the protective glass 6043 face each other. In this way, with the glass door 6004 closed to the base door 6003, the play area 6105 can be viewed from the front, and game balls flowing down the play area 6105 can be prevented from flying out forward.

The protective glass 6043 may be made of multiple pieces of glass (e.g., two pieces) attached with a gap between them, or multiple pieces of glass may be unitized to have a gap between them. Furthermore, if the protective glass is unitized, a light guide plate, for example, may be provided between the pieces of glass. The protective glass 6043 is not limited to being made of glass, and may be made of, for example, transparent resin.

In addition, an operation unit 6066 is provided at the bottom of the glass door 6004, which can be operated by, for example, a player to receive a gaming information service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). This operation unit 6066 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated by an arcade manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

A speaker cover is provided on the top of the glass door 6004, located in front of the speaker 6032 described above. Furthermore, a large number of LED groups 6046 used for light-emitting effects and the like are arranged around the periphery of the opening 6041 of the glass door 6004, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 6046. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 6046 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as the LED group 6046. The LED group 6046 is, for example, a light-emitting means for use in light announcements and light-emitting effects in various variations, but is not limited to LEDs as long as it can perform such light-emitting effects and the like, and may be, for example, liquid crystal or a lamp.

The tray unit 6005 is a unit consisting of an upper tray 6051 and a lower tray 6052. The tray unit 6005 is located at the front lower part of the base door 6003, below the glass door 6004. As described above, the tray unit 6005 is configured to be rotated relative to the base door 6003 to open and close, so that, for example, when balls become jammed, an arcade attendant can clear the jam. Note that the tray unit 6005 does not necessarily need to have an upper tray 6051 and a lower tray 6052, and may be configured as an integrated tray.

The upper tray 6051 is provided so that game balls can be stored therein, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 6051 are launched from the launching device 6006 toward the game area 6105. The upper tray 6051 is provided with a payout outlet 6053 and a performance button 6054. Game balls to be lent out or paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout outlet 6053 to the upper tray 6051. The performance button 6054 is what is called a "CHANCE button" or "push button". The performance button 6054 may have a predetermined performance function in addition to an operation function operated by a player. The predetermined performance function may be, for example, a function to vibrate or protrude upward based on the result of a hit determination process for a special symbol. It may also serve the function of the operation unit 6066.

The lower tray 6052 is primarily intended to store game balls that have overflowed from the upper tray 6051. The lower tray 6052 is provided with a payout outlet 6055 that communicates with the upper tray 6051, and game balls that have overflowed from the upper tray 6051 are paid out from the payout outlet 6055 to the lower tray 6052.

An opening (no reference number) is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 6052, which can be opened and closed by the player. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 6052 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 6052 can be transferred to a ball box placed below the lower tray 6052. If a so-called per-machine counting system is installed on each machine, not only is the ball box unnecessary, but the game balls counted by the per-machine counting system can be stored and the stored game balls can be used again for play.

The launching device 6006 is for launching game balls stored in the upper tray 6051 toward the game area 6105. The launching device 6006 is located at the lower right front of the base door 6003, and at the lower right of the tray unit 6005. The launching device 6006 includes a panel body 6061, a drive unit (not shown), and a launching handle 6062.

The panel body 6061 is arranged so that when the tray unit 6005 is closed relative to the base door 6003, the tray unit 6005 and the launching device 6006 fixedly attached to the base door 6003 appear integrated in appearance.

The launch handle 6062 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is disposed on the front side of the panel body 6061. The drive device is disposed on the back side of the panel body 6061, and is configured, for example, by a launch solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the launch handle 6062, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device. Note that when operating the launch handle 6062, the greater the amount of clockwise rotation (amount of operation), the stronger the launch strength of the game ball.

The game ball launched from the launching device 6006 located at the lower right of the tray unit 6005 rolls in an arc along the guide rail 6110 (not shown) via the launching rail (not shown) and is launched into the game area 6105 (not shown). The location of the launching device 6006 is not limited to the lower right of the tray unit 6005, but may be the lower left of the tray unit 6005. In this case, the launching rail is not necessary, and the area below the glass door 6004 can be effectively utilized, making it possible to increase versatility.

The display device 6007 has a display area for displaying various effect images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 6100. The display device 6007 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or may project an image using a projection device such as a projector. In the display area of the display device 6007, for example, an effect identification pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed to display the result of the hit determination process of the special pattern, an effect image according to the result of the hit determination process of the special pattern, an effect image during a big win game state, a demo effect image, an effect image showing the pending status of the variable display of the special pattern, etc. are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 6007 is attached to the game board unit 6010, but the display device 6007 may be attached to the base door 6003 as long as the display area of the display device 6007 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 6100.

In this embodiment, one display device 6007 is provided to display the various performance images described above, but multiple display devices (e.g., two) may be provided and the performance images may be displayed using these multiple display devices.

The payout unit 6008 (not shown) is disposed on the rear side of the base door 6003, and is composed of a ball passage 6081, a payout device 6082, etc. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 6081 from a storage tank 6080 (not shown). Game balls are supplied to the storage tank 6080 from an island facility (not shown). When the payout condition is met, the payout device 6082 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied to the ball passage 6081 from the storage tank 6080, for example, to the upper tray 6051. In addition, a power switch 6095 (see FIG. 192) is provided on the rear side of the payout unit 6008.

The board unit 6009 (not shown) is disposed on the rear side of the base door 6003. The board unit 6009 is provided with various control boards, etc.

Specifically, the board unit 6009 is provided with a main control board 6091 on which a main control circuit 6200 (see FIG. 192) is mounted, a sub-control board 6092 on which a sub-control circuit 6300 (see FIG. 192) is mounted, a payout/launch control board 6093 on which a payout/launch control circuit 6400 (see FIG. 192) that controls the payout/launch of game balls is mounted, and a power supply board on which a power supply circuit 6450 (see FIG. 192) that supplies power is mounted.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 6092 is configured as a one-board board (a board on which one control LSI or multiple LSIs are provided). However, this is not limited to this, and the sub-control board 6092 may be configured with multiple boards, for example, by making all or part of the display control circuit 6304, audio/LED control circuit 6305, and role control circuit 6307 (all of which are shown in FIG. 192 and described below) separate boards.

[Outline of the gaming device]
The gaming device 7001 is a device in a separate housing from the pachinko machine 6001 that receives light output (emitted) from the pachinko machine 6001. Figure 190 (A) shows the state of the gaming device 7001 when actually playing a game. In this example, the gaming device 7001 is fixedly attached near the middle of the right side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 6001.

Here, the pachinko machine 6001 outputs sounds related to the effects of the gaming machine to the outside, for example, by optical communication, and the gaming device 7001 receives the light output from the pachinko machine 6001 and generates sounds (sounds related to the effects of the gaming machine and other sounds such as warning sounds) based on the received light, and outputs the generated sounds to the connected wired audio device 8001 and wireless audio device 8002. The wired audio device 8001 is, for example, headphones or earphones connected to the gaming device 7001 by an audio cable, and the player can use these devices to hear the sounds related to the effects of the gaming machine.

In the following explanation, headphones and earphones will be assumed to be owned and worn by the player, but these audio devices can also be rented out by the gaming establishment to anyone who wishes to use them.

The wireless audio device 8002 is, for example, a headphone or earphone wirelessly connected to the gaming device 7001 by wireless communication (for example, Bluetooth (registered trademark)). In this case, the sound related to the effects of the pachinko machine 6001 is not output from the speaker of the pachinko machine 6001 or is suppressed to a predetermined low volume. Note that in FIG. 190(A), headphones are illustrated as the wired audio device 8001 and earphones are illustrated as the wireless audio device 8002, but this is merely an example, and headphones and earphones can be used for both the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002 (the same applies to the following drawings). Even audio devices that do not belong to the category of headphones or earphones can be used as the audio device of the present application as long as the player can hear the sound by wearing them.

This configuration of the present application realizes one-way non-contact communication from the pachinko machine 6001 to the gaming device 7001, completely preventing information from flowing into or electrical connection to the pachinko machine 6001, and does not increase the risk of fraudulent activities, etc.

Furthermore, the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002 allow the player to reliably hear the sounds related to the effects of the gaming machine at the desired volume. Furthermore, in recent years, noise canceling technology has improved in audio devices, and since outside sounds are largely blocked out, players are hardly bothered by surrounding noise. Some headphones also have ear pads that completely cover the ears, and this type of headphone, in combination with the noise canceling function described above, can effectively block out outside sounds.

In addition, because this creates an environment where sound can be reliably delivered to the player's ears and outside noise can be effectively blocked out, it becomes easier to provide binaural sound to the player, making it possible to reproduce terrifying sound effects and rich, immersive sounds in the performance of the pachinko machine 6001.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 6001, the sounds related to the effects are not output from the speakers or are suppressed to a low volume, which results in the volume level being suppressed throughout the gaming facility, providing a higher quality gaming environment even for players who do not use sound equipment.

Figure 190 (B) shows the gaming device 7001 temporarily removed from the pachinko machine 6001, and at the position of the pachinko machine 6001 corresponding to the position where the gaming device 7001 was fixed, light-emitting units for emitting light to the gaming device 7001 (i.e., two audio output LEDs 6045 (audio output LED-A 6045a, audio output LED-B 6045b)) are shown.

Figure 191 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the present application described above. Figure 191 (A) shows how light (e.g., infrared light) is output (emitted) from the light-emitting unit (two sound output LEDs 6045) of the pachinko machine 6001, and how that light is received by the light-receiving unit of the gaming device 7001. Note that here, the shape of the pachinko machine 6001 is shown in a simplified form, and the position of the gaming device 7001 is conveniently displayed at a position separate from the pachinko machine 6001 so that the output state of infrared light can be seen.

Also, unlike FIG. 190, the position of the sound output LED 6045 and the corresponding gaming device 7001 are fixedly attached near the upper left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 6001 (similar to FIG. 191(B)). In this way, the gaming device 7001 can be placed anywhere as long as it is a position where it can receive the light output from the pachinko machine 6001.

Figure 191 (B) shows the state of the gaming device 7001 when a game is actually being played, and in this positional relationship, the light emitted from the light-emitting unit of the pachinko machine 6001 is received by the light-receiving unit of the gaming device 7001. The gaming device 7001 is also provided with an audio output terminal 7006 into which the plug of the audio cable of the wired audio device 8001 is inserted.

The player can listen to the sounds related to the effects of the pachinko machine 6001 through the audio device by inserting the audio cable (plug) of the wired audio device 8001 into the audio output terminal 7006 of the gaming device 7001, or by configuring the wireless audio device 8002 to connect to the gaming device 7001. Depending on the configuration of the gaming device 7001, it is also possible to listen to the sounds related to the effects of the gaming machine using both the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002.

[Electrical configuration of pachinko machine]
Next, the configuration of a pachinko machine 6001 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 192. The pachinko machine 1 basically has the same configuration as the first pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment shown in Fig. 6. Fig. 192 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the pachinko machine 6001.

As shown in FIG. 192, the pachinko machine 6001 is mainly composed of a main control circuit 6200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 6300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 6400, and a power supply circuit 6450.

The main control circuit 6200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on and processes related to game operations, and includes a main CPU 6201, a main ROM 6202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 6203 (read-write memory), an initial reset circuit 6204, and a backup capacitor 6207, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 6201 is connected to the main ROM 6202, the main RAM 6203, the initial reset circuit 6204, etc. The main CPU 6201 has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer (WDT) that monitors operation and a function to prevent fraud.

The main ROM 6202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 6201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 6201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 6202.

The main RAM 6203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. This main RAM 6203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 6201. Note that, although in this embodiment, RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 6201, this is not limiting and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The initial reset circuit 6204 monitors the main CPU 6201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 6207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 6203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 6200 also includes an I/O port 6205 that is connected to various devices and other devices so as to be able to communicate with each other, and a command output port 6206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 6300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 6300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 6200. For example, the main control circuit 6200 is connected to the normal symbol display unit 6161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 6162, the first special symbol display unit 6163, the second special symbol display unit 6164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 6165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 6166, the probability change notification display unit 6167, the time reduction notification display unit 6168, the normal power solenoid 6148, and the special power solenoid 6135. In addition to these, the main control circuit 6200 is also connected to the performance display monitor 6170 and the error notification monitor 6172. The main control circuit 6200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 6205.

The performance display monitor 6170 displays performance display data and setting values (described later) under the control of the main CPU 6201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 6172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the error notification monitor 6172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc. Note that the setting change code may be a special symbol that is not normally displayed (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that a setting change is in progress).

The main control circuit 6200 is also connected to the first start port switch 6121, the second start port switch 6141, the pass gate switch 6127, the count switch 6132, and the general winning port switch 6123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to the main control circuit 6200 via the I/O port 6205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 6200 is connected to a calling device (not shown) having functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 6184 used to send data to a hall computer 6186 that manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall, a setting key socket 6174 into which a setting key 6174a is inserted that is operated to change or check the setting value in the case of a pachinko machine with a setting function, and a RAM clear switch 6176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 6203 in response to the operation of the gaming center manager. The RAM clear switch 6176 can also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, but is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the setting value may also be provided.

The setting key slot 6174 and the RAM clear switch 6176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the manager of the game arcade. "Inside a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key slot 6174 and the RAM clear switch 6176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key slot 6174 and the RAM clear switch 6176, so that the manager of the game arcade can touch the setting key slot 6174 and/or the RAM clear switch 6176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game arcade to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key slot 6174 and the RAM clear switch 6176 are connected to the main control circuit 6200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 6400 or the power supply circuit 6450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the arcade manager from easily touching the setting key slot 6174 or the RAM clear switch 6176.

The sub-control circuit 6300 includes a sub-CPU 6301, a program ROM 6302, a work RAM 6303, a display control circuit 6304, a sound/LED control circuit 6305, a role control circuit 6307, and a command input port 6308. The sub-control circuit 6300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 6200. Although not shown in FIG. 192, effect buttons that can be operated by the player are also connected to the sub-control circuit 6300.

The program ROM 6302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the pachinko machine 6001 by the sub-CPU 6301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 6301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 6302. In particular, the sub-CPU 6301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 6200.

The work RAM 6303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 6301.

The display control circuit 6304 is a circuit for controlling the display of the display device 6007. The display control circuit 6304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 6304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 6007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 6301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 6007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 6304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 6007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 6007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 6007. In this way, the display control circuit 6304 can control the display device 6007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio/LED control circuit 6305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 6032. The audio/LED control circuit 6305 includes an audio controller for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier for amplifying the audio signal (hereinafter referred to as AMP), and the like.

The audio controller controls the audio output from the speaker 6032. In response to an audio generation command from the sub-CPU 6301, the audio controller selects one piece of audio data from multiple pieces of audio data stored in the audio data ROM. The audio controller also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a specified audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 6032.

The audio/LED control circuit 6305 also controls the audio output LED 6045, which outputs light toward the gaming device 7001. The audio/LED control circuit 6305 includes a drive circuit (LED driver) for supplying an LED control signal to the audio output LED 6045, a D/A converter for converting audio data into a signal for outputting light, and the like.

The audio/LED control circuit 6305 controls the group of performance LEDs 6046, which includes decorative LEDs. The audio/LED control circuit 6305 includes a lamp controller that generates LED control signals for the group of performance LEDs 6046 in accordance with the timing of the performance, a drive circuit (LED driver) for supplying the generated LED control signals, and a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored.

The reel control circuit 6307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of reels for performance 6058). The reel control circuit 6307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a reel data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored.

The reel control circuit 6307 selects one operation pattern from among the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 6301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from among the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 6301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 6308 is connected to the command output port 6206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 6200.

The payout/launch control circuit 6400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls, and is connected to a payout device 6082 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 6006 capable of launching game balls, a card unit 6180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 6400 receives a prize ball control command sent from the main control circuit 6200, it sends a specified signal to the payout device 6082 and controls the payout device 6082 to pay out game balls.

The card unit 6180 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 6182. The ball lending operation panel 6182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (neither is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 6180. The payout/launch control circuit 6400 controls the payout device 6082 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 6180. The ball lending operation panel 6182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 6180 side.

In addition, when the launch device 6006 (e.g., the launch handle) is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 6400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation) and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 6450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 6200, the sub control circuit 6300, the payout/launch control circuit 6400, etc.

The power supply circuit 6450 is connected to a power switch 6095 and other components. The power switch 6095 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 6200, the sub control circuit 6300, the payout/launch control circuit 6400, etc.).

[Configuration of sub-control circuit]
Next, referring to FIG. 193, the detailed configuration of the sub-control circuit 6300 of the pachinko machine 6001 according to this embodiment will be described.

Figure 193 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the sub-control circuit 6300. As described with reference to Figure 192, the sub-control circuit 6300 includes a sub-CPU 6301, an audio/LED control circuit 6305, etc., but here, the audio/LED control circuit 6305 will be described, focusing on the configuration for outputting audio related to effects and the like as light.

The audio controller 6305a of the audio/LED control circuit 6305 reads multiple pieces of audio data stored in the audio data ROM 6310 in response to an audio generation command from the sub-CPU 6301. The audio generation command from the sub-CPU 6301 is a command corresponding to a command related to a performance (performance instruction command) received from the main CPU 6201.

Then, the audio controller 6305a synthesizes audio data related to the performance based on the read audio data, converts the audio data into a specified audio signal, and sends it to the IS2 interface 6311. In addition, when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 6001 or an alarm is required, the audio controller 6305a converts the corresponding audio data into an audio signal and sends it to the IS2 interface 6311.

At this time, the audio controller 6305a controls the converted audio signal to be provided to either the AMP 6312 or the D/A converter 6311, depending on the output destination stored in the work RAM 6303 of the sub-control circuit 6300.

In this embodiment, if "headphone/earphone output" is not specified, the output destination is the speaker 6032, in which case the audio signal is provided to the AMP 6312. On the other hand, if "headphone/earphone output" is specified, the output destination is the audio output LED 6045, in which case the audio signal is provided to the D/A converter 6313.

When an audio signal is provided to the AMP 6312, volume information of the audio signal is also provided to the AMP 6312 according to the "volume value" stored in the work RAM 6303. However, such volume information may be provided directly to the AMP 6312, or the amplified audio signal output from the AMP 6312 may be adjusted according to the volume information.

As described above, the work RAM 6303 stores whether or not "headphone/earphone output" is specified, and the "volume value", and these settings are performed by the player via the menu screen 6501 and the volume adjustment screen 6502 described below (see FIG. 194). In addition, the whether or not "headphone/earphone output" is specified, and the "volume value" stored in the work RAM 6303 are returned to default values (for example, no "headphone/earphone output" is specified, and "volume value" = 5) depending on predetermined conditions.

The above settings stored in the work RAM 6303 are reset to the default values when an event that could be considered a change of player is detected, such as when the power to the pachinko machine 6001 is turned on, when the player has not played for a specified period of time, when a ball loan card or other return operation is performed in the card unit 6180, or when an instruction is given to count gaming media (when a machine-specific counting system is installed in each machine).

In the above configuration, the audio signal is controlled to be provided to either the AMP 6312 or the D/A converter 6311 depending on the output destination stored in the work RAM 6303. However, if "headphone/earphone output" is specified as the output destination, it is possible that the speaker 6032 will also reduce the volume of the sound related to the performance (for example, set the volume to 0 or output at a specified low volume) (for example, mute or lower the volume in the AMP 6312), in which case the audio signal will be provided to both the AMP 6312 and the D/A converter 6311.

On the other hand, even if "headphone/earphone output" is not specified as the output destination, it is also possible to control the audio signal to be provided to the D/A converter 6311.

When the AMP 6312 receives an audio signal from the audio controller 6305a via the IS2 interface 6311, it amplifies the audio signal and transmits it to the speaker 6032. As a result, audio related to the performance, etc. is output from the speaker 6032. If the audio is related to the performance, it is output from the speaker 6032 in conjunction with the display of the performance image on the display device 6007, for example.

The audio controller 6305a can handle audio data from multiple channels, and the AMP 6312 can amplify the audio signal associated with each piece of audio data and output it to the corresponding speaker 6032 for each channel (for example, the right and left speakers dedicated to the low-frequency range, and the right and left speakers other than those).

When the D/A converter 6311 receives an audio signal (L signal and R signal) from the audio controller 6305a via the IS2 interface 6311, it converts the audio signal into an analog signal and transmits it to the infrared transmission control unit 6314. At this time, the analog signal is also converted for each L/R according to the L/R of the audio signal. As described above, the audio controller 6305a can handle audio data across multiple channels, but when transmitting an audio signal to the D/A converter 6311, it downmixes these multiple channel audio data into two channels, the L signal and the R signal, and transmits them. For example, it performs PCM calculations on the L signal and the R signal to synthesize the waveforms, and adjusts the peak value as necessary.

The infrared transmission control unit 6314 is, for example, an FM modulation circuit for audio signals. FM (Frequency Modulation) is a modulation method in which an analog signal is transmitted by changing the frequency of a carrier wave.

In this embodiment, when the infrared transmission control unit 6314 transmits the input analog signal L+R as a main channel signal to the LED driver 6315, the LED driver 6315 causes the audio output LED-A 6045a to emit light (emission of infrared rays) in response to the main channel signal (basic carrier wave). Similarly, when the infrared transmission control unit 6314 transmits the analog signal L-R as a sub-channel signal to the LED driver 6315, the LED driver 6315 causes the audio output LED-B 6045b to emit light (emission of infrared rays) in response to the sub-channel signal (sub-carrier wave).

The method of transmitting an analog signal using the main channel signal and the sub-channel signal as described above is similar to the method used in FM broadcasting, for example. With this mechanism, even if the receiving side only supports monaural playback, monaural audio can be reproduced by demodulating the main channel signal. However, in this embodiment, if there is no need to reproduce monaural audio on the receiving side (gaming device 7001), such a method does not necessarily have to be adopted. For example, the infrared transmission control unit 6314 may generate an L channel signal based on the L signal of an analog signal, and an R channel signal based on the R signal of an analog signal, and the receiving side gaming device 7001 may demodulate the audio signals of the L signal and the R signal from the L channel signal and the R channel signal, respectively.

As described above, the LED driver 6315 illuminates the audio output LED-A 6045a and the audio output LED-B 6045b based on the received analog signal, and this specification is based on, for example, the standard for analog audio transmission systems using infrared as a medium (JEITA CP-1208). This standard is a standard in which each carrier is FM-modulated by an audio signal (20 Hz to 20 kHz) (carriers of different frequencies are assigned to eight channels (H1 to H8)), and the FM-modulated carrier signal is used to brightness-modulate an infrared carrier (using an infrared carrier of 800 nm to 900 nm).

In this embodiment, for example, the above-mentioned H1 and H2 channels are used to transmit the main channel signal and the sub-channel signal, respectively (by infrared carrier waves). This type of transmission uses an analog carrier wave, so there is less delay than with methods of transmitting digital audio data (digital transmission requires time for codec processing (encoding before transmission and decoding after reception)), and because it does not use radio wave bands, there is no risk of crosstalk.

In this embodiment, for example, an infrared LED with a peak wavelength of 850 nm or an infrared LED with a peak wavelength of 940 nm is used as the audio output LED-A 6045a and the audio output LED-B 6045b. Note that while infrared rays are classified as invisible light, an infrared LED with a peak wavelength of 850 nm can actually be recognized as red by the human eye. Also, it is possible to use a single-color LED or full-color LED that outputs visible light as the audio output LED in this embodiment.

In addition, in this embodiment, the light from the two infrared LEDs (sound output LED-A 6045a, sound output LED-B 6045b) is received by two corresponding infrared receiving units (see FIG. 196), but it is also possible to provide multiple sets of these. For example, by providing four sets of two infrared LEDs and two infrared receiving units, and using each set to send and receive the same audio information, even if one of these sets stops functioning, it is possible to maintain normal reception of audio information using the functioning set (i.e., using the infrared receiving unit that is receiving signals normally).

The lamp controller 6305b of the sound/LED control circuit 6305 references multiple types of LED decoration patterns stored in the decoration data ROM 6316, generates an LED control signal in accordance with the timing of the performance, and transmits the LED control signal to the LED driver 6317 to cause the performance LED group 6046 to emit light.

In this embodiment, as described above, the sound of the pachinko machine 6001 is sent to the outside using infrared rays, but if an FM modulated carrier wave is used, the sound can also be sent in the same way using an FM transmitter. However, when performing such communication using radio waves, a conformity test related to the weak radio equipment registration system (weak radio conformity mark (ELP mark)) stipulated by the Radio Law is required, which requires time and costs for the examination. In contrast, the configuration of this embodiment uses only "light" to send the sound of the gaming machine, and does not require the above-mentioned examination. In consideration of the number of gaming machines sold and the development cycle, adopting the configuration of this embodiment has a great advantage in this respect as well.

[How to specify audio output destination]
Next, referring to Figure 194, a method in which a player specifies the audio output destination in the pachinko machine 6001 according to this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 194(A) shows a menu screen 6501 displayed on the display device 6007 by the player's operation. The menu screen 6501 is displayed on the display device 6007 when the player presses (or presses and holds) one of the predetermined buttons (e.g., the performance button 6054 or the operation unit 6066) of the pachinko machine 6001. The menu screen 6501 has "volume adjustment" and "return to play" as selection items. When the player operates a predetermined button of the pachinko machine 6001 to select "volume adjustment" and give an instruction to confirm, the display of the display device 6007 transitions to the volume adjustment screen 6502 shown in FIG. 194(B). When the player selects "return to play" and gives an instruction to confirm, the display of the menu screen 6501 is controlled to disappear. Note that the menu screen 6501 is shown in a simplified form here, but the selection items of the menu screen 6501 may be, for example, each item of the menu screen shown in FIG. 171(A).

On the volume adjustment screen 6502 shown in FIG. 194 (B), the player can adjust the volume of the pachinko machine 6001 and specify whether or not to enable headphone/earphone output (specify whether or not to enable headphone/earphone output).

If the checkbox specifying whether or not to output to headphones/earphones is not checked, the sound from the pachinko machine 6001 will be output to the speaker 6032, and the volume can be adjusted here. The volume can be adjusted to seven levels by operating the button associated with "+" or the button associated with "-", for example, and this allows the volume of the sound output to the speaker 6032 of the pachinko machine 6001 to be adjusted. Here, the leftmost volume value is "0", and with this setting, no sound is output from the speaker 6032. However, in this embodiment, error sounds and warning sounds other than those for the effects are controlled to be output from the speaker 6032 at a volume above a certain value, regardless of the volume value of the volume adjustment.

When the headphone/earphone output checkbox is checked, sounds related to the effects of the pachinko machine 6001, as well as error sounds, warning sounds, and other sounds other than effects, are not output from the speaker 6032, but are instead output to the player's headphones or earphones via the gaming device 7001. At this time, the volume of the sounds output to the speaker 6032 of the pachinko machine 6001 is reduced (for example, the volume setting of the volume control on the volume adjustment screen 6502 is automatically set to 0), and cannot be changed while the headphone/earphone output checkbox is checked.

After that, by operating a specific button, selecting "OK" on the volume adjustment screen 6502 and giving an instruction to confirm, the volume adjustment and the settings for headphone/earphone output are confirmed, and then selecting "Return to menu screen" and giving an instruction to confirm will return to the menu screen 6501 in FIG. 194 (A).

In the above example, when the checkbox for headphone/earphone output is checked, the volume of the sound output to the speaker 6032 of the pachinko machine 6001 is set to 0, and nothing is output from the speaker 6032. In this case, however, the volume of the sound output to the speaker 6032 may be set to a low volume such as "1" or "2."

In this way, by operating the pachinko machine 6001 that the player is using to play, the player can specify whether the sound output to the speaker 6032 is to be output directly to the speaker 6032 or to be heard through headphones or earphones.

In this embodiment, as described above, the menu screen 6501, etc. is displayed on the display device 6007 by the player's operation, and the screen is operated by pressing a specific button on the pachinko machine 6001. However, for example, in the pachinko slot machine 4001 according to the third embodiment, the menu screen 6501, etc. can be displayed on the first sub-display device 4201, and the screen can be operated by the player's touch operation.

[Configuration of the gaming device]
Fig. 195 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a gaming device 7001. The gaming device 7001 shown in Fig. 195 is, for example, the gaming device 7001 of the type shown in Fig. 191.

As in the case shown in FIG. 191, the gaming device 7001 has a pachinko machine 6001 placed on the left side, and as shown, infrared rays emitted from the sound output LED 6045 of the pachinko machine 6001 are received by an infrared receiving unit 7011 placed on the left side of the gaming device 7001. More specifically, infrared rays emitted from the sound output LED-A 6045a of the pachinko machine 6001 are received by infrared receiving unit A 7011a, and infrared rays emitted from the sound output LED-B 6045b are received by infrared receiving unit B 7011b.

The infrared receiving unit A7011a and the infrared receiving unit B7011b are composed of, for example, a photodiode or a phototransistor, and can amplify and extract the current generated by the emitted light. As described above, the infrared light emitted from the sound output LED-A6045a and the infrared light emitted from the sound output LED-B6045b output carrier waves of different frequencies, so the infrared receiving unit 7011 can extract audio information from the corresponding sound output LED 6045 due to this difference in frequency. Also, if the pachinko machine 6001 has three or more sound output LEDs 6045, corresponding infrared receiving units can be provided according to the number.

The gaming device 7001 in FIG. 195 also has a shielding section 7012 that blocks the intrusion of light between the pachinko machine 6001 and the gaming device 7001, preventing the infrared receiving section 7011 from receiving disturbances (noise). However, generally, lighting in gaming establishments and LEDs in the pachinko machine 6001 have different frequencies from the infrared LEDs of this embodiment and are therefore not affected. In such cases, such shielding section 7012 can be omitted and the gaming device 7001 can be placed at a certain distance from the pachinko machine 6001.

The gaming device 7001 in FIG. 195 is provided with an audio output terminal 7006 (so-called earphone jack) for inserting the plug of an audio cable for wired headphones or earphones. The gaming device 7001 is also provided with a volume operation unit 7005 (volume knob) for adjusting the volume of the audio when using wired headphones or earphones.

The gaming device 7001 in FIG. 195 is also provided with four buttons 7008 that are used when using wireless headphones or earphones. The first button 7008a is a button that turns on the power to the circuit that performs wireless output (wireless output control unit 7007, described later). When pressed, the power to the circuit is turned on, and then the device automatically transitions to a pairing mode in which pairing is performed to establish a session with the headphones or earphones to be connected.

Pressing and holding the second button 7008b pairs the device with the headphones or earphones to be connected. Pressing and holding the third button 7008c decreases the volume, and pressing and holding the fourth button 7008d increases the volume.

Up to this point, we have explained the configuration of the gaming device 7001, but this configuration is merely an example, and gaming devices that achieve similar functions with various other appearances and circuit configurations can be conceived.

Next, the configuration of the gaming device 7001 will be described with reference to FIG. 196. The gaming device 7001 includes two infrared receiving units 7011 (infrared receiving unit A 7011a and infrared receiving unit B 7011b), an infrared reception control unit 7002, a headphone amplifier 7003, a volume circuit 7004, a volume operation unit 7005, an audio output terminal 7006, a wireless output control unit 7007, a button 7008, an antenna 7009, and a power management unit 7010.

As described above, the two infrared receiving units 7011 are circuits including photodiodes and phototransistors that receive infrared light emitted from the audio output LED 6045 of the opposing pachinko machine 6001, amplify and extract the current generated by the emitted light, and transmit the value to the connected infrared reception control unit 7002.

The two infrared receiving units 7011 are each associated with one audio output LED 6045, with the infrared receiving unit A 7011a configured to receive infrared light emitted from the audio output LED-A 6045a and the infrared receiving unit B 7011b configured to receive infrared light emitted from the audio output LED-B 6045b.

The infrared reception control unit 7002 is a circuit that generates a digital audio signal based on data received from the two infrared receiving units 7011, and transmits the digital audio signal to the headphone amplifier 7003 and the wireless output control unit 7007. The infrared reception control unit 7002 also receives, for example, an L+R analog signal (main channel signal) from the infrared receiving unit A 7011a, and an L-R analog signal (sub-channel signal) from the infrared receiving unit B 7011b, and generates a digital audio signal (L) and a digital audio signal (R) from these signals. This specification is based on, for example, the standard (JEITA CP-1208) for analog audio transmission systems using infrared as a medium.

The headphone amplifier 7003 is a circuit that receives a digital audio signal (L) and a digital audio signal (R) from the infrared reception control unit 7002, converts these audio signals into analog signals, amplifies them, and provides them to the audio output terminal 7006. The audio output terminal 7006 is a so-called earphone jack, and by connecting an audio cable for wired headphones or earphones to this terminal (i.e., inserting the plug of the audio cable into the earphone jack), the player can listen to the sound output from the pachinko machine 6001 through the wired headphones or earphones.

The volume of the audio signal (L/R) output from the headphone amplifier 7003 is adjusted by a volume circuit 7004 (e.g., a circuit including a variable resistor), and the volume value is adjusted by the player operating the volume control unit 7005 (e.g., a volume knob as shown in FIG. 195).

The wireless output control unit 7007 is a circuit that receives a digital audio signal (L) and a digital audio signal (R) from the infrared reception control unit 7002, compresses (encodes) these audio signals, and controls the wireless transmission of the compressed data from the antenna 7009.

Buttons 7008 are buttons 7008a to 7008d as shown in FIG. 195, and as described above, these buttons are used to turn on the power, perform pairing, and increase/decrease the volume.

The wireless headphones or earphones paired with the wireless output control unit 7007 decode the data (compressed data) received via wireless communication and play the audio, allowing the player to listen to the audio output from the pachinko machine 6001 using the wireless headphones or earphones.

The power management unit 7010 is a circuit that provides power to each of the above circuits. The power management unit 7010 can use, for example, a lithium ion polymer battery built into the gaming device 7001 as its power source. It can also be configured to take power via a USB cable or charge a built-in battery such as a lithium ion polymer battery. A USB terminal into which the terminal of a USB cable can be inserted is arranged, for example, in the card unit 6180 or in island equipment related to an "island" where multiple pachinko machines 6001 are arranged, and power can be supplied from these.

(Variation 1)
Next, a gaming device 7201 which is a modified example of the gaming device 7001 will be described with reference to FIGS.

Figure 197 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the gaming device 7201. Like the gaming device 7001, the gaming device 7201 shown in Figure 197 is also a gaming device of the type shown in Figure 191.

As in the case shown in FIG. 191, the gaming device 7201 has a pachinko machine 6001 placed on the left side, and although not shown, infrared rays emitted from the sound output LED 6045 of the pachinko machine 6001 are received by an infrared receiving unit 7211 placed on the left side of the gaming device 7201.

The gaming device 7201 in FIG. 197 is also provided with an audio output terminal 7206 (so-called earphone jack) for inserting the plug of an audio cable for wired headphones or earphones. The gaming device 7201 is also provided with a power button 7213 and a touch panel display unit 7224.

Next, the configuration of the gaming device 7201 will be described with reference to FIG. 198. The gaming device 7201 is configured as one computer system, and includes a CPU 7221, a ROM 7222, a RAM 7223, a touch panel display unit 7224, two infrared receiving units 7211 (infrared receiving unit A 7211a, infrared receiving unit B 7211b), an infrared reception control unit 7202, a headphone amplifier 7203, an audio output terminal 7206, a wireless output control unit 7207, an antenna 7209, a power management unit 7210, and a power button 7213.

The CPU 7221 executes the programs stored in the ROM 7222 and controls each component of the gaming device 7201. The RAM 7223 temporarily stores data generated during execution of the programs. It also continuously holds setting information related to audio output.

The infrared receiving unit 7211 (infrared receiving unit A 7211a, infrared receiving unit B 7211b) is configured to include, for example, a photodiode or a phototransistor, and can amplify and extract the current generated by the emitted light. Since the infrared rays emitted from the two corresponding audio output LEDs output carrier waves of different frequencies, the infrared receiving unit 7211 can extract audio information from the corresponding audio output LED due to this difference in frequency.

Under the control of the CPU 7221, the infrared reception control unit 7202 generates a digital audio signal based on the data received from the two infrared receiving units 7211, and transmits the digital audio signal to the headphone amplifier 7203 and the wireless output control unit 7207. The operation of the infrared reception control unit 7202 is similar to that of the infrared reception control unit 7002 of the gaming device 7001 described above, and for example receives an L+R analog signal (main channel signal) from the infrared receiving unit A 7211a, receives an L-R analog signal (sub-channel signal) from the infrared receiving unit B 7211b, and generates a digital audio signal (L) and a digital audio signal (R) from these signals.

Under the control of the CPU 7221, the headphone amplifier 7203 receives a digital audio signal (L) and a digital audio signal (R) from the infrared reception control unit 7202, converts these audio signals to analog signals, amplifies them, and provides them to the audio output terminal 7206. The audio output terminal 7206 is a so-called earphone jack, and by connecting an audio cable for wired headphones or earphones to this terminal, the player can listen to the sound output from the pachinko machine 6001 through the wired headphones or earphones.

Under the control of the CPU 7221, the wireless output control unit 7207 receives a digital audio signal (L) and a digital audio signal (R) from the infrared reception control unit 7202, compresses (encodes) these audio signals, and controls the compressed data to be wirelessly transmitted from the antenna 7209.

When the power management unit 7210 detects that the power button 7213 has been pressed, it provides power to each component.

The touch panel display unit 7224 is a display device that can be operated by the player through touch, and displays a setting screen and the like under the control of the CPU 7221, and the contents set therein are stored in the RAM 7223 (e.g., flash memory). On the setting screen, it is possible to set the volume when outputting sound to the wired sound device 8001 and the volume when outputting sound to the wireless sound device 8002. The CPU 7221 refers to the volume value set on such a setting screen, and instructs the headphone amplifier 7203 to output sound from the wired sound device 8001 at the specified volume, and instructs the wireless output control unit 7207 to output sound from the wireless sound device 8002 at the specified volume.

The setting screen displayed on the touch panel display unit 7224 also displays information related to pairing when the wireless output control unit 7207 and the wireless audio device 8002 are paired.

Figure 199 shows an example of a setting screen displayed on the touch panel display unit 7224. Figure 199 (A) shows a menu screen 7305, and Figure 199 (B) shows a volume adjustment screen 7306.

The menu screen 7305 in FIG. 199(A) is displayed, for example, when the player touches the touch panel display unit 7224, and the menu screen 7305 displays options for selecting which settings to make. In this example, one of "volume adjustment," "pairing," and "clear settings" can be selected by touch operation.

When the "Volume Adjustment" selection item is touched on the menu screen 7305, the display on the touch panel display unit 7224 transitions to a volume adjustment screen 7306 as shown in FIG. 199 (B). On the volume adjustment screen 7306, the output volume can be adjusted for each of the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002. For the wired audio device 8001, the volume can be adjusted to seven levels by touching the "+" or "-" to the right of the "Wired headphones/earphones" display, thereby adjusting the volume of the sound output to the wired audio device 8001. Here, the volume value on the far left is "0", and with this setting, no sound is output from the wired audio device 8001.

Similarly, for the wireless audio device 8002, the volume can be adjusted to seven different volume values by touching the "+" or "-" to the right of the "wireless headphones/earphones" display, thereby adjusting the volume of the sound output to the wireless audio device 8002. Here, the leftmost volume value is "0," and with this setting, no sound is output from the wireless audio device 8002.

In this embodiment, when the cable of the wired audio device 8001 is connected to the audio output terminal 7206, audio is output from the wired audio device 8001. In this case, the volume setting of the wireless audio device 8002 is irrelevant and any value may be set. Similarly, when pairing is performed for the wireless audio device 8002 and the gaming device 7201 is connected, audio is output from the wireless audio device 8002. In this case, the volume setting of the wired audio device 8001 is irrelevant and any value may be set. In other words, in the gaming device 7201, the digital audio signal from the infrared reception control unit 7202 is output to both the headphone amplifier 7203 and the wireless output control unit 7207, regardless of which audio device actually outputs the audio, and the audio signal is processed there.

However, the volume adjustment screen 7306 can be used to allow the player to specify whether the audio device to be used is a wired audio device 8001 or a wireless audio device 8002, and for audio devices that are not being used, the infrared reception control unit 7202 can be controlled not to send digital audio signals to the associated audio transmission unit (i.e., the headphone amplifier 7203 or wireless output control unit 7207) so that processing by that audio transmission unit is not performed.

After setting the volume on the volume adjustment screen 7306, touch "OK" to confirm the volume adjustment settings, and then touch "Return to menu screen" to return to the menu screen 7305 in FIG. 199 (A).

Touching "Pairing" on the menu screen 7305 in FIG. 199(A) performs pairing to connect the wireless audio device 8002 to the wireless output control unit 7207 of the gaming device 7201. Although not shown here, for example, when the wireless audio device 8002 receives audio signals via Bluetooth (registered trademark), touching "Pairing" displays a list of wireless devices including the player's wireless audio device 8002, and the player selects his/her own wireless audio device 8002 from the list to establish a connection.

When "Clear Settings" is touched on the menu screen 7305 in FIG. 199 (A), the volume value previously set is reset to the default value and the pairing settings are cleared.

Up to this point, we have explained the configuration of the gaming device 7201, but this configuration is merely an example, and gaming devices that achieve similar functions with various other appearances and system configurations can be conceived.

(Variation 2)
Next, the gaming system PS210 will be described with reference to Fig. 200 and Fig. 201. The gaming system PS210 has a pachinko machine 6601 which is basically the same in configuration as the pachinko machine 6001 but which emits infrared rays in a different direction, and a card unit 6700 which is essentially a configuration in which a gaming device 7201 is incorporated into a card unit 6180 (see Fig. 192). Note that here, the internal configuration of the pachinko machine 6601 will be indicated using the same reference numerals as those of the pachinko machine 6001.

Figure 200(A) is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine 6601 and a card unit 6700. Here, the pachinko machine 6601 and the card unit 6700 are spaced apart to clearly show the direction of the infrared rays emitted from the pachinko machine 6601, but in reality, the two are placed close to each other, as shown in Figure 200(B).

As can be seen from Fig. 200(A) and Fig. 200(B), the pachinko machine 6601 has two sound output LEDs 6045 (sound output LED-A 6045a, sound output LED-B 6045b) located at the top of the left side as viewed from the front, and emits infrared rays to the left as viewed from the front. The card unit 6700 is placed close to the right side of the pachinko machine 6601, receives infrared rays emitted from the pachinko machine 6601 with two infrared receivers 6711 located at the top of the right side as viewed from the front, and outputs sound to the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002 based on the received light.

The audio cable of the wired audio device 8001 is connected to an audio output terminal 6706 provided at the bottom of the front of the card unit 6700.

Figure 201 is a diagram showing the configuration of the card unit 6700. As described above, this card unit 6700 is the card unit 6180 shown in Figure 192 with the gaming device 7201 shown in Figure 198 incorporated into it.

As shown in FIG. 201, the card unit 6700 includes a CPU 6721, a ROM 6722, a RAM 6723, a card reader/writer 6731, a bill identification device 6732, a coin insertion sensor 6733, an interface 6735, a touch panel display unit 6724, two infrared receiving units 6711 (infrared receiving unit A 6711a and infrared receiving unit B 6711b), an infrared reception control unit 6702, a headphone amplifier 6703, an audio output terminal 6706, a wireless output control unit 6707, an antenna 6709, a power management unit 6710, and a power button 6713.

The CPU 6721 executes the programs stored in the ROM 6722 and controls each component of the card unit 6700. The RAM 6723 temporarily stores data generated during execution of the programs. It also continuously holds certain information related to the game and setting information related to audio output.

The card reader/writer 6731 is, for example, a non-contact IC card reader/writer that reads information from a player's card (for example, a ball loan card, etc.), the bill identification device 6732 determines the type and authenticity of bills inserted through the bill insertion slot, and the coin insertion sensor 6733 determines the type and authenticity of coins inserted through the coin insertion slot. The CPU 6721 controls the lending of gaming media (gaming balls and medals) according to the player's card, inserted bills, and inserted coins.

The touch panel display unit 6724 is a display device that can be operated by the player through touch, and includes, for example, the functions of the ball lending operation panel 6182 of the card unit 6180. Under the control of the CPU 6721, the touch panel display unit 6724 displays screens for instructing processes related to the lending and paying out of gaming media, settlement, counting, etc., and setting screens for adjusting the volume of the sound output to the audio device, etc.

Each component of the card unit 6700, which will be described below, basically has the same function as the components of the gaming device 7201.

The infrared receiving unit 6711 (infrared receiving unit A 6711a, infrared receiving unit B 6711b) is configured to include, for example, a photodiode or phototransistor, and can amplify and extract the current generated by the emitted light. Since the infrared rays emitted from the two corresponding sound output LEDs (sound output LED-A 6045a, sound output LED-B 6045b) output carrier waves of different frequencies, the infrared receiving unit 6711 can extract audio information from the corresponding sound output LED due to this difference in frequency. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 6601 has three or more sound output LEDs 6045, corresponding infrared receiving units can be provided according to the number.

Under the control of the CPU 6721, the infrared reception control unit 6702 generates a digital audio signal based on the data received from the two infrared receiving units 6711, and transmits the digital audio signal to the headphone amplifier 6703 and the wireless output control unit 6707. The infrared reception control unit 6702 also receives, for example, an L+R analog signal (main channel signal) from the infrared receiving unit A 6711a, and an L-R analog signal (sub-channel signal) from the infrared receiving unit B 6711b, and generates a digital audio signal (L) and a digital audio signal (R) from these signals.

Under the control of the CPU 6721, the headphone amplifier 6703 receives a digital audio signal (L) and a digital audio signal (R) from the infrared reception control unit 6702, converts these audio signals to analog signals, amplifies them, and provides them to the audio output terminal 6706. The audio output terminal 6706 is a so-called earphone jack, and by connecting an audio cable for wired headphones or earphones to this terminal, the player can listen to the sound output from the pachinko machine 6601 through the wired headphones or earphones.

Under the control of the CPU 6721, the wireless output control unit 6707 receives a digital audio signal (L) and a digital audio signal (R) from the infrared reception control unit 6702, compresses (encodes) these audio signals, and controls the compressed data to be wirelessly transmitted from the antenna 6709.

When the power management unit 6710 detects that the power button 6713 has been pressed, it provides power to each component.

In particular, the contents set on the setting screen are stored in RAM 6723 (e.g., flash memory). On the setting screen, it is possible to set the volume when outputting audio to wired audio device 8001 and the volume when outputting audio to wireless audio device 8002. The CPU 6721 refers to the volume value set on such a setting screen and instructs the headphone amplifier 6703 to output audio from wired audio device 8001 at the specified volume, and instructs the wireless output control unit 6707 to output audio from wireless audio device 8002 at the specified volume.

The setting screen displayed on the touch panel display unit 6724 also displays information related to pairing when the wireless output control unit 6707 and the wireless audio device 8002 are paired.

Up to this point, the configuration of the card unit 6700 has been described, but this configuration is merely an example, and gaming devices that achieve similar functions with various other appearances and system configurations can be considered. In addition, there are various other configurations (for example, configurations related to the lending and dispensing of gaming media) other than the main configuration of the present application, which is to receive infrared light and output sound to an audio device.

(Variation 3)
Next, the gaming system PS220 will be described with reference to Fig. 202 and Fig. 203. The gaming system PS220 includes a pachinko machine 6701 and a data display device 6801, and is, for example, a gaming system PS100 of the tenth embodiment to which the one-way non-contact voice communication function of the present application has been added. Note that, here, the internal configuration of the pachinko machine 6701 will be indicated by the same reference numerals as those of the pachinko machine 6001.

The gaming system PS100 of the tenth embodiment includes a gaming machine 3001 and a data display 2501. The light output from the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 is captured by the image sensor unit 2811 of the data display 2501 mounted on the top of the gaming machine 3001. The data display 2501 determines the presentation pattern of the gaming machine 3001 from the captured image, and controls the liquid crystal display 2502 of the data display 2501 to display a corresponding image according to the presentation pattern thus determined (see FIG. 149). In addition, the data display 2501 is provided with a call button 2505 for calling a member of staff at the gaming facility.

The pachinko machine 6701 shown in FIG. 202 corresponds to the gaming machine 3001 described above, and like the gaming machine 3001, has a lamp 6804 (corresponding to the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001). The data display 6801 shown in FIG. 202 corresponds to the data display 2501 described above, and the image sensor unit 6831, liquid crystal display 6824, and call button 6832 correspond to the image sensor unit 2811, liquid crystal display 2502, and call button 2505 of the gaming machine 3001 described above, respectively. That is, the image sensor unit 6831 of the data display 6801 captures visible light from the lamp 6804 of the pachinko machine 6701 to grasp the performance pattern of the pachinko machine 6701, etc.

The pachinko machine 6701 in FIG. 202 is also equipped with two audio output LEDs (audio output LED-A 6045a and audio output LED-B 6045b) that each emit infrared light in order to realize the one-way non-contact audio communication function of the present application. On the other hand, the data display 6801 (not shown in FIG. 202) has an infrared receiving unit 6811 at its bottom for receiving infrared light emitted from the audio output LED 6045 of the pachinko machine 6701.

The data display 6801 includes a configuration similar to that of the gaming device 7201 of the present application described above (see FIG. 198), and audio is provided to the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002 based on infrared rays received by the infrared receiving unit 6811. In addition, the audio cable of the wired audio device 8001 is connected to an audio output terminal 6806 provided at the bottom of the side of the data display 6801.

In FIG. 202, the pachinko machine 6701 and the data display 6801 are spaced apart to clearly show the direction of the infrared rays emitted from the pachinko machine 6701, but in reality, as shown in FIG. 203, the two are placed close to each other (for example, the data display 6801 is placed (fixedly if necessary) on top of the pachinko machine 6701).

Up to this point, we have described the configuration of the present application applied to the configuration of the gaming system PS100 of the tenth embodiment, but this configuration is merely an example, and gaming systems that realize the functions of the present application can be conceived using various other system configurations. For example, the configuration of the gaming system PS100 (the configuration of capturing an image of the light output from the lamp of the pachinko machine with the image sensor unit of the data display device and understanding the performance pattern of the pachinko machine from that image) can be deleted.

(Variation 4)
Next, the gaming system PS230 will be described with reference to Fig. 204(A). The gaming system PS230 includes a pachinko machine 6001a which is an improvement over the pachinko machine 6001 (see Figs. 192 and 193) of the gaming system PS200, and a gaming device 7301 which is an improvement over the gaming device 7201 (see Fig. 198).

Similar to the gaming system PS200, the gaming system PS230 receives infrared rays emitted from the sound output LED of the pachinko machine 6001a with an infrared receiving unit of the gaming device 7301, generates an audio signal based on the light received by the infrared receiving unit, and outputs it to the wired audio device 8001, etc.

In the gaming system PS200, the sounds output to the wired audio device 8001 and the like are sounds that should be output to the speakers of the gaming machine, such as sounds related to the game presentation, error sounds and warning sounds related to the gaming machine. However, in the gaming system PS230, in addition to the sounds that should be output to the speakers of the gaming machine, sounds generated by playing on the gaming machine (such as the rolling sounds of game balls, the payout sounds of medals, the movement sounds of role-playing objects, etc.), emergency broadcasts by the gaming establishment in the event of a disaster (notification of the occurrence of a disaster and evacuation guidance), advertising and guidance broadcasts at the gaming establishment, and background music at the gaming establishment are output to the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002 along with the sounds that should be output to the speakers of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the gaming system PS230, the sound output to the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002 has the characteristic of being almost completely free of surrounding sounds, including sounds from other gaming machines, making it suitable for recording as content to be distributed on SNS (social networking service) or video posting sites. In light of this, it is possible to control the replacement of the sounds (music) related to the effects of the gaming machines and the background music in the gaming establishment with content that can be distributed without problems (i.e., content that will not cause copyright issues when distributed).

In addition, in the gaming system PS230, when the pachinko machine 6001a outputs sounds generated by playing on the gaming machine (for example, the sounds of the game balls rolling, the sounds of medals being paid out, the sounds of props moving, etc.), the sound is acquired using a built-in microphone (preferably a directional microphone), the acquired sound is synthesized with the sound to be output to the speaker of the gaming machine, and based on the synthesized sound, corresponding infrared rays are emitted from the sound output LED. Also, sounds generated by playing on the gaming machine may be synthesized with pre-stored pseudo sounds in accordance with the timing of the effects, etc., without being acquired by the built-in microphone. Such pseudo sounds may be stored, for example, in a storage means corresponding to the sound data ROM 6310 shown in FIG. 193.

The gaming system PS230 also includes a hall computer 6186a which is an improved version of the hall computer 6186 shown in FIG. 192, and this hall computer 6186a provides emergency broadcasts (disaster alerts and evacuation guidance) from the gaming establishment in the event of a disaster, advertising and information broadcasts from the gaming establishment, and background music from the gaming establishment to the gaming establishment as required, as specified by the gaming device 7301. It is also possible to set it to output audio for distribution at this time.

Here, the hall computer 6186a provides the above-mentioned sound to the gaming device 7301 via a wireless LAN antenna (access point) placed on the ceiling or the like of the gaming parlor, as shown in FIG. 204, and the gaming device 7301 synthesizes the sound from the pachinko machine 6001a (i.e., the sound generated by light received by an infrared receiving unit) with the sound from the hall computer 6186a (i.e., the sound received by wireless LAN), and outputs the synthesized sound to a wired audio device 8001, etc.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned standard (JEITA CP-1208), carrier waves of different frequencies are assigned to eight channels (H1 to H8). For example, sounds related to the effects of games and error and warning sounds related to the gaming machine can be assigned to channels H1 and H2, sounds generated by games played on the gaming machine (for example, the rolling sounds of game balls, the payout sounds of medals, the movement sounds of role-playing objects, etc.) can be assigned to channels H3 and H4, emergency broadcasts by the gaming establishment in the event of a disaster (disaster notification and evacuation guidance) can be assigned to channels H5 and H6, and advertising and information broadcasts at the gaming establishment and background music at the gaming establishment can be assigned to channels H7 and H8, and these can be provided to the gaming device 7301.

In this modified example, the sound from the hall computer 6186a is transmitted to the gaming device 7301 via wireless LAN, but similar to the mechanism by which sound from the pachinko machine 6001a is provided to the gaming device 7301, sound data relating to the sound can also be transmitted using infrared rays. In this case, sound output LEDs are provided on the ceiling of the gaming establishment, and the gaming device 7301 is provided with a dedicated infrared receiving unit that receives infrared rays from the sound output LEDs.

Figure 204 (B) shows a gaming system PS240 including a pachinko machine 6601a which is an improved version of the pachinko machine 6601 (see Figure 200) of the gaming system PS210, and a card unit 6700a which is an improved version of the card unit 6700.

In this gaming system PS240, like the gaming system PS230, not only the sounds to be output to the speakers of the gaming machines, but also sounds generated by playing on the gaming machines (for example, the sounds of game balls rolling, the sounds of medals being paid out, the sounds of reels moving, etc.), emergency broadcasts from the gaming establishment in the event of a disaster (notification of the occurrence of a disaster and evacuation guidance), advertising and information broadcasts from the gaming establishment, background music from the gaming establishment, etc. are output to the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002 along with the sounds to be output to the speakers of the gaming machines.

For this reason, in the gaming system PS240, a configuration similar to that of the pachinko machine 6001a of the gaming system PS230 described above is added to the pachinko machine 6601a. Also, a configuration similar to that of the gaming device 7301 of the gaming system PS230 described above is added to the card unit 6700a. However, in this example, the sound provided by the hall computer 6186b is transmitted to the card unit 6700a via a wired LAN connection between the hall computer 6186b and the card unit 6700a.

Figure 205 is a diagram showing the configuration of the gaming device 7301 described in Figure 204 (A). As described above, the gaming device 7301 is an improved version of the gaming device 7201 (see Figure 198), so similar components are given the same reference numerals as the gaming device 7201 and descriptions are omitted.

Compared to the gaming device 7201, the gaming device 7301 shown in FIG. 205 has been added with a wireless communication control unit 7231 and a voice synthesis unit 7232. The wireless communication control unit 7231 establishes a wireless LAN communication connection with the hall computer 6186a, and controls the reception of the above-mentioned voice data (i.e., emergency broadcasts from the gaming establishment in the event of a disaster (notification of the occurrence of a disaster and evacuation guidance), advertising and guidance broadcasts at the gaming establishment, background music at the gaming establishment, etc.) from the hall computer 6186a. This wireless LAN communication is based on a communication standard such as IEEE802.11n.

The voice synthesis unit 7232 synthesizes the voice data (digital voice signal) received by the wireless communication control unit 7231 from the hall computer 6186a with the voice data (digital voice signal) generated by the infrared reception control unit 7202 based on infrared rays from the pachinko machine 6001a, and transmits the synthesized digital voice signal to the headphone amplifier 7203 and the wireless output control unit 7207. Note that in this embodiment, the voice synthesis unit 7232 performs the synthesis process of the voice data, but the synthesis process of the voice data may be performed by other functional units such as the wireless communication control unit 7231 and the infrared reception control unit 7202.

The configuration of the card unit 6700a described in FIG. 204(B) will not be described here, but similar to the gaming device 7301 shown in FIG. 205, the communication control unit receives audio data such as the emergency broadcasts of the gaming parlor in the event of a disaster, as described above, from the hall computer 6186b (connected via a wired LAN), and the audio synthesis unit synthesizes the audio data (digital audio signal) received by the communication control unit from the hall computer 6186b with the audio data (digital audio signal) generated by the infrared reception control unit 6702 based on infrared rays from the pachinko machine 6601a, and transmits the synthesized digital audio signal to the headphone amplifier 6703 and the wireless output control unit 6707.

Figure 206 shows an example of a setting screen displayed on the display device of the pachinko machine 6001a shown in Figure 204 (A) or the pachinko machine 6601a shown in Figure 204 (B) (a display device corresponding to the display device 6007 of the pachinko machine 6001). Figure 206 (A) shows a menu screen 6511 displayed on the display device by the player's operation. The menu screen 6511 is displayed on the display device when the player presses (or presses and holds) a specific button on the pachinko machine 6001a or the pachinko machine 6601a.

Menu screen 6511 has options such as "volume adjustment," "headphone/earphone output," and "return to play." By operating a specific button on the pachinko machine to select "volume adjustment" and giving an instruction to confirm, the screen will transition to volume adjustment screen 6502 as shown in FIG. 194 (B), for example, where the volume of the pachinko machine is adjusted (however, this screen does not specify whether or not to use headphone/earphone output, as in volume adjustment screen 6502).

Figure 206 (B) shows a headphone/earphone output instruction screen 6512 that is displayed when "Headphone/earphone output" is selected on the menu screen 6511 and a confirmation instruction is given.

In this headphone/earphone output instruction screen 6512, the player can operate a specific button on the pachinko machine to specify whether or not to output to headphones/earphones (whether or not to output to headphones/earphones). If the check box for specifying whether or not to output to headphones/earphones is checked here, the volume of the sound from the pachinko machine is reduced (for example, the volume value is automatically changed to 0 or a specific small value) regardless of the volume adjustment specified via the menu screen 6511, and it is controlled so that it cannot be changed until the check box for specifying whether or not to output to headphones/earphones is unchecked.

The pachinko machine player can also select the content of the audio to be output to the headphones or earphones on the headphone/earphone output instruction screen 6512 in FIG. 206 (B). In this example, the items "Game machine audio," "Game machine live audio," and "For distribution" are listed, with check boxes set for each.

The "Game Machine Sound" check box is shown checked and hatched, meaning that it must be checked and cannot be unchecked. Additionally, the volume of each item can be adjusted individually (not shown).

In the above items, "gaming machine sound" is sound to be output from the gaming machine's speaker, such as sounds related to the game's presentation, error sounds related to the gaming machine, warning sounds, etc. "Gaming machine live sound" is live sound generated by playing on the gaming machine, such as the rolling sounds of gaming balls, the payout sounds of medals, the movement sounds of role-playing objects, etc. This sound data is acquired by a microphone built into the gaming machine, or provided as simulated sounds, and then synthesized with the gaming machine sound described above, and the synthesized sound data is emitted from the sound output LED as infrared rays corresponding to this sound data.

The "for distribution" designation is a designation to mute or replace the audio in order to avoid copyright issues when the audio output from the wired audio device 8001 or the wireless audio device 8002 is recorded or directly uploaded and provided to SNS or video distribution sites. Such adjustments to the content of the audio are related to the "game machine audio" item, for example.

After checking the checkboxes for each item indicating the content of the audio to be output to the headphones or earphones, the specified content is confirmed by selecting "Confirm", and then, by selecting "Return to menu screen" and issuing a confirmation command, the screen returns to the menu screen 6511 in FIG. 206 (A).

The contents of the designation specified via the menu screen 6511 and the headphone/earphone output instruction screen 6512, etc., are stored in the pachinko machine 6001a or the RAM of the pachinko machine 6601a (for example, a storage area corresponding to the work RAM 6303 of the pachinko machine 6001, etc.). The designation contents stored in this way are returned to the default value when an event that is considered to be a change of player is detected (for example, when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on, when the player has not played for a specified period of time, when a return operation of a ball loan card or the like is performed in the card unit, when counting of game media is instructed (when a counting system for each machine is provided for each machine), etc.).

Figure 207 shows an example of a setting screen displayed on the touch panel display unit of the gaming device 7301 shown in Figure 204 (A) or the card unit 6700a shown in Figure 204 (B) (a display device corresponding to the touch panel display unit 7224 of the gaming device 7201 or the touch panel display unit 6724 of the card unit 6700). Figure 207 (A) shows a menu screen 7305, Figure 207 (B) shows a volume adjustment screen 7306, and Figure 207 (C) shows a headphone/earphone output instruction screen.

The menu screen 7311 in FIG. 207(A) is displayed, for example, when the player touches the touch panel display unit, and the menu screen 7311 displays options for selecting which settings to make. In this example, one of "volume adjustment," "headphone/earphone output," "pairing," and "clear settings" can be selected by touch operation.

When the "Volume Adjustment" selection item is touched on the menu screen 7311, the display on the touch panel display unit transitions to the volume adjustment screen 7312 shown in FIG. 207 (B). On the volume adjustment screen 7312, the output volume can be adjusted for each of the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002. For the wired audio device 8001, the volume can be adjusted to seven levels by touching the "+" or "-" to the right of the "Wired headphones/earphones" display, thereby adjusting the volume of the sound output to the wired audio device 8001. Here, the volume value on the far left is "0", and with this setting, no sound is output from the wired audio device 8001.

Similarly, for the wireless audio device 8002, the volume can be adjusted to seven different volume values by touching the "+" or "-" to the right of the "wireless headphones/earphones" display, thereby adjusting the volume of the sound output to the wireless audio device 8002. Here, the leftmost volume value is "0," and with this setting, no sound is output from the wireless audio device 8002.

After setting the volume on the volume adjustment screen 7312, touch "OK" to confirm the volume adjustment settings, and then touch "Return to menu screen" to return to the menu screen 7305 in FIG. 207 (A).

When the "Headphone/earphone output" selection item is touched on the menu screen 7311, the display on the touch panel display unit transitions to the headphone/earphone output instruction screen 7313 shown in FIG. 207 (C), where the user can specify whether or not to enable headphone/earphone output (whether or not to enable headphone/earphone output).

On the headphone/earphone output instruction screen 6512 of FIG. 206(B) shown on the display device of the pachinko machine, the player can select "game machine sound", "game machine live sound", or "for distribution" as the content of the sound to be output to the headphones or earphones. Here, however, the items "in-store emergency broadcast", "in-store advertising/guide broadcast", "in-store BGM 1", and "in-store BGM 2" are further listed, and from these, the player can select the sound to be output to the headphones or earphones. The above list also includes the item "for distribution", just like the headphone/earphone output instruction screen 6512 of FIG. 206(B). A check box is set for each item in order to select each item.

An "in-store emergency broadcast" is an emergency broadcast made by an amusement establishment in the event of a disaster, and includes disaster occurrence notification and evacuation guidance. An "in-store advertising and information broadcast" is, for example, advertising for specific products and services at the amusement establishment, and information about events, etc. This content does not have to be content that is actually broadcast in real time at the amusement establishment, and may include, for example, targeted advertising in line with the tendencies of players who use headphones/earphones. "In-store BGM 1" and "In-store BGM 2" are background music provided by the amusement establishment, but do not have to be background music that is actually broadcast in real time at the amusement establishment.

The "In-store emergency announcement" check box is checked and hatched, indicating that due to the importance of the "In-store emergency announcement," it cannot be unchecked.

The "for distribution" designation is a designation to mute or replace the audio in order to avoid copyright issues when the audio output from the wired audio device 8001 or the wireless audio device 8002 is recorded or directly uploaded and provided to SNS or video distribution sites. Such adjustments to the content of the audio relate to the items "in-store BGM 1" and "in-store BGM 2", for example.

The overall volume can be set on the volume adjustment screen 7312 in FIG. 207(B), but the volume can also be set for each item (not shown). However, the volume for the "in-store emergency broadcast" cannot be set below a certain volume value.

After checking the checkboxes for each item indicating the content of the audio to be output to the headphones or earphones, the specified content is confirmed by selecting "Confirm", and then, by touching "Return to menu screen", the user returns to the menu screen 7311 in FIG. 207 (A).

The contents specified via the menu screen 7311, the volume adjustment screen 7312, the headphone/earphone output instruction screen 7313, etc. are stored in the RAM of the gaming device 7301 and the card unit 6700a. The contents thus stored can be reset to the default values by touching the "Clear Settings" item on the menu screen 7311 and performing a specified operation.

The behavior when "Pairing" is selected on menu screen 7311 is the same as when "Pairing" is selected on menu screen 7305 in FIG. 199 (A), so a description of this will be omitted here.

In this case, for each of the items "in-store emergency broadcast", "in-store advertising/guidance broadcast", "in-store BGM 1", and "in-store BGM 2", the gaming device 7301 and card unit 6700a receive these audio data from the hall computer 6186a etc., and then synthesize only the designated audio with the audio from the pachinko machine 6001a and pachinko machine 6601a. Alternatively, the gaming device 7301 and card unit 6700a may be configured to first transmit the designated item to the hall computer 6186a etc., and then receive only the audio data related to the designated item from the hall computer 6186a etc.

The gaming device 7301 and the card unit 6700a can also be configured to have a light-emitting unit that flashes visible light to the outside when audio data related to an "in-store emergency broadcast" is received from the hall computer 6186a or the like. With this configuration, the player can be made aware of an emergency not only by sound but also by sight.

Note that the "in-store advertising/information broadcasts," "in-store BGM 1," and "in-store BGM 2" transmitted from the hall computer 6186a, etc. may be different from what is actually being broadcast in the store.

So far, we have described gaming system PS230 and gaming system PS240 relating to variant example 4 with reference to Figures 204 to 207, but these configurations are merely examples, and the functions of the present application can be realized by various other configurations.

(Variation 5)
Next, the gaming system PS250 will be described with reference to Fig. 208. The gaming system PS250 includes the pachinko machine 6001a and the gaming device 7301 which are improved from the gaming device 7301 of the gaming system PS230, and further includes a hall computer 6186c which is an improved version of the hall computer 6186a, and a smartphone 5801 of a player.

Unlike the gaming device 7301, the gaming device 7301a does not receive audio data from the hall computer. Also, like the gaming device 7301, the gaming device 7301a receives infrared rays emitted from the audio output LED of the pachinko machine 6001a with an infrared receiving unit, generates an audio signal based on the light received by the infrared receiving unit, and outputs the digital audio data as a wireless signal (for example, Bluetooth (registered trademark)). However, in this case, the smartphone 5801 receives this digital audio data instead of the wireless audio device 8002 (the smartphone 5801 is paired with the wireless audio device). The digital audio data received by the smartphone 5801 may include "gaming machine audio" and "gaming machine live audio" as in the gaming system PS230.

The hall computer 6186c also transmits digital audio data related to "in-store emergency broadcasts," "in-store advertising and information broadcasts," "in-store BGM 1," "in-store BGM 2," etc., to the smartphone 5801, for example, via wireless LAN, in accordance with the content specified by the player via the application 5802 on the smartphone 5801. The hall computer 6186c may also transmit these sounds to the gaming device 7301a via optical communication using infrared rays (optical communication similar to the infrared transmission from the pachinko machine 6001a to the gaming device 7301a).

The application 5802 executed on the smartphone 5801 receives digital audio data related to "gaming machine sound" and "gaming machine live sound" from the gaming device 7301a via the wireless communication described above, as described above, and receives digital audio data related to "in-store emergency broadcasts," "in-store advertising and information broadcasts," "in-store BGM 1," "in-store BGM 2," etc., from the hall computer 6186c via wireless LAN. Furthermore, if music or the like is being played on the smartphone 5801, the application 5802 synthesizes all of the digital audio data and transmits the digital audio data to the wireless audio device 8002 paired (wirelessly connected) with the smartphone 5801.

With this configuration, the player can listen to the music being played on his or her smartphone 5801 while also listening to the audio from the pachinko machine 6001a, and can also listen to "in-store emergency broadcasts," "in-store advertising and information broadcasts," and the like, transmitted from the hall computer 6186c.

In addition, if music is not being played on the user's own smartphone 5801, the user can listen to background music provided by the arcade ("In-store BGM 1", "In-store BGM 2") from the hall computer 6186c.

In addition, the player can specify which sounds to listen to and the volume of each sound from the setting screen of the pachinko machine 6001a and the gaming device 7301, as in the gaming system PS230 and gaming system PS240. In addition, the settings made on the gaming device 7301, etc. using the menu screen 7311, volume adjustment screen 7312, and headphone/earphone output instruction screen 7313 in FIG. 207 can also be made using the application 5802 on the smartphone 5801.

Note that here, the final voice synthesis process including the music being played is performed by the application 5802 on the player's smartphone 5801, but the device that executes such processing is not limited to a smartphone and may be any other portable music playback device.

So far, we have described the gaming system PS250 relating to variant example 5 with reference to FIG. 208, but this configuration is merely an example, and the functions of the present application can be realized by various other configurations.

(Variation 6)
Next, the gaming system PS260 will be described with reference to Fig. 209. The gaming system PS260 includes the pachinko machine 6001a and the gaming device 7301b which is an improved version of the gaming device 7301 of the gaming system PS230, and further includes a chair 5201 used by the player when playing the game.

Like the gaming device 7301, the gaming device 7301b receives infrared rays emitted from the sound output LED of the pachinko machine 6001a with an infrared receiving unit of the gaming device 7301b, generates an audio signal based on the light received by the infrared receiving unit, and outputs digital audio data to the wired audio device 8001, etc. The chair 5201 receives infrared rays emitted from the sound output LED of the pachinko machine 6001a with an infrared receiving unit 5202 provided in the chair 5201, and controls it to vibrate based on the received light, so that the player is given vibrations synchronized with the sound of the pachinko machine 6001a.

To achieve this configuration, the infrared receiving unit of the chair 5201 is placed in a position where it can receive the sound output LED of the pachinko machine 6001a, and the gaming device 7301b is configured to have a transparent resin housing, for example, so that the infrared rays emitted from the sound output LED of the pachinko machine 6001a can be transmitted in the direction of the chair 5201, as shown in FIG. 209.

The infrared receiving unit 5202 of the chair 5201 has the same configuration as the infrared receiving unit of the gaming device 7301b (i.e., the same configuration as the infrared receiving unit 7211 of the gaming device 7201), and an infrared reception control unit (e.g., corresponding to the infrared receiving control unit 7202 of the gaming device 7201) connected to the infrared receiving unit 5202 activates a vibration device (e.g., a vibration motor) arranged on the seat or backrest of the chair 5201 according to the size and amplitude of the generated audio signal, and gives the player vibrations that change according to the audio from the pachinko machine 6001a. The so-called "Bodysonic" technologies can be introduced into such a configuration of the present application.

In the example shown in FIG. 209, the gaming device 7301b is attached to (or placed close to) the pachinko machine 6001a, but the gaming device 7301b can also be attached to or incorporated into the backrest of the chair 5201, receive infrared rays emitted from the sound output LED of the pachinko machine 6001a, and connect the infrared reception control unit of the gaming device 7301b to the vibration device of the chair 5201 to vibrate the chair 5201 in accordance with the sound. In this case, there is no need to provide the infrared reception unit 5202 or the infrared reception control unit on the chair 5201. In addition, the audio cable of the wired audio device 8001 is inserted into the sound output terminal of the gaming device 7301b attached to the chair 5201, so that the view of the player's hands and the area around the game board of the pachinko machine 6001a can be clear.

The vibration device can also be configured to be incorporated into the chair cover or cushion rather than into the body of the chair 5201.

So far, we have described the gaming system PS260 relating to variant example 6 with reference to FIG. 209, but this configuration is merely an example, and the functions of the present application can be realized by various other configurations.

(Other Modifications)
In this embodiment, as described above, the pachinko machine is equipped with an audio output LED that emits infrared rays corresponding to audio signals, and the light is received by the gaming device or card unit, but the infrared rays emitted from the pachinko machine can also be directly received by so-called infrared wireless headphones. In this case, the audio output LED can be provided to limit the irradiation angle so that the light emitted from the audio output LED is not widely irradiated. In addition, it is also possible to control the reach of the infrared rays irradiated by the audio output LED so that the infrared rays reach the infrared wireless headphones or their dedicated receivers appropriately (so that the infrared rays do not reach the headphones of players at other seats).

The configuration of gaming device 7001 or gaming device 7201 can also be incorporated inside the pachinko machine.

Furthermore, the gaming device 7001 etc. can capture the light-emitting parts of the pachinko machine (for example, the light-emitting parts corresponding to the group of LEDs for effects 6046 shown in FIG. 192) with an imaging device such as a CCD camera, determine the effect pattern and the status of the pachinko machine from the light emission pattern, and output sound related to the effects etc. to the wired audio device 8001 or the wireless audio device 8002 depending on the determination result.

With this configuration, even for existing pachinko machines that do not have sound output LEDs, the gaming device of the present application can be used to listen to the sound of the gaming machine through headphones or earphones.

In addition, after taking certain measures to prevent unauthorized signals from being input to the pachinko machine, an audio output terminal can be placed on the pachinko machine and the audio cable of the wired audio device 8001 can be connected to it.

Up to this point, the gaming system according to the 15th embodiment and its modified examples have been described with reference to Figures 190 to 209, but the configuration of each device is merely an example, and the technical idea of the present application can be realized by various other configurations. In addition, it is possible to construct a new gaming system by appropriately combining each device (including modified examples) according to the 15th embodiment that has been described up to this point. Furthermore, the gaming system according to the 15th embodiment and its modified examples can be appropriately applied to the above-mentioned first to fourteenth embodiments.

6001, 6601, 6701, 6001a, 6601a Pachinko machine 6186, 6186a, 6186b, 6186c Hall computer 6700 Card unit 6801 Data display device 7001, 7201, 7301, 7301a, 7301b Gaming device 8001 Wired audio device 8002 Wireless audio device 5801 Smartphone 5201 Chair PS200, PS210, PS220, PS230, PS240, PS250, PS260 Gaming system

Claims (5)

A control means for performing various controls related to games;
a voice output means capable of outputting a voice corresponding to voice information according to the control of the control means;
a light emitting means capable of emitting light corresponding to audio information in response to control by said control means toward the outside;
a light receiving means for receiving light emitted by the light emitting means;
a sound information generating means for generating sound information from the light received by the light receiving means;
a sound output control means for controlling a connected audio device to output a sound corresponding to the sound information generated by the sound information generating means;
A gaming system comprising: The gaming system of claim 1, characterized in that when an input means capable of specifying an audio output method is used to specify that audio can be output to the audio device, the volume of the audio output by the audio output means is reduced. the voice information generating means is capable of acquiring additional voice information from an external means different from the control means;
The gaming system described in claim 1, characterized in that the acoustic device is capable of outputting sound in response to either sound information corresponding to the light received by the light receiving means or sound information corresponding to the additional sound information. A control means for performing various controls related to games;
a voice output means capable of outputting a voice corresponding to voice information according to the control of the control means;
a light emitting means capable of emitting light corresponding to audio information in response to control by the control means toward the outside,
A gaming machine characterized in that a sound corresponding to the audio information generated from the light can be output by an external audio device. A light receiving means for receiving light emitted by an external light emitting means;
a sound information generating means for generating sound information from the light received by the light receiving means;
a sound output control means for controlling a connected audio device to output a sound corresponding to the sound information generated by the sound information generating means;
A gaming device comprising:

Images